title: Pakistan World Bibliographical Series ; V.

10
author: Taylor, David D.
publisher: ABC-CLIO
isbn10 | asin: 1851090819
print isbn13: 9781851090815
ebook isbn13: 9780585058887
language: English
subject Pakistan--Bibliography.
publication date: 1990
lcc: Z3196.T39 1990eb
ddc: 016.95491
subject: Pakistan--Bibliography.
 Page i

Pakistan
 Page ii
WORLD BIBLIOGRAPHICAL SERIES
General Editors:
Robert G. Neville (Executive Editor)
John J. Horton
Ian Wallace
Hans H. Wellisch
Ralph Lee Woodward, Jr.
John J. Horton is Deputy Librarian of the University of Bradford and currently
Chairman of its Academic Board of Studies in Social Sciences. He has
maintained a longstanding interest in the discipline of area studies and its
associated bibliographical problems, with special reference to European
Studies. In particular he has published in the field of Icelandic and of Yugoslav
studies, including the two relevant volumes in the World Bibliographical Series.
Ian Wallace is Professor of Modern Languages at Loughborough University of
Technology. A graduate of Oxford in French and German, he also studied in
Tübingen, Heidelberg and Lausanne before taking teaching posts at
universities in the USA, Scotland and England. He specializes in East German
affairs, especially literature and culture, on which he has published numerous
articles and books. In 1979 he founded the journal GDR Monitor, which he
continues to edit.
Hans H. Wellisch is Professor emeritus at the College of Library and Information
Services, University of Maryland. He was President of the American Society of
Indexers and was a member of the International Federation for
Documentation. He is the author of numerous articles and several books on
indexing and abstracting, and has published The Conversion of Scripts and
Indexing and Abstracting: an International Bibliography. He also contributes
frequently to Journal of the American Society for Information Science, The
Indexer and other professional journals.
Ralph Lee Woodward, Jr. is Chairman of the Department of History at Tulane
University, New Orleans, where he has been Professor of History since 1970.
He is the author of Central America, a Nation Divided, 2nd ed. (1985), as well
as several monographs and more than sixty scholarly articles on modern Latin
America. He has also compiled volumes in the World Bibliographical Series on
Belize (1980), Nicaragua (1983), and El Salvador (1988). Dr. Woodward edited
the Central American section of the Research Guide to Central America and the
Caribbean (1985) and is currently editor of the Central American history
section of the Handbook of Latin American Studies.
 Page iii

VOLUME 10

Pakistan
David Taylor
Compiler

CLIO PRESS
OXFORD, ENGLAND · SANTA BARBARA, CALIFORNIA
DENVER, COLORADO
 Page iv
© Copyright 1990 by Clio Press Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying or otherwise, without the prior permission in writing
of the publishers.
British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data
Taylor, David, 1945 Mar. 25-
Pakistan. (World bibliographical series, 10).
1. Pakistan - Bibliographies
I. Title II. Series
016.9549'1
ISBN 1-85109-081-9
Clio Press Ltd.,
55 St. Thomas' Street,
Oxford OX1 1JG, England.
ABC-CLIO,
130 Cremona Drive,
Santa Barbara,
CA 93117, USA.
Designed by Bernard Crossland.
Typeset by Columns Design and Production Services, Reading, England.
Printed and bound in Great Britain by Billing and Sons Ltd., Worcester.
 Page v
THE WORLD BIBLIOGRAPHICAL SERIES
This series, which is principally designed for the English speaker, will eventually
cover every country in the world, each in a separate volume comprising
annotated entries on works dealing with its history, geography, economy and
politics; and with its people, their culture, customs, religion and social
organization. Attention will also be paid to current living conditions housing,
education, newspapers, clothing, etc. that are all too often ignored in standard
bibliographies; and to those particular aspects relevant to individual countries.
Each volume seeks to achieve, by use of careful selectivity and critical
assessment of the literature, an expression of the country and an appreciation
of its nature and national aspirations, to guide the reader towards an
understanding of its importance. The keynote of the series is to provide, in a
uniform format, an interpretation of each country that will express its culture,
its place in the world, and the qualities and background that make it unique.
The views expressed in individual volumes, however, are not necessarily those
of the publisher.
VOLUMES IN THE SERIES
1 Yugoslavia, John J. Horton
2 Lebanon, Shereen Khairallah
3 Lesotho, Shelagh M. Willet and David Ambrose
4 Rhodesia/Zimbabwe, Oliver B. Pollack and Karen Pollack
5 Saudi Arabia, Frank A. Clements
6 USSR, Anthony Thompson
7 South Africa, Reuben Musiker
8 Malawi, Robert B. Boeder
9 Guatemala, Woodman B. Franklin
10 Pakistan, David Taylor
11 Uganda, Robert L. Collison
12 Malaysia, Ian Brown and Rajeswary Ampalavanar
13 France, Frances Chambers
14 Panama, Eleanor DeSelms Langstaff
15 Hungary, Thomas Kabdebo
16 USA, Sheila R. Herstein and Naomi Robbins
17 Greece, Richard Clogg and Mary Jo Clogg
18 New Zealand, R. F. Grover
19 Algeria, Richard I. Lawless
20 Sri Lanka, Vijaya Samaraweera
21 Belize, Ralph Lee Woodward, Jr.
23 Luxembourg, Carlo Hury and Jul Christophory
24 Swaziland, Balam Nyeko
25 Kenya, Robert L. Collison
26 India, Brijen K. Gupta and Datta S. Kharbas
27 Turkey, Merel Gülçü
28 Cyprus, P. M. Kitromilides and M. L. Evriviades
29 Oman, Frank A. Clements
31 Finland, J. E. O. Screen
32 Poland, Richard C. Lewanski *
33 Tunisia, Allan M. Findlay, Anne M. Findlay and Richard I. Lawless
34 Scotland, Eric G. Grant
35 China, Peter Cheng
36 Qatar, P. T. H. Unwin
37 Iceland, John J. Horton
38 Nepal, John Whelpton
39 Haiti, Frances Chambers
40 Sudan, M. W. Daly
41 Vatican City State, Michael J. Walsh
42 Iraq, A. J. Abdulrahman
43 United Arab Emirates, Frank A. Clements
44 Nicaragua, Ralph Lee Woodward, Jr.
45 Jamaica, K. E. Ingram
46 Australia, I. Kepars
 Page vi
47 Morocco, Anne M. Findlay, Allan M. Findlay and Richard I. Lawless
48 Mexico, Naomi Robbins
49 Bahrain, P. T. H. Unwin
50 The Yemens, G. Rex Smith
51 Zambia, Anne M. Bliss and J. A. Rigg
52 Puerto Rico, Elena E. Cevallos
53 Namibia, Stanley Schoeman and Elna Schoeman
54 Tanzania, Colin Darch
55 Jordan, Ian J. Seccombe
56 Kuwait, Frank A. Clements
57 Brazil, Solena V. Bryant
58 Israel, Esther M. Snyder (preliminary compilation E. Kreiner)
59 Romania, Andrea Deletant and Dennis Deletant
60 Spain, Graham J. Shields
61 Atlantic Ocean, H. G. R. King
63 Cameroon, Mark W. DeLancey and Peter J. Schraeder
64 Malta, John Richard Thackrah
65 Thailand, Michael Watts
66 Austria, Denys Salt with the assistance of Arthur Farrand Radley
67 Norway, Leland B. Sather
68 Czechoslovakia, David Short
69 Irish Republic, Michael Owen Shannon
70 Pacific Basin and Oceania, Gerald W. Fry and Rufino Mauricio
71 Portugal, P. T. H. Unwin
72 West Germany, Donald S. Detwiler and Ilse E. Detwiler
73 Syria, Ian J. Seccombe
74 Trinidad and Tobago, Frances Chambers
76 Barbados, Robert B. Potter and Graham M. S. Dann
77 East Germany, Ian Wallace
78 Mozambique, Colin Darch
79 Libya, Richard I. Lawless
80 Sweden, Leland B. Sather and Alan Swanson
81 Iran, Reza Navabpour
82 Dominica, Robert A. Myers
83 Denmark, Kenneth E. Miller
84 Paraguay, R. Andrew Nickson
85 Indian Ocean, Julia J. Gotthold with the assistance of Donald W. Gotthold
86 Egypt, Ragai N. Makar
87 Gibraltar, Graham J. Shields
88 The Netherlands, Peter King and Michael Wintle
89 Bolivia, Gertrude M. Yeager
90 Papua New Guinea, Fraiser McConnell
91 The Gambia, David P. Gamble
92 Somalia, Mark W. DeLancey, Sheila L. Elliott, December Green, Kenneth J.
Menkhaus, Mohammad Haji Moqtar, Peter J. Schraeder
93 Brunei, Sylvia C. Engelen Krausse, Gerald H. Krausse
94 Albania, William B. Bland
95 Singapore, Stella R. Quah, Jon S. T. Quah
96 Guyana, Frances Chambers
97 Chile, Harold Blakemore
98 El Salvador, Ralph Lee Woodward, Jr.
99 The Arctic, H.G.R. King
100 Nigeria, Robert A. Myers
101 Ecuador, David Corkill
102 Uruguay, Henry Finch with the assistance of Alicia Casas de Barrán
103 Japan, Frank Joseph Shulman
104 Belgium, R.C. Riley
105 Macau, Richard Louis Edmonds
106 Philippines, Jim Richardson
107 Bulgaria, Richard J. Crampton
108 The Bahamas, Paul G. Boultbee
109 Peru, John R. Fisher
110 Venezuela, D. A. G. Waddell
111 Dominican Republic, Kai Schoenhalls
 Page vii

To my parents
 Page ix

Contents
Introduction xiii
The Country and Its People 1
Geography 6
General 6
Gazetteers and maps 8
Flora and Fauna 12
Travellers' Accounts 15
Tourism 22
Archeology and Prehistory 24
History 29
South Asia 29
Muslims of South Asia 35
Constituent provinces of Pakistan 44
Pakistan movement 56
Independence and partition 61
Pakistan (1947-) 65
Biographies and Autobiographies 69
Population 76
Minorities 81
Overseas Population 84
Languages and Dialects 87
Religion 92
 Page x

Social Structure 102

General 102
Regional 107
Social Change and Social Issues 113
Women and society 115
Politics 119
General 119
Regional 129
Islam and politics 131
Constitutional and Legal System 137
Government and Administration 141
Armed Forces 144
Foreign Relations 148
General 148
India 153
Economy 158
Planning 165
Standards of Living 169
Regional disparities 172
Industry 174
Agriculture 176
Trade 180
Transport 182
Statistics 184
Urban Development 186
Education 189
Science and Technology 191
Literature 193
Urdu 193
Regional 199
English 202
 Page xi

The Arts 204

General 204
Visual arts 205
Music and dance 207
Folklore and Festivals 209
Mass Media 211
General 211
Newspapers 212
Periodicals 213
Reference Works 214
Bibliographies 215
Index of Authors 219
Index of Titles 227
Index of Subjects 243
Map of Pakistan 257
 Page xiii

Introduction
The Islamic Republic of Pakistan has existed within its present borders, in the
north-western part of the Indian subcontinent, only since 1971. For the first
twenty-four years after independence in 1947 the majority of the country's
population lived in the eastern wing in East Bengal, but after a bloody civil war
this broke away from the dominant western wing and became the independent
state of Bangladesh. The year 1947 itself had also seen horrendous violence
and transfers of population within the newly partitioned British Indian empire.
Fifteen to twenty per cent of the population of Pakistan immediately after
independence were refugees from India, taking the place of Hindus and Sikhs
who had fled in the opposite direction. Even before 1947 the territories which
today make up Pakistan Punjab, Sindh, the North-West Frontier and
Balochistan had had a complicated past. Subject to the political and cultural
pulls of Iran and Central Asia as well as of the Indian subcontinent, they had
often been frontier areas, and the British especially had treated them as such.
Until the advent of large-scale irrigation schemes in the 19th and 20th
centuries population densities were much less than elsewhere in the
subcontinent.
It was only after the First World War and the eventual formulation of the
demand for a homeland for South Asia's Muslims by the Muslim League and its
principal leader Mohammed Ali Jinnah, the founder of Pakistan, that attention
became focused on a specific territory as well as on the political demands of
the whole community. When suddenly Pakistan achieved independence as a
modern territorial state in 1947 a whole range of political questions demanded
answers that the leadership was not in a position to provide. Since
independence, efforts have been made to solve them by placing greater
emphasis on the idea of an Islamic state, but this too has been problematic,
with several sharply contrasted models on offer. Meanwhile, questions of class
and region have become ever more acute, while the international environment
in the aftermath of the Afghan crisis of 1979 has been a demanding one.
 Page xiv
An understanding of Pakistan today requires therefore a more than usually
wide frame of reference. Its history is simultaneously that of its geographical
territory and of the Muslims of South Asia. Intellectual or political developments
elsewhere in the Islamic world often have a direct impact. While in some
respects, therefore, it is deeply rooted both in its territory and in its culture, the
traumatic circumstances of its creation, the civil war of 1971, and continuing
political instability have meant that the relevance of the past has not always
been clear. Pakistan is at the same time a part of the Third World, facing crises
of poverty and underdevelopment which elude simple solutions.
The Country and Its People
Pakistan is made up of four major provinces each of which corresponds to some
extent to a linguistic and cultural unit, although there are many inconsistencies
and overlaps. In population terms the largest province is the Punjab, with its
political and cultural centre in Lahore. Some fifty-six per cent of Pakistan's
citizens live in the province, most of whom speak Punjabi. Irrigation from the
Indus and its tributaries has meant that parts of the province have become the
principal agricultural regions of the country, growing wheat and cotton, while
industry in recent years has made rapid progress in Lahore, Faisalabad, and
some other areas in the north-east. Martial traditions reflect the region's
turbulent past, and these were reinforced by a British policy of recruiting its
soldiers from the area. Today, the bulk of Pakistan's army is Punjabi. The
institution of biraderi or brotherhood remains of great importance, both socially
and politically.
The North-West Frontier Province, usually abbreviated to NWFP, lies between
Punjab and the Afghan frontier and was administered with the former until
1901. Its population forms thirteen per cent of the country's total. The
dominant element are the Pukhtuns (also called Pushtuns or Pathans), who
speak a distinct language and whose social organization is based on tribal
units. Also important is a strict code of behaviour called pukhtunwali which
emphasizes the imperatives of hospitality, revenge and honour. There are other
ethnic groups in NWFP, especially in Hazara district, who speak dialects of
Punjabi. There has been some agricultural development in the region, and a
limited amount of industrial development, but much of the economy depends
on remittances from men working elsewhere in Pakistan or abroad. The
province has been very much affected by the movement of refugees from
province has been very much affected by the movement of refugees from
Afghanistan after 1979.
 Page xv
This has had political and economic consequences, and has also been
connected with the rise of drug smuggling in the area.
Further to the south along the Indus river lies the province of Sindh (earlier
Sind). Much of its surface is desert but some has become highly fertile as a
result of irrigation projects. Twenty-three per cent of the population lives in
Sindh, but by no means all are Sindhi-speakers. In the cities, especially the
country's principal commercial and industrial centre Karachi, whose population
is now at least seven million, Sindhis are a minority. The dominant element are
the mainly Urdu-speaking muhajirs or refugees who came from India at the
time of independence. There are also substantial numbers of Punjabis and
Pukhtuns who have come in recent years.
The smallest province in terms of population but largest in geographical area is
Balochistan (earlier Baluchistan). It has substantial mineral resources but these
have yet to be fully developed. Agriculturally it has made little progress. In
historical and cultural terms, Balochistan, still basically a tribal society, has links
as much with the Middle East as with South Asia, and there are indeed many
Baluch in Iran and Afghanistan as well as in Pakistan. A significant number of
non-Baluch are to be found in the towns and elsewhere.
The other political units of Pakistan include the centrally administered areas.
These are made up first of the tribal areas or agencies along the Afghan
border. Inhabited by Pukhtun tribes, these are part of Pakistan but not all of
the country's laws are applied there. Secondly, in the high mountains of the
North, the Gilgit Agency is also centrally administered. This region, together
with Baltistan in the northern part of Kashmir, is often referred to as the
Northern Areas. Although very sparsely populated, its tribal groups have often
attracted attention for their distinct cultural patterns. It has been made much
more accessible in recent years by the opening of the Karakoram Highway from
Pakistan to China. Also administered centrally is the Federal Capital Territory of
Islamabad.
Mention must also be made of Azad Jammu and Kashmir (generally called Azad
Kashmir). Following the partition of India in 1947 and the war with India in
194748, the former princely state was divided on a de facto basis between
India and Pakistan. But while India has incorporated its section into its national
territory (and claims sovereignty over the remainder, including the Northern
Areas which Pakistan does not consider to be disputed) Pakistan insists that
Areas which Pakistan does not consider to be disputed) Pakistan insists that
until the plebiscite provided for by the United Nations in its resolution in 1949
is held, the status of the whole state remains undecided. It therefore treats the
area under its control as a quasi-independent jurisdiction. One consequence of
this is that Azad
 Page xvi
Jammu and Kashmir is usually excluded from official surveys and statistics. The
population is estimated at less than two million.
The History of Pakistan
The earliest archaeological evidence for human habitation in South Asia in fact
comes from Pakistan, and the first urban civilization in the subcontinent had its
centre in the Indus valley. The two cities of Harappa (in the Punjab) and
Mohenjo-daro (in Sindh) together with Kalibangan and Lothal in India are the
most important known centres of a distinctive culture which flourished from
around 2500 BC and declined during the course of the second millennium BC.
It was a literate culture but the script remains largely undeciphered and the
archaeologist has to rely on the extensive and impressive remains to
reconstruct the characteristics of the civilization.
From the middle of the second millennium successive waves of migrants from
the Iranian plateau and later on from Central Asia passed into India from the
north-west. Alexander the Great reached the Punjab in 327 BC but Greek
control in the north-west lasted only a brief while before the Mauryan empire
extended its control over the area. After its decline, however, there was a
period in the 2nd century BC when Indo-Greek (Bactrian) dynasties ruled in
the Punjab. They in turn were succeeded by a number of other dynasties, for
example the Shakas, Pahlavas and Kushans, the last of whom ruled in the
region up to the 3rd century AD. The Kushans were displaced by the Gupta
empire, although its influence hardly penetrated to the north-west which from
the 5th century on saw the movement into India of fresh waves of tribes from
Central Asia. For much of the classical period, indeed, the history of what were
essentially sparsely inhabited borderlands is obscure. There are, however,
extensive archaeological remains at Taxila (near present-day Islamabad) which
testify to the vigour of Buddhism in the region during the Mauryan and Kushan
periods, as well as to the earlier cultures of what was then called Gandhara.
The first contact South Asia had with Islam was when Muhammad bin Qasim,
the Arab governor of Basra, invaded Sindh in the 8th century and established a
brief sway over the lower Indus valley. In the 11th century the Ghaznavid
rulers, Turks who had established themselves in Afghanistan, succeeded in
dominating much of what is now Pakistan. In 1206 a centre of Muslim power
was established within South Asia. This was the Delhi sultanate, which
dominated northern India for the next three centuries. It was not, however, a
stable régime and had to contend with domestic rebellion, intra-
 Page xvii
dynastic feuding and constant pressure from outside Muslim groups, notably
the Mongols of Central Asia. It was a Mongol dynasty, the Mughals, who from
the 16th to the 18th centuries pushed Muslim dynastic control to its widest
limits in South Asia. They also established an administrative and fiscal system
that allowed the development of the most distinguished intellectual and artistic
achievements of South Asian Islam in the pre-modern period. Akbar perhaps
achieved the most during his long reign in the second half of the 16th century,
but the names of Babur, Humayun, and Aurangzeb, the last of the powerful
Mughals, are nearly as important.
During the whole period from the founding of the Delhi sultanate to the decline
of the Mughal empire many individual Muslims entered India from outside,
mostly to serve as soldiers, officials and artists. The rulers did not staff their
administrations exclusively with Muslims, however, nor did they make any
concerted efforts to convert their indigenous subjects by force. Yet by the 19th
century Muslims formed no more than about a fifth of the population of India,
concentrated disproportionately in East Bengal, the north-west and the towns
and cities of North India. Most of the Muslims were converted members of the
indigenous population. The process had been a gradual one and had taken
place largely under the influence of Muslim holy men belonging to the mystical
sufi orders. Settling in various parts of India, they had gradually drawn some
sections of the population to a religious identity as Muslims that did not
demand too drastic a break with traditional beliefs and practices.
By the 18th century the Mughal empire was in decline and was gradually
replaced first by regional rulers and then by the colonial power of the British
East India Company. In 1803 Delhi was captured and the Mughal emperor
reduced to the status of a Company pensioner. Sindh was taken from the local
Talpur dynasty in 1843 and the Punjab from the Sikhs in 1849. In 1858,
following the revolt of the previous year (once known as the Indian Mutiny),
the British government assumed direct control of India and abolished both the
East India Company and the last shadow of the Mughal empire. The mid-19th
century also marked the beginning of the construction of the infrastructure of a
modern state and economy. Railways were built, examinations introduced for
the senior ranks of the civil service, and new irrigation schemes begun to
improve the output of commercial crops like wheat and cotton. Although the
primary purpose of such changes was of course to integrate India into the
British imperial system, they also provided a focus for new patterns of thought
and action among the various communities and regions in the country.
 Page xviii
For some of the Muslims of South Asia the impact of the British meant in a
direct way the loss of political and cultural dominance, and it was among these
groups in North India that new movements sprang up in the later part of the
19th century. Two small towns near Delhi became associated with divergent
positions on how to respond to the political and cultural challenge of the
British. The first was Deoband, where a group of ulama (learned men) settled
after the 1857 defeat. Drawing on the work of earlier reformers, notably that of
Shah Wali Allah in the 18th century, they set out to purify Islam of medieval
accretions and to keep closely to the teachings of the Quran and the traditions
of the Prophet. Through its direct training of young students who went on to
staff the mosques and to teach, and through its network of schools, Deoband
has had an enormous influence on the modern development of Islam in South
Asia (although it must be emphasized that alternative focuses exist, especially
the Barelvi group which takes a more indulgent view of traditional practices).
In political terms, Deoband's attitudes to the colonial presence ranged from
indifference to outright hostility. The second, 'modernist' response came from
Aligarh, where a descendant of the Mughal aristocracy Sayyid Ahmad Khan
established the Muhammadan Anglo-Oriental College in 1875 (originally as a
school) after his retirement from British service. Addressing himself directly to
the Muslim élite of North India, Sayyid Ahmad Khan preached the compatibility
of European science and Islamic teaching on the one hand and of British power
and Muslim self respect on the other.
The Muslim League, founded in 1906 as a pressure group for the protection of
Muslim interests, grew directly out of Sayyid Ahmad Khan's work, and initially
its office was located at Aligarh. The British responded favourably by creating
what were known as separate electorates for Muslim voters in the new
legislative councils that were being established. It soon became clear, however,
that other possibilities existed for the expression of Muslim élite interests
besides cooperation with the British, and under the leadership of men like the
Ali brothers Mohamed and Shaukat some rejected cooperation with the British
and began to cooperate with the Indian National Congress. Ideas of pan-
Islamic solidarity became important. Two episodes in this period are of especial
importance. The first was an agreement reached with the Congress in 1916,
the Lucknow Pact, which confirmed the Muslim demands for recognition as a
separate political unit with legitimate demands such as reservation of seats in
legislative institutions. The second was the Khilafat movement which began in
1919 and was at its peak from 1920 to 1922. The object of the movement was
to secure better treatment for Turkey, which had been defeated in the First
World War, and whose ruler held the
 Page xix
position of Caliph of the Islamic world. The campaign, which was linked to
Gandhi's first major confrontation with the British, was led jointly by the Ali
brothers and members of the ulama, who for the first time used the techniques
of mass agitation to make their point. Although it failed to achieve its ostensible
object, the Khilafat movement created an awareness of new possibilities and
new horizons.
By the early 1930s the rapid pace of political development, in particular the
ability of the Congress to challenge British power, meant a refining and limiting
of the political options open to the Muslim population and to its élite leadership.
The Congress had made it clear in 1928 that cooperation had to be on the
basis of universal franchise with only limited and short-term special protection
for Muslims. The sense of foreboding felt by many Muslims was articulated in
1930 by Muhammad Iqbal, an enormously influential poet and philosopher with
a vision of Islam as a dynamic and creative force. Iqbal argued that the Muslim
genius could flourish only if there were to be a separate Muslim state in the
north-west of India. By the time he died in 1938 the leadership of the Muslim
League had been assumed by Jinnah and on 23 March 1940 the party passed
what has become known as the Pakistan Resolution, demanding independent
states for the Muslim-majority areas of South Asia (it was only in 1946 that the
resolution was amended to demand a single state).
From 1940 to 1947 events moved rapidly under the impetus first of the Second
World War and then of the desire of the postwar government in Britain to grant
independence. Jinnah seems to have played a careful hand in the tortuous
negotiations that took place, although it has been argued that in many ways
the outcome a fully independent Pakistan but located within a divided Punjab
and a divided Bengal was not what Jinnah had wanted at all. The last stages of
the negotiations were in any case overshadowed by mounting violence
between Hindu, Sikh and Muslim in which hundreds of thousands were killed
and many millions forced to become refugees. Any possibility of normal
relations with India after independence was dashed by the armed conflict that
broke out over the fate of the princely state of Kashmir. Occupying a strategic
position between India and Pakistan to the south and China to the north,
Kashmir had a majority-Muslim population but a Hindu ruler.
Pakistan after Independence
At independence on 14 August 1947 the initiative remained in the hands of
Jinnah, whose authority was unquestioned. He was already
 Page xx
a sick man, however, and he died on 11 September 1948. His place was taken
by Liaquat Ali Khan, his close ally but politically a lesser figure. Beyond Liaquat
there were simply provincial leaders squabbling over the spoils of office: yet the
tasks were enormous, greater, for example, than in India. New political
institutions had to be created almost from nothing. What had previously been
peripheral areas had to be welded into a new country, and a just formula had
to be found to balance the interests of the two wings and of the provinces
within the western wing. The meaning of an Islamic state had also to be
defined, although at this stage the modernist view was the dominant one.
Pakistan's political history to the present time can be divided into five periods,
separated from each other by military coups or other violent interruptions. The
first phase lasted from 1947 until the coup that brought Ayub Khan to power in
1958. Liaquat Ali Khan was assassinated in obscure circumstances in 1951 and
from then on a succession of weak civilian governments wrestled with the
problems of framing a constitution and of creating a party that could integrate
the various social groups and regions. Although a constitution was finally put
together in 1956, the political situation had degenerated to a point where
there was little chance of it being worked successfully. Already, the senior
ranks of the army and the bureaucracy had emerged as the real decision-
makers. Pakistan had also moved firmly into the Western sphere of influence,
both militarily through its membership of the US-sponsored SEATO (South-East
Asia Treaty Organization) and CENTO (Central Treaty Organization) pacts and
economically through the policies it adopted.
It was therefore no great surprise when in October 1958 the president a senior
civil servant and the army commander, General Ayub Khan, seized power. Ayub
Khan shortly afterwards eased out his colleague and assumed the presidency
as well. He made no secret of his view that a country like Pakistan was not
suited to Western parliamentary institutions with direct elections and he
therefore created a constitution based on indirect elections. This was
deliberately designed to root Pakistan's political institutions in the countryside
among the 'natural leaders' of rural society. It was from an electoral college
thus constituted that Ayub Khan was re-elected president at the beginning of
1965.
This election was the high point of his period of power, however. Pakistan
fought an ill-advised war with India in September 1965 to try to wrest Kashmir
by force. The stalemate that resulted damaged Ayub's domestic standing and
opened the way for his ambitious foreign minister, Zulfikar Ali Bhutto, to make
a bid for power. Bhutto did this by establishing his own party, the Pakistan
People's
 Page xxi
Party (PPP), in 1967 with a radical programme of social and economic change.
He was helped by the consequences of Ayub's economic policy which, under
American guidance, had stimulated rapid economic growth but had also
widened the already great disparities between rich and poor. In late 1968
disturbances spread throughout the country and forced Ayub to stand down in
March 1969, to be replaced by General Yahya Khan, the then army chief.
The most important challenge to Yahya Khan came in fact not from the PPP
but from East Pakistan, where the Awami League under Sheikh Mujibur
Rahman was demanding a degree of autonomy that seemed to the West to be
tantamount to independence. Yahya and his advisers decided to risk holding
elections on the basis of universal suffrage, calculating perhaps that divisions
between the political leaders of the two wings would allow the military a
decisive voice. These elections, the first in fact to be held in Pakistan, took
place in December 1970 and resulted in a stunning victory for the Awami
League which won all but two seats in East Pakistan and thus an absolute
majority in the country as a whole. Meanwhile the PPP had secured a
convincing but not overwhelming position in the West. In this situation much
depended on the goodwill of the three main players, Mujib, Bhutto and Yahya
Khan, but each had his own aims and was unwilling to subordinate them to
some wider objective. After several months of negotiation, not all of it in good
faith, the government clamped down on East Pakistan in March 1971 and thus
initiated what soon became a civil war in which hundreds of thousands died.
While the Pakistan army ruthlessly repressed all expressions of Bengali
nationalism, it was unable to establish complete control over the countryside
where a resistance movement, the Mukti Bahini, had emerged. Eventually
India, which was host to millions of refugees from East Bengal, intervened
militarily and soon defeated the Pakistan army. Bangladesh became a reality in
December 1971 and has pursued its own fraught course since then.
There was no role left for Yahya Khan in the truncated Pakistan, and elements
in the army ensured that Bhutto, as the only popular political figure in the
country, became the new president. Bhutto moved swiftly to establish his
political control and to implement his manifesto, for example by taking over
control of most of the country's large-scale industry. A new constitution was
framed in 1973 which reintroduced parliamentary democracy. Despite these
achievements, Bhutto was unable to establish a stable government, perhaps
because of his own imperious personality, and he faced increasing hostility
from a wide range of sources. Most of his early political associates in the PPP
left or were driven out, to be replaced by local political bosses. Opposition
parties were harassed and in some cases
 Page xxii
their leaders put on trial. Matters came to a head in 1977 when elections were
held under the new constitution. The PPP won, but there were widespread and
plausible allegations of rigging by party members. The immediate result was a
storm of protest organized by the opposition Pakistan National Alliance. Taken
aback by its strength, Bhutto tried to negotiate a compromise but before one
could be reached the army again intervened under the leadership of General
Zia-ul-Haq, the chief of staff. While promising fresh elections as soon as
possible, Zia also claimed that it was his duty to bring politicians to account.
Bhutto was put on trial for alleged involvement in the murder of the father of a
political opponent, and was executed in April 1979.
General Zia ruled Pakistan for eleven years, and attempted a transformation of
the country as radical in its way as anything tried by his predecessors. His
vision of Pakistan was based on the notion of social and political discipline
deriving from a commitment to thoroughgoing Islamization of the country's
institutions. This took him into the fields of criminal justice, economic policy and
finally constitutional change. In 1985 he held non-party elections and lifted
Martial Law but only after rewriting the 1973 constitution in such a way as
greatly to enhance the powers of the presidency. The new prime minister
Mohammad Khan Junejo was initially Zia's creation. When he tried
subsequently to establish some independent room for himself, he was
dismissed in May 1988.
Zia promised to hold fresh elections at the end of 1988 but in August he died
in an air crash which was almost certainly the result of sabotage, although the
perpetrators have never been named. Despite ruling for longer than any other
leader of Pakistan, Zia never succeeded in generating widespread support for
his régime. Apart from limited support from fundamentalist Islamic groups, he
achieved passive acceptance but not popular acclaim. He was actively opposed
by regional movements in Sindh and Balochistan, and was unpopular with
women. One factor which strengthened his position was the Afghan crisis
which erupted at the end of 1979. This guaranteed American aid and allowed
Zia to cultivate new interests in the country. After some years, however, the
lack of progress towards a solution and the continuing presence in Pakistan of
millions of refugees began to have its effect and the Afghan issue became
something of a wasting asset for Zia.
After Zia's death the presidency was assumed by Ghulam Ishaq Khan, a career
civil servant who had been chairman of the Senate. Despite anxieties about
renewed military intervention, elections were held in November which made
the PPP the largest party but without an absolute majority. The late Mr
Bhutto's daughter Benazir became
 Page xxiii
prime minister and took up the burden, unsolved by any of her predecessors,
of defining Pakistan's place in the world.
Economic and Social Development
Pakistan in its forty-two years of independence has made progress in some
areas but has yet to make a breakthrough to steady, self-reliant growth. Once
the immediate shock of partition was handled, some economic progress was
made as the gaps left were filled up. From 1955 Pakistan adopted the practice
of formulating five-year development plans. It was with the 1960s, however,
that a clearly defined economic strategy was set out with the aid of American
advisers. This was based on encouraging private entrepreneurs to move into
fast-yielding industries such as textiles. The results were striking when
measured in terms of overall growth, but were achieved at the expense of
significantly increased disparities between rich and poor. Of particular
significance was the strong feeling in East Pakistan that the boom had been
financed by foreign exchange earnings from jute transferred to West Pakistan-
based entrepreneurs through manipulations of the exchange rate.
After the secession of Bangladesh industry languished, partly because of the
policies pursued by the Bhutto government. Agricultural production, however,
which had benefited in the late 1960s from the impact of the 'green revolution'
in technology, continued to increase. The economy also benefited from the
rapid rise in remittances of foreign exchange from Pakistanis working abroad,
especially in the Middle East. Generally, however, the 1970s were a bad period
for the economy. During the Zia period the economy recovered in some
respects, although little progress was made in tackling questions of structural
change and development. Increasing foreign debt and large budget deficits
became serious concerns, and in 1988 Pakistan had to go to the International
Monetary Fund for loans to tide over a major foreign exchange crisis. These
came with the usual conditionalities.
Although Pakistan's economy has grown somewhat over the years, and per
capita income in 1987 was $350, substantially above many other low-income
countries, its social infrastructure is still very undeveloped. Health and other
facilities leave much to be desired in the rural areas, and slums are a major
problem in Karachi. Education particularly is an area where little progress has
been made; the literacy rate is below thirty per cent, and among rural women
much less. Income inequalities remain very marked both between urban and
rural areas and within each sector. The extremes of poverty which exist
elsewhere in South Asia are rarely to be found in
 Page xxiv
Pakistan, but there are many families living in very depressed circumstances.
By contrast there is a small but very wealthy élite in the big cities, some of
whom are also rural landlords.
International Relations
Pakistan's international relations were for many years dominated by the
Kashmir issue. The initial conflict over Kashmir in 194748 was brought to an
end with a UN-sponsored ceasefire which included provision for a plebiscite in
the state. India's refusal to implement this led Pakistan to join the US-
sponsored CENTO and SEATO alliances and to receive military aid from the
USA. These steps did not, however, produce the results it had hoped for. In
1965 the Ayub Khan government tried by force to seize Kashmir, but the war
ended in stalemate and a Soviet-sponsored ceasefire. The only other military
conflict between the two countries was in 1971 when India intervened in the
civil war. Pakistan's decisive defeat meant an end to any realistic hopes of
being able to match India's growing military strength, and the Simla
agreement of July 1972 between Mr Bhutto and Mrs Indira Gandhi, the Indian
prime minister, set the seal on this with a tacit understanding that the status
quo in Kashmir would continue.
Since 1972 successive Pakistan governments have continued to worry about
what they see as India's hegemonic ambitions in South Asia and have taken
both military and diplomatic steps to counteract them. A nuclear programme
has been under way since the 1970s and although strict secrecy is preserved it
seems almost certain that there is a military dimension. The Afghan crisis set
off by the Soviet intervention of 1979 has enabled Pakistan to get access to
advanced weapon systems from the USA. On the diplomatic front, the friendly
relationship with China which developed in the early 1960s has been
maintained and is regarded as a cornerstone of foreign policy. Perhaps the
most significant development in recent years, however, has been greater
integration of Pakistan into the Islamic world. This process began in the early
1970s during the Bhutto years and continued under Zia. Economic, cultural
and military relationships have all been important. The Afghan crisis has also
been important in reinforcing links with other Muslim countries. Pakistan has
been able to maintain close and friendly ties with a wide range of countries in
the Middle East. Within South Asia itself Pakistan maintains close links with the
other countries, including Bangladesh, and has been a supporter of the South
other countries, including Bangladesh, and has been a supporter of the South
Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC).
 Page xxv

Pakistani Culture and Literature

It will have become clear from the historical sketch above that Pakistan's
culture today is firmly grounded in the Islamic faith of its people. The Islam
that is practised is increasingly based on a Sunni orthodoxy that is the preserve
of the learned scholars. Even so, one should not suppose that there is no room
for differences of interpretation and expression, between, for example, the
fundamentalists grouped together in the Jamaat-i-Islami and the more
traditional approach of the Deoband or Barelvi scholars. Nor should one
suppose that the importance of sufism has diminished. For many Pakistanis
their initiation as a pit's disciple is of enormous emotional and spiritual
importance. There is also a substantial Shia minority in the country. The
numbers are uncertain but are commonly put at between ten and twenty per
cent. Among the educated élite modernist interpretations of Islam are
important, expressed today more in terms of Iqbal's ideas than in those of
Sayyid Ahmad Khan. Secularist thought also exists, although often on the
defensive. In specific areas, for example women's rights, there have been lively
debates.
The artistic tradition of Pakistan can hardly be disentangled from the traditions
of the whole subcontinent, especially but not exclusively the Islamic ones. The
music of Pakistan, for example, is the music of North India. Elite culture
remains closely linked to the Urdu language and its literary forms, even among
many for whom it is not their first language. In recent years, however, there
has been a considerable upsurge in regional literary activity, often linked to
political demands for greater regional autonomy.
Pakistan and the Future
Benazir Bhutto's accession to power in 1988 was in some ways a remarkable
event. She became one of the world's youngest leaders and the first woman to
achieve such a position in a Muslim country. In other respects, though, her
position was less surprising. In the first place she came from a leading political
family, and would clearly not have become prime minister otherwise. Secondly,
she was constrained in the way that so many of her predecessors had been by
the entrenched structures of Pakistani society. She knew that if she diverged
too sharply from the status quo the armed forces would be likely to intervene,
and in any case her political position was weak. Thirdly, there is a huge and
difficult agenda to be tackled, much of it
 Page xxvi
inherited from the past. Items on the list include the economy, which despite
growth in the 1980s remains fragile, and the social infrastructure in such fields
as health and education. In the 1980s, partly as a consequence of the Afghan
crisis, smuggling, especially in arms and drugs, has become a major factor in
Pakistan society and has been one of several factors that have led to a sharp
upsurge in violence on the streets, especially in Karachi. Although Soviet troops
were withdrawn from Afghanistan in 1989, there seems little prospect of an
internal settlement that would allow the millions of refugees in Pakistan to
return, and at least some portion of them may become semi-permanent
residents. The shape of the country itself is still under challenge, with strong
regional movements in several parts of the country. Although the prospect of a
further partition is unlikely, politics will continue to reflect a very strong regional
emphasis.
Pakistan has not so far achieved its founders' vision of a state which would
allow all its citizens, through their Islamic faith, to lead a productive and
satisfying life. Nor has it been able to transform itself into an Islamic state in a
literal sense of the term. There is concern in many quarters over the country's
inability to sustain democratic institutions and over its position internationally,
but little prospect of a radical alternative that would achieve a political
breakthrough. Although in the 1990s these frustrations may place great strain
on the social fabric, they are hardly unique to Pakistan. The measure of the
achievement since 1947 is that the majority of Pakistanis see the solution to
their problems as having to come from within the country.
The Bibliography
The aim of this bibliography is to present an accurate map or template of its
subject, the history and culture of Pakistan, but it must be said that there are
certain insuperable difficulties which mean that it can at best be only a partial
representation. These difficulties revolve round the interrelated questions of
language and of the authors' own concerns. A bibliography which confines
itself to works in English and other European languages, or to works translated
into those languages, is of course limited in the range of authors included.
However brilliant an author may be, if he or she has not been translated from
Urdu, Punjabi or whatever, he or she is excluded. This is regrettable in itself
but also conceals the more important problem that those who write in, or who
translate into, English, have their own assumptions about what is important.
This is so whether the authors concerned are Pakistani or foreign. In both
cases, even if with somewhat different emphases, the focus is likely to be, for
 Page xxvii
example, on the modernist elements in recent Islamic thought. Although it is
true that the fundamentalist views of someone like Maulana Maududi are easily
available in English, the same is not true of the perspectives of, for example,
the Barelvi sect to which belong very many ordinary Pakistanis in town and
country, or of the Shia minority. In the field of literature the number of
translations from Urdu into English compared to the number from Punjabi or
other languages, although it reflects what is available, gives a false impression
of the relative standing of the languages within Pakistan today, not least
because of the large number of Urdu works written before 1947 outside what
is now Pakistan. Yet it would be impossible to describe the literature of
Pakistan without including the major classical Urdu poets. Inevitably, therefore,
the bibliography gives greater space to some aspects of Pakistan than others.
Two problems confront all who write in English on Pakistan or South Asia:
transliteration and alphabetization. Rules for both are available, but they
frequently fail to reflect the reality of Pakistani usage and are not widely used
except in specialist journals and libraries. To have used them would have
hindered rather than helped the reader. As far as transliteration is concerned I
have used the most widely accepted forms current in South Asia today.
Diacritical marks have not been used (although they are of course reproduced
where they occur in titles of books and articles). Using similar criteria, I have
arranged both entries and indexes according to the last element of an author's
name, although it must be stressed that Muslim personal names are not based
on the same principles as Western ones. Some catalogues and indexes,
however, use alternative systems, and it is always worth looking for an author
or individual subject under all elements of his or her name. I have made an
exception to the 'last name' rule for pre-modern writers such as Abul Fazl or
Wali Allah, who are universally known by their full names, although even here
titles, such as Shah, can be misleading.
Items for the bibliography have been located in many different collections and
libraries, and I am grateful to those many librarians who have never raised an
eyebrow at the apparently eclectic collection of books that I have asked for. I
must mention especially the libraries of my own institution, the School of
Oriental and African Studies of the University of London, the Institute of
Commonwealth Studies, the London School of Economics, the India Office
Library and Records, the British Library, and the Indian Institute in the
Bodleian Library, Oxford, but this list is far from exhaustive. I am also grateful
to booksellers in Pakistan and Britain who never objected to my prolonged
browsing along their shelves. I have tried not to impose too much on the
goodwill of my colleagues,
 Page xxviii
although many have been aware of the progress of the work and have always
been ready with advice and suggestions. Two friends who have been especially
helpful are Dr Mohammad Waseem and Professor Christopher Shackle. My wife
Pamela has as always been my most careful editor and critic. My children's
contributions, not always so constructive, have been just as welcome.
DAVID TAYLOR
DECEMBER 1989
 Page xxix

Chronology
ca.
25001750 Indus valley civilization
BC
327 BC Invasion by Alexander the Great
ca. 272232
Reign of Ashoka
BC
712 AD Arab conquest of Sindh
1206 Establishment of Delhi sultanate
1526 Establishment of Mughal dynasty in India
15561605 Reign of Akbar
1707 Death of Aurangzeb
1803 British conquest of Delhi
1843 British conquest of Sindh
1849 British conquest of the Punjab
1857 The Great Rebellion or Indian Mutiny
1867 Establishment of the Deoband seminary
1875 Establishment of the Aligarh College
1906 Establishment of the Muslim League
The Lucknow Pact between the Muslim League and
1916
the Indian National Congress
1919-
Khilafat movement
c.1922
Muhammad Iqbal's speech to the Muslim League
1930
calling for a Muslim state
1940 The Pakistan Resolution passed at Lahore
1947 Independence and partition
19478 Kashmir issue emerges; war with India
 Page xxx

1948 Death of M. A. Jinnah

1956 Promulgation of first constitution
1958 Military coup by General Ayub Khan
1965 Ayub Khan re-elected president; war with India
Fall of Ayub Khan; martial law declared by General Yahya
19689
Khan
1971 Bangladesh civil war; war with India; partition of Pakistan
1973 New constitution promulgated
Parliamentary elections; allegations of rigging; anti-
1977
government agitation; military coup by General Zia-ul-Haq
19789Trial and execution of Z. A. Bhutto
1979 Soviet intervention in Afghanistan
1984 Referendum on Islamization programme of President Zia
1985 Non-party elections; martial law lifted
Death of President Zia in air crash; elections; accession to
1988
power of Benazir Bhutto
1989 Soviet withdrawal from Afghanistan completed
 Page xxxi

Heads of State and Prime Ministers

(Governors-general)
19478 M. A. Jinnah
194851 Khwaja Nazimuddin
19515 Ghulam Mohammad
19556 Iskander Mirza
(Presidents)
19568 Iskander Mirza
195869 Ayub Khan
196971 Yahya Khan
197173 Zulfikar Ali Bhutto
19738 Fazl Elahi Chaudhuri
197888 Zia-ul-Haq
1988- Ghulam Ishaq Khan
Prime ministers
194751 Liaquat Ali Khan
19513 Khwaja Nazimuddin
19535 Muhammad Ali Bogra
19556 Chaudhri Muhammad Ali
19567 H. S. Suhrawardy
1957 I. I. Chundrigar
19578 Firoz Khan Noon
19737 Zulfikar Ali Bhutto
19858 Mohammad Khan Junejo
1988 Benazir Bhutto
 Page 1

The Country and Its People

1
We live in Pakistan.
Mohamed Amin. Hove, England: Wayland, 1984; New York: Bookwright Press,
1985. 60p. map.
Lavishly illustrated with excellent colour photographs, this book is intended
primarily for educational use by younger children. It consists of 26 statements
by individual Pakistanis about their lives, work and beliefs. Those included
range from a farmer to a woman television news reader, but there is a strong
emphasis on modern urban life.
2
Journey through Pakistan.
Mohamed Amin, Duncan Willetts, Graham Hancock. London; Sydney; Toronto:
Bodley Head, 1982. 255p. map.
A book of glossy photographs of all parts of the country from the spectacular
northern mountains to the port and beaches of Karachi. The emphasis is on the
scenic and picturesque. There is a text which serves as a useful and
informative commentary on the photographs. The same authors produced the
similar Beauty of Pakistan (Karachi: SAY Publishing, 1983).
3
Pakistan: a nation in making.
Shahid Javed Burki. Boulder, Colorado; London: Westview Press; Karachi:
Oxford University Press, 1986. 226p. bibliog.
An account for the general reader of Pakistan's political history, its economic
and social development and its foreign relations. The author is a Pakistani
economist who has worked for many years as a senior official of the World
Bank. His major thesis is that the circumstances of Pakistan at the time of its
creation forty years ago are no longer an adequate basis either for
understanding the country today or for the construction of a national identity.
 Page 2
4
Let's visit Pakistan.
John C. Caldwell. London; Toronto; Bridgeport, Connecticut: Burke, 1983. 3rd
ed. 96p. map.
Designed for junior classes in schools, this book offers a broad, historically
based introduction to Pakistan. First published in 1966, some of the text has
been only rather sketchily revised since then and some of the illustrations also
now appear a little dated.
5
The Pathans 550 BC AD 1957.
Olaf Caroe. London: Macmillan; New York: St Martin's Press, 1958. 521p. 6
maps.
Still unsurpassed as a general history and survey of the tribes of the North-
West Frontier Province, although in the later sections the account is very much
from the perspective of the British Raj. The author was a distinguished member
of the Indian Civil Service and a governor of the province just before
independence.
6
An introduction to South Asia.
B. H. Farmer. London; New York: Methuen, 1983. 253p.
A brief and businesslike general introduction to the subcontinent. Farmer
discusses the physical environment, history, political and economic
development, and international relations of the region. Where appropriate,
there are separate sections for Pakistan.
7
An anthropological reconnaissance in West Pakistan, 1955. With appendixes on
the archaeology and natural history of Baluchistan and Bahawalpur.
Henry Field. Cambridge, Massachusetts: Peabody Museum, 1959. 332p. maps.
bibliog. (Papers of the Peabody Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology,
Harvard University, vol. 52).
The volume contains the detailed scientific findings of an expedition to
Baluchistan and Bahawalpur in 1955, the purpose of which was to fill in some
of the known lacunae in prehistory, early history and physical anthropology in
these two areas lying on each side of the Indus valley. Although described as
an anthropological expedition, much of the work done was of a somewhat
miscellaneous character. Field himself was particularly concerned with the use
of anthropometrical techniques. Seventeen appendices, by a number of hands,
cover such fields as archaeology, botany, entomology, etc.
8
Pakistan past and present: a comprehensive study published in
commemoration of the centenary of the birth of the founder of Pakistan.
Edited by Hamid Jalal (et al.). London: Stacey International, 1977. 288p.
maps. bibliog.
Published in connection with the Jinnah centenary, this extensively illustrated
book is by many authors but has been moulded by the editors into a more or
less continuous account of Pakistan. Sections cover Jinnah's life, Pakistan's
history from the Harappan civilization, the land and the people, economic and
social topics, cultural traditions, and Pakistan's place in the world.
 Page 3
9
All round view.
Imran Khan. London: Chatto & Windus, 1988. 210p.
This mainly autobiographical book is primarily about the author's own cricketing
career in England and Pakistan, but it has a little family background (he comes
from a family of cricketers) and some sharp criticism of the cricketing
authorities in Pakistan. Imran Khan published an earlier autobiography (Imran:
the autobiography of Imran Khan, with Patrick Murphy. London: Pelham Books,
1983) which covers the same ground but deals almost exclusively with the
cricketing side. The name Khan is also synonymous with Pakistan's prominent
position in squash. The exploits of Jahangir Khan and other members of his
family are covered by Keith Miles in Jahangir and the Khan Dynasty (with
Rahmat Khan, London: Pelham Books, 1988).
10
Sind: a general introduction.
H. T. Lambrick. Hyderabad, Pakistan: Sindhi Adabi Board (distributed by
Oxford University Press, Pakistan), 1964. 274p. 15 maps. (History of Sind
Series, vol. 1).
This first volume in what will, if completed, be the standard history offers an
overview of Sindh through the ages, with special emphasis on the influence of
geographical and climatic factors. Of central importance is the river Indus,
which gave the province its name and whose annual flooding and occasional
changes of course have quite literally been responsible for the present shape of
the land. The book does not cover the colonial or post-1947 periods, when the
river was tamed into providing massive irrigation facilities. It does, however,
include a chapter on the Sindhi language.
11
Pakistan: das Land und seine Menschen, Geschichte, Kultur, Staat und
Wirtschaft. (Pakistan: the land and its people, history, culture, state and
economy.)
Edited by M. Usman Malik, Annemarie Schimmel. Tübingen, West Germany;
Basel, Switzerland: Horst Erdmann, 1976. 563p. 12 maps. bibliog.
A comprehensive survey of all aspects of Pakistan's history and culture,
together with information on geology and flora and fauna. Well illustrated with
photographs, maps, statistical tables and charts showing, for example, the
educational pattern, it has a useful bibliography of works in both German and
English.
12
Peoples of South Asia.
Clarence Maloney. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1974. 584p. 8 maps.
bibliog.
A basic American college textbook on South Asian society which gives plenty of
attention to Pakistan. It provides coverage of a large number of topics which
range from social structure to socio-linguistics.
13
Pakistan: society and culture.
Edited by Stanley Maron. New Haven, Connecticut: Human Relations Area
Files, 1957. 192p. 5 maps. bibliog.
A collection of primarily anthropological articles on aspects of society in
Pakistan intended for a general reader. The style is descriptive. Punjab and the
North-West
 Page 4
Frontier Province are covered but not Sindh or Baluchistan. There is also a
piece on women in Pakistan.
14
The tigers of Baluchistan.
Sylvia Matheson. London: Arthur Barker, 1967. 213p. maps. bibliog.
A rather breathless account by a writer and journalist of five years in the late
1950s spent among the Bugti tribesmen (the 'tigers' of the title) of
Baluchistan. The author's main concern is the value system of the tribesmen,
particularly the emphasis on honour and revenge. Her husband was an
engineer working on the development of natural gas reserves in the area, and
the book is also interesting for the light it sheds on the impact of these
operations on local life.
15
Saints of Sind.
Peter Mayne. London: John Murray, 1956. 200p. map.
This is essentially a travelogue but focused entirely on the principal sufi shrines
of Sindh, which have always provided social as well as religious leadership to
the region. The tone of the writing may strike some as relentlessly personal and
anecdotal, but the author writes with knowledge and experience. Two chapters
are devoted to the Pir of Pagaro.
16
Area handbook for Pakistan.
Richard Nyrop (et al.). Washington, DC: American University, Foreign Area
Studies Division, 1984. 5th ed. 372p. maps. bibliog.
Originally published in 1958, this is a descriptive work intended in the first
instance for US personnel working in or visiting Pakistan. The basic facts about
Pakistan are conveyed succinctly in sections on history and society, politics, the
economy and military forces.
17
The Pakistani way of life.
Ishtiaq Husain Qureshi. London: Heinemann, 1956. 81p. bibliog.
Although brief and published not many years after the creation of Pakistan, this
can still be seen as a significant statement of the aspirations of many of the
country's élite. The author was Education Minister in the 1950s and an eminent
academic.
academic.
18
The Cambridge encyclopedia of India, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Nepal, Bhutan and
the Maldives.
Edited by Francis Robinson. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press,
1989. 520p. maps. bibliog.
An up-to-date survey of the whole subcontinent produced by numerous
scholars from the region and from outside. Although termed an encyclopedia, it
is arranged by subject rather than alphabetically, with short articles covering
aspects of history, economics, society and culture. It is attractively designed
and illustrated.
19
Indian cookery.
Sameen Rushdie. London: Century, 1988. 256p.
The author spent much of her early life in Pakistan and includes some regional
dishes in this collection of recipes designed to introduce South Asian or Indian
cookery to a
 Page 5
wider audience abroad. Another well-known writer on Indian cuisine is Madhur
Jaffrey. Among her books is An invitation to Indian cooking (New York: Knopf,
1973; London: Jonathan Cape, 1976).
20
Pakistani village.
Ailsa Scarsbrook, Alan Scarsbrook. London: A. & C. Black, 1979. 25p. map.
Provides photographs and a short text on life in a village in northern Punjab
near Rawalpindi, seen through the eyes of a young boy. This book is designed
for use by lower age groups in schools.
21
Lords of the Khyber: the story of the North-West Frontier.
André Singer. London: Faber & Faber, 1984. 234p. map. bibliog.
A modern study intended for a general readership. The author is a trained
anthropologist as well as film-maker, and brings a number of perspectives to
bear on his description of Pukhtun history and society. Although many of the
dramatis personae are European, the centre of attention remains the Pukhtun.
Singer believes that the Soviets have made many of the same mistakes as
earlier invaders by failing to understand the true nature of Pukhtun society.
The book could be read alongside Caroe, The Pathans 550 BC AD 1957 (q.v.)
as a basic introduction to the North-West Frontier.
22
The way of the Pathans.
James W. Spain. London: Robert Hale, 1962. 190p. map.
This is an anecdotal account of the Pukhtun areas of the North-West Frontier
Province by an American diplomat who was stationed in Pakistan in the 1950s
and subsequently went on to carry out more systematic research on the
peoples of the area. The fruits of the latter were published as The Pathan
borderland (The Hague: Mouton, 1963).
23
Muslim peoples: a world ethnographic survey.
Edited by Richard V. Weekes. Westport, Connecticut; London: Greenwood
Press, 1978. 546p. bibliog.
An anthropologically oriented cooperative work, mainly by American scholars.
The aim is to describe the major ethnic groups within the worldwide Muslim
population. Pakistan is covered in terms of Punjabis, Sindhis, Pashtuns, Baluch,
population. Pakistan is covered in terms of Punjabis, Sindhis, Pashtuns, Baluch,
Brahuis, and Kashmiris, and an ethnically diverse group labelled 'Urdu speakers
of North India and Pakistan'. For each group there is a separate section giving
a succinct description of language, social structure and stratification, distinctive
religious practices and recent history.
Pakistan: a political geography.
See item no. 34.
Gazetteer of the province of Sind.
See item no. 36.
 Page 6

Geography
General
24
The mineral and nuclear fuels of the Indian subcontinent and Burma: a guide
to the study of the coal, oil, natural gas, uranium and thorium resources of the
area.
J. Coggin Brown, A. K. Dey. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1975. 517p. 25
maps.
This is a detailed geological survey for the specialist of the subcontinent's
known reserves of mineral and nuclear fuels. While Pakistan has very little of
the latter, it has extensive reserves of coal and natural gas and some onshore
oil, mostly explored since 1975. The work also includes a technical history of
exploration and exploitation of the resources identified.
25
The North-West Frontier of West Pakistan: a study in regional geography.
David Dichter, with the collaboration of Nathan Popkin. Oxford, England:
Clarendon Press, 1967. 231p. maps. bibliog.
This is a study based on extended fieldwork which seeks to establish a general
framework for more detailed research. The main part of the book describes
each geographical division in turn, laying particular stress on physical and
economic aspects. The tribal agencies and the northern territories are also
included.
26
Pakistan.
B. L. C. Johnson. London; Exeter, New Hampshire: Heinemann, 1979. 214p.
maps.
A comprehensive study of Pakistan from a geographical perspective. The
author studies the interaction of man and his environment in the light of a wide
range of material drawn from the other social sciences. The book would be
useful both as an undergraduate textbook and as an introduction for the
general reader.
 Page 7
27
A geography of Pakistan.
K. U. Kureshy. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1977. 4th ed. 199p. maps.
bibliog.
A comprehensive account in the old style of Pakistan's physical, economic and
human geography. It includes a statistical appendix on agricultural and
industrial production, population and climate. The three earlier editions of the
book (1964, 1969, 1973) were written by Kazi S. Ahmad. The present version
is substantially rewritten and updated, although it follows the same pattern as
the earlier volumes.
28
Pakistan Geographical Review.
Lahore: University of the Punjab, Department of Geography, 1949 . biannual.
The major geographical journal from Pakistan, this covers the full range of
geographical topics. It replaced the Punjab Geographical Review which began
publication in 1942.
29
A physical and economic geography of Sind (the lower Indus basin).
Maneck B. Pithawalla. Karachi: Sindhi Adabi Board, 1959. 389p. 41 maps.
bibliog.
The first six chapters of this work deal with aspects of Sindh's physical
geography, including the hydrography of the Indus, soils, natural vegetation
and climate, while the remaining six cover the economic side. Considerable
attention is paid to the importance of the Indus river both as a means of
communication and as a source of irrigation water.
30
Pakistan: its resources and development.
Akhtar Husian [sic, Husain] Siddiqi. Hong Kong: Asian Research Service, 1979.
276p. 26 maps.
This is essentially an economic geography of Pakistan, which takes full
advantage of a wide range of sources, both official and unofficial, to produce a
rounded picture of Pakistan's resource endowment and the extent to which it
has been developed. A concluding chapter looks at regional patterns of
development.
31
31
India and Pakistan: a general and regional geography.
O. H. K. Spate, A. T. A. Learmonth. London: Methuen, 1967. 3rd ed. 877p.
maps. bibliog.
Although a little dated, this remains the most comprehensive and reliable
geographical survey of the Indian subcontinent. The authors are generous in
their definition of the geographical and discuss many aspects of historical and
economic development. Due attention is paid to Pakistan throughout, with
separate sections where appropriate. The specifically regional chapters of the
work were published as a separate volume in 1972: India, Pakistan and
Ceylon: the regions, by Spate, Learmonth and B. H. Farmer (London:
Methuen). Spate contributed a much briefer review of the subcontinent to The
changing map of Asia: a political geography, edited by W. Gordon East, Spate
and Charles Fisher (London: Methuen, 1971, 5th ed.).
 Page 8
32
South Asia: a systematic geographic bibliography.
B. L. Sukhwal. Metuchen, New Jersey: Scarecrow Press, 1974. 827p.
A well-prepared but unannotated bibliography which lists 1,622 entries for
Pakistan arranged according to standard geographical categories. Unpublished
US dissertations are included, as are numerous journal articles from Pakistan
and abroad.
33
Geology of Kohistan: Karakoram Himalaya, northern Pakistan.
Edited by R. A. Khan Tahirkheli, M. Qasim Jan. Peshawar: University of
Peshawar, Centre of Excellence in Geology, [c. 1979]. 187p. maps. bibliog.
The papers included in this collection are intended for the specialist interested
in the geology and petrography of the Kohistan region which lies to the north
of Peshawar and Islamabad. Kohistan, which is part of the Karakoram range at
the northwestern end of the Himalayas, has been explored systematically only
since 1968.
34
Pakistan: a political geography.
A. Tayyeb. London: Oxford University Press, 1966. 250p. 39 maps. bibliog.
This is perhaps not so much a geography of Pakistan as a book about Pakistan
written by a geographer. Tayyeb brings a geographer's awareness of space
and the environment to his account of Pakistan's history, its economy and its
relations with its neighbours.
35
Mountain people.
Edited by Michael Tobias, foreword by Georgina Ashworth, introduction by Jack
D. Ives. Norman, Oklahoma; London: University of Oklahoma Press, 1986.
219p. 9 maps. bibliog.
This is a collection of essays devoted to recording the lives of mountain peoples
worldwide as they face the environmental pressures of the late 20th century.
Two papers are concerned with groups in Pakistan. Kenneth Hewitt describes
the Kalash Kafirs of the Hindu Kush and muses on how to see the world
through their eyes. Pat Emerson describes the human world of Baltistan.
Fully annotated atlas of South Asia.
See item no. 39.
See item no. 39.
Gazetteers and Maps
36
Gazetteer of the province of Sind.
E. H. Aitken. Karachi: Government of Bombay, 1907. 519p. map.
Although in most parts of British India gazetteers were compiled on a district
basis, in Sindh it was decided that a single volume should be prepared for what
was then a part of the Bombay presidency, albeit under its own chief
commissioner. Aitken's work follows the standard colonial pattern, with
chapters detailing the physical aspects of the
 Page 9
region, its flora and fauna, its economy, its population divided into ethnic and
religious groups, its history and its system of government. It should be noted
that there was no direct connection between Aitken's work and that produced
as part of the Imperial gazetteer: provincial series (q.v.). After independence, a
new gazetteer was produced by a retired British official, H. T. Sorley, The
gazetteer of West Pakistan: the former province of Sind (including Khairpur
State) (Karachi: Government of West Pakistan, [c.1968]).
37
Atlas of Pakistan.
Rawalpindi: Director of Map Publications, Survey of Pakistan, 1985. 129p.
This is the first officially produced atlas of Pakistan. The country is covered at a
scale of 1:1,000,000 and there are 43 thematic maps at 1:5,000,000 dealing
with vegetation, climate, crops and industries.
38
An historical atlas of Islam.
Edited by William C. Brice. Leiden, The Netherlands: E. J. Brill, 1981. 71p. 57
maps. bibliog.
Intended as a companion to the Encyclopaedia of Islam (q.v.), this atlas
contains ten maps illustrating Muslim penetration of India and the areas ruled
by the subsequent Muslim dynasties. Other maps show the place of India
within the Indian Ocean and the wider Islamic world. The brief introduction
includes bibliographical notes.
39
Fully annotated atlas of South Asia.
Ashok K. Dutt, Margaret Geib. Boulder, Colorado; London: Westview Press,
1987. 231p. maps. bibliog.
This is in fact more a descriptive geography than simply an atlas. The authors
devote a chapter to the political and economic geography of Pakistan, as well
as covering it as part of the region as a whole. Much of the information is given
in the form of charts and tables as well as in numerous clearly drawn, although
rather cramped maps.
40
An atlas of the Mughal empire: political and economic maps with detailed
notes, bibliography and index.
Irfan Habib. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1982. 105p. maps. bibliog.
Irfan Habib. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1982. 105p. maps. bibliog.
This volume is primarily intended for the specialist historian but might be of
some use to others, although the black and white maps are not in themselves
especially alluring. The Mughal empire is divided into sixteen blocks, for each of
which there are two maps at a scale of 1:2,000,000 giving political and
economic information respectively. The extensive notes give sources for place-
name identification and other information contained on the maps, and contain
discussions of the issues raised. As Habib, the leading present-day historian of
the Mughals, states in his introduction, the period is remarkably rich in sources
for the modern map-maker, and an immense amount of information can be
derived from the maps. Susan Gole has demonstrated the range of precolonial
map-makers in two books: Maps of Mughal India, drawn by Colonel Jean-
Baptiste-Joseph Gentil, Agent for the French government to the court of Shuja-
ud-daula at Faizabad, in 1770 (Delhi: Manohar, 1988), and Indian maps and
plans from earliest times to the advent of European surveys (Delhi: Manohar,
1989).
 Page 10
41
The imperial gazetteer of India: the Indian empire.
Oxford: Clarendon Press, 19079. 26 vols.
The first attempt at a comprehensive gazetteer of the Indian empire was
produced in 1881, when it was a mere nine volumes. The 19079 version,
produced at the height of the British Raj, was 26 volumes in length. Four
served as general description, one was an index, one an atlas, and the
remaining twenty contained alphabetically arranged notes on every place of
any significance in the whole country.
42
The imperial gazetteer of India: provincial series.
Calcutta: Government of India, Superintendent of Government Printing, 19089.
maps.
Produced at the same time as the series for the Indian empire (see previous
entry), the aim and pattern is similar. Each province is covered in one or two
volumes, with sections on the general history of the province and its main
subdivisions, followed by a place-by-place gazetteer. Punjab is covered in two
volumes, mostly written by H. A. Rose, Baluchistan and North-West Frontier
Province each in one by R. Hughes-Buller and H. A. Rose respectively. Sindh is
included in the second volume of the Bombay Presidency set.
43
Indian subcontinent: India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka.
Edinburgh: John Bartholomew, [n.d.]. (Bartholomew World Travel Map).
This widely available and frequently reprinted map covers the whole
subcontinent at a scale of 1:4,000,000. The physical features, main
communications network and urban centres are all clearly shown and there is a
1:200,000 plan of Karachi. The cartography of the map is also used for the
Times Atlas of the World (London: Times Books, 1980, 6th ed.).
44
Atlas of the Islamic world since 1500.
Francis Robinson. Oxford, England: Phaidon, 1982. 238p. 50 maps. bibliog.
The title of this work, intended for a general readership, is somewhat
misleading. Although it contains a number of clearly drawn and informative
maps, it could equally be described as an illustrated history of the Muslim world
or an introduction to Islamic civilization. Photographs of people and places,
Persian and Mughal miniatures, and political cartoons are all used to illustrate
the author's text. Considerable attention is given to the Muslims of the Indian
subcontinent.
45
A historical atlas of South Asia.
Edited by Joseph E. Schwartzberg. Chicago, London: University of Chicago
Press, 1978. 352p. maps. bibliog. (Association for Asian Studies Reference
Series, no. 2).
The product of many years' work by Schwartzberg and his colleagues, this atlas
quickly established itself as a uniquely valuable research tool. The numerous
large and small maps are divided into fourteen sections covering historical
periods from the prehistoric to the contemporary and political, economic and
social developments. Each section of maps has a paired chapter of text which
provides background information and commentary. The bibliography is also
particularly extensive and useful.
 Page 11
Abode of snow: a history of Himalayas exploration and mountaineering.
See item no. 65.
Continents in collision: the International Karakoram Project.
See item no. 69.
Irrigation and drainage in the world: a global review.
See item no. 661.
Lahore: Entwicklung und räumliche Ordnung seines zentralen Geschäfts-
bereich. (Lahore: development and spatial organization of its central business
area.)
See item no. 685.
 Page 12

Flora and Fauna

46
Compact handbook of the birds of India and Pakistan.
Salim Ali, S. Dillon Ripley, plates by John Henry Dick. Delhi: Oxford University
Press, 1987. 2nd ed. 737p. maps. bibliog.
Ali and his American colleague Ripley are the universally acknowledged
founders of modern ornithology in South Asia. Their magnum opus was the
Handbook of the birds of India and Pakistan, published originally in ten
volumes from 1968 to 1975 (Bombay: Oxford University Press). A second
edition is gradually being issued. The Compact handbook, published originally
in 1983, manages, by using small but legible print, to get all the text into a
single large volume. The second edition incorporates the revised editions of the
first four volumes. It also includes an entirely new set of illustrations, some in
colour and some in black and white. Closely connected to the Handbook are
Salim Ali, The book of Indian birds (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1979, 11th
ed.), the best single-volume work for the amateur, and S. Dillon Ripley, A
synopsis of the birds of India and Pakistan (Bombay: Natural History Society,
1982, 2nd ed.).
47
The book of Indian reptiles.
J. C. Daniel. Bombay: Bombay Natural History Society (distributed by Oxford
University Press, Delhi), 1983. bibliog.
Illustrated with colour and black and white pictures as well as with line
drawings, this work describes all the common reptiles to be found in India.
Crocodiles, turtles, lizards and snakes are all included. Although the author is
concerned primarily with present-day India, there are a number of references
to the whole of the subcontinent.
48
Encyclopedia of Indian natural history: centenary publication of the Bombay
Natural History Society, 18831983.
Edited by R. E. Hawkins, illustrations editors Doris Norden, Bittu Sahgal. Delhi:
Oxford University Press for the Bombay Natural History Society, 1986. 620p.
map.
Although oriented towards India, many entries in this work are for species to
be
 Page 13
found in Pakistan also, and distributions there are often noted. The
encyclopedia lists some hundreds of species and categories of species of all
types of plant and animal life. The entries are written by experts but intended
to convey up-to-date, non-technical information to a general readership. There
are many well-reproduced drawings and black and white photographs in the
text, and 40 plates of colour and black and white illustrations.
49
The vanishing jungle: the story of the World Wildlife Fund expeditions to
Pakistan.
Guy Mountfort, illustrated by Eric Hosking. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1970.
286p. 5 maps. bibliog.
The author led two expeditions to undivided Pakistan on behalf of the World
Wildlife Fund in 1966 and 1967. The book itself is as much a travelogue as
anything, but it contains a full list of all bird, amphibian, reptile and mammal
species observed during the two expeditions. The expeditions themselves were
mounted in order to make recommendations to the Government of Pakistan on
how to preserve the country's rapidly dwindling wildlife.
50
Flowers of the Himalaya.
Oleg Polunin, Adam Stainton. Oxford, England; New York: Oxford University
Press, 1984. 580p. maps. bibliog.
Intended as a field guide, this volume identifies all the common species which
belong to the Himalayan flora. The fieldwork was carried out in India and
Nepal, but many of the species described can be found in Pakistan (alongside
others of West or Central Asian provenance). Each of the 1,495 entries is given
a full scientific description. There are 689 colour photographs and 316 line
drawings. A concise edition, including all the illustrations but with abbreviated
descriptions, was published in 1988.
51
The mammals of Pakistan.
T. J. Roberts, with a foreword by His Royal Highness Prince Bernhard of The
Netherlands. London; Tonbridge, England: Ernest Benn, 1977. 361p. maps.
bibliog.
This is a detailed catalogue of Pakistan's mammals, from the smallest mouse to
monkeys, leopards, deer and goats and including aquatic mammals such as
dolphins. The author maintains that his work is oriented towards the field
observer rather than the scientific taxonomist, but the book is rigorously
organized and would be useful to specialist zoologists as well as to serious
amateurs.
52
Mountain monarchs: wild sheep and goats of the Himalaya.
George B. Schaller. Chicago; London: University of Chicago Press, 1977. 425p.
map. bibliog.
A scientific study based on over two years' research in Pakistan on the ecology
and behavioural patterns of the wild sheep and goat of the Himalayan region.
The author is particularly concerned with those species about which little has
been written previously, for example the urial, wild goat and bharal. The work
is well illustrated both with photographs and with tables of information on
distribution, physical characteristics, etc. Schaller also wrote Stones of silence:
journeys in the Himalaya (London: André Deutsch, 1980), which is based on
the same research but takes a broader view of the environment of the regions
in which he travelled.
 Page 14
An anthropological reconnaissance in West Pakistan, 1955. With appendixes on
the archaeology and natural history of Baluchistan and Bahawalpur.
See item no. 7.
The trekker's guide to the Himalaya and Karakoram.
See item no. 82.
Herb drugs and herbalists in Pakistan.
See item no. 699.
 Page 15

Travellers' Accounts
53
Mountains of the Murgha Zerin: between the Hindu Khush and the Karakoram.
Elizabeth Balneaves. London: John Gifford, 1972. 239p. bibliog.
This is an account of an extended journey in the northern areas of Pakistan by
a writer who had made a number of previous visits to Pakistan. The date is not
mentioned but must have been the late 1960s. Another book by the author on
Pakistan is The waterless moon (London: Lutterworth, 1955).
54
Travels into Bokhara together with a narrative of a voyage on the Indus.
Alexander Burnes, introduction by James Lunt. Karachi: Oxford University
Press, 1973. 3 vols. map. (Oxford in Asia Historical Reprints).
Burnes, later to be killed in Kabul during the first Afghan war, was one of the
first European explorers of Afghanistan and Central Asia. In 1831 he travelled
up the Indus to deliver a gift of horses to Ranjit Singh in Lahore (as well, of
course, as carrying out surveys of the country for British use). He later travelled
through Punjab to Afghanistan and Bokhara. The third volume of his travels,
first published in 1834, tells the story of his journey up the Indus. The editor of
the reprint is also the author of Bokhara Burnes (London: Faber & Faber,
1969).''
55
Scinde; or the unhappy valley.
Richard F. Burton. London: Richard Bentley, 1851. 2 vols.
Burton was a young officer with Napier during the initial British conquest of
Sindh, and he spent several years there in the 1840s. He was one of the first
British officials to master the Sindhi language. His experiences there provided
the basis for this account of the province and its people. Generally lighthearted
in tone (if rather precious in places to modern ears), he nevertheless argues for
continuing British rule if Sindh is to progress from what he sees as its unhappy
economy and political condition. Burton also wrote Sindh, and the races that
inhabit the valley of the Indus; with notices of the topography and history of
the province (London: W. H. Allen, 1851) which covered
 Page 16
much of the same ground in a more systematic but less lively way. In 1877 he
published Sind revisited: with notices of the Anglo-Indian army; railroads; past,
present, and future (London: Richard Bentley). Despite its separate title that
work is in most respects a revised version of Scinde; or the unhappy valley,
although there are some comments on developments since it was first
published.
56
Breaking the curfew: a political journey through Pakistan.
Emma Duncan. London: Michael Joseph, 1989. 313p. 2 maps.
The author is an economic journalist who covered Pakistan for the London
Economist for some time in the mid-1980s. Her book describes various places
she visited and people whom she met during visits to the country, and through
these vignettes she tackles such issues as the role of the army in politics,
corruption, and the position of women. She reports also on meetings with the
late President Zia and with Benazir Bhutto.
57
Up the country: letters written to her sister from the Upper Provinces of India.
Emily Eden, notes by Edward Thompson, new introduction by Elizabeth
Claridge. London: Virago, 1983. 410p.
First published in 1866 and reprinted several times since (in the present
version in 1930), this is a classic of early English travel writing on India. Emily
Eden was the sister of Lord Auckland, governor-general of India from 1836 to
1842. With him she went, in the pre-railway age, on a progress 'up the
country' in 18389. In the course of it she visited Lahore and met Ranjit Singh.
Her letters to a married sister in England are notable for their wit and
observation. Her younger sister Fanny, who travelled with her, also kept a
journal in the form of letters to friends which has only recently been published
(Tigers, durbars and kings: Fanny Eden's Indian journals 18371838,
transcribed and edited by Janet Dunbar. London: John Murray, 1988). This
lacks some of the subtlety and style of Emily's work, but can be read with
pleasure either by itself or in parallel. Some of Fanny's original sketches are
included as illustrations.
58
The lion river: the Indus.
Jean Fairley. London: Allen Lane, 1975. 290p. 6 maps. bibliog.
A popular account of the Indus from its source in Tibet to its mouth near
Karachi. Special attention is paid to its European explorers.
See item no. 3
59
Early travels in India 15831619.
Edited by William Foster. London: Oxford University Press, 1921. 351p. 2
maps. bibliog.
This volume contains the original narratives of seven English travellers, mostly
traders and merchants, during the heyday of the Mughals. Several of them
passed through what is now Pakistan. Of particular value is William Finch's
account of his visit to Lahore in 1611.
 Page 17
60
Letters from India; describing a journey in the British dominions of India, Tibet,
Lahore, and Cashmere during the years 1828, 1829, 1830, 1831 undertaken
by orders of the French government.
Victor Jacquemont, introduction by John Rosselli. Karachi: Oxford University
Press, 1979. 2 vols. map. (Oxford in Asia Historical Reprints).
First published in English in 1834, this work was widely read in the 19th
century both in France and in Britain. Its author went to India on a scientific
expedition to collect botanical specimens but soon made contacts among
British officials and Indian rulers. Although Jacquemont shared most of the
European prejudices of his time, his letters to family and friends are marked, in
the words of Rosselli's useful introduction to the modern edition, by a 'morning
freshness' of perception. During his travels he made extensive visits to both
Punjab and Kashmir, although less so to those parts that are now in Pakistan
or Azad Kashmir.
61
Where men and mountains meet: the explorers of the western Himalayas
182075.
John Keay. London: John Murray, 1977. 277p. 4 maps. bibliog.
This is perhaps the most accessible account of the various European traders,
spies and eccentrics who first visited the area that now forms northern and
north-western Pakistan. They include among others Moorcroft (q.v.), Vigne
(q.v.) and Jacquemont (q.v.). Keay also published a sequel (The Gilgit game:
the explorers of the western Himalayas 186595. London: John Murray, 1979)
which concentrates on the period when exploration was more closely linked to
the manoeuvres of the British and Russian empires along their common
frontier.
62
Where three empires meet: a narrative of recent travel in Kashmir, Western
Tibet, Gilgit, and the adjoining countries.
E. F. Knight. London, New York: Longmans, Green & Co., 1893. 3rd ed. 582p.
map.
Knight travelled extensively in Kashmir and what are now the northern areas of
Pakistan in 1891, at a time when the Indian government was beginning to take
a more active interest in the region. The volume contains his observations and
an account of one episode of armed conflict between local tribesmen and
Indian army troops. The background to this and the general political rivalry
between Britain and Russia is covered by G. J. Alder in British India's northern
frontier 186595: a study in imperial policy (q.v.).
63
Travels of Fray Sebastien Manrique.
Sebastien Manrique, translated and edited by C. Eckford Luard. Oxford,
England: Hakluyt Society, 1927. 2 vols. 19 maps. bibliog. (Hakluyt Society 2nd
Series, nos 59, 61).
Although he wrote in Spanish, Manrique was a Portuguese missionary of the
17th century who travelled widely in Asia. The second volume of his memoirs
tells of his travels in India in 164041, during which time he visited Lahore and
then travelled to Multan and thence via the Indus to Thatta.
 Page 18
64
Where four worlds meet: Hindu Kush 1959.
Fosco Mariani, translated by Peter Green. London: Hamish Hamilton, 1964.
290p. 4 maps. bibliog.
A lively account of an Italian mountaineering expedition to the Hindu Kush
region of northern Pakistan in 1959. The larger part of the book is in fact taken
up with the journey there from Peshawar through Dir and Chitral, although
there is also a detailed description of the expedition's successful ascent of the
hitherto unclimbed 24,000-feet Mount Saraghrar.
65
Abode of snow: a history of Himalayan exploration and mountaineering.
Kenneth Mason. London: Rupert Hart-Davis, 1955. 372p. bibliog.
The author was once Superintendent of the Survey of India and his book is a
detailed, sometimes rather dry account both of the geology of the Himalayas
and of the stages by which the region was explored and its high peaks
climbed.
66
Narrative of various journeys in Balochistan, Afghanistan and the Panjab,
including a residence in those countries from 1828 to 1838.
Charles Masson, introduction by Gavin Hambly. Karachi: Oxford University
Press, 1974. 3 vols. (Oxford in Asia Historical Reprints).
Charles Masson was one of the most remarkable figures in early British contact
with the areas that are now Pakistan. After deserting from the Indian army he
wandered alone, often penniless and dependent on the hospitality of people
who had never before encountered a European. He was among the first to
recognize for what they were the extensive Buddhist remains of north-west
India and Afghanistan and conducted the first archaeological investigations of
them. Later on he was employed as an intelligence agent by the government,
although his relations with his superiors were often tense. These volumes, first
published in 1842, describe in detail his travels and activities. His life is the
subject of a sympathetic modern biography by Gordon Whitteridge, Charles
Masson of Afghanistan (Warminster, England: Aris & Phillips, 1986).
67
Narrative of a journey to Kalat.
Charles Masson, introduction by H. T. Lambrick. Karachi: Oxford University
Press, 1977. 463p. map. (Oxford in Asia Historical Reprints).
Published slightly later, in 1844, and reprinted separately, this is also in some
editions the fourth volume of Masson's Narrative. In it, he relates his
unintended involvement in 1840 in the affairs of the state of Kalat in
Baluchistan, which had been torn apart in the aftermath of the first Afghan
war. The events that he describes, and in which he was an active participant,
established the state in the form it retained up to 194748. The volume includes
a memoir of eastern Baluchistan.
68
The narrow smile: a journey back to the North-West Frontier.
Peter Mayne. London: John Murray, 1955. 264p. 2 maps.
Peter Mayne had worked in India before independence and then briefly
afterwards for the Pakistan government. This book is an account, self-indulgent
in places but lively and interesting, of a return visit to the North-West Frontier
in the early years of independence. Mayne travelled on the Afghan side of the
line as well as the Pakistani and has some useful observations on the
Pashtunistan issue which had been raised at that time by the Afghan
government.
 Page 19
69
Continents in collision: the International Karakoram Project.
Keith Miller, foreword by Lord Hunt. London: George Philip, 1982. 212p. map.
This is the record of an expedition sponsored by the Royal Geographical Society
of London in 1980 which brought together Pakistani, British and Chinese
scientists to explore the Karakoram mountain range in northern Pakistan. The
title of the book is to be taken literally, for this is an area of complex tectonic
activity. The book itself, illustrated by dramatic colour photographs, is part
travelogue and part report on the less specialized aspects of the scientific work
of the expedition. There is a useful appendix on the history of European
exploration of the area in the 19th and 20th centuries. A technical study of the
same region is Geology of Kohistan, Karakoram Himalaya, Northern Pakistan
(q.v.).
70
Travels in the Himalayan provinces of Hindustan and the Panjab from 1819 to
1825.
William Moorcroft, George Trebeck, introduction by G. J. Alder. Karachi: Oxford
University Press, 1979. 2 vols. map. (Oxford in Asia Historical Reprints).
Although not the most famous, Moorcroft was the first British traveller to cross
Afghanistan and reach Bokhara at a time when it was almost wholly unknown
to Europeans. The purpose of his journey was to investigate trade possibilities
between India and Central Asia, particularly in horses to improve the cavalry
stock of the army. During his journey he passed through the kingdom of Ranjit
Singh in the Punjab (and in fact met Ranjit Singh), as well as through what is
now the North-West Frontier Province. Moorcroft died during his return journey
from Bokhara, and the present work, first published in 1841, was assembled
from his papers by H. H. Wilson. Alder, who wrote the introduction to the
reprint, is also the author of a comprehensive biography of Moorcroft, Beyond
Bokhara: the life of William Moorcroft, Asian explorer and pioneer veterinary
surgeon, 17671825 (London: Century, 1985).
71
To the frontier.
Geoffrey Moorhouse. London; Sydney; Auckland; Toronto: Hodder &
Stoughton, 1984. 285p. map.
An account by a well-known travel writer describing a visit to Pakistan in 1983.
From Karachi he travelled through Sindh and Baluchistan to Quetta and then
to Lahore and Peshawar before moving on through the mountains to Chitral
and Gilgit. Moorhouse comments on the passing scene and makes some
perceptive observations of life during the height of the Zia period, although he
does not follow any particular theme.
72
Where the Indus is young.
Dervla Murphy. London: Century, 1983. 266p. map. bibliog.
A travelogue, originally published in 1977 by a well-known practitioner of the
art of travelling rough, which covers a winter spent in 197475 in Baltistan, part
of Pakistan's northern areas. As a woman accompanied by a young child, the
author was able to see aspects of traditional Balti life that would not be open to
a casual visitor. The author gives lively descriptions of the scenery and of the
people that she encountered. Her earlier journey through Pakistan is described
in Full tilt (London: John Murray, 1965).
 Page 20
73
Passage to Peshawar: Pakistan between the Hindu Kush and the Arabian sea.
Richard Reeves. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1984. 223p. map.
A lively and very readable account of Pakistan as it was in 1983 during the
military régime of President Zia and at the time when the refugees from
Afghanistan were making their initial impact on Pakistan society. The book is in
the form of a travelogue, but there is a great deal of general information and
analysis as well. The author is particularly interesting on Pakistan-US relations.
74
That untravelled world: an autobiography.
Eric Shipton. London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1969. 286p. 8 maps.
The autobiography of a renowned mountaineer who made some of the
attempts in the 1920s and 1930s to climb Mount Everest. He made a major
expedition to the Karakoram in 1937, to which a separate chapter of this book
is devoted. He also described the expedition in Blank on the map (London:
Hodder & Stoughton, 1938).
75
Words for my brother: travels between the Hindu Kush and the Himalayas.
John Staley. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1982. 287p. 7 maps. bibliog.
The author is a professional geographer who visited the northern areas of
Pakistan on a number of occasions to conduct research on glaciers but who at
the same time became fascinated by the lives of the people who lived in these
remote areas. This book tries, through the author's own experiences and his
research, to convey the spirit of their lives, as well as to sketch in the
development of relations between them and the wider world.
76
Between Oxus and Jumna.
Arnold J. Toynbee. London: Oxford University Press, 1961. 211p. map.
A travelogue by the distinguished historian and philosopher. Toynbee visited
Pakistan (as well as India and Afghanistan) in 1960 and travelled widely within
what was once the Kushan empire. Familiar with the literary and archaeological
sources, he shares with the reader his excitement at visiting the historical sites,
while at the same time commenting on the lives of the modern descendants of
those who had lived there.
77
77
Travels in Kashmir, Ladak, Iskardo ... and the Himalaya, north of the Panjab.
G. T. Vigne. London: Henry Colburn, 1842. 2 vols. map.
Vigne travelled extensively in Kashmir and the Western Himalayas in the
second half of the 1830s. Although Moorcroft (q.v.) had preceded him, he was
the first European to visit Skardu and to explore the Baltistan region in any
depth. He appears the archetypal English amateur, with his concern for
hunting and for the local topography, although John Keay (q.v.) suggests he
may also have worked as a British agent.
The vanishing jungle: the story of the World Wildlife Fund expeditions to
Pakistan.
See item no. 49.
 Page 21
On Alexander's track to the Indus: personal narrative of explorations on the
north-west frontier of India.
See item no. 99.
A glance at Sind before Napier or dry leaves from young Egypt.
See item no. 185.
 Page 22

Tourism
78
A traveller's guide to Pakistan.
Hilary Adamson, Isobel Shaw. Islamabad: Asian Study Group, 1981. 364p. 48
maps. bibliog.
Practically oriented if less glossily produced than many guidebooks, this volume
is intended for the foreigner resident in Pakistan for a year or two as much as
for the short-term visitor. There is much interesting information about smaller
places on the way between the main tourist sights.
79
An insight and guide to Pakistan.
Christine Osborne. Harlow, England; New York: Longmans, 1983. 268p. 6
maps. bibliog.
Written as a basic introduction to Pakistan for a prospective visitor or as a
companion for someone already there, the book seeks to capture the spirit of
the country. Best read in conjunction with a standard guidebook, it includes
many photographs and a small selection of recipes.
80
Pakistan: a travel survival kit.
Jose Roleo Santiago. South Yarra, Victoria: Lonely Planet, 1984. 2nd ed. 213p.
maps.
One of a series of guides intended mainly for the younger independent
traveller. It combines highly practical information on accommodation at all price
levels and means of transport with some suggestions on what to see. It is
rather sketchy for some parts of the country, but contains detailed information
on trekking routes in the Himalayas.
81
Pakistan: Collins illustrated guide.
Isobel Shaw. London: Collins, 1989. 232p. 14 maps. bibliog.
Beautifully illustrated with drawings and colour photographs, this guide is a
judicious blend of enthusiasm and highly practical advice.
 Page 23
82
The trekker's guide to the Himalaya and Karakoram.
Hugh Swift. San Francisco: Sierra Club Book, 1982. 342p. maps. bibliog.
Covers the whole of the Himalayan region and contains three chapters
describing in detail treks that can be made in Chitral, Gilgit and Baltistan
respectively. The approach is sensible, and there are useful chapters giving a
wide range of practical information. There are also glossaries of several of the
local languages and a chapter on flora and fauna.
83
A handbook for travellers in India, Pakistan, Nepal, Bangladesh and Sri Lanka
(Ceylon).
L. F. Rushbrook Williams. London: John Murray, 1975. 22nd ed. (reprinted with
amendments, 1982). 762p. maps. bibliog.
Often known as Murray's Guide, this is by far the oldest extant tourist guide for
South Asia, dating back to the 19th century. It is in some ways a historical
curiosity. The recommended routes follow the railways, and dak bungalows
feature more frequently than modern hotels, but it is more comprehensive than
most in its listing of places to see and does not just concentrate on the obvious
sights. Some fifty pages are devoted to Pakistan, besides a separate section on
Kashmir.
Peshawar: historic city of the frontier.
See item no. 181.
Karachi.
See item no. 683.
 Page 24

Archaeology and Prehistory

84
The rise of civilization in India and Pakistan.
Bridget Allchin, Raymond Allchin. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University
Press, 1982. 379p. maps. bibliog. (Cambridge World Archaeology).
This is a revised version of the same authors' The birth of Indian civilization
(Harmondsworth, England: Penguin, 1968) and covers the stone age, the
Indus civilization, and the arrival in the subcontinent of Indo-Aryan groups
followed by the re-emergence of cities in the middle of the first millennium BC.
Intended for a non-specialist readership, although very detailed in some parts,
it is extensively illustrated. It incorporates the new emphasis on non-traditional
types of archaeological data, for example from palaeoclimatology, to produce
as integrated as possible a view of the cultures concerned.
85
Excavations at Mohenjo Daro, Pakistan: the pottery.
George F. Dales, Jonathan Mark Kenoyer, with a contribution by Leslie Alcock.
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania: University of Pennsylvania, University Museum,
1986. 586p. maps. bibliog. (University Museum Monograph, no. 53).
This is the first of what are intended to be three final reports on excavations at
Mohenjo-daro in 1965. At that time Dales and his colleagues carried out an
intensive resurvey of a small area to extend the range of knowledge of the site
and the Harappan culture generally. Alcock's contribution makes available for
the first time certain material from Mortimer Wheeler's earlier excavations.
When complete, these reports will be the standard source for specialized
information on Mohenjo-daro.
86
The historic city of Taxila.
Ahmad Hasan Dani. Tokyo: Centre for East Asian Cultural Studies; Paris:
UNESCO, 1986. 190p. maps. bibliog.
The author is a distinguished archaeologist but while he never loses sight of
the
 Page 25
archaeological dimension he seeks in this work to provide a more historically
and anthropologically oriented account of this major city of ancient Punjab than
that provided by Sir John Marshall's A guide to Taxila (q.v.).
87
The roots of ancient India: the archaeology of early Indian civilization.
Walter A. Fairservis, Jr., drawings by Jan Fairservis. London: George Allen &
Unwin, 1971. 482p. 28 maps. bibliog.
A major synoptic work on Indian archaeology by a leading US scholar.
Fairservis begins with the earliest evidence from the stone age dating back a
quarter of a million years or more. He then deals with the transition to settled
habitation before coming to the Harappan period. Because of the spatial
distribution of human settlement in prehistoric India, much of the book derives
its material from sites which are now in Pakistan.
88
Studies in the archaeology of India and Pakistan.
Edited by Jerome Jacobson. Warminster, England: Aris & Phillips; Delhi: Oxford
& IBH, 1987. 327p. maps. bibliog.
A collection of scholarly papers designed to illustrate the work of US
archaeologists working on South Asia in the 1980s. A number of the papers are
concerned with the Harappan civilization both in terms of its social and cultural
life and of its material culture.
89
Antiquities of northern Pakistan: reports and studies. vol. 1. Rock inscriptions in
the Indus valley.
Edited by Karl Jettmar. Mainz am Rhein, West Germany: Verlag Philipp von
Zabern, 1989 (1 vol. in 2 parts).
The petroglyphs or rock-carvings along the Indus valley in its upper reaches
along the ancient trade routes have become fully known only in recent years.
Dating back to at least the third millennium BC, they are a major source for the
prehistoric and Buddhist periods. This volume of specialist essays has been
brought together by the leading specialist on the subject. The second part of
the volume, printed separately, is devoted to photographic illustrations of the
carvings. A related volume of photographs and text, produced originally for an
exhibition and intended for a general readership, is Between Gandhara and the
silk road: rock-carvings along the Karakoram highway. Discoveries by German-
Pakistani expeditions, 19791984, edited by Karl Jettmar and Volker Thewalt
(Mainz am Rhein, West Germany: Verlag Philipp von Zabern, 1987).
90
Architecture and art treasures in Pakistan: prehistoric, protohistoric, Buddhist
and Hindu periods.
F. A. Khan. Karachi: Elite, 1969. 200p. bibliog.
This is a general book on the subject by a senior Pakistani archaeologist,
divided equally between the architectural remains to be found at the country's
major archaeological sites and the artefacts that have been found. There is
only brief mention of the post-Gandhara period.
 Page 26
91
A comprehensive bibliography of Pakistan archaeology: paleolithic to historic
times.
Denise King. East Lansing, Michigan: Michigan State University Asian Studies
Center, 1975. 95p. 2 maps. (South Asian Series Occasional Paper, no. 24).
The bibliography includes 1,083 items published up to and including 1972. The
entries are not annotated and are arranged simply by author, but there is a
subject index. They include books, articles and unpublished dissertations. All
items are in European languages, mostly in English.
92
The people of South Asia: the biological anthropology of India, Pakistan, and
Nepal.
Edited by John R. Lukacs. New York; London: Plenum, 1984. 465p. map.
bibliog.
This is a specialized collection of papers in the field of physical anthropology.
Two distinct sections cover palaeoanthropology and the biological anthropology
of the contemporary population of the area. In the former section Pakistani
material features in a number of chapters, especially two on Harappa by Pratap
C. Dutta and Jim G. Shaffer respectively. A paper in the second section by
Charles A. Weitz, 'The impact of irrigation on the demographic structure of the
Peshawar basin of northwest Pakistan', argues that social factors need to be
built into models relating material resources and population growth.
93
A guide to Taxila.
John Marshall. London: Cambridge University Press, 1960. 4th ed. 187p. maps.
bibliog.
This is not so much a guidebook as a summary of Marshall's comprehensive
account of his archaeological discoveries at Taxila from 1913 to 1934 (Taxila:
an illustrated account of archaeological excavations carried out at Taxila ...
between the years 1913 and 1934. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1975 [first
published by Cambridge University Press, 1951], 3 vols). It would however be
useful to a student or an amateur archaeologist visiting the sites of the
successive cities of Taxila which were built by rulers of the area from at least
the 6th century BC onwards. These included among others the Bactrian Greeks
and the Kushans. Taxila was a major educational and cultural centre and there
have been many Buddhist finds.
94
Pakistan Archaeology.
Karachi: Government of Pakistan, Ministry of Education, Department of
Archaeology, 1964 . annual.
An annual publication designed for the archaeologist and carrying reports on
current excavations. Volumes appear several years after the nominal date
given. Another archaeological journal which also began publication in 1964 but
has appeared irregularly is Ancient Pakistan, from the Department of
Archaeology at the University of Peshawar.
 Page 27
95
Harappan civilization: a contemporary perspective.
Edited by Gregory Possehl. Warminster, England: Aris & Phillips, 1982. 440p.
maps. bibliog.
The papers in this useful collection arose from a conference in 1979 of a group
of mainly Indian and US archaeologists. They are arranged into sections
dealing with the nature of Harappan urbanization, the results of recent
fieldwork, ecology, technology and trade, biological anthropology, the later
phases of the Harappan tradition, and history of research on the subject. There
are single papers on the Indus script and on 'Paradigm changes in the study of
the Indus civilization'. This last places the volume in perspective and
emphasizes, in contrast to earlier approaches, how complex and interwoven
were the processes of cultural change during the Harappan period. Another
collection of papers which equally illustrate trends in archaeological research is
Studies in the archaeology and palaeoanthropology of South Asia, edited by K.
A. R. Kennedy and Gregory Possehl (New Delhi: Oxford & IBH Publishing
Corporation, 1984). The papers with Pakistani relevance are mainly but not
exclusively concerned with Harappan topics.
96
The end of the ancient cities of the Indus.
Robert L. Raikes. American Anthropologist, vol. 62, no. 2 (April 1964), p.
28499. map. bibliog.
This is a provocative article which challenges existing interpretations of the
decline of Harappa and Mohenjo-daro which see it essentially in terms of social
factors. Instead, Raikes suggests that geomorphological changes and
consequent flooding were primarily responsible. A critical review of Raikes's
hypothesis is offered by Gregory Possehl ('The Mohenjo-daro floods: a reply',
American Anthropologist, vol. 69, no. 1 (Feb. 1967), p. 3240), who argues,
following Wheeler, that the cities' decline was due primarily to over-utilization
of the land.
97
Asian axe two million years old.
Helen Rendell, Robin Dennell. The Geographical Magazine, vol. 59, no. 6 (June
1987), p. 2702. map.
This article reports the finding in 1983 in northern Pakistan of a stone axe
which has been dated to at least two million years ago. If confirmed, this
finding would revolutionize the whole study of hominids in Asia.
98
The middle stone age cultures of northern Pakistan.
Mohammad Salim. Islamabad: Quaid-i-Azam University, Centre for the Study of
the Civilizations of Central Asia, 1986. 227p. map. bibliog.
This is a specialized study of stone age cultures in Pakistan based on intensive
work at two sites, one in Mardan district, the other in the Soan valley in
Rawalpindi. Salim is concerned to work out chronologies for the middle stone
age sites of India and Pakistan.
99
On Alexander's track to the Indus: personal narrative of explorations on the
North-West Frontier of India.
Aurel Stein. London: Macmillan, 1929. 182p. 2 maps. bibliog.
Sir Aurel Stein, one of the most scholarly of all the British Raj's officials, made
his reputation by his work on Central Asia. His knowledge of the Chinese-
language and
 Page 28
Buddhist sources made him particularly well qualified to write about the
Buddhist period in North-West Frontier history. The present work combines
travelogue with history and archaeology.
100
Vergessene Städte am Indus: frühe Kulturen in Pakistan vom 8.2. Jahrtausend
v. Chr. (Forgotten cities of the Indus: early cultures in Pakistan from the 8th to
the 2nd millennium BC).
Günter Urban, Michael Jansen (et al.). Mainz am Rhein, West Germany: Verlag
Philipp von Zabern, 1987. 312p. maps. bibliog.
Produced in connection with an exhibition on the 'Forgotten cities of the Indus'
held first at Aachen in 1987, this volume is made up of a series of essays for
the general reader. Well-known scholars write on different aspects of the
Harappan culture. The quality of the printing and of the illustrations is of a high
order.
101
The Indus civilization.
Mortimer Wheeler. London: Cambridge University Press, 1968. 3rd ed. 144p.
maps. bibliog. (Supplementary Volume to the Cambridge History of India).
This is the most detailed and authoritative account available for the non-
specialist reader on the Indus or Harappan civilization. Wheeler, who himself
made one of the most significant contributions to its uncovering, discusses all
aspects of the civilization from its artefacts to aspects of religion and language
which can only dimly be perceived from the archaeological record.
102
My archaeological mission to India and Pakistan.
Mortimer Wheeler. London: Thames & Hudson, 1976. 96p. maps. bibliog.
A personal account by Sir Mortimer Wheeler of his time as Director-General of
the Archaeological Survey of India from 1944 to 1947. After independence he
was for a little while in charge of archaeology in Pakistan. During the six years
after 1944 he carried out excavations at the major Pakistani sites at
Charsadda, Harappa and Mohenjo-daro. These memoirs include both personal
reflections and archaeological information.
Narrative of various journeys in Balochistan, Afghanistan and the Panjab
including a residence in those countries from 1828 to 1838.
See item no. 66.
See item no. 66.
Between Oxus and Jumna.
See item no. 76.
Peshawar: historic city of the frontier.
See item no. 181.
Anthropology in Pakistan: recent socio-cultural and archaeological perspectives.
See item no. 399.
 Page 29

History
South Asia
103
The A;in-i Akbari.
Abu'l Fazl 'Allami, translated by H. Blochmann, H. S. Jarrett, revised by D. C.
Phillott, Jadunath Sarkar. Delhi: Atlantic Publishers, 1989.
This is in fact the final part of Abul Fazl's Akbarnama (q.v.) but is always
referred to as a separate work. In it Abul Fazl describes in meticulous detail the
mode of government of the Mughal empire during the reign of Akbar. The first
section deals with the royal household and with military affairs, the second
which has been used to good effect by later economic historians such as
Shireen Moosvi in her The economy of the Mughal empire (q.v.) with the
revenues of the empire, and the third with the social conditions of the
population of India. There is also a section which lists the sayings and
observations of the emperor. There is no single source that is so important for a
study of Indian history in the Mughal period. A modern scholarly edition is
badly needed but Blochmann's 19th-century translation, first published
187396, retains its value.
104
The Akbarnama.
Abu-l-Fazl, translated by H. Beveridge. Delhi: Atlantic Publishers, 1989. 3 vols.
This massive Persian work, which in translation runs to well over 2,000 pages,
is the official life of the emperor Akbar by Abul Fazl, his principal administrator.
While the literary form is that of a court biography, including for example
minute astrological details, it remains one of the most important sources
available for Mughal history. The edition, although first published 190239, is
scholarly. There is a brief introduction to the third volume in which the
translator offers his own assessment of Akbar, although it would strike most
modern readers as unduly moralistic.
 Page 30
105
The crisis of empire in Mughal North India: Awadh and the Punjab, 170748.
Muzaffar Alam. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1986. 365p. 7 maps. bibliog.
This major scholarly study of the 18th century moves beyond existing work on
the period in its emphasis on the interaction of forces operating at the centre
of the Mughal empire and those arising in the provinces, in this case the
Punjab and Awadh. While Alam sees the period as one of decline of central
control, he also emphasizes the extent of new growth at the provincial and
local level. There is considerable material on the struggles between the Sikhs
and Mughal officials in the Punjab. Another important work that covers a
slightly later period but is also concerned with the post-Mughal situation in
North India is C. A. Bayly, Rulers, townsmen and bazaars: North Indian society
in the age of British expansion, 17701870 (Cambridge, England: Cambridge
University Press, 1983).
106
Babur-nama (Memoirs of Babur).
Translated by A. S. Beveridge. London: Luzac, 1922 (reprinted 1969). 880p.
This work was written by Babur, the first Mughal ruler of India and direct
descendant of Taimur (Tamerlane), who brought his troops into India in the
early 16th century and laid the foundations of the empire. His memoirs
describe not only his campaigns but also the countryside and his interest in the
arts. They were originally written in Turki but were soon translated into Persian.
A number of translations into European languages exist. A particularly lavish
edition which includes reproductions of miniatures from a manuscript copy of
the Persian text is Le livre de Babur: Mémoires du premier Grand Mogol des
Indes (14941529), translated by Jean-Louis Bacqué-Grammont (Paris:
L'Imprimerie Nationale, 1985).
107
The patrimonial-bureaucratic empire of the Mughals.
Stephen P. Blake. Journal of Asian Studies, vol. 39, no. 1 (Nov. 1979), p. 7794.
An assessment of the Mughal empire in which the author argues that it is
inappropriate to see it as a forerunner of the centralized British administration
of the 19th century. It would be better, he suggests, to look at it in terms of a
model derived from the Weberian concept of a patrimonial form of political
organization focused on the person of the emperor wherever he happened to
be.
108
The Cambridge Economic History of India.
Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press, 1982. 2 vols. vol. 1,
c.1200c.1750, edited by Tapan Raychaudhuri, Irfan Habib. 543p. 10 maps.
bibliog. vol. 2, c.1757c.1970, edited by Dharma Kumar. 1073p. 12 maps.
bibliog.
In the tradition of the Cambridge histories, these two volumes provide as far as
possible a comprehensive and authoritative review of the subject by its leading
academic exponents. What is now Pakistan is covered in the sections on
Northern India (Punjab and the North-West Frontier Province) and Western
India (Sindh and Baluchistan). In the second volume there is considerable
material on the individual regions, rather less in the first. There is also much to
be gleaned from the general
 Page 31
chapters, especially those in the second volume on irrigation and the railways.
A chapter in the final section reviews the performance of the Pakistan economy
from independence to 1970.
109
The Cambridge History of India.
London: Cambridge University Press, 192237. 5 vols. maps. bibliog.
The Cambridge History of India was planned in six volumes, although the
second volume on the later classical period was never written. The contributors
and editors were a mixture of professional academics and scholar-
administrators. While still valuable as a reference work in some areas, it has for
the most part been overtaken by modern scholarship. Volume 1, published in
1922 and edited by E. J. Rapson, deals with ancient India; vol. 3 (1928, edited
by Wolseley Haig) with the Turks and Afghans; vol. 4 (1937, edited by Richard
Burn) with the Mughal period; vol. 5 (1929, edited by H. H. Dodwell) with
British India, 14971858; and vol. 6 (1932, edited by H. H. Dodwell) with the
Indian empire, 18581918. A supplement to volume 1 by Mortimer Wheeler,
The Indus valley civilization (q.v.) was published separately at a later stage. A
New Cambridge History of India has begun to appear, but this comprises a
series of monographs on interconnected topics rather than the magisterial
volumes of the earlier work. C. A. Bayly's Indian society and the making of the
British empire (Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press, 1988), is
relevant to Pakistan.
110
The imperial impact: studies in the economic history of Africa and India.
Edited by Clive Dewey, A. G. Hopkins. London: Athlone Press, 1978. 409p.
The major essay in this collection of studies in economic history that bears on
Pakistan is that by Clive Dewey, 'Patwari and Chaukidar: subordinate officials
and the reliability of India's official statistics' (p. 280314), in which he argues
that published statistics in South Asia depend critically on the village officials,
who very often simply made them up. Many of his examples are taken from the
Punjab. A more detailed article on the Punjab was published by Dewey in a
specialist journal: 'The agricultural statistics of the Punjab, 18861947', Bulletin
of Quantitative and Computer Methods in South Asian Studies, no. 2 (March
1974), p. 314.
111
The history of India as told by its own historians: the Muhammadan period.
H. M. Elliot, edited after his death by John Dowson. London: Trübner & Co,
186777. 8 vols.
Although designed, often in the crudest fashion, to glorify British rule and
depict India's past as one only of tyranny and misery, this massive work is still
a frequently used collection of translations of historical manuscripts mostly in
Persian, many of which are not otherwise available. There are some editorial
annotations and bibliographical comments.
112
The great Moghuls.
Bamber Gascoigne. London: Jonathan Cape, 1971. 264p. map. bibliog.
This is a beautifully illustrated popular account of the Mughal emperors.
Separate chapters are devoted to Babur, Humayun, Akbar, Jahangir, Shah
Jahan, and Aurangzeb.
 Page 32
113
The agrarian system of Mughal India (15561707).
Irfan Habib. Bombay: Asia Publishing House, 1963. 453p. map. bibliog.
The publication of this book marked the beginning of a new phase in the study
of Mughal economic and social history. Habib uses a wide range of Persian
sources to describe and analyse the agrarian economy and social structure of
Mughal India. He discusses the relationship between the land revenue system,
the local economy, and the structure of the Mughal state, and identifies an
agrarian crisis that gradually developed in the course of the 17th century.
114
The technology and economy of Mughal India.
Irfan Habib. Indian Economic and Social History Review, vol. 17, no. 1
(Jan.March 1980), p. 134.
A wide-ranging survey of the levels of technology reached during the Mughal
period which indicates high levels in some areas and lesser achievements in
others. Habib, a prominent scholar of the period, concludes that although there
was no in-built resistance to technological change there was equally no
overwhelming enthusiasm for it.
115
Class structure and economic development: India and Pakistan since the
Moghuls.
Angus Maddison. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1971. 181p. bibliog.
Maddison's essay in broad historical analysis discusses the links between the
social structure of the Indian subcontinent and economic growth there. He
looks particularly at the question of whether governments in India and Pakistan
have been able to change underlying social structures to any substantial
extent. He reviews critically the 'functional inequality' approach pursued in
Pakistan in the 1960s.
116
Mughals in India: a bibliographical survey of manuscripts.
D. N. Marshall. London; New York: Mansell, 1985. 634p.
The compiler has attempted to include all manuscripts, whatever the language,
which are relevant to the study of political, economic, and social conditions
during the Mughal period. Items range therefore from the well known, for
example the A'in-i Akbari (q.v.), to minor works which may nevertheless be
highly relevant to one particular area or topic. Each of the 2,105 entries is
annotated. The entries are arranged by author's name and there are title and
subject indexes.
117
The men who ruled India.
Philip Woodruff (pseud. for Philip Mason). London: Jonathan Cape. vol. 1. The
founders, 1953. 402p. 8 maps. bibliog; vol. 2. The guardians, 1954. 385p. 4
maps. bibliog.
Mason's work has become the classic account of the British officials who
succeeded first in conquering and then in ruling India. Through a series of
biographical sketches he deftly weaves together historical incident with
personal detail to recreate the world of the British officials and their changing
perceptions of their role in India. Mason was himself a member of the Indian
Civil Service in the last years of British rule, and his assessment of his
colleagues and predecessors is sympathetic but informed by an acute
awareness of the ambiguities and complexities of their position.
 Page 33
118
The economy of the Mughal empire c.1595: a statistical survey.
Shireen Moosvi. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1987. 442p. 11 maps. bibliog.
This is a careful attempt to establish as accurate a picture as possible of the
state of the Indian economy under the Mughals in 1595, a date which sees the
empire at its high point and for which there is available the uniquely valuable
A'in-i AkbaRi (q.v.). Moosvi uses other documentary and numismatic evidence
to discuss such topics as agricultural productivity, money supply and foreign
trade, population and the distribution of the agrarian surplus at the local level
and among the ruling class.
119
India at the death of Akbar: an economic study.
W. H. Moreland. London: Macmillan, 1920. 328p. bibliog. 2 maps.
Although outmoded in many respects, this work remains an accessible and
coherent account of the economic and social conditions of India at the height
of Mughal power. Moreland foreshadows later research in his attempt to
quantify wherever possible. He was also the author of The agrarian system of
Moslem India (Cambridge, England: W. Heffer, 1929) and From Akbar to
Aurangzeb: a study in Indian economic history (London: Macmillan, 1923).
120
Some aspects of religion and politics in India during the thirteenth century.
Khaliq Ahmad Nizami, foreword by C. C. Davies, introduction by Mohammad
Habib. Aligarh: Aligarh Muslim University, Department of History, 1961. 421p.
bibliog. (Publications of the Department of History, Aligarh Muslim University,
no. 16).
This important study deals with India at the time of the Turkish invasions which
led to the establishment of the Delhi Sultanate in 1206. Nizami reviews the
background and then discusses the position of various groups in society,
including the rulers, the ulama, the sufis, and the Hindus. Appendices include
relevant documents and discussion of source material generally.
121
The administration of the Sultanate of Delhi.
Ishtiaq Husain Qureshi. Karachi: Pakistan Historical Society, 1958. 4th rev. ed.
2 maps. bibliog. (Pakistan Historical Society Publication, no. 10).
First published in 1942, this is a comprehensive review of the administrative
system in the area of the Sultanate of Delhi from its formation as an
independent unit in 1206 till its first defeat by the Mughals in 1526. The
Sultanate's territories included the Punjab and Sindh.
122
The imperial monetary system of Mughal India.
Edited by John F. Richards. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1987. 382p. maps.
This is a collection of specialized articles arising out of a conference which
brought together specialists in various aspects of the history of Mughal India to
see how numismatic studies could be brought to bear on wider issues in the
economic history of the period. Contributions cover, for example, the currency
system in the time of
 Page 34
Akbar, the structure of monetary exchange in North India, and foreign
merchants and the Mughal mints.
123
Centre and periphery in the Mughal state: the case of seventeenth-century
Panjab.
Chetan Singh. Modern Asian Studies, vol. 22, no. 2 (May 1988), p. 299318.
Singh uses the example of Punjab in the 17th century to challenge some
current historiographical assumptions about the degree to which the Mughal
state exercised control over peripheral areas. He draws attention to the
existence of a strong regional landed élite in the Punjab with which the Mughal
rulers had to come to terms.
124
A history of the Indian people.
D. P. Singhal. London: Methuen, 1983. 481p. 12 maps. bibliog.
Singhal provides a comprehensive narrative survey of Indian history from
prehistoric times to the 1980s. After 1947 the focus is solely on what is now
India, but for the rest the whole of the subcontinent is included. The classical
and medieval periods are both well covered.
125
A history of India: volume two.
Percival Spear. Harmondsworth, England: Penguin Books, 1965. 284p. 2 maps.
bibliog.
A standard history of the Indian subcontinent for the general reader written by
a British historian of humanist and liberal persuasions. The second volume
covers the Mughals and the colonial period. The final chapters deal with the
post-independence period but are confined to India. The first volume of the
history, by Romila Thapar (Harmondsworth, England: Penguin Books, 1966),
covers the classical period and the early Muslim dynasties.
126
The twilight of the Mughuls: studies in late Mughul Delhi.
Percival Spear. London: Cambridge University Press, 1951. 270p. map. bibliog.
A beautifully written history of the city of Delhi from the late 18th century up to
1858 which evokes the intellectual and political atmosphere of the time. This
was the Delhi both of the poet Ghalib and of Sir Sayyid Ahmad Khan. Another
interesting study which overlaps with Spear in its treatment of the late Mughal
interesting study which overlaps with Spear in its treatment of the late Mughal
period is Narayani Gupta, Delhi between two empires 18031931: society,
government and urban growth (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1981).
127
A guide to Western manuscripts and documents in the British Isles relating to
South and South East Asia.
Compiled by M. D. Wainwright, Noel Matthews. London: Oxford University
Press, 1965. 532p.
This is a major research tool for anyone working on any aspect of Pakistan in
the colonial period. It lists in summary form the archival holdings of many
different record offices and museums, from the Public Record Office down to
small regimental museums and business firms. There is an extensive index by
person and place. The records of the India Office Library and Records (well
described in Martin Moir, A
 Page 35
general guide to the India Office Library and Records. London: British Library,
1988) are excluded, however. A limited amount of information on archives
within Pakistan can be found in Government archives in South Asia: a guide to
national and state archives in Ceylon, India and Pakistan, edited by D. A. Low,
J. C. Iltis and M. D. Wainwright (London: Cambridge University Press, 1969).
An atlas of the Mughal empire: political and economic maps with detailed
notes, bibliography and index.
See item no. 40.
A historical atlas of South Asia.
See item no. 45.
Early travels in India 15831619.
See item no. 59.
A matter of honour: an account of the Indian army, its officers and men.
See item no. 550.
South Asian history, 17501950: a guide to periodicals, dissertations and
newspapers.
See item no. 787.
Muslims of South Asia
128
Studies in Islamic culture in the Indian environment.
Aziz Ahmad. Oxford, England: Clarendon Press, 1964. 311p. bibliog.
Aziz Ahmad sees the development of an Islamic culture in India both as a
regional formulation of a general Islamic culture and as a process of interaction
with the Hinduism that is indigenous to the region. He traces these two themes
from the Delhi Sultanate of the pre-Mughal period to the 20th century. Topics
include pan-Islamism in India, Islamic modernism, and sufism and syncretism.
129
Muslim self-statement in India and Pakistan 18571968.
Edited by Aziz Ahmad, G. E. von Grunebaum. Wiesbaden, West Germany: Otto
Harrassowitz, 1970. 240p.
This is an anthology of extracts, mainly translated from Urdu, which illustrate
some of the main themes in Islamic thought in the 19th and 20th centuries.
Conservative and progressive tendencies are represented by such writers as
Sayyid Ahmad Khan, Amir Ali, Abul Kalam Azad, Iqbal, and Maududi. The work
is linked to Aziz Ahmad's Islamic modernism in India and Pakistan 18571964
(q.v.).
130
My life, a fragment.
Mohamed Ali, edited by Afzal Iqbal. Lahore: Sh. Muhammad Ashraf, 1942.
363p.
Mohamed Ali, together with his older brother Shaukat, played a central role in
 Page 36
mobilizing support for the Khilafat campaign and was involved in all the major
political developments of the 1910s and 1920s. This incomplete autobiography,
written while he was in jail, deals primarily with his religious background and
outlook. Three volumes of his political writings have appeared edited by
Mushirul Hasan and covering the period 1907 to 1923 (Mohamed Ali in Indian
politics: selected writings. Delhi: Atlantic Publishers, 1982, 1983, 1986), and
two volumes of his articles from his newspaper Comrade (Selections from
Mohamed Ali's Comrade, edited by R. A. Jafri. Lahore: Mohammad Ali
Academy, 1965).
131
Sources of Indian tradition.
Compiled by W. Theodore de Bary (et al.). New York: Columbia University
Press; London: Oxford University Press, 1958. 961p. 2 maps. bibliog. (Records
of Civilization: Sources and Studies, no. 56).
This is an excellent collection of readings from South Asian authors of all
periods in which Muslim writers are well represented. For the medieval writers
in Persian or later in Urdu, the extracts translated here are often the only easily
available English versions. The 19th and 20th centuries are represented by
Sayyid Ahmad Khan, Iqbal, Muhammad Ali (i.e. Mohamed Ali), Rahmat Ali,
Liaquat Ali Khan, Maududi, and I. H. Qureshi.
132
Shari'at and ambiguity in South Asian Islam.
Edited by Katherine P. Ewing. Berkeley; Los Angeles; London: University of
California Press, 1988. 321p. map. bibliog.
This volume, a successor to that on adab edited by Barbara Metcalf (q.v.),
explores the codes of behaviour by which South Asian Muslims live their lives,
and the interrelationship in those codes of the Islamic sharia and ideas drawn
from other sources. The editor suggests that the relationship is often a
deliberately ambiguous one. Contributors are historians and anthropologists.
133
Islam in Asia. vol. 1. South Asia.
Edited by Yohanan Friedmann. Jerusalem: Magnes Press, The Hebrew
University, 1984. 289p.
This volume brings together a selection of papers from a conference held in
1977. Apart from a shared concern with Islam in South Asia, there is no
common theme, and topics include both medieval and contemporary issues.
134
Islam et société en Asie du Sud. (Islam and society in South Asia.)
Edited by Marc Gaborieau. Paris: Editions de l'Ecole des Hautes Etudes en
Sciences Sociales, 1986. (Collection Purusartha, no. 9).
A collection of essays in both French and English on various aspects of Muslim
society in South Asia. The articles have brief summaries in both languages. Of
particular interest are the five articles on pre-colonial Muslim society and
culture, and the articles by Akbar S. Ahmed on Islam, ethnicity and the state
and by Mariam Abu Zahab on the early history of the Pakistan People's Party
from 1967 to 1971.
 Page 37
135
The political theory of the Delhi sultanate (including a translation of Ziauddin
Barani's Fatawa-i Jahandari, circa, 13589 A.D.).
Mohammad Habib, Afsar Umar Salim Khan. Allahabad, India: Kitab Mahal,
[1960]. 172p.
The bulk of this work is a translation into English of Barani's Fatawa-i
Jahandari, which is regarded as the prime political text produced in the
medieval period. A shorter section discusses Barani's thought. A related
discussion of Barani can be found in P. Hardy, Historians of medieval India:
studies in Indo-Muslim historical writing (London: Luzac, 1960). A general work
on medieval Islamic political thought is E. I. J. Rosenthal, Political thought in
medieval Islam: an introductory outline (London: Cambridge University Press,
1958).
136
The Muslims of British India.
Peter Hardy. London: Cambridge University Press, 1972. 306p. 5 maps. bibliog.
(Cambridge South Asian Studies, no. 13).
This masterly work surveys the historical experience of the Muslims of South
Asia from the decline of Mughal power to what the author describes as the
dual partition, the division of India into two sovereign states and of the Muslim
population between them. He outlines the main intellectual trends both among
those exposed to the colonial educational institutions and among those who
remained with the traditional framework of the religious seminary, and
discusses the ways in which Muslims entered politics, for what purposes, and
with what success.
137
Partners in freedom and true Muslims: the political thought of some Muslim
scholars in British India, 19121947.
Peter Hardy. Lund, Sweden: Studentlitteratur, 1971. 62p. (Scandinavian
Institute of Asian Studies Monograph Series, no. 5).
Not all Muslims supported the demand for Pakistan, and this is a study of the
thought of some of those who opposed it. Hardy pays particular attention to
the ideas of Abul Kalam Azad and the ulama who belonged to the Jamiat-ul-
ulama-i-Hind, for example Maulana Madani. He establishes links between their
ideas and those of earlier Muslim thinkers. There is a detailed study of Azad by
Ian Henry Douglas, Abul Kalam Azad: an intellectual and religious biography
(Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1988).
138
Nationalism and communal politics in India, 19161928.
Mushirul Hasan. Delhi: Manohar, 1979. 372p. bibliog.
Originally a doctoral thesis, this is an important study of the subject. Hasan
rejects simplistic notions of a politically homogeneous Muslim community in
India and looks instead for the specific factors that were responsible for the
development of a strong separatist movement in the 20th century. He attaches
particular importance during the period under study to the relationships
between national Hindu and Muslim leaders, although he recognizes that by
the 1940s a grassroots separatist sentiment had developed.
 Page 38
139
The Cambridge History of Islam. vol. 2, The Further Islamic Lands, Islamic
society and civilization, edited by P. M. Holt, Ann K. S.
Lambton, Bernard Lewis. London: Cambridge University Press, 1970. 966p. 6
maps. bibliog.
The Cambridge histories aim at synoptic coverage of their subjects by
acknowledged authorities, and this is no exception. Approximately 120 pages
are devoted to South Asia. There are two chapters by I. H. Qureshi on the pre-
Mughal and Mughal periods, and by S. A. A. Rizvi and Aziz Ahmad on the 18th
century and the colonial periods respectively.
140
The Indian Musalmans: are they bound in conscience to rebel against the
Queen?
William Wilson Hunter. London: Trübner, 1871. 215p.
Written at the request of the viceroy Lord Mayo, Hunter's book marked the
beginning of a new British policy towards the Muslim community (despite
Mayo's assassination shortly afterwards at the hands of a Muslim). Hunter
argued that the considerable disaffection that existed was not entailed by
Islam, although he was critical of many of the ulama, and that a policy of
conciliation would pay considerable dividends. A famous review of Hunter's
book was written by Sayyid Ahmad Khan (Review of Dr. Hunter's Indian
Musalmans, by Syed Ahmad Khan Bahadur, Benares [Varanasi, India], the
author, 1872), which argued strongly for government encouragement to the
Muslim community.
141
A history of the freedom movement (being the story of Muslim struggle for the
freedom of Hind-Pakistan).
Edited by Mahmud Husain, S. Moinul Haq (et al.). Karachi: Pakistan Historical
Society, 195770. 4 vols. (Pakistan Historical Society Publications, nos 15, 19,
56).
Originally under government control, responsibility for this work was later
transferred to the Pakistan Historical Society. Although the study was intended
to go up to 1947, the last volume is incomplete and ends with the Simla
conference of June 1945. Many of Pakistan's leading historians contributed to
what was intended to be the authoritative work on the subject. The standard
of the contributions is variable, however, and the tone often rather bland. The
bibliographical details are somewhat confusing. Although it is divided into four
volumes, volumes two and three are divided into two parts, published at
different times. The first volume was not included in the Pakistan Historical
Society Publications series.
142
Islamic Culture.
Hyderabad, India: Islamic Culture Board, 1927 . quarterly.
This longstanding journal published from Hyderabad, a major centre of Islamic
culture in India, is devoted primarily to Islamic history and culture in South
Asia, although a few articles tackle broader topics.
143
Islamic society and culture: essays in honour of Professor Aziz Ahmad.
Edited by Milton Israel, N. K. Wagle. New Delhi: Manohar, 1983. 383p. bibliog.
Twenty articles on a wide range of topics, but with one exception all concerned
with
 Page 39
Muslims in South Asia. Contributors include many distinguished scholars in the
fields of history, literature and religious studies.
144
Journal of the Pakistan Historical Society.
Karachi: Pakistan Historical Society, 1953 . quarterly.
This carries scholarly articles mainly on South Asian Muslims, but occasionally
covers the pre-Islamic period and Muslim groups elsewhere in the world. Most
articles are in English, with occasional contributions in Urdu.
145
Muslim endowments and society in British India.
Gregory C. Kozlowski. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1985. 211p.
bibliog. (Cambridge South Asian Studies, no. 35).
Despite its apparently narrow focus this is a major contribution to the debate
on the role of Islam among South Asian Muslims. The author's starting point is
the controversy during the colonial period over the legal status of waqfs or
religious endowments. Could they be used, as they had been in the pre-
colonial period, to further private as well as public purposes, or could they, as
the British courts came to insist in the late 19th century, be applied only to
'charitable purposes'? The status quo was restored by legislation in 1913, but
the author argues that the debate between British administrators and Muslim
political leaders had the effect of emphasizing a monolithic and narrow view of
the Muslim community in India which has obscured its diversity both at the
time and subsequently.
146
Growth of Muslim population in medieval India (A.D. 10001800).
K. S. Lal. Delhi: Research Publications, 1973. 272p. bibliog.
A detailed demographic study which discusses the position of Muslims within
the total Indian population. Lal reinforces the generally accepted view that
most Muslims were initially local converts.
147
Aligarh's first generation: Muslim solidarity in British India.
David Lelyveld. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1978. 380p.
3 maps. bibliog.
A richly detailed account of the early years of the college founded at Aligarh in
1875 by Sir Sayyid Ahmad Khan. Lelyveld describes the intellectual and social
1875 by Sir Sayyid Ahmad Khan. Lelyveld describes the intellectual and social
milieu in which the college operated through an examination of sharif culture.
He then examines the education which young men received at the college and
the solidarity created among them as a result of their experiences there. This,
he argues, was the setting for the development of new forms of Muslim self-
awareness.
148
Conversion to Islam.
Edited by Nehemia Levtzion. New York, London: Holmes & Meier, 1979. 272p.
bibliog.
Apart from the general introduction, the main interest is an important article by
P. Hardy, 'Modern European and Muslim explanations of conversion to Islam in
South Asia: a preliminary survey of the literature', p. 6899, which was first
published in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, 1977, no. 2, p. 177206.
Hardy discusses the early uncertainties about the size of the Muslim
population, the conflicting theories based on
 Page 40
immigration and on conversion through sufi influence, and the meanings
attached to these theories in ideological controversy.
149
Moslem nationalism in India and Pakistan.
Hafeez Malik. Washington, DC: Public Affairs Press, 1963. 355p.
Malik offers a general survey of the subject beginning from the earliest period
of Muslim contact with South Asia and ending with the creation of Pakistan. He
examines the various strands, religious and secular, in the Pakistan movement,
and describes its historical development. He also discusses those Muslim
groups and individuals who opposed the Pakistan ideal.
150
Sir Sayyid Ahmad Khan and Muslim modernization in India and Pakistan.
Hafeez Malik. New York: Columbia University Press, 1980. 340p. bibliog.
(Studies in Oriental Culture, no. 15).
A substantial historical study of Sayyid Ahmad Khan, a key figure in Muslim
modernist thought in South Asia. Malik discusses his intellectual background in
the Delhi of the first half of the 19th century and his experiences as an East
India Company official, especially during the 1857 revolt, before describing his
views on education and politics. Purely religious issues are covered more
briefly.
151
Islamic revival in British India: Deoband, 18601900.
Barbara Daly Metcalf. Princeton, New Jersey; Guildford, England: Princeton
University Press, 1982. 386p. 7 maps. bibliog.
The focus of this absorbing if specialized study of Islamic revival in colonial
India is the seminary that was established in 1867 at the small town of
Deoband in northern India and which thereafter provided religious leadership
for many of South Asia's Muslims. Metcalf describes the ulama associated with
Deoband as reformers or renewers but working firmly within the established
religious tradition of Islam compared to the modernists who reached out to
newer sources of inspiration.
152
Moral conduct and authority: the place of adab in South Asian Islam.
Edited by Barbara Metcalf. Berkeley, California; Los Angeles; London: University
of California Press, 1984. 389p.
of California Press, 1984. 389p.
This very valuable collection of papers by leading scholars of South Asian Islam
takes as its theme the concept of adab, an idea which is difficult to translate
but which refers in a very broad sense to proper behaviour. Collectively, the
authors of the papers seek to stress the continuity in South Asia of the basic
ideal of adab, however much it may have been influenced by the Western
world. The papers explore a range of different themes located in a number of
different epochs to bring out the central meanings of the concept. There is
much about sufism, but also about the life of officials, musicians and others.
153
The Khilafat movement: religious symbolism and political mobilization in India.
Gail Minault. New York: Columbia University Press, 1982. 294p. bibliog.
(Studies in Oriental Culture, no. 16).
The Khilafat (Caliphate) movement which was at its peak in the 1919 to 1921
period
 Page 41
was an attempt to bring pressure to bear on the British government not to
destroy the defeated Ottoman empire after the First World War, and in
particular to preserve its ruler's position as the Caliph of the Islamic world. It
was a high point both of pan-Islamic feeling among Indian Muslims and, more
surprisingly, of Hindu-Muslim cooperation. Minault's work, which draws on a
wide range of Urdu and English sources, seeks to locate the movement in the
framework of contemporary developments in India and to examine the multiple
meanings the Caliphate had for different groups in the Muslim community. She
concludes that the most significant aspect of the Khilafat movement was its
symbolic value in the creation of a sense of a distinct Muslim identity within the
broader Indian population. A collection of articles most of which are about the
Khilafat period is Communal and pan-Islamic trends in colonial India (edited by
Mushirul Hasan. Delhi: Manohar, 1981).
154
The Indian Muslims.
M. Mujeeb. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1967. 590p. bibliog.
This is perhaps the most authoritative account of the history of South Asia's
Muslims from the 'nationalist Muslim' point of view. Mujeeb is concerned to
depict the various ways in which over time Muslims have defined themselves
and their distinctive position in Indian society. This takes him into the social,
political, and artistic, as well as the religious fields.
155
The Khilafat movement in India, 19191924.
A. C. Niemeijer. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1972. 263p. bibliog.
(Verhandeligen van het Koninlijk Instituut voor Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde,
no. 62).
This detailed study of the Khilafat movement relies heavily on official
documents and the private papers of British officials. The frame of reference is
general theories of nationalism rather than the specific history of South Asian
Muslims.
156
Historians of India, Pakistan and Ceylon.
Edited by C. H. Philips. London: Oxford University Press, 1961. 504p.
(Historical Writing on the Peoples of Asia, no. 1).
This is a unique survey of the historiography of South Asia which covers both
Western and South Asian writers from the earliest times to the present. Three
chapters are devoted to Muslim historians writing in the Mughal and pre-
Mughal periods. Three chapters cover modern writing on aspects of Muslim
history in South Asia, and there is relevant material in other chapters.
157
The Muslim community of the Indo-Pakistan subcontinent (6101947): a brief
historical analysis.
Ishtiaq Husain Qureshi. Karachi: Ma'aref, 1977. 2nd ed. 385p. bibliog.
First published in 1962, this work has become a standard account by a
Pakistani of his country's history as part of the history of the Muslims of the
subcontinent. Qureshi begins with the first Arab traders and moves on through
the Muslim dynasties and the decline of Muslim political power to the rise of the
Muslim League, the Khilafat movement, described by him as an 'adventure in
altruism', and the Pakistan movement itself.
 Page 42
158
A short history of Pakistan.
Edited by Ishtiaq Husain Qureshi. Karachi: University of Karachi, 1967.4 vols.
maps. bibliog.
Intended for the student and the general reader alike, this work is a synoptic
history which seeks, not always very successfully, to include all the relevant
aspects of South Asian history within the perspective of Pakistan. The first
volume, by A. H. Dani, covers the pre-Muslim period; the second, by M. Kabir,
Muslim rule under the Sultans; the third, by A. Rashid, the Mughal empire; and
the fourth, by a number of scholars, is devoted to 'alien rule and the rise of
Muslim nationalism'.
159
The 'ulama of British India and the hijrat of 1920.
M. Naeem Qureshi. Modern Asian Studies, vol. 13, no. 1 (Feb. 1979), p. 4159.
During the Khilafat movement many Muslims in what is now Pakistan obeyed a
call to migrate from India to Muslim-ruled Afghanistan, only to be forced to
return in disarray. Qureshi describes the episode and discusses the divisions
among the ulama on the appropriateness of the action. He concludes that the
hijrat was an ill-advised move but that it reflected the frustrations of the
period.
160
The wonder that was India. vol. II. A survey of the history and culture of the
Indian sub-continent from the coming of the Muslims to the British conquest.
S. A. A. Rizvi. London: Sidgwick & Jackson, 1987. 416p. 7 maps. bibliog.
Rizvi is a well-known writer on many aspects of medieval Indian Muslim history,
and his account of medieval India draws extensively on his detailed knowledge
of Islamic movements, especially the sufi orders, although it could be faulted
for its lack of attention to areas that were not under Muslim rule. Rizvi portrays
the period as one when Muslims retained their distinctive religious beliefs and
practices but at the same time evolved a culture that was compatible with their
Hindu neighbours. The book is a sequel to the same publisher's The wonder
that was India by A. L. Basham (3rd ed., 1967), which dealt only with the
classical period.
161
Islam and Muslim society in South Asia.
Francis Robinson. Contributions to Indian Sociology (n.s.), vol. 17, no. 2 (July-
Dec. 1983), p. 185203.
This essay argues strongly in favour of a view of Muslim society in South Asia as
defined by its constant tendency to move over time towards patterns of
behaviour and belief that derive from the central core of Islam as transmitted
by the ulama. He is critical of sociological approaches which portray an
equilibrium between 'high Islamic' and custom-centred, more local traditions.
Robinson's article provoked critical rejoinders from Veena Das (ibid., vol. 18,
no. 2 [July-Dec. 1984] p. 293300) and Gail Minault (ibid., p. 3015). His reply
(ibid., vol. 20, no. 1 [Jan.-June 1986], p. 97104) reaffirms his original position.
 Page 43
162
Modern Islam in India: a social analysis.
Wilfred Cantwell Smith. London: Victor Gollancz, 1946. rev. ed. 344p.
Although the author later changed his mind on many of the arguments put
forward in this work, it remains a remarkable attempt at applying the
categories of class analysis to the various ideological tendencies that were
prominent in 20th-century Islam in South Asia. Smith deals first with individual
writers and their followers, for example Sayyid Ahmad Khan, Amir Ali and Iqbal,
and then with political groupings. These latter include a number of the small
radical groups such as the Ahrars and Khaksars as well as the Muslim League,
described by Smith as first a reactionary and then a bourgeois nationalist
movement.
163
The making of Pakistan.
Richard Symonds. London: Faber & Faber, 1950. 2nd ed. 227p. bibliog.
Written very shortly after independence this book retains its value as a brief
survey of the background to Pakistan. It is in two parts. The first, 'The growth
of a nation', sketches in the history of the Muslims of South Asia from the
earliest period. The second, 'The creation of a state' deals with partition and
then describes the constituent parts of the new country and the initial lines of
government policy. There is an appendix by Ahmed Ali on the culture of
Pakistan.
164
Political identity in South Asia.
Edited by David Taylor, Malcolm Yapp. London: Curzon Press; Atlantic
Highlands, New Jersey: Humanities Press, 1979. 266p.
The main interest of this work from the Pakistan perspective is in the two
articles by Paul Brass and Francis Robinson where the issues raised by Brass in
his Language, religion and politics in North India (q.v.) are debated in the
specific context of the Muslim population of India. The major point at stake is
the relative weight to be assigned to political competition compared to religious
ideas in the emergence of Muslim separatism.
165
The political triangle in India 18581924.
Syed Razi Wasti. Lahore: People's Publishing House, 1976. 240p.
This is a collection of the author's previously published articles, mainly in
Pakistani journals, on the political history of India's Muslims in the period from
immediately after the 1857 revolt to the Khilafat movement. Topics include
British policy towards the Muslims and Muslim political organizations, especially
the establishment of the Muslim League in 1906.
166
Rise of Muslims in Indian politics: an analysis of developments from 1885 to
1906.
Rafiq Zakaria, foreword by Y. B. Chavan. Bombay: Somaiya, 1970. 427p.
bibliog.
Originally a thesis, this is a useful study of the emergence of an all-India
Muslim political leadership in the years up to the founding of the Muslim
League in 1906. Zakaria traces the intellectual background, especially in the
shape of the Aligarh movement, and discusses the immediate problems facing
the Muslim community at
 Page 44
that time. The focus is very much on figures like Sir Sayyid Ahmad Khan and
others who were beginning to articulate the interests of the Muslim élite.
Zakaria is sympathetic to the dilemmas they faced but regrets their lack of
vision which he sees as having laid the foundations for Muslim separatism.
An historical atlas of Islam.
See item no. 38.
Atlas of the Islamic world since 1500.
See item no. 44.
Islamic modernism in India and Pakistan 18571964.
See item no. 347.
Islamic Studies.
See item no. 366.
The rose and the rock: mystical and rational elements in the intellectual history
of South Asian Islam.
See item no. 368.
Essays on Islamic civilization presented to Niyazi Berkes.
See item no. 369.
South Asian intellectuals and social change: a study of the role of vernacular-
speaking intelligentsia.
See item no. 397.
Islam in the political process.
See item no. 515.
Punjab Muslim press and the Muslim world, 18881911.
See item no. 772.
Constituent Provinces of Pakistan
167
From martial law to martial law: politics in the Punjab, 19191958.
Syed Nur Ahmad. Edited by Craig Baxter, translated by Mahmud Ali. Boulder,
Colorado; London: Westview Press, 1985.455p. bibliog.
The author of this work, originally written in Urdu, was a journalist and civil
servant who had been close to many of the leading political figures of the
Punjab in the 20th century. It is on the one hand a rather routine account of
political developments at the all-India and later all-Pakistan level but on the
other a more interesting and valuable review of events and personalities in the
Punjab, especially the leading landlord politicians. The editor has added an
extensive and useful set of notes to the text, although the introduction itself is
rather brief.
 Page 45
168
Diary and notes of Mian Fazl-i-Husain.
Edited by Waheed Ahmad. Lahore: Research Society of Pakistan, 1977. 363p).
(Publication no. 47).
The first part of this work consists of the diary kept by Sir Fazl-i-Husain from
1930 to his death in 1936, and the second of notes on various issues prepared
for his colleagues at the time when he was a member of the viceroy's executive
council. The diary deals with personal as well as political matters. Ahmad also
produced an edition of Fazl-i-Husain's letters: Letters of Mian Fazl-i-Husain
(Lahore: Research Society of Pakistan, 1976 [Publication no. 39]).
169
British India's northern frontier 186595: a study in imperial policy.
G. J. Alder. London: Longmans, 1963. 392p. 3 maps. bibliog. (Imperial Studies
Series, no. 25).
This is a careful and detailed study of the northern rather than the north-west
frontier of India, stretching from the Pamirs to the eastern end of the
Karakoram range, and of the attempts during the 19th century to control the
region by both Russians and British. Eventually, after many alarms and
excursions involving soldiers, diplomats and explorers, an agreement was
signed in 1895 which settled the spheres of influence of the two sides. Alder
also discusses the involvement of China in the area, as well as relevant aspects
of the history of Afghanistan.
170
The Punjab under imperialism, 18851947.
Imran Ali. Princeton, New Jersey; Guildford, England: Princeton University
Press, 1988. 264p. bibliog. 2 maps.
Ali's subject is the expansion of canal irrigation in the Punjab in the late 19th
century, in particular how it was that despite the major investment that the
canals represented the Punjab as a whole remained in most respects
undeveloped and stagnant. He traces the development of the canal system, its
management, and the way the British used it to tie the landed élite into
support for colonial rule.
171
Relations between the Muslim League and the Panjab National Unionist Party,
19351947.
Imran Ali. South Asia, no. 6 (Dec. 1976), p. 51-65.
The focus of this detailed article is the domination of Punjab politics in this
period by the landed interest. Its support was given first to the Unionist Party
and then switched to the Muslim League to serve purely provincial interests.
172
The Chachnama, an ancient history of Sind.
Ali Kufi, translated by Mirza Kalichbeg Fredunbeg. Lahore: Vanguard Books,
1985. 207p. (Historical Reprints, no. 2).
This important source for the history of Sindh was written in the 13th century
by one Ali, originally from Syria but settled in India. The theme of the book is
the conquest of Sindh by the Arabs in the 8th century. Originally written in
Arabic, it was then translated into Persian. The Fredunbeg translation into
English was first published in 1900. There is an article on the historical value of
the Chachnama in Yohanan Friedmann (ed.), Islam in Asia, vol. 1. South Asia
(q.v.).
 Page 46
173
N.-W.F.P. administration under British rule, 19011919.
Lal Baha. Islamabad: National Commission on Historical and Cultural Research,
1978. 297p. 3 maps. bibliog. (Historical Studies (Muslim India) Series, no. 2).
This is a detailed account of its subject based on government records, private
papers and other material. The author discusses in turn the formation of the
province out of the Punjab in 1901, relations with the frontier tribes, and
various aspects of administration.
174
The problem of ''greater Baluchistan": a study of Baluch nationalism.
I. Baloch. Stuttgart, West Germany: Steiner Verlag Wiesbaden, 1987. 299p. 4
maps. bibliog. (Beiträge zur Südasienforschung Südasien-Institut Universität
Heidelberg, vol. 116).
Originally a thesis, this work includes a considerable volume of general material
on the Baluch peoples and their culture, before dealing with Baluchistan in the
19th and 20th centuries up to the time of independence and the failure of the
Khanate of Kalat to assert an independent status in 194748. The author
argues that Baluchi nationalism has been hindered in the past by the lack of a
modern social basis but that this is changing. Extensive appendices include a
number of documents relevant to the position of Kalat in 1947.
175
Searchlights on Baloches and Balochistan.
Mir Khuda Baksh Bijarani Marri Baloch. Karachi: Royal Book Company, 1974.
387p. maps. bibliog.
A general history and survey of the Baluch people by a distinguished Baloch
jurist. While proud of his people's history, the author does not gloss over
internal feuding and strife.
176
Inside Baluchistan: a political autobiography of His Highness Baiglar Baigi,
Khan-e-Azam XIII.
Mir Ahmad Yar Khan Baluch. Karachi: Royal Book Company, 1975. 352p.
bibliog.
The author was ruler of Kalat, the major princely state of the Baluchistan area,
from 1933 until March 1948 and thereafter played a controversial role in
Pakistan politics. The first half of the main text of this book summarizes Baluch
history up to 1933. The remainder is an attempt to justify the author's actions
in 1947 and 1948 in delaying the merger of his state with Pakistan and to
demonstrate his loyalty to the country. He also criticizes the actions of
successive rulers of Pakistan up to 1971. The book also includes the text of
nineteen important documents from the initial agreement between Kalat and
the British in 1839 to the correspondence between the author and Jinnah at
the time of independence. An alternative account of the events described by
Ahmad Yar Khan can be found in W. A. Wilcox, Pakistan: the consolidation of a
nation (q.v.).
 Page 47
177
Lahore past and present (being an account of Lahore compiled from original
sources).
Muhammad Baqir. Lahore: Panjab University Press, 1952. 556p. map. bibliog.
(Panjab University Oriental Publication, no. 34).
A scholarly and immensely detailed history of Lahore from its origin at some
point in the first millennium AD to its height under the Mughals and thence to
the 20th century. The author also includes descriptions of all the main mosques
and other public buildings of the city, as well as lists of the rulers of Lahore and
other relevant information.
178
The Punjab Alienation of Land Bill of 1900.
Norman G. Barrier. Durham, North Carolina: Duke University, 1966. 125p.
bibliog. (Monograph and Occasional Paper Series, no. 2).
This is a study of a colonial piece of legislation which succeeded in setting the
political agenda for the whole period up to independence by giving special
protection in matters of land ownership to so-called agricultural tribes and
castes. Barrier discusses the complex policy processes of the government,
which, he argues, were not at all monolithic, and the effect of the passage of
the Bill on the balance of political forces in the province. A major contribution
to the debate in government circles was published as Musalmans and
moneylenders by S. S. Thorburn (q.v.).
179
Punjab history in printed British documents: a bibliographic guide to
parliamentary papers and select, nonserial publications, 18431947.
N. Gerald Barrier. Columbia, Missouri: University of Missouri Press, 1969. 108p.
(University of Missouri Studies, vol. 50).
Includes 488 items on Punjab history in the colonial period and is a good guide
to the wealth of material contained in printed documents.
180
The wealth and welfare of the Punjab.
H. Calvert. Lahore: Civil & Military Gazette, 1936. 2nd ed. 421p.
First published in 1922, this is a good example of the colonial scholar-
administrator at work. The author is primarily concerned with agriculture and
the means by which it can be developed in such a way as to ensure stable
prosperity. He is particularly concerned to argue the case for free trade rather
than the protectionism then being demanded by industrial interests in India.
The book is useful both for the data that it provides and as an example of
colonial thinking on issues of economic development.
181
Peshawar: historic city of the frontier.
Ahmad Hasan Dani. Peshawar: Khyber Mail Press, 1969. 253p. 3 maps.
The author, a distinguished archaeologist, here outlines the history of
Peshawar from its earliest origins in the Kushan period to after independence.
The major emphasis is on the people who lived in and around the city rather
than on the physical fabric, but there are two chapters which describe the
historic monuments of Peshawar city and the Peshawar valley respectively.
 Page 48
182
The problem of the North-West Frontier, 18901908, with a survey of policy
since 1849.
C. Collin Davies. London: Cambridge University Press, 1932. 220p. 3 maps.
bibliog.
Based on official records, this work remains the starting point for later
discussions of the subject. Davies reviews the history of British policy in the
light of local and imperial considerations and notes that it was constantly in
flux. He focuses in particular on the Curzon years, when the North-West
Frontier Province was established and the 20th-century approach to the tribal
areas was laid down.
183
Punjab settlement manual.
J. M. Douie. Delhi: Daya Publishing House, 1985. 246p.
This apparently highly technical work on the way in which the British assessed
(settled) and collected land revenue can usefully be read by anyone with a
serious interest in the Punjab's history. It is divided into three parts. The first is
a review of settlement policy from the annexation in 1849 until the time the
work was written at the end of the 19th century. The second and third
examine respectively the compilation of the 'record of rights', a key element in
the British system, and the assessment of revenue itself. The edition cited here
is reprinted from the first edition of 1899, although the work was several times
reissued in updated form, most recently as the 4th edition in 1930. Douie was
also the author of The Panjab, North-west Frontier Province and Kashmir
(London: Cambridge University Press, 1916 [Provincial Geography of India]).
184
The Punjab tradition: influence and authority in nineteenth-century India.
P. H. M. van den Dungen. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1972. 366p. map.
bibliog.
The Punjab, both because it was the last province to be incorporated into
British India and because of its military and strategic significance, was
perceived by the British as needing special treatment. The 'Punjab tradition'
that thus developed emphasized the importance of protecting the position of
the rural population and excluding outside forces that might bring in subversive
ideas. Van den Dungen's thorough study discusses in detail the emergence of
official thinking on these issues, especially in the context of land ownership.
185
A glance at Sind before Napier or dry leaves from young Egypt.
E. B. Eastwick, introduction by H. T. Lambrick. Karachi: Oxford University
Press, 1973. 377p. map. (Oxford in Asia Historical Reprints).
This was originally published in 1849 as Dry leaves from young Egypt or a
glance at Sindh before Napier. The author was a government official posted in
Sindh before its annexation by Napier in 1843. His account of his travels
between 1839 and 1841 is delightful in its own right and is also of substantial
historical interest. Eastwick was a strong proponent of the former rulers of
Sindh, the mirs, and felt strongly that they had been cheated and duped by
the British.
 Page 49
186
A bibliography of economic literature relating to the Punjab.
Cyril P. K. Fazal. Lahore: Board of Economic Inquiry Punjab, 1941. 112p.
(Board of Economic Inquiry Punjab, publication no. 73).
Most of the items included are government publications of one sort or another,
ranging from proceedings of official commissions and annual statistical
publications to leaflets of the Punjab Agricultural Department, although there
are also lists of articles and books on aspects of rural development related to
the Punjab. The entries are unnumbered and unannotated, but they are
arranged by subject and there are author and subject indexes. The same
author compiled Guide to Punjab government reports and statistics, 1939
(Board of Economic Inquiry Punjab, publication no. 10).
187
Remarks on Baluchi history.
Richard N. Frye. Central Asiatic Journal, vol. 6 (1961), p. 4450.
A specialist article which discusses the linguistic and other evidence bearing on
the origins of the Baluch people. The author considers they may well have
come in the 11th and 12th centuries from the desert areas of Iran.
188
The peoples of Pakistan: an ethnic history.
Y. V. Gankovsky, translated by Igor Gavrilov. Moscow: 'Nauka' Publishing
House, 1971. 247p. bibliog.
Using a Marxist categorization of history into slave-owning, feudal and
bourgeois periods, Gankovsky looks at the emergence and development of each
of Pakistan's main ethnic groups, viz. Punjabis, Sindhis, Baluch and Pukhtuns
(and also Bengalis), up to the 20th century. Religion and language were, he
argues, the main factors shaping the consciousness of the various groups as,
with the emergence of capitalist relations of production, ethnic consciousness
evolved into national (in a specifically Marxist sense) consciousness.
189
Empire and nation: Punjab and the making of Pakistan.
David Gilmartin. London: I. B. Tauris, 1988. 258p. 2 maps. bibliog.
This important study looks at the tension within the Punjab in the 20th century
between the politics of colonialism, dominated by landlords and other
intermediaries between state and society, and the new ideal of Muslim
community embodied in the demand for Pakistan. Although in 1947 the Muslim
League gained an apparent victory over the forces of localism, it was not able
to consolidate it. Gilmartin pays special attention to the role of the pirs,
religious leaders but also landlords in their own right. In a separate article he
has discussed in more detail the role they played in the critical elections of
1946: 'Religious leadership and the Pakistan movement in the Punjab', Modern
Asian Studies, vol. 13, no. 3 (July 1979), p. 485517.
190
"Old Lahore": reminiscences of a resident.
H. R. Goulding, with a historical and descriptive account by T. H. Thornton.
Lahore: Universal Books, [1976]. 94p. 2 maps.
Published originally in book form in 1924, Goulding first wrote these
reminiscences as a series of articles for the Civil and Military Gazette. Most of
the work is a mixture of firsthand experience of the city in the late 19th century
and snippets of information gathered from many different sources on the
earlier history of Lahore. The second part of the book, by Thornton, was
published as a pamphlet in 1860 and reviews the history of the city from its
origins to the British conquest.
 Page 50
191
European adventurers of northern India, 1785 to 1849.
C. Grey, edited by H. L. O. Garrett. Lahore: Superintendent, Government
Printing, 1929. 361p. bibliog.
The subjects of this book are the motley crew of Europeans who sought their
fortunes in the Punjab and Afghanistan in the late 18th and the first part of the
19th centuries. Some, like George Thomas, were adventurers pure and simple
who exploited the disturbed conditions to carve out temporary fiefdoms for
themselves. Others, like the famous or notorious Avitabile, were soldiers who
were recruited into the army of Ranjit Singh. Most of the material is derived
from Punjab government records or from previously published works. The book
is popular in tone, although it naturally reflects the prejudices of the time it
was written.
192
Chiefs and families of note in the Punjab.
Lepel H. Griffin, Charles Francis Massey, revised and corrected by W. I. Conran,
H. D. Craik. Lahore: Government of the Punjab, 1909. 2 vols.
This large work was the final version of a series of British efforts, first begun in
the 1860s, to put in writing the history of those prominent social figures whom
they wished to make their loyal allies in the Punjab. Each prominent landlord
family is given a chapter which begins with a genealogical table and goes on to
describe the family history and fortunes. There are frequent comments on the
moral qualities of individuals. The work has a period flavour and can be seen as
a typical product of colonial rule, but it also contains some valuable source
material.
193
Sources on Punjab history.
Edited by W. Eric Gustafson, Kenneth W. Jones. Delhi: Manohar Book Service,
1975. 454p.
As a whole this volume seeks to draw the attention of scholars to under-utilized
sources for Punjab history, especially non-English language sources. Of special
interest here are the chapters on Ahmadiyah history by Spencer Lavan, and on
the printed literature of the Punjabi Muslims, 18601900, by Edward Churchill,
although there are also relevant items in other chapters.
194
A forgotten chapter of Indian history as described in the memoirs of Seth
Naomul Hotchand, C.S.I., of Karachi, 18041878.
Naomul Hotchand, translated by Alumal Trikamdas Bhojwani, edited by Evan
M. James, introduction by Hamida Khuhro. Karachi: Oxford University Press,
1982. 222p. (Oxford in Asia Historical Reprints).
Seth Naomul Hotchand was an agent of the British both before and after the
conquest of Sindh in 1843 and invaluable to them in many ways. These
memoirs (first published in 1915) are a significant historical source to be set
alongside the comparable works of Masson (q.v.) and others.
 Page 51
195
Mizh: a monograph on government's relations with the Mahsud tribe.
Evelyn Howell, foreword by Akbar S. Ahmed. Karachi: Oxford University Press,
1979. 119p. map. (Oxford in Asia Historical Reprints).
The Mahsuds are one of the most important of the Pukhtun tribal groups in the
unadministered areas on the North-West Frontier, and their conflicts with the
British formed a major chapter in frontier history. This short book, written
originally for British officials and published in 1931, contains a wealth of
historical detail that illuminates both British and tribal history. It is also, in the
words of Akbar S. Ahmed, 'a masterly analysis of tribal structure and
organization'.
196
British relations with Sind, 17991843: an anatomy of imperialism.
Robert A. Huttenback. Berkeley, California; Los Angeles: University of California
Press, 1962. 161p. map. bibliog.
This academic study reviews events in Sindh in the decades up to and
including annexation in 1843 and explores the paradox of its conquest at a
time when in general British policy was in a non-expansionist phase.
Huttenback concludes that it can be explained in terms of commercial and
security considerations as interpreted by the ambitious figure of Sir Charles
Napier.
197
Thirty seconds at Quetta.
Robert Jackson. London: Evans Brothers, 1960. 248p. map.
A popular account of the devastating earthquake which almost completely
destroyed the city of Quetta, capital of Baluchistan, on 31 May 1935 and in
which 30,000 people died. The major emphasis of the book is on the part
played in the rescue work by the British troops quartered in the largely
unaffected cantonment outside the city.
198
India, Pakistan or Pakhtunistan: the nationalist movements in the North-West
Frontier Province, 193747.
Erland Jansson. Uppsala: Acta Universitatis Upsaliensis (distributed by Almqvist
& Wiksell, Stockholm), 1981. 283p. 2 maps. bibliog. (Studia Historica
Upsaliensia, no. 119).
This is a doctoral dissertation which covers much the same ground as S.
Rittenberg's Ethnicity, nationalism and the Pakhtuns: the independence
movement in India's North-West Frontier Province (q.v.) and uses many of the
same sources. The focus, however, is more specifically on the 193747 period
and Jansson differs to some extent from Rittenberg in the relatively lesser
weight he assigns to cultural aspects of Pukhtun identity.
199
Pakistan movement in Baluchistan.
Inamul Haq Kausar. [n.p., n.d.]. 69p.
A brochure which gives a brief factual account of the main events and
personalities in Baluchistan during the years immediately preceding partition.
The role of Jinnah is given special prominence. It should be noted, however,
that the Pakistan movement as such made very little impact in Baluchistan
before 1947.
 Page 52
200
Multan: history and architecture.
Ahmad Nabi Khan. Islamabad: Islamic University, Institute of Islamic History,
Culture and Civilization, 1983. 390p. maps. bibliog. (A Fifteenth Century Hijra
Publication).
Multan, the principal city of southern Punjab, was also a major centre of sufi
activity in the 13th and 14th centuries AD. The tombs of the saints form a
major chapter in the history of Indo-Islamic architecture. The first part of this
volume is a scholarly study of Multan's history, the second of its architecture,
illustrated with plans of the buildings and with black and white and colour
photographs.
201
Sind through the centuries: proceedings of an international seminar held in
Karachi in Spring 1975 by the Department of Culture, Government of Sind.
Hamida Khuhro. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1981. 301p.
This volume contains 32 contributions from most of the leading scholars on
Sindh in Pakistan and abroad. They cover all periods of Sindhi history and
aspects of Sindhi culture.
202
Sind before the Muslim conquest.
H. T. Lambrick. Hyderabad: Sindhi Adabi Board, 1973 (distributed by Oxford
University Press, Pakistan). 218p. 4 maps. (History of Sind Series, vol. 2).
A review by the leading foreign scholar of the history of Sindh from the Indus
civilization period to the downfall of the Brahman dynasty at the hands of
Muslim invaders in 712 AD. The work is based on a full review of all the
relevant archaeological and historical sources, but for large parts of the period
even as late as the 6th century evidence is altogether lacking. For much of the
period Sindh belonged as much to the Middle East as to South Asia.
203
Sir Charles Napier and Sind.
H. T. Lambrick. Oxford, England: Clarendon Press, 1952. 402p. 2 maps.
bibliog.
The standard modern account of the British officer who conquered Sindh from
the Talpur mirs in 1843 and established the earliest British administration
there. Lambrick's work gives a brief account of Sindh before and after the
conquest, but concentrates on the 184247 period when Napier was in Sindh.
Napier's activities attracted criticism in England (e.g. E. B. Eastwick, A glance
at Sind before Napier [q.v.]) which Lambrick assesses.
204
The terrorist.
Translated and edited by H. T. Lambrick. London: Ernest Benn, 1972. 246p. 2
maps.
H. T. Lambrick was a senior official concerned with the repression of the
rebellion launched in 1942 by the Hurs, followers of a hereditary saint in the
desert areas of Sindh. The Sindhi text he has translated is a composite of a
number of documents which came into his hands after the end of the revolt
and is in the form of an autobiography of an otherwise unknown individual who
took part in many attacks on government forces and on others. The translation
is lively and gives an insight into the
 Page 53
dynamics of the revolt and of the ties that bind the disciples of a saint to him,
although very little background information on the rebellion is provided.
205
Hindu-Muslim riots in the British Punjab (18491900).
Ikram Ali Malik. Lahore: Gosha-i-Adab, 1984. 50p.
A short monograph which uses contemporary newspapers and government
records to discuss the factors involved in the communal riots which became
increasingly frequent in this period. Malik sees them as primarily an urban
phenomenon born of political competition between the main communities.
206
The Sindh story.
K. R. Malkani. New Delhi: Allied, 1984. 192p. map. bibliog.
A Sindhi Hindu's view of Sindhi history. The book gives considerable emphasis
to the Hindu contribution to Sindh's history and interprets the latter in terms of
a specifically Sindhi, non-religious identity. The book is very critical of the way
Sindh was dealt with at the time of partition.
207
The Panjab Past and Present.
Patiala, India: Punjabi University, 1967 . biannual.
Produced from India and with a bias towards Indian, especially Sikh subjects,
this journal nevertheless frequently carries articles of relevance to Pakistani
Punjab both in the modern and premodern periods.
208
Personal observations on Sindh: the manners and customs of its inhabitants
and its productive capabilities.
T. Postans. Karachi: Indus, 1973. 402p. map.
Originally published in 1843, this is a review by one of the officials involved of
the general conditions and situation of Sindh at the time of the British
conquest. Postans was concerned to describe the area's history and geography
in order to assess the prospects of British commerce.
209
Ethnicity, nationalism and the Pakhtuns: the independence movement in
India's North-West Frontier Province.
S. A. Rittenberg. Durham, North Carolina: Carolina Academic Press, 1988.
286p. 2 maps. bibliog.
The most complete study so far of the 20th-century dominance of the politics
of the NWFP by the Pukhtuns. The author sees the primary focus of Pukhtun
political life as residing in their strongly developed sense of their own ethnic
identity and character. Although this also leads to intense internal division, it
gives the Pukhtun population the ability to dominate their own area and to
resist outside encroachments except on their own terms. For a brief moment at
the time of independence this led to a decision to join Pakistan. Before and
after, however, the main theme was the maintenance of local autonomy.
Although the author does not take his account beyond 1947, his work is of
considerable relevance to the post-independence situation.
 Page 54
210
Chitral: the story of a minor siege.
George S. Robertson, introduction by M. E. Yapp. Karachi: Oxford University
Press, 1977. 363p. map. (Oxford in Asia Historical Reprints).
The siege of Chitral in 1895 was an episode in the constant manoeuvrings by
the British to protect their frontiers against the possibility of Russian
subversion. By the end of the 19th century Dardistan, the remote area in the
north of what is now Pakistan, had acquired increased importance and ill-
judged decisions by British officials led to the siege of a small British force in
Chitral by local tribesmen. A successful resistance by the British inscribed the
episode in imperial history, and Robertson's own account, originally published
in 1898, has become, in the words of the introduction, 'a minor classic of the
imperial frontier'. The historical background is covered at greater length by G.
J. Alder in British India's northern frontier 186595: a study in imperial policy
(q.v.).
211
Makli hill: a center of Islamic culture in Sindh.
Annemarie Schimmel. Karachi: University of Karachi, Institute of Central and
West Asian Studies, 1983. 45p. (First Syed Hussamuddin Rashdi Memorial
Lecture).
Makli hill, near the town of Thatta, is a religious centre of great importance
where the tombs of many saints are located. Schimmel places her account of
these shrines and saints against a broader canvas of Sindhi cultural history.
212
North-West Frontier: people and events 18391947.
Arthur Swinson. London: Hutchinson, 1967. 354p. 4 maps. bibliog.
A popular history of the Frontier, mainly from the British perspective. The body
of the work begins with the prelude to the first Afghan war in 1839 and ends a
century or so later with independence, although there are brief introductory
and concluding chapters. Much of the book deals in a racy way with the
military side of things.
213
Provincial politics and the Pakistan movement: the growth of the Muslim
League in north-west and north-east India, 193747.
Ian Talbot. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1988. 155p. bibliog.
This is a brief survey of the provinces excluding Baluchistan that became
Pakistan in 1947. Talbot looks at the interplay of popular enthusiasm for Islam
and Islamic brotherhood and factional conflicts among the élite. The Muslim
League used both in its final push for Pakistan but failed, the author argues, to
build an adequate organization to sustain itself beyond 1947. Talbot has also
written a detailed study of the Punjab, focusing especially on the role of the
Unionist Party, Punjab and the Raj, 18491947 (Delhi: Manohar, 1988).
214
Musalmans and money-lenders in the Punjab.
S. S. Thorburn. Delhi: Mittal, 1983. 198p.
First published in 1886, this is a passionate plea by a government official for
measures to protect the Muslim agriculturists of the Punjab from becoming
serfs to the Hindu moneylenders (by the side of whom, Thorburn says, Shylock
was a gentleman). Although many of Thorburn's assertions would no longer be
accepted by scholars, his
 Page 55
book initiated the debate which eventually resulted in the 1901 Alienation of
Land Act (covered by Barrier's book [q.v.]).
215
Strategies of British India: Britain, Iran and Afghanistan, 17981850.
M. E. Yapp. Oxford, England: Clarendon Press, 1980. 682p. 8 maps. bibliog.
This important and meticulously researched study covers the early 19th-
century period in British imperial policy before the establishment of a definite
north-west frontier, although the Russian factor already loomed large. Towards
the end of it the British annexed both Sindh and the Punjab and began to take
a direct interest in Baluchistan.
The Pathans 550 BC AD 1957.
See item no. 5.
Sind: a general introduction.
See item no. 10.
Lords of the Khyber: the story of the North-West Frontier.
See item no. 21.
Scinde; or the unhappy valley.
See item no. 55.
Narrative of a journey to Kalat.
See item no. 67.
Sailors and the crowd: popular protest in Karachi, 1946.
See item no. 236.
Facts are facts: the untold story of India's partition.
See item no. 238.
Divide and quit.
See item no. 241.
Pakistan: the consolidation of a nation.
See item no. 261.
Fazl-i-Husain: a political biography.
See item no. 270.
Sikandar Hayat Khan (18921942): a political biography.
Sikandar Hayat Khan (18921942): a political biography.
See item no. 277.
India as I knew it, 18851925.
See item no. 280.
Father and daughter: a political autobiography.
See item no. 284.
Abdul Ghaffar Khan: faith is a battle.
See item no. 288.
Colonel Sir Robert Sandeman: his life and work on our Indian frontier. A
 Page 56
memoir, with selections from his correspondence and official writings.
See item no. 289.
Rusticus loquitur, or the old light and the new in the Punjab village.
See item no. 407.
Focus on Baluchistan and Pushtoon question.
See item no. 489.
Bugles and a tiger: a personal adventure.
See item no. 551.
Pakistan Movement
216
Pakistan or the partition of India.
B. R. Ambedkar. Bombay: Thacker & Co., 1946. 3rd ed. 481p. 3 maps.
Dr Ambedkar was a distinguished constitutional lawyer as well as the
preeminent figure of his time from India's untouchable or scheduled castes. As
a political leader who was in some ways on the edge of both Hindu society as
well as mainstream Congress politics, he was in a special position to analyse
the demands being put forward by the Muslim League and possible ways in
which they could be met without necessarily involving a permanent partition.
In this major work he makes a sustained effort to understand the aspirations of
the Muslim population. Although constitutional arrangements matter, he
argues, a united state has to be based on a shared sense of national identity.
If that cannot be achieved, he says, it would be better for a division to take
place.
217
The historical background of Pakistan 18571947: an annotated digest of
source material.
K. K. Aziz. Karachi: Pakistan Institute of International Affairs, 1970. 626p.
This is a listing of over 9,000 printed items relating to the subject, with brief
annotations which serve to indicate the subject of the entry. Despite the
number of entries, the work is not comprehensive, but its strength lies in its
extensive coverage of newspaper and periodical articles from the period under
study.
218
The making of Pakistan: a study in nationalism.
K. K. Aziz. London: Chatto & Windus, 1967. 223p. bibliog.
An essentially historical approach to the rise of Muslim nationalism in India. The
author sees feelings of nationalist sentiment as the product of a range of
historical, religious and cultural factors. To an extent, therefore, Muslim
nationalism in South Asia was a contingent development in that it was a
subjective state of mind. Once it began to develop, however, it thrived on the
opposition it encountered from the Indian National Congress.
 Page 57
219
Language, religion and politics in North India.
Paul R. Brass. London: Cambridge University Press, 1974. 467p. maps. bibliog.
This major contribution to the theoretical debate on nationalism and nationality
formation uses as one of its principal case-studies the emergence among north
Indian Muslims of the demand for Pakistan. Brass stresses throughout the work
the importance of political and social change in creating political expressions of
religious and linguistic differences. This thesis is challenged in the specific case
of South Asian Islam by Francis Robinson in D. Taylor and M. Yapp (eds),
Political Identity in South Asia (q.v.).
220
Muslim separatism in India: a brief survey 18581947.
Abdul Hamid. Lahore: Oxford University Press, 1967. 263p. bibliog.
A general narrative by a Pakistani scholar of the emergence of the Pakistan
movement which sees it as the product of a complex of factors, but principally
the Muslim urge for freedom. The author examines the work of Sayyid Ahmad
Khan and the impact of the partition of Bengal before telling the story of the
Khilafat movement and then the rise of the Muslim League.
221
Letters of Iqbal to Jinnah: a collection of Iqbal's letters to the Qaid-i-Azam
conveying his views on the political future of Muslim India.
Muhammad Iqbal, with foreword by M. A. Jinnah. Lahore: Sh. Muhammad
Ashraf, 1942. 32p.
These letters sent by Iqbal between May 1936 and November 1937, shortly
before his death, give his views on the immediate political situation in India,
and express his belief in the importance of separate Muslim states in those
areas where they were in a majority. Unfortunately, Jinnah's replies have not
been preserved. The two most important letters can also be found in the
collection of Jinnah's correspondence edited by S. S. Pirzada, Quaid-e-Azam
Jinnah's correspondence (q.v.).
222
The sole spokesman: Jinnah, the Muslim League and the demand for Pakistan.
Ayesha Jalal. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press, 1985. 310p. 6
maps. bibliog. (Cambridge South Asian Studies, no. 31).
A major reassessment of Jinnah's aims that has evoked strong criticism in some
quarters in Pakistan. Jalal argues on the basis of close scrutiny of Jinnah's
actions and a search for the 'inwardness' of his strategy that Jinnah's real aim
was to preserve some form of unity for the whole subcontinent while
guaranteeing Muslim access to political power and that he was outmanoeuvred
in the end-game of empire by an alliance of Congress leaders and the last
viceroy, Mountbatten.
223
Iqbal, Jinnah, and Pakistan: the vision and the reality.
Edited by C. M. Naim. Syracuse, New York: Syracuse University, Maxwell School
of Citizenship and Public Affairs, 1979. 216p. (Foreign and Comparative
Studies/South Asian Series, no. 5).
This volume brings together six useful studies of Iqbal and Jinnah, some of
which look at them separately, others jointly. Those by Saleem Qureshi,
Manzooruddin Ahmed, Sheila McDonough, Barbara Metcalf, and Lawrence
Ziring (whose contribution deals
 Page 58
primarily with the post-independence situation), were originally presented to a
conference in 1977 to mark the birth centenaries; that by Anwar H. Syed was
added later.
224
Prelude to partition: the Indian Muslims and the imperial system of control
19201932.
David Page. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1982. 288p. 3 maps. bibliog.
This is a careful study by a historian of the political background in the 1920s,
especially in north India, against which Jinnah and the Muslim League
eventually came to articulate the demand for Pakistan. Page is particularly
concerned with the effect on the structure of politics of the introduction of
provincial autonomy under the Government of India Act of 1919. It was the
working of these reforms, he argues, which alienated many Muslims from the
Congress and heightened communal tensions. They also led to the
development of important political interests in the Punjab, whose support had
to be obtained before Pakistan could become a reality.
225
The collected works of Quaid-e-Azam Mohammad Ali Jinnah.
Edited by Syed Sharifuddin Pirzada. Karachi: East and West Publishing
Company, 1984. In progress.
Although Jinnah is revered as Pakistan's founder, he has not been as well
served by Pakistan's historians and archivists as, for example, Mahatma Gandhi
has been in India. Although his private papers are held by the Pakistan
government and are available to scholars, there are no plans to publish them.
What is included in these volumes are Jinnah's public pronouncements. The
first three volumes, which run from his first entry into public life in 1906 up to
his participation in the first Round Table Conference in London in 1930, include
in particular his speeches as a leading member of the Central Legislative
Assembly but also other public speeches and letters to the press. Each volume
has a historical introduction. When complete, the project will be an important
source of information for Jinnah's political career.
226
Foundations of Pakistan: All-India Muslim League documents, 19061947.
Edited by Syed Sharifuddin Pirzada. Karachi; Dacca: National Publishing House,
1981, 1982. 2 vols.
These volumes bring together the previously difficult to find resolutions and
addresses at the annual sessions of the Muslim League from its foundation in
1906 until independence in 1947. For certain years the League was split and
both factions' meetings are covered. The volumes also include documentation
for League Council meetings in the critical years immediately before
independence and key statements of Jinnah. Vol. 1 covers the period 190642,
vol. 2 the remainder.
227
Quaid-e-Azam Jinnah's correspondence.
Edited by Syed Sharifuddin Pirzada. Karachi: East and West Publishing
Company, 1977. 3rd rev. and enlarged ed. 425p.
This collection aims at coverage of all Jinnah's important political
correspondence between 1918 and his death in 1948. There are facsimiles of a
few items.
 Page 59
228
Separatism among Indian Muslims: the politics of the United Provinces'
Muslims, 18601923.
Francis Robinson. London: Cambridge University Press, 1974. 469p. 4 maps.
bibliog. (Cambridge South Asian Studies, no. 16).
This is one of the earliest academic studies to look at the emergence of political
demands for separate political representation in terms of the dynamics of local
and regional politics. Robinson takes as his subject the key area of northern
India, from which sprang most of the original leaders of the Muslim League and
where the Urdu-speaking élite among the Muslim community was most
entrenched. He traces the emergence of so-called old and young parties
among the Muslim élite and the struggle between them for leadership as they
had to come to terms with threats to their privileged positions.
229
Pakistan: the formative phase.
Khalid bin Sayeed. Karachi: Pakistan Publishing House, 1960. 492p. bibliog.
This is an old but still valuable study of the origins of the Pakistan movement
from the mid-19th century and of the initial years of independence from 1947
to 1951. Sayeed was able to interview many leading political figures and senior
officials who had participated in the events he describes.
230
Muslims and political representation in colonial India: the making of Pakistan.
Farzana Shaikh. Modern Asian Studies, vol. 20, no. 3 (July 1986), p. 53957.
A study of the way Indian Muslims expressed their views on how they should
be represented politically. The author argues that Western concepts based on
liberal individualism were rejected not merely because they were contrary to
the short-term interests of the community's leadership but because they
offended against Islamic concepts of community. She suggests that this point
is central to an understanding of the expression of Muslim demands from the
beginning of the 20th century to the attainment of Pakistan in 1947. The
Indian National Congress and the Muslim League put forward 'wholly
irreconcilable sets of political norms'. The argument is extended to the post-
independence period in 'Islam and the quest for democracy in Pakistan',
Journal of Commonwealth and Comparative Politics, vol. 24, no. 1 (March
1986), p. 7492.
231
Pakistan: old country new nation.
Ian Stephens. Harmondsworth, England: Penguin Books, 1964. 352p. 3 maps.
bibliog.
First published in 1963 simply as Pakistan, this is a now rather dated and old-
fashioned but sympathetic and informed account of Pakistan's history by
someone who was an official in British India, a newspaper editor, and finally for
a short period official historian to the Pakistan army. Rather more attention is
given than would be today to the circumstances of the Pakistan movement and
the foundation of the state and less to Pakistan's post-1947 history.
 Page 60
232
M. A. Jinnah Ispahani correspondence 19361948.
Edited by Z. H. Zaidi. Karachi: Forward Publication Trust, 1976. 718p.
M. A. H. Ispahani was a member of a distinguished Muslim business family
based in Calcutta who became one of Jinnah's most devoted lieutenants in the
Pakistan movement and after independence Pakistan's ambassador to the
United States. His correspondence with Jinnah is one of the few opportunities
we have to see Jinnah at work as a politician, although he always has his cards
close to his chest. There are also glimpses of the private individual. The
volume, which includes all the items extant in the Ispahani papers, includes a
useful introduction and notes by the editor.
233
Students' role in the Pakistan movement.
Mukhtar Zaman, with supplementary articles by Abdus Salam Khurshid, M. A.
Mekhari. Karachi: Quaid-i-Azam Academy, 1978. 242p. (Historical Studies
(Pakistan) 1).
The author was a leading figure in the All-India Muslim Students' Federation
immediately before independence. He draws on his own recollections as well as
documentary sources to describe the role played by Muslim students as
propagandists and activists for the Pakistan movement, especially at the time
of the 1945ndash;46 elections. The situation in each province is described in
detail, as is the part played by Jinnah in inspiring student activity.
The Muslims of British India.
See item no. 136.
Nationalism and communal politics in India, 19161928.
See item no. 138.
A history of the freedom movement (being the story of Muslim struggle for the
freedom of Hind-Pakistan).
See item no. 141.
Moslem nationalism in India and Pakistan.
See item no. 149.
The Khilafat movement: religious symbolism and political mobilization in India.
See item no. 153.
The Muslim community of the Indo-Pakistan subcontinent (6101947): a brief
historical analysis.
See item no. 157.
Modern Islam in India: a social analysis.
See item no. 162.
Political identity in South Asia.
See item no. 164.
From martial law to martial law: politics in the Punjab, 19191958.
See item no. 167.
 Page 61
Empire and nation: Punjab and the making of Pakistan.
See item no. 189.
India, Pakistan or Pakhtunistan: the nationalist movements in the North-West
Frontier Province, 193747.
See item no. 198.
Pakistan movement in Baluchistan.
See item no. 199.
Ethnicity, nationalism and the Pakhtuns: the independence movement in
India's North-West Frontier Province.
See item no. 209.
Provincial politics and the Pakistan movement: the growth of the Muslim
League in North-West and North-East India, 193747.
See item no. 213.
Eight lives: a study of the Hindu-Muslim encounter.
See item no. 268.
Modern Muslim India and the birth of Pakistan (18581951).
See item no. 271.
The last Wali of Swat: an autobiography as told to Fredrik Barth.
See item no. 273.
Pathway to Pakistan.
See item no. 274.
Mohammad Ali Jinnah: a political study.
See item no. 282.
Jinnah of Pakistan.
See item no. 290.
State and ideology in the Middle East and Pakistan.
See item no. 459.
Pakistan's ideology and ideologues.
See item no. 500.
Independence and Partition
234
The emergence of Pakistan.
Chaudhri Muhammad Ali. New York; London: Columbia University Press, 1967.
418p. 5 maps.
Chaudhri Muhammad Ali, who later became prime minister of Pakistan in the
mid-1950s, was a senior civil servant at the time of independence and became
Pakistan's representative on the steering committee of the Partition Council.
This carefully
 Page 62
written memoir, which depends on written sources as well as the author's own
recollections, deals with the situation immediately before and after 14 August
1947. He describes in particular the mechanics of partition.
235
Freedom at midnight.
Larry Collins, Dominique Lapierre. London: Collins, 1975. 500p. 5 maps.
bibliog.
An often highly coloured account of independence and partition which has
achieved considerable prominence in the popular literature. Jinnah, whose
personal contribution to the achievement of Pakistan is made much of, is
described as a man of towering vanity.
236
Sailors and the crowd: popular protest in Karachi, 1946.
Anirudh Deshpande. Indian Economic and Social History Review, vol. 26, no. 1
(Jan.March 1989), p. 128. map.
The naval uprisings of February 1946 in Bombay and Karachi were significant
events in creating the climate in which the transfer of power took place. This
article looks not only at the mutiny itself, but at the parallel activities in the city
of Karachi. Deshpande is particularly concerned with the dynamics of crowd
behaviour.
237
The great divide: Britain India Pakistan.
H. V. Hodson. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1985. 2nd ed. 590p. bibliog.
Although first published in 1969 without access to all the documentation that
subsequently became available, this book is valuable both because of its
considerable merits as a literary work and because its author had free access to
the papers of Lord Mountbatten, the last viceroy. Half the book is devoted to
the period up to Mountbatten's arrival in March 1947, half to the negotiations
that produced the partition plan and to its implementation. Mountbatten is very
much the central figure and Hodson rates his achievements very highly. The
second edition is unchanged except for a 25-page epilogue which looks at
India and Pakistan after independence.
238
Facts are facts: the untold story of India's partition.
Wali Khan, translated by Syeda Saiyidain Hameed. Delhi: Vikas, [1987]. 182p.
Wali Khan, translated by Syeda Saiyidain Hameed. Delhi: Vikas, [1987]. 182p.
Son of Abdul Ghaffar Khan and himself a major political figure in Pakistan who
has been at odds with successive governments, Wali Khan writes here of his
views of the political history of India from the First World War up to partition,
and in particular of his own frontier region. He is concerned, on the basis of
British official records, to document the claim that the colonial government
followed a policy of 'divide and rule' on religious lines so as to limit the power of
the nationalist movement, especially that part represented in the Frontier by
the Khudai Khidmatgars. Although his immediate target is the British rulers of
India, it is clear that he is also challenging the legitimacy of the view that only
the Muslim League and its leaders represented the real interests of Muslims in
India.
 Page 63
239
Constitutional relations between Britain and India: the transfer of power
19427.
Editor-in-Chief, Nicholas Mansergh, editors and assistant editors (vols 14) E. W.
R. Lumby; (vols 512) Penderel Moon. London: Her Majesty's Stationery Office,
197083. 12 vols. maps.
This truly monumental project is on a scale never likely to be repeated in the
field of South Asian studies. The twelve volumes, each around 900 pages and
impeccably edited, contain all the documents of any significance from the
British archives which bear on the question of how and why policy was framed
as it was. From the telegrams, minutes, notes, etc. which are included it is
possible to build up an immensely rich and detailed picture of the progress of
events on the British side. Even though a complete story would require equal
documentation from the Congress and Muslim League leaders, which does not
exist, by itself the Transfer of Power series is an invaluable source for any
serious scholar of the subject.
240
The transfer of power in India.
V. P. Menon. Bombay: Orient Longmans, 1957. 542p.
Written by an Indian official who was closely involved in the negotiations
preceding the transfer of power and who was on intimate terms with the
Indian leadership, this detailed work naturally reflects an Indian view on events
and personalities. It nevertheless strives for and in large measure achieves
perspective and balance.
241
Divide and quit.
Penderel Moon. London: Chatto & Windus, 1961. 302p. 2 maps.
The author was a senior official in Bahawalpur state in the Punjab during the
partition period and witnessed at first hand the communal killings that took
place in and around the state. His memoir of this period describes carefully and
compassionately the dreadful events that he witnessed, although the scale of
the killing in the state was relatively less than in other parts of the Punjab.
Moon also includes some more general analysis of the political background to
partition.
242
Escape from empire: the Attlee government and the Indian problem.
R. J. Moore. Oxford, England: Clarendon Press, 1983. 376p. bibliog.
This meticulously researched and written work deals with the 'high politics' of
the period from Attlee's appointment as prime minister in July 1945 to the
transfer of power in August 1947. Relying principally on government
documents and the private papers of those most closely involved, Moore
reconstructs as far as is possible the negotiations and manoeuvrings that took
place as it became clear after the war that the British wished to leave but that
there were fundamental disagreements as to how power should be transferred.
Moore has written two other volumes dealing in similar vein with the earlier
period, The crisis of Indian unity, 19171940 (Oxford, England: Clarendon
Press, 1974) and Churchill, Cripps, and India, 19391945 (ibid., 1979), and a
collection of essays, Endgames of empire: studies of Britain's Indian problem
(Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1988).
243
Making the new Commonwealth.
R. J. Moore. Oxford, England: Clarendon Press, 1987. 218p. bibliog.
Although the focus of this detailed and authoritative monograph is inevitably on
India and in particular on Nehru, Pakistan was also centrally involved in the
efforts of
 Page 64
Mountbatten and others to keep the two post-partition states in the
Commonwealth. Moore pays due attention to the position of Jinnah and his
successor Liaquat Ali Khan and to the importance of the Kashmir dispute of
194748. The book concludes with the Commonwealth Conference of April 1949
which established the Commonwealth on a new footing, although earlier hopes
for joint defence arrangements between Britain, India and Pakistan for the
Indian Ocean region proved illusory.
244
The last days of the British Raj.
Leonard Mosley. London: Weidenfeld & Nicholson, 1961. 263p. 2 maps.
bibliog.
A racily written account, based on personal research as well as on the standard
sources then available, of the partition of India. The author does his best to be
fair to all concerned, although he is convinced that if things had been done in
less of a hurry much of the suffering could have been avoided, and that
Mountbatten in particular must bear some of the responsibility for the undue
haste.
245
The partition of India: policies and perspectives 19351947.
Edited by C. H. Philips, Mary Doreen Wainwright. London: George Allen &
Unwin, 1970. 607p. bibliog.
The valuable papers included in this volume were originally presented to a
conference in London in 1967 which brought together Pakistani, Indian and
British participants in the events of 1947 as well as scholars from the three
countries. Thirteen papers, mainly but not exclusively by academics, are
included in the first section on policies and parties, and sixteen in the second
on perspectives and reflections. Although not a comprehensive history of the
subject, this is a major contribution to its study.
246
The partition of the Punjab 1947: a compilation of official documents.
Compiled by Mian Muhammad Sadullah. Lahore: National Documentation
Centre, 1983.4 vols. 7 maps.
These four volumes provide comprehensive documentation of the work of the
Punjab Boundary Commission which, under the chairmanship of Sir Cyril
Radcliffe, drew the boundary line in the Punjab in 1947. Much of the material
included has hitherto been available only in archive collections. Volume 1
contains material relating to the establishment of the commission and the initial
representations submitted to it; volume 2 is a verbatim record of the public
sessions at which each party argued its case; volume 3 brings together the
reports of the individual members of the commission, who were unable to
reach a consensus, and the final award by the chairman; volume 4 consists of
a selection of maps submitted to the commission and an illustrative map added
by the editors.
247
Experiment with freedom: India and Pakistan 1947.
Hugh Tinker. London; Bombay; Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1967. 165p.
(Chatham House Essays, no. 16).
Although written before the official archives were open, this remains one of the
most lucid and balanced introductions to the tangled web of negotiations that
produced the transfer of power in 1947 but at the same time the partition of
the country. Tinker, a distinguished historian and political scientist, compresses
a great quantity of detail into his narrative but never loses sight of the main
points.
 Page 65
248
The Viceroy's journal.
Archibald Wavell, edited by Penderel Moon. London: Oxford University Press,
1973. 528p.
Lord Wavell was viceroy of India during the closing stages of the war and in
1945 and 1946, when increasingly frantic efforts were being made by the
British to find a formula that would maintain the unity of India after the
transfer of power. Wavell himself tried at the Simla conference in June 1945,
and was deeply involved in the Cabinet Mission Plan the ramifications of which
provided the focus for Congress-League manoeuvring during most of 1946. His
private diary, well edited by Moon, is a prime source for the period and tells the
reader both about the day-to-day negotiations and about the way the Viceroy
himself perceived the impasse. Wavell was eventually replaced by Lord
Mountbatten, who was able to push through the partition. As Moon remarks,
however, it was Wavell's failure which paved the way for Mountbatten's
success.
The making of Pakistan.
See item no. 163.
The Sindh story.
See item no. 206.
Pakistan: the formative phase.
See item no. 229.
Pakistan: old country new nation.
See item no. 231.
The economic consequences of divided India: a study of the economy of India
and Pakistan.
See item no. 619.
Pakistan 1947
249
Can Pakistan survive? The death of a state.
Tariq Ali. Harmondsworth, England: Penguin, 1983. 237p. 2 maps.
A journalistic survey of Pakistan from the beginning of the Pakistan movement
to the early 1980s, in which the author, a well-known journalist and left-wing
political activist, develops his thesis that the country in its present shape is held
together only by the coercive power of the army and the bureaucratic
apparatus with the support of the United States. The style is vigorous and no
previous knowledge is assumed.
250
Pakistan: military rule or people's power.
Tariq Ali. London: Jonathan Cape, 1970. 270p.
The writer describes his history of Pakistan since 1947 as 'an unabashed and
straightforward polemic against the feudal and capitalist class of Pakistan'. He
is particularly concerned to describe and analyse the mass movement against
the Ayub Khan régime from November 1968 to March 1969, and calls for a
revolutionary party to lead further struggles.
 Page 66
251
Party politics in Pakistan, 19471958.
K. K. Aziz. Islamabad: National Commission on Historical and Cultural Research,
1976. 302p. bibliog. (Historical Studies (Pakistan) Series, no. 1).
Party politics in the period from independence up to the coup of 1958 were
often chaotic and confused. Aziz gives a meticulous account of the parties and
their activities, and of the attempts to find a constitutional settlement.
Appendices list the members of successive governments at the national level
and chief ministers at the provincial, and give biographical notes for the
principal political figures.
252
The great tragedy.
Zulfikar Ali Bhutto. Karachi: Pakistan People's Party, 1971. 107p
Bhutto has often been accused of at least partial responsibility for the 1971
civil war. This pamphlet, written in the middle of the crisis, puts his case and
argues that the Pakistan People's Party (PPP) was always prepared to meet the
Awami League's essential demands and that a grand coalition of the two
parties could have solved the problem.
253
Pakistan under Bhutto 19711977.
Shahid Javed Burki. London: Macmillan, 1988. 2nd ed. 285p. bibliog.
First published in 1980, this is a major contribution to the study of the Bhutto
period and to the study of Pakistan politics more generally. Burki analyses in
detail the social groups that made up Bhutto's initial constituency and the
effect on those and other groups of the policies he pursued when in power. By
1977, he says, the PPP had lost its middle-class support and had to rely on
'landed interests, rural poor and urban marginals'. The second edition
reproduces the first more or less unchanged and adds further material on the
1977 elections and a new chapter assessing the Bhutto legacy.
254
The last days of united Pakistan.
G. W. Choudhury. London: C. Hurst, 1974. 239p.
This is a detailed account of the 196971 period in Pakistan by a Bengali
academic political scientist who was at the same time directly involved as a
member for a time of Yahya Khan's cabinet. Choudhury argues that the
dismemberment of Pakistan was not the answer to any of South Asia's regional
problems. The book sets out to justify some at least of the actions taken by the
Pakistan government towards the Bangladesh demand. Choudhury's account of
the period, and his own bona fides, were fiercely atacked by Altaf Gauhar in
'The last days of united Pakistan: a review article', Third World Quarterly, vol.
1, no. 1 (Jan. 1979), p. 91104.
255
Revolution in Pakistan: a study of the Martial Law administration.
Herbert Feldman. London: Oxford University Press, 1967. 242p.
This is a detailed and useful account of the history of Pakistan from the coup of
October 1958 which brought General Ayub Khan to power to the framing of
the new constitution in 1962. Feldman discusses the social and legal reforms
introduced by the Martial Law government as well as the economic policies
pursued by it. A number of relevant documents are included in appendices.
Feldman wrote two subsequent volumes which carried the story forward to the
end of united Pakistan: From crisis to crisis: Pakistan in 196269 (London:
Oxford University Press, 1970) and The end and the beginning: Pakistan,
196871 (London: Oxford University Press, 1975).
 Page 67
256
A history of Pakistan (19471958).
Y. V. Gankovsky, L. R. Gordon-Polonskaya. Lahore: People's Publishing House,
1964. 335p. bibliog.
Translated from a Russian original, this is an example of well-informed work in
an orthodox Marxist mode. The first quarter of the book in fact deals with the
origins of Pakistan rather than the period from independence to the Ayub Khan
coup of 1958. The authors interpret the history of Pakistan in terms of the
development of class and regional (national) contradictions.
257
Pakistan: failure in national integration.
Rounaq Jahan. New York, London: Columbia University Press, 1972. 248p.
bibliog.
Written before the break-up of Pakistan in 1971, although published
afterwards, this major study by a Bangladeshi political scientist discusses issues
of interwing disparity in economic, administrative and military terms. The main
emphasis, however, is on the period after 1958 and the consequences of the
policies pursued by Ayub Khan. The author traces the rise in East Pakistan of
what she terms the 'vernacular elite' and studies its rivalry with the national
élite based in West Pakistan.
258
Economic history of Pakistan.
Anwar Iqbal Qureshi. Lahore: Islamic Book Service, 1978. 466p.
The writer was the first Economic Advisor to the Government of Pakistan after
independence, and his work draws heavily on his personal experience. His
direct involvement is also reflected in the rather polemical tone adopted in the
treatment of Pakistan's economic relations with India and of trade relations
between East and West Pakistan. The work is a valuable source of information,
especially for the economic aspects of partition and for the physical
development of the economy after independence. There is a brief and now
rather dated account of pre-1947 economic history.
259
Persistent praetorianism: Pakistan's third military regime.
William L. Richter. Pacific Affairs, vol. 51, no. 3 (Fall 1978), p. 40626.
This is a detailed account of the months immediately following General Zia's
coup of July 1977. Richter discounts the view that the coup itself was part of a
carefully designed grand strategy but argues presciently that the weakness of
the country's democratic traditions would lead the military régime to cling to
power.
260
Witness to surrender.
Siddiq Salik. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1977. 245p. 7 maps.
This is an eyewitness account, with the emphasis on the military side of events,
by a senior Pakistani officer who was present in East Bengal throughout the
civil war in 1971. Salik also comments on the earlier stages of the crisis. While
he seeks to rebut the more devastating of the charges against the Pakistan
army, he provides a balanced account of events and personalities. Appendices
include the text of the Awami League's six points, the operational document for
'Operation Searchlight', and the instrument of surrender.
 Page 68
261
Pakistan: the consolidation of a nation.
Wayne Ayres Wilcox. New York; London: Columbia University Press, 1963.
276p. 4 maps. bibliog.
The title of this book is somewhat misleading in that the actual focus is the way
in which the government of the newly independent Pakistan dealt with the
princely states that fell within its undisputed territory (i.e. excluding Jammu
and Kashmir). These included Bahawalpur and Khairpur, adjacent to and easily
absorbed into Punjab and Sindh respectively, the barren states of Baluchistan
and the small and isolated units in the northern areas. Wilcox deals with each
state in turn, detailing the often tortuous negotiations which led to their
integration into Pakistan, a process completed for all but the northern states in
1956. There is a brief chapter reviewing developments thereafter, including the
tribal revolt in Baluchistan. Wilcox is sympathetic to the Pakistan government's
policy of eliminating princely power but critical of what he sees as excessive
centralization of government in the 1950s.
262
The Ayub Khan era: politics in Pakistan, 19581969.
Lawrence Ziring. Syracuse, New York: Syracuse University Press, 1971. 234p. 2
maps. bibliog.
This work is divided into two parts. The first is a historical survey of the period
of Ayub Khan's power from 1958 to his downfall in March 1969; the second
examines themes in the politics of the period, notably the bureaucratic legacy
and the attempt to accelerate rural change through the institution of basic
democracies. Ziring argues that Ayub achieved political stability but at the cost
of stagnation. The key to progress, he argues, is the growing middle class.
263
Pakistan: the long view.
Edited by Lawrence Ziring, Ralph Braibanti, W. Howard Wriggins. Durham,
North Carolina: Duke University Press, 1977. 485p. bibliog. (Duke University,
Commonwealth Studies Center Publication, no. 43).
A set of papers originally prepared for a symposium in 1974 in memory of a
leading American scholar of Pakistan, Wayne A. Wilcox. The purpose of the
collection was to place Bhutto's Pakistan in a wider perspective and the
subjects covered range across the fields of history, economics and foreign
policy. Although some of the papers are now rather dated, others are of lasting
value.
From martial law to martial law: politics in the Punjab, 19191958.
See item no. 167.
Pakistan: old country new nation.
See item no. 231.
Contemporary Pakistan: politics, economy and society.
See item no. 447.
The political economy of Pakistan 194785.
See item no. 473.
 Page 69

Biographies and Autobiographies

264
The memoirs of Aga Khan: world enough and time.
The Aga Khan, foreword by W. Somerset Maugham. London: Cassell, 1954.
350p.
The Aga Khans, hereditary leaders of the Ismaili sect among Shia Muslims,
came originally from Iran but settled in India in the 19th century. The third
Aga Khan played an intermittent part in Muslim politics in the years before
independence and his autobiography touches on these matters, although much
of the book is devoted to more personal affairs. A racy history of the Aga Khans
is Mihir Bose's The Aga Khans (Kingswood, England: World's Work, 1984).
265
Quaid-i-Azam Mohammad Ali Jinnah: the formative years 18921920.
Riaz Ahmad. Islamabad: National Institute of Historical and Cultural Research,
1986. 254p. bibliog. (Biographical Series, no. 10).
A detailed account of Jinnah's early political career, when his links were more
with the Congress than the League, as also of his professional career as a
barrister in Bombay. 1892 was the year when Jinnah left for London to train as
a lawyer, although the author also reviews the rather scanty evidence that
exists relating to his childhood. From 1920 on, with the rise of Gandhi and a
new style of political action, Jinnah broke his links with the Congress. Ahmad
wishes to demonstrate that although Jinnah never sympathized with Gandhian
tactics and preferred the legislative arena, he was no less a radical in his
approach to politics.
266
Daughter of the East: an autobiography.
Benazir Bhutto. London: Hamish Hamilton, 1988. 333p.
Written just before the death of President Zia and Benazir Bhutto's own
assumption of the office of prime minister, this book clearly has a political
purpose. Much of it is an account of her father's trial and execution and her
own detention at the hands of the military régime as well as developments
after her release first to go into exile in London and then to return to the
political fray in 1986. There is also, however, some
 Page 70
personal material on which to build up a picture of the first woman to become
leader of a Muslim country. In Pakistan the book was published as Daughter of
destiny.
267
Interview with history.
Oriana Fallaci, translated by John Shepley. London: Michael Joseph, 1976.
376p.
Oriana Fallaci, whose collection of interviews with world leaders was first
published in Italian in 1974, is a well-known journalist and writer who met
Zulfikar Ali Bhutto in April 1972, just after his accession to power. Much of the
discussion that she records in this book is about the Bangladesh war and
Bhutto's account of his own role in it, although he also talks about his personal
beliefs and aims.
268
Eight lives: a study of the Hindu-Muslim encounter.
Rajmohan Gandhi. Albany, New York: State University of New York Press, 1986.
359p. bibliog.
Even if it does not live up to the promise of its subtitle to examine the Hindu-
Muslim encounter this book provides very readable and reliable accounts of its
subjects: Jinnah, Iqbal, Sayyid Ahmad Khan, Jinnah's principal lieutenant
Liaquat Ali Khan, Fazlul Huq, who was a major figure in Bengal politics before
and after independence, and Muhammad Ali, Abul Kalam Azad and Zakir
Husain, three figures who in rather different ways were associated with the
Indian National Congress and Mahatma Gandhi (the author's grandfather).
Rajmohan Gandhi's own outlook is based on a tolerant humanism which
comprehends the Muslim dilemmas in pre-independence India while regretting
that they had to be resolved through partition. The book was published in
India under the title Understanding the Muslim mind (Delhi: Penguin, 1987).
269
Life of Iqbal: general account of his life.
Masud-ul-Hasan. Lahore: Ferozsons, 1978. 506p.
Masud-ul-Hasan's biography of Iqbal is a straightforward chronological account
of his life which takes the reader from his early days in Sialkot and Lahore to his
death in 1938. Considerable use is made of Iqbal's correspondence. Compared
to other works on Iqbal there is much more stress on his political activities as
an exponent of Muslim interests. According to the introduction, the work is to
be the first in a series of four books on Iqbal. Collections of Iqbal's English
letters and speeches have been made by B. A. Dar, Letters and writings of
Iqbal (Karachi: Iqbal Academy, 1967), and by Shamloo, Speeches and
statements of Iqbal (Lahore: Al-Manar Academy, 1948, 2nd ed.).
270
Fazl-i-Husain: a political biography.
Azim Husain, foreword by C. Rajagopalachariar. Bombay: Longmans, Green &
Co, 1946. 388p.
Fazl-i-Husain was a major figure in the politics of the Punjab in the earlier part
of the 20th century. Founder of the Unionist Party which held power until the
eve of independence, he became a provincial minister and at the time of his
death in 1936 was a member of the viceroy's council. He awaits a good
modern biography which takes account of new historiographical developments
from the 1960s on but this account by his son is reliable and useful in its
recounting both of Fazl-i-Husain's own life and of the Unionist Party.
 Page 71
271
Modern Muslim India and the birth of Pakistan (18581951).
S. M. Ikram. Lahore: Sheikh Muhammad Ashraf, 1970. 2nd rev. ed. 506p.
This work has gone through a number of previous versions. Based on an earlier
book in Urdu, it was first published in English under the pseudonym A. H.
Albiruni in 1950 as Makers of Pakistan and modern Muslim India. The present
version was first published in 1965. Originally, it was composed of a set of
straightforward biographical sketches of the principal political and intellectual
figures in the Pakistan movement and its predecessors. The current version is
approximately twice as long and includes substantial sections dealing with the
emergence of Muslim political activity in the areas that were to become
Pakistan. The approach remains primarily biographical, however.
272
From purdah to parliament.
Shaista S. Ikramullah. London: Cresset Press, 1963. 168p.
An autobiographical memoir of a woman from a traditional Muslim family.
Daughter of Hassan Suhrawardy, and therefore from one of the principal
upper-class families of Muslim India, she was born in Calcutta in 1915. With
encouragement from her husband, a member of the Indian Civil Service, she
moved with ease into the wider world. Her family connections brought her
close to Jinnah and into a political role in the years just before 1947. After
independence she became a member of Pakistan's constituent assembly,
although she writes little of her activities there.
273
The last Wali of Swat: an autobiography as told to Fredrik Barth.
Miangul Jahanzeb. Oslo: Norwegian University Press (Universitetsforlaget); New
York: Columbia University Press, 1985. 199p. bibliog.
Swat, in Pakistan's North-West Frontier Province, was initially a princely state
and then an autonomous unit within Pakistan with which it merged finally in
1969. The last ruler, Miangul Jahanzeb, gives a detailed account of his political
career and of the negotiations in which he was involved, but the book would be
useful to anyone interested in the anthropological or historical background to
this Pukhtun society.
274
Pathway to Pakistan.
Choudhry Khaliquzzaman. Lahore: Longmans Pakistan Branch, 1961. 432p.3
Choudhry Khaliquzzaman was an important figure in the politics of the United
Provinces and significant within all-India Muslim politics as well. From a
distinguished family, he had close links with the Congress leaders, Nehru in
particular, but eventually committed himself fully to the Muslim League. At
independence he was asked by Jinnah to remain in India as leader of the
Muslim community there, although in the end he came to Pakistan. His
autobiography is essentially a record of the political events in which he
participated.
275
Friends not masters: a political autobiography.
Mohammad Ayub Khan. London: Oxford University Press, 1967. 275p. 2 maps.
The first of Pakistan's military rulers, Ayub Khan was also in the line of those
who saw the country as embodying a progressive and modernist conception of
Islam. His
 Page 72
autobiography, written while he was in power and clearly intended to make an
impact domestically and internationally, describes his life from his days as one
of the first Indian cadets at Sandhurst to the presidential election of 1965,
although most of the attention is given to events after the coup of October
1958. A clearly worked-out set of views on the appropriate constitutional forms
for Pakistan and on the future of Pakistan as a Third World country is
presented.
276
Mohammed Ali Jinnah: maker of modern Pakistan.
Edited by Sheila McDonough. Lexington, Massachusetts: D. C. Heath, 1970.
101p. bibliog. (Problems in Asian Civilizations).
Intended primarily for students, this work brings together readings on Jinnah
from a wide variety of scholars, and political leaders who interacted with him.
These are intended to allow the reader to assess both Jinnah's character and
his political strategy. There is a brief introduction to set the readings in context.
277
Sikandar Hayat Khan (18921942): a political biography.
Iftikhar Haider Malik. Islamabad: National Institute of Historical and Cultural
Research, 1985. 211p. bibliog.
Sikandar Hayat Khan was, after Fazl-i-Husain, the dominant Muslim political
figure in the Punjab before independence. This study discusses his political
career as a leader of the Unionist party and as prime minister of the Punjab
from 1937 until his death, and his complex relationship with Jinnah and the
Muslim League. A number of appendices cover relevant correspondence and
other documents, including Sikandar's own 1939 scheme for an Indian
federation.
278
Sir George Cunningham: a memoir.
Norval Mitchell. Edinburgh; London: William Blackwood, 1968. 183p. map.
Governor of the North-West Frontier Province at the time of independence,
Cunningham remained in post until April 1948 during the early stages of the
Kashmir crisis. This is a largely personal account of his long career as a British
official on the frontier.
279
Quaid-i-Azam: studies in interpretation.
Quaid-i-Azam: studies in interpretation.
Sharif al Mujahid. Karachi: Quaid-i-Azam Academy, 1981. 2nd ed. 806p.
bibliog.
This account of Jinnah takes a sympathetic but not a blinkered view of him.
The focus is more on Jinnah's political career than on his personality.
Approximately half of the work is given over to a useful selection of documents.
A briefer and simpler study of Jinnah which follows the same basic approach as
Mujahid is Waheed-uz-Zaman, Quaid-i-Azam Mohammad Ali Jinnah: myth and
reality (Islamabad: National Institute of Historical and Cultural Research, 2nd
ed., 1985).
280
India as I knew it, 18851925.
Michael O'Dwyer. London: Constable, 1925. 453p. 2 maps.
O'Dwyer was governor of the Punjab at the time of the Jallianwala Bagh
massacre in April 1919, a turning point in Indian history. His memoirs seek to
justify his actions at that time, but they are also a document of the views of a
staunch imperialist who
 Page 73
believed in the appropriateness for Punjab of a paternalist government. The
earlier chapters recount his life as an official in various parts of the Punjab and
elsewhere in India.
281
The story of soldiering and politics in India and Pakistan.
Sher Ali Khan Pataudi. Lahore: Wajidalis, 1978. 430p. map.
This is the autobiography of a member of a princely family in India who joined
the army in 1933 and in 1947 opted for Pakistan. Apart from his military
service the author held diplomatic assignments and was a minister during the
Yahya Khan period. Although there is little that is new in the book on the inner
story of politics, the memoirs are an interesting record of the experience of a
senior member of the Pakistan élite. Another military autobiography by
someone who rose from the ranks to become first commander-in-chief and
then governor of West Pakistan under Ayub Khan is Mohammad Musa, Jawan
to general: recollections of a Pakistani soldier (Karachi: East & West Publishing
Company, 1984).
282
Mohammad Ali Jinnah: a political study.
Matlubul Hasan Saiyid. Lahore: Sh. Muhammad Ashraf, 1953. 2nd ed. 529p.
An early biography of Jinnah which still has value as the first attempt to
provide a comprehensive political account of his life. Saiyid concentrates mainly
on Jinnah's activities as a principal leader of the Muslims and their
representative in talks with the British and the Congress. The first edition of the
work was published in 1945, before the final round of negotiations.
283
Bhutto: trial and execution.
Victoria Schofield. London: Cassell, 1979. 250p.
The author was a university friend of Benazir Bhutto and she writes here a
detailed acount of the period from the arrest of Zulfikar Ali Bhutto in
September 1977 through the trial to his execution in April 1979.
284
Father and daughter: a political autobiography.
Jahan Ara Shahnawaz. Lahore: Nigarishat, 1971. 304p.
Jahan Ara Shahnawaz was the daughter of Sir Muhammad Shafi, a
distinguished Punjabi politician of the pre-independence period. She herself
distinguished Punjabi politician of the pre-independence period. She herself
played some political role, especially as a representative of women's interests
within the Muslim League. After independence she became a member of the
Constituent Assembly. In this autobiography she describes both her personal
life and the political activities of her father and herself at the Punjab and
national levels.
285
The garden of fidelity, being the autobiography of Flora Annie Steel 18471929.
Flora Annie Steel. London: Macmillan, 1929. 293p.
Flora Annie Steel, the novelist and collector of Punjab folktales, lived for some
years in the Punjab as the wife of a British official. She was herself appointed
Inspectress of Schools for the Punjab with responsibility for female education.
Her autobiography, which devotes much space to her years in India,
particularly in the districts of Kasur and Sialkot, shows her as indomitably
Victorian in her moral concerns, for example
 Page 74
over the position of women in India, as also in her immense energy and
forthrightness. She died in 1929 and the last chapter of the book was in fact
written by her daughter. There is a modern biography: Flora Annie Steel:
novelist of India by Violet Powell (London: Heinemann, 1981).
286
Punjabi saga (18571987).
Prakash Tandon. Delhi: Penguin, 1988. 664p.
An omnibus edition of three volumes of autobiography written by Prakash
Tandon, who grew up in West Punjab in the early years of the 20th century.
Son of an engineer in the irrigation department, he describes in the first part,
published originally as Punjabi century (London: Chatto & Windus, 1961), the
rural life of the areas where his father was posted, as well as the traditions and
social customs of his middle-class community at a time of rapid change. The
second and third parts of the book, originally titled Beyond Punjab (Berkeley
and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1971) and Return to Punjab
(New Delhi: Vikas, 1980) deal with the author's life as a senior business
executive in India and elsewhere, and deal only in passing with Pakistan
Punjab. Ved Mehta, whose family belonged to the same milieu, has written a
comparable trilogy: Daddyji (London: Secker & Warburg, 1972); Mamaji (New
York and Oxford, England: Oxford University Press, 1979); and The ledge
between the streams (London: Harvill Press, 1984). The last includes Mehta's
memories of the partition period in Lahore until the point in June 1947 when
his family left for India as refugees.
287
Bhutto: a political biography.
Salmaan Taseer. London: Ithaca Press, 1979. 216p. bibliog.
Although the author is an admirer and supporter of the late Mr Bhutto, this is
by no means a hagiography. The book, completed shortly after Mr Bhutto's
execution in April 1979, contains a considerable amount of information and
comment about its subject as an individual, a politician and a statesman.
Taseer's basic view of Bhutto is that he was above all a politician for whom
loyalty rather than ideology was the key factor.
288
Abdul Ghaffar Khan: faith is a battle.
D. G. Tendulkar. Bombay: Popular Prakashan, 1967. 550p. map.
Often known as the 'Frontier Gandhi' or Badshah Khan, Abdul Ghaffar Khan
played a leading role in the politics of the North-West Frontier in the 20th
century. Organizer of the Khudai Khidmatgars or servants of God, he
succeeded in leading a largely nonviolent movement against colonialism among
a notoriously warlike population. His views first on the desirability of a united
India and then on an autonomous Pakhtunistan did not endear him to
successive Pakistan rulers and he was imprisoned and spent time in exile. This
very detailed biography, by someone who wrote also on Mahatma Gandhi, sees
him primarily as a participant in the Congress movement and touches only
briefly on the post-independence period.
 Page 75
289
Colonel Sir Robert Sandeman: his life and work on our Indian frontier. A
memoir, with selections from his correspondence and official writings.
Thomas Henry Thornton, with foreword by Ronald Wingate. Karachi: Oxford
University Press, 1979. 392p. map. (Oxford in Asia Historical Reprints).
First published in 1895, this is the standard life of Sir Robert Sandeman who in
the 1870s first established British control or suzerainty over Baluchistan, where
he was agent for a number of years. Thornton discusses the particular qualities
that allowed Sandeman to win the trust of the tribal leaders of the area.
290
Jinnah of Pakistan.
Stanley Wolpert. New York; Oxford, England: Oxford University Press, 1984.
421p. 2 maps. bibliog.
This is a full-dress biography of Jinnah by an American historian. Wolpert takes
the reader meticulously through Jinnah's personal and political life from his
early days as a successful lawyer in Bombay through the years of relative
isolation from 1921 to 1934 to the intense activity thereafter. Half the book is
devoted in fact to the period from the passing of the Pakistan Resolution in
1940 to Jinnah's death in 1948.
Babur-nama (Memoirs of Babur).
See item no. 106.
Diary and notes of Mian Fazl-i-Husain.
See item no. 168.
The sole spokesman: Jinnah, the Muslim League and the demand for Pakistan.
See item no. 222.
Iqbal, Jinnah, and Pakistan: the vision and the reality.
See item no. 223.
The collected works of Quaid-e-Azam Mohammad Ali Jinnah.
See item no. 225.
Quaid-e-Azam Jinnah's correspondence.
See item no. 227.
M. A. Jinnah Isphani correspondence 19361948.
See item no. 232.
See item no. 232.
An analysis of contemporary Pakistani politics: Bhutto versus the military.
See item no. 474.
Ghalib: the poet and his age.
See item no. 719.
 Page 76

Population
291
Census of Pakistan 1951.
Karachi: Government of Pakistan, Manager of Publications, [n.d.]. 9 vols. maps.
The first census for Pakistan after independence was conducted in February
1951 and the results published after a couple of years (with earlier Bulletins
giving interim results). The first volume gives the results for the whole country
(excluding Jammu and Kashmir and certain other areas) for basic demographic
data, literacy, language and economic activity, while volumes 27 present the
same categories on a provincial basis. Volumes 8 and 9 report the results of
separate labour force inquiries.
292
Census of Pakistan 1961.
Karachi: Government of Pakistan, Ministry of Home and Kashmir Affairs,
196364. 10 vols. maps.
The second census followed very much the pattern of that held in 1951, with
data collected in January 1961 on the principal demographic variables of age,
marital status, religion etc., on literacy and on economic activity. Volumes 810
report the results of a separate housing census carried out in 1960. Volume 7
was a report on the administration of the census and was not available for
public circulation. As well as Bulletins reporting the initial results, the census
organization also produced District census reports based on the census
material. These resemble the earlier district gazetteers produced during the
British period.
293
Housing, economic and demographic survey, 1973.
Islamabad: Government of Pakistan, Interior Division, Census Organization,
[n.d.]. 2 vols. (vol. 2 published in 5 parts).
Unlike the earlier censuses the 197273 operation was carried out in two parts.
A 'big count', as it was officially termed, was conducted in September 1972,
and its results published in the form of separate volumes for each province, in
which the simple population totals for each unit right down to the village level
were given (Census bulletin, no. 2, Islamabad: Government of Pakistan,
Interior Division, Census
 Page 77
Organization, 197475. 5 vols). The following year a sample of approximately a
quarter of a million households was interviewed in greater depth and the
results published in two volumes. The first covered methodological issues and
reviewed the main findings. The second, in five parts, presented detailed
statistical tabulations for each province for demographic, employment and
housing variables.
294
1981 census report of Pakistan.
Islamabad: Government of Pakistan, Statistics Division, Population Census
Organization, 1984. 200p. 2 maps. (Census Report, no. 69).
The fourth census in Pakistan was conducted in March 1981 and collected data
for the usual categories. An additional section includes information on
migration both within Pakistan and abroad. The report for the whole country is
made up of a short introductory text followed by 24 summary tables. Separate
volumes published simultaneously give the same information on a
disaggregated basis for each of the four provinces.
295
The population of Pakistan.
Mohammad Afzal with the cooperation of Mazhar Hussain. Islamabad: Pakistan
Institute of Development Economics, 1974. 112p. bibliog. (C.I.C.R.E.D.
Series).
This is a general review of the subject undertaken in connection with the World
Population Year 1974. The author examines population growth in Pakistan and
its components. Appendices discuss the history of census-taking in Pakistan.
296
Fertility in Pakistan: a review of findings from the Pakistan fertility survey.
Edited by Iqbal Alam, with assistance from Betzy Dinesen. Voorburg, The
Netherlands: International Statistical Institute, 1984. 259p. bibliog.
The Pakistan Fertility Survey was carried out from 1974 to 1975 as part of the
World Fertility Survey organized by the International Statistical Institute and
has become the baseline for further demographic research in this area. In all,
5,246 households were interviewed on a random basis to collect data on
nuptiality, fertility, family size preferences, and use of contraception. The
papers included in this volume, most of which were initially presented at a
conference in 1980 and subsequently revised, are a major contribution to the
second-stage analysis of the data. Topics covered include fertility levels and
trends, fertility differentials, age at marriage, use of contraception,
breastfeeding practices, community variables, and infant and child mortality.
The initial findings of the survey were published in 1976 by the International
Statistical Institute but would be of interest only to specialists. The main
conclusions can be found in The Pakistan fertility survey 1976: a summary of
findings (Voorburg, The Netherlands: International Statistical Institute, 1977
[World Fertility Survey Summary of Findings, no. 3]). A comment on the
methodology of the survey with special reference to Pakistan is M. Nizamuddin,
'Collecting WFS community data: the Pakistan experience', in John B.
Casterline (ed.), The collection and analysis of community data (Voorburg, The
Netherlands: International Statistical Institute, 1985).
 Page 78
297
The population of India and Pakistan.
Kingsley Davis. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1951. 263p.
22 maps. bibliog.
Davis's book has been the starting point for all subsequent demographic work
on the Indian subcontinent. In it he first reviews the nature and reliability of
the historical evidence for population levels and for trends in birth and death
rates and discusses social structure and change from a demographic
perspective. He then discusses possible population policies based on a mixture
of rapid industrialization and birth control, although presciently he predicted a
worsening of the demographic situation before it stabilized.
298
Sozio-ökonomische Determinanten der Fertilität der Landbevölkerung im Nord-
Punjab. Fallbeispiel: Muradi Janjil (Pakistan).
(Socio-economic determinants of fertility in the rural population of northern
Punjab. Case study: Muradi Janjil (Pakistan).) Eva-Maria Herms. Stuttgart,
West Germany: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1987. 256p. bibliog. (Beiträge zur
Südasienforschung Südasien-Institut Universität Heidelberg, vol. 119).
A study of the comparative importance of the various factors affecting fertility
levels based on a detailed study of a village a little to the south of Rawalpindi.
The author concludes that the cultural importance to a family of having sons in
order to increase its status is such as to outweigh official efforts to encourage
effective family planning.
299
Education, income, and fertility in Pakistan.
Mohammad Ali Khan, Ismail Sirageldin. Economic Development and Cultural
Change, vol. 27, no. 3 (April 1979), p. 51947.
Using data derived from a 196869 sample survey, the authors construct an
econometric model to analyse factors affecting family size in Pakistan.
Education, whether of husband or wife, is shown to be positively associated
with small families; the effect of income levels varies across urban and rural
areas.
300
Population redistribution and development in South Asia.
Edited by Leszek A. Kosinski, K. Maudood Elahi. Dordrecht, The Netherlands;
Boston; Lancaster, England: D. Reidel, 1985. 243p. maps. bibliog.
This volume emerged out of a symposium on the subject of population
redistribution organized in Karachi in 1980 by the International Commission on
Population Geography. The first two papers provide valuable comparative data
for the whole of South Asia on migration flows from and within the region. Two
papers are devoted solely to Pakistan, one on the redistribution of population in
the aftermath of the 1947 partition and the effects of urbanization, the other
on North-West Frontier Province where the impact of the Afghan refugees after
December 1979 has been a major factor.
 Page 79
301
Population and social organization.
Edited by Moni Nag. The Hague; Paris: Mouton, 1975. 367p. bibliog. (World
Anthropology series).
This volume of conference papers includes an essay by Karam Elahi entitled
'Some aspects of socioeconomic change and fertility control among the
emerging elite of the Pathans' (p. 93125) which argues that there is a marked
shift among the small but growing group of Pathans in modern élite
occupations towards a preference for small families.
302
Pakistan Demographic Survey.
Karachi: Federal Bureau of Statistics, 1984 . annual.
These volumes are an attempt to remedy the absence in Pakistan of an
efficient registration system for births, deaths and marriages, and also to
provide a corrective for census figures which are regarded as unreliable as
sources of fertility and mortality statistics. Each volume, published some time
after the year to which it relates, is based on a sample survey (in 1986 22,715
households were covered) and provides data by province on standard
demographic variables.
303
Women's status and fertility change in Pakistan.
Zeba Sathar, Nigel Crook, Christine Callum, Shahnaz Kazi. Population and
Development Review, vol. 14, no. 3 (Sept. 1988), p. 41532.
A general discussion of the low status of women in Pakistan relative to men,
and the consequences of this for fertility levels. Drawing on survey data for the
1970s and early 1980s the authors argue that there is so far no conclusive
evidence of sustained declines in fertility levels but that signs of change may be
detected in the larger urban areas.
304
Migration in Pakistan: theories and facts.
Edited by Frits Selier, Mehtab S. Karim. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1986. 193p.
map. bibliog.
Quite apart from the huge movements of population which occurred at the
time of independence and subsequently the phenomenon of substantial
overseas migration, there has been considerable internal migration of
population within Pakistan since 1947. Much of it has been from rural to urban
areas, especially but not exclusively to Karachi. The articles in this volume
make use of data from the population censuses and migration surveys carried
out in 197980 and 198384 to examine various aspects of the process.
305
Pakistan's economic problem and demographic policy.
Alexander Zablotsky. Journal of South Asian and Middle Eastern Studies, vol. 7,
no. 1 (Fall 1983), p. 5776.
An analysis by a Soviet scholar of the search for solutions to problems of
unemployment, low production and rapidly increasing population. The author
reviews Pakistan's efforts to introduce family planning programmes and
concludes that they will not succeed unless they are made part of a
comprehensive programme of economic and social change, including radical
land reform, state-controlled industrialization and changes in the status of
women.
 Page 80
Growth of Muslim population in medieval India (A.D. 10001800).
See item no. 146.
Age and social status at marriage, Karachi, Pakistan, 196164 and 1980: a
comparative study.
See item no. 395.
Pakistani women: a socioeconomic and demographic profile.
See item no. 444.
Pakistan Development Review.
See item no. 612.
 Page 81

Minorities
306
The city in South Asia: premodern and modern.
Edited by Kenneth Ballhatchet, John Harrison. London: Curzon Press; Atlantic
Highlands, New Jersey: Humanities Press, 1980. 342p. maps.
This contains an article by Raffat Khan Haward, 'An urban minority: the Goan
Christian community in Karachi', p. 299323, in which the author uses an
anthropological perspective to discuss the position of the Goan Christians in
Karachi in the mid-1970s.
307
Afghan refugees in Pakistan: from emergency towards self-reliance. A report on
the food situation and related socio-economic aspects.
Hanne Christensen. Geneva: United Nations Research Institute for Social
Development, 1984. 87p. (UNRISD Refugee Settlement Series, 84.2).
Despite the narrowness of the title, this report in fact ranges quite widely
across issues to do with the situation of the Afghan refugee population in
Pakistan. The author argues that after the initial period the refugee community
achieved a degree of self-reliance in food supply and in some other aspects of
its material existence. Another piece on the same subject is Nancy Hatch
Dupree, 'Demographic reporting on Afghan refugees in Pakistan', Modern Asian
Studies, vol. 22, no. 4 (Oct. 1988), p. 84565. The economic aspects are
covered in more detail by Asif Ashraf, Economic impact of Afghan refugees in
NWFP (Peshawar: Pakistan Academy for Rural Development, 1988).
308
The Ahmadiyah movement: a history and perspective.
Spencer Lavan. Delhi: Manohar Book Service, 1974. 220p. bibliog.
The Ahmadiyah movement, whose adherents are also sometimes known as
Qadianis, was founded by Mirza Ghulam Ahmed and is a religious reform
movement within Islam which had its origins in late 19th-century Punjab. Since
independence the Ahmadis have been the target of attack from orthodox
Muslims and in 1974 they were
 Page 82
declared to be a non-Muslim minority. A number of Ahmadis have nevertheless
achieved prominence within Pakistan, most notably Muhammad Zafrullah Khan,
Foreign Minister in the 1950s and subsequently a judge of the International
Court. Lavan's study, originally a doctoral thesis, discusses the history of the
Ahmadiyah movement up to the 1930s and sets it against the religious
background of the late 19th century where reformists of all the main religions
were contending against each other as well as against conservatives within
their own communities. The teachings of the Ahmadiyah movement are most
conveniently found in English in Bashir-ud-din Mahmud Ahmad, Invitation to
Ahmadiyyat (London; Boston; Henley, England: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1980
[orig. published 1961], 328p.). There is an article on the recent position of the
group by Charles H. Kennedy: 'Towards the definition of a Muslim in an Islamic
state: the case of Ahmadiyya in Pakistan', in Dhirendra Vajpeyi and Yogendra
K. Malik (eds), Religious and ethnic minorities in South Asia (Delhi: Manohar,
1989), p. 71108.
309
Al-Mushir.
Rawalpindi: Christian Study Centre, c.1959 . quarterly.
This well-produced quarterly from an interdenominational centre in Pakistan
describes itself as a theological journal, but the range of articles carried is
much wider than this might imply. While some are research-based historical
pieces on the various Christian groups in Pakistan and their history, others are
concerned with questions of dialogue with Islam or with the situation of
Christianity in Pakistan. Each issue contains news items on religious matters in
Pakistan. The title of the journal is Arabic for 'counsellor', and each issue is
divided more or less equally into English and Urdu sections.
310
Eine sozio-ethno-religiöse Minderheit: die Christen West-Pakistans.
(A socio-ethno-religious minority: the Christians of West Pakistan.) Karl Heinz
Pfefer. Sociologus (n.s.), vol. 12, no. 2 (1962), p. 11327.
This general description by a sociologist looks, on the one hand, at high-status
sections among the Christian population who since independence have mostly
kept a low public profile and, on the other, at the much more numerous low-
status Christians, mostly belonging to the sweeper community, for whom, the
author argues, there is little opportunity for real social mobility.
311
The hesitant dawn (Christianity in Pakistan 15791760).
John Rooney. Rawalpindi: Christian Study Centre, 1984. 120p. map. bibliog.
(Pakistan Christian History Monograph, no. 2).
This short but carefully researched book looks at the work of the Jesuits and
other Catholic missionaries who visited and worked in Mughal India. He
describes in detail their activities in what is now Pakistan. Rooney is also the
author of Shadows in the dark (a history of Christianity in Pakistan up to the
10th century) (Rawalpindi: Christian Study Centre, 1984 [Pakistan Christian
History Monograph, no. 1]).
312
The Christian community and change in nineteenth century North India.
John C. B. Webster. Delhi: Macmillan, 1976. 293p. 2 maps. bibliog.
The author is himself a missionary as well as a scholar, and the dissertation on
which this book is based looks at the work of the American Presbyterian
missionaries in the
 Page 83
Punjab and the neighbouring United Provinces in the 19th century. Their
impact on Indian society is depicted against a background of intellectual and
political questioning. Webster concludes that their influence is to be measured
not in terms of converts but of their educational and religious work.
The crow eaters.
See item no. 743.
 Page 84

Overseas Populations
313
The myth of return: Pakistanis in Britain.
Muhammad Anwar. London: Heinemann, 1979. 278p. bibliog.
This is an anthropological study of Pakistanis, mostly from the Punjab, in
Rochdale in the north of England. Anwar discusses how they recreated kin-
based networks and the links between these networks and economic activity.
He shows more generally how Pakistan continues to be used as a point of
reference for people's lives.
314
Urban ethnicity.
Edited by Abner Cohen. London: Tavistock, 1974. 391p. map. bibliog.
This volume of conference papers includes (p. 77118) 'The nature of Pakistani
ethnicity in industrial cities in Britain' by Badr Dahya. Dahya, basing himself on
fieldwork in Birmingham and Bradford mainly in the mid-1960s, is particularly
concerned with the economic motives for migration and with the maintenance
by the communities of a set of values distinct from that of the indigenous
population. He criticizes earlier studies of Pakistani migrants for lack of
perspective on these points.
315
Migrants, workers and the social order.
Edited by Jeremy Eades. London; New York: Tavistock, 1987. 281p. bibliog.
(ASA Monographs, no. 26).
This is a collection of papers from an academic conference of British
anthropologists held in 1986 around the theme of migration. Two papers deal
with Pakistani migrants. Roger Ballard's 'The political economy of migration:
Pakistan, Britain, and the Middle East' focuses on migrants from the Mirpur
district of Kashmir and the economic and social context in which they make
decisions on migration. Pnina Werbner entitles her discussion of businessmen
in Manchester and their place in the community 'Enclave economies and family
firms: Pakistani traders in a British city'.
 Page 85
316
Citizens, slaves, guest-workers: the dynamics of labour migration from South
Asia.
Ijaz Shafi Gilani, with Jonathan S. Addelton (sic, Addleton). Islamabad:
Institute of Policy Studies, 1985. 84p. bibliog.
This is a summation of a number of studies carried out by Gilani on the subject
of labour migration from Pakistan mainly to the Middle East. He looks at the
process from the points of view of both sending and receiving countries and
from that of the migrants themselves. He discusses the uses made of
remittances from workers abroad and looks at other economic consequences of
labour migration. The most important of the specialized studies referred to is
Ijaz Gilani, M. Fahim Khan and Munawar Iqbal, Labour migration from Pakistan
to the Middle East and its impact on the domestic economy (Islamabad:
Pakistan Institute of Development Economics, 1981 [Research Report Series,
no. 126]).
317
Migrants and refugees: Muslim and Christian Pakistani families in Bristol.
Patricia Jeffery. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press, 1976. 221p.
3 maps. bibliog.
This is a detailed study by an anthropologist of a number of families of
Pakistani origin living in the large English city of Bristol. In theoretical terms the
study is marked by its awareness of the Pakistani background; empirically it is
unusual in its inclusion of both Christians and Muslims (the 'refugees' and
'migrants' of the title). The families studied came from urban rather than rural
backgrounds in Pakistan. The fieldwork was conducted in 197071.
318
Minority families in Britain: support and stress.
Edited by Verity Saifullah Khan. London: Macmillan, 1979. 203p. bibliog.
(Studies in Ethnicity, no. 2).
The contributors to this collection, much of which originated in a conference in
1976, are concerned to challenge popular misconceptions about the
relationship between minority families and the social services, particularly those
which see the former simply as generating 'problems' for the latter. Papers
specifically or substantially on groups of Pakistani origin are by Catherine
Ballard on second-generation Asians in Britain and by the editor on Mirpuris
(from Azad Jammu and Kashmir) in Bradford. There is a paper on the same
topic by Verity Saifullah Khan, 'The Pakistanis: Mirpuri villagers at home and in
Bradford', in James L. Watson (ed.), Between two cultures: migrants and
minorities in Britain (Oxford, England: Basil Blackwell, 1977, p. 5789).
319
My beautiful launderette and the rainbow sign.
Hanif Kureishi. London; Boston: Faber & Faber, 1986. 111p.
Born in London of a Pakistani father and an English mother, Hanif Kureishi is a
well-known playwright and scriptwriter. My beautiful launderette was his first
major success. In it he explores the pressures on young people in Britain of
Pakistani origin. The rainbow sign is an autobiographical essay which covers
the same topics on the basis of Kureishi's own experience both of Britain and of
Pakistan.
 Page 86
320
Pakistanis in Europe.
London Centre for Pakistan Studies. London: New Century Publishers, 1982.
188p.
The proceedings of a conference held by community leaders in Manchester in
1982. The volume includes background papers on Pakistani communities in
Britain and elsewhere in Europe and the particular issues facing them, together
with appendices which give much practical information on Pakistani
organizations.
321
A Pakistani community in Britain.
Alison Shaw. Oxford, England: Basil Blackwell, 1988. 187p. 3 maps.
This is an anthropological study based on fieldwork in Britain and Pakistan of
the relatively small Pakistani community in Oxford. The author emphasizes its
links with Pakistan and the continuity of values, for example the importance of
kinship and of mutual obligation.
322
The export of manpower from Pakistan to the Middle East, 19751985.
Isabelle Tsakok. World Development, vol. 10, no. 4 (April 1982), p. 31925.
A brief review of the subject which assesses the value to individual households
and to the economy as a whole of high flows of remitted funds from overseas
workers and balances them against the cost to the economy of the export of
skills in short supply domestically. Tsakok concludes that the balance at the
point of writing had been favourable. She contributed a chapter on a similar
theme to the volume on Pakistan's development priorities edited by Burki and
LaPorte (q.v.).
323
Ethnic communities in business: strategies for economic survival.
Edited by Robin Ward, Richard Jenkins. Cambridge, England: Cambridge
University Press, 1984. 270p. bibliog.
This well-focused collection of essays looks at the business activities of various
immigrant groups into Britain. It includes case-studies and more general
analyses of the complex interrelationship of ideology, racism and social factors
that influence the extent to which migrants become businessmen. A separate
section deals with Asian groups and all four chapters in it deal wholly or in part
with Pakistani groups.
324
Manchester Pakistanis: lifestyles, ritual and the making of social distinctions.
Pnina Werbner. New Community, vol. 9, no. 2 (Autumn 1981), p. 21629.
Reprinted in Eric Butterworth and David Weir (eds), The new sociology of
modern Britain (London: Fontana, 1984), this is a theoretically oriented piece
by an anthropologist who sees 'lifestyle' as a means of conveying messages to
others and uses the concept to distinguish social categories among the
Pakistani community in Manchester. Two earlier articles by Werbner in New
Community are also relevant: 'Avoiding the ghetto: Pakistani migrants and
settlement shifts in Manchester', vol. 7, no. 3 (Winter 1979), p. 37689; 'From
rags to riches: Manchester Pakistanis in the textile trade', vol. 8, nos 1&2
(Spring-Summer 1980), p. 8495.
The impact of international migration on economic development in Pakistan.
See item no. 594.
 Page 87

Languages and Dialects

325
An English-Panjabi dictionary.
T. Grahame Bailey. Delhi: Ess Ess Publications, 1976. 159p.
First published in 1919, this dictionary has been included for want of anything
more up to date. The Punjabi equivalents of nearly 6,000 English words are
given transliterated into Roman.
326
Panjabi grammar: a brief grammar of Panjabi as spoken in the then Wazirabad
district.
Thomas Grahame Bailey. Lahore: Saaddi Panjabi Academy, 1977. 60p.
First published in 1904, this is a brief and straightforward grammatical sketch.
All material is transliterated into Roman.
327
A course in Baluchi.
Muhammad Abd-al-Rahman Barker, Aqil Khan Mengal. Montreal: McGill
University, Institute of Islamic Studies, 1969.2 vols. 2 maps.
This is the most comprehensive modern course available for Baluchi and is
based on extensive original research. The dialect chosen as the basis is
Rakhshani, spoken extensively in central Baluchistan. The course is designed
primarily for use in the classroom. A Roman-based phonemic script is used in
the initial sections, with the Arabic script being introduced in the second
volume.
328
A course in Urdu.
Muhammad Abd-al-Rahman Barker (et al). Montreal: McGill University, Institute
of Islamic Studies, 1967. 3 vols. map.
This is a comprehensive and well-researched textbook designed for intensive
classroom use (the authors recommend at least five hours a week with a
teacher). The first two volumes introduce the student to grammar, vocabulary,
idiom, and, in the later
 Page 88
sections, the Persian script. The third volume is devoted to vocabulary lists.
Barker and his associates have published several companion works, including A
reader of classical Urdu poetry (Ithaca, New York: Spoken Languages Services,
1977, 3 vols); Urdu-English vocabulary: student's pronouncing dictionary
(Ithaca, New York: Spoken Languages Services, 1980); An Urdu newspaper
reader (Montreal: McGill University, Institute of Islamic Studies, 1968).
329
The Baluchi language: a dialectology with texts.
J. H. Elfenbein. London: Royal Asiatic Society, 1966, 48p. 2 maps. (Royal
Asiatic Society Monographs, vol. 27).
The purpose of this work is to distinguish the features of the various dialects of
Baluchi, and to provide a modern classification of them, based primarily on
phonological and morphological features. Elfenbein suggests that six main
dialects can be identified, with some further subclassification.
330
Linguistic survey of India.
George Abraham Grierson. Calcutta: Government of India, Central Publications
Branch, 190328. 11 vols (some in multiple parts), maps. bibliog.
Although out of date in many important respects, Grierson's work, carried out
in the late 19th and early 20th centuries, is still the starting point for linguistic
research on South Asia. The first volume (in three parts) provides a general
and comparative survey of the subject and establishes the classificatory
scheme. Each volume in turn then deals with the languages in each of the
groups identified. Altogether 179 languages and 544 dialects are covered. For
each one there are carefully recorded and analysed specimens and brief
accounts of grammar, syntax and a limited vocabulary. Languages spoken in
Pakistan today are mainly covered in volumes 8, 9 and 10.
331
The standard English-Urdu dictionary.
Abdul Haq. Aurangabad, India: Anjuman-e-Urdu Press, 1937. 1513p.
(Anjuman-e-Taraqqi-e-Urdu (India) Series, no. 106).
Despite its age, this large volume has often been reprinted and is also the basis
for many more recent dictionaries. Ferozsons English-Urdu dictionary (Lahore:
Ferozsons, n.d.), for example, is little more than an abbreviated version. The
compiler was a great Urdu scholar who acquired the title of Baba-i-Urdu, father
of Urdu. It should be noted that the Urdu entries are only in Persian script.
332
The standard Urdu-English dictionary.
Abdul Haq. Delhi: Chaman Book Depot, [?1938]. 831p.
Like Abdul Haq's English-Urdu dictionary (see previous entry), this has become
the basis for other dictionaries. Despite its claim to originality, Ferozsons Urdu-
English dictionary (Lahore: Ferozsons, 1960) is only a copy.
333
Lehrbuch des Pashto (Afghanisch). (Pashto teaching book (Afghan).)
Manfred Lorenz. Leipzig, East Germany: VEB Verlag Enzyklopädie, 1979. 303p.
Arranged into 44 sections, this work provides an introduction to Pashto
grammar and would be suitable for the student working on his or her own as
well as for those in the
 Page 89
classroom. Each lesson includes grammar, vocabulary and exercises. The script
is introduced from the beginning, but except in the translation exercises each
word is also transliterated.
334
Report on a linguistic mission to north-western India.
Georg Morgenstierne. Oslo: H. Aschehoug, 1932. 76p. 2 maps. (Instituttet for
Sammenlignende Kulturforskning, series C III-1).
Morgenstierne was a distinguished scholar of Indo-Iranian languages. The
present work is a brief field report on a visit that he made to the isolated areas
of what is now northern Pakistan, especially Chitral, in order to study the
languages spoken there. He was interested in the character of the languages
spoken on the frontier between the Iranian and Indo-Aryan branches of the
larger Indo-European family.
335
Development and use of writing system cross culture: the case of Arabic-
Persian Urdu orthographic model.
Gopi Chand Narang. Journal of South Asian and Middle Eastern Studies, vol.
10, no. 2 (Winter 1986), p. 6477.
Urdu is derived phonologically and grammatically from Indian sources but uses
a script adapted from Arabic and Persian. Narang discusses the practical
difficulties this has caused and the expedients that were developed to
overcome them. He concludes that the result is a complex but nevertheless
functional system with substantial cultural resonance.
336
Newsletter of Baluchistan Studies.
Naples, Italy: Istituto Universitario Orientale, Dipartimento di Studi Asiatici;
Rome: Istituto Italiano per Medio ed Estremo Oriente, 1982-irreg.
Although this newsletter is concerned with Baluchistan studies in all its
aspects, articles on language form the largest category. Most contributions are
in the form of fairly short research notes.
337
A dictionary of Urdu, classical Hindi, and English.
John T. Platts. London: Oxford University Press, 1930. 1259p.
Although in most respects Platts' dictionary dates back more than a hundred
years, it is an essential tool for any serious student of the Urdu language. The
years, it is an essential tool for any serious student of the Urdu language. The
Urdu word is in each case given first, followed where the word is also used in
Hindi, by its transliteration in devanagari (the Hindi script), and then by an
English definition.
338
A new course in Urdu and spoken Hindi for learners in Britain.
Ralph Russell. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, External Services
Division, 1986. 2nd ed. 4 vols.
First published in 1980 as A new course in Hindustani, this is designed
specifically as a teach yourself course for adult learners in Britain, especially
those in contact with Urdu-speaking members of the South Asian community
there. It would be useful for anyone with limited time available. The first part is
the basic course, the second an outline of the grammar, the third readings; the
fourth part is devoted to the script.
 Page 90
339
Punjabi in Lahore.
Christopher Shackle. Modern Asian Studies, vol. 4, no. 3 (July 1970), p. 23967.
A fascinating study by a sociologically aware linguist of the position of Punjabi
in post-independence Lahore. Squeezed between English and Urdu, Punjabi
nevertheless has its own position, especially as a spoken language. At the time
the article was written, a significant literary movement existed to promote
Punjabi.
340
The Siraiki language of central Pakistan: a reference grammar.
Christopher Shackle. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, 1976.
198p. 2 maps. bibliog.
Sometimes called Multani or Southern Lahnda, Siraiki is the language of a large
number of people in southern Punjab and Sindh, although it is not recognized
as a separate language by the Census of Pakistan. It is nevertheless, although
it is difficult to disentangle it entirely from Punjabi and Sindhi, a separate
language with its own literature. The present work is a descriptive grammar by
a modern philologist intended for academic use. There is a similar work by a
Soviet scholar, U. A. Smirnov: The Lahndi language (Moscow, 'Nauka'
Publishing House, 1975 [Languages of Asia and Africa]).
341
South Asian languages: a handbook.
Edited by Christopher Shackle. London: School of Oriental and African Studies,
External Services Division, 1985. 62p. 6 maps. bibliog. (External Services
Division Occasional Papers, no. 10).
Staff at the University of London's School of Oriental and African Studies
collaborated to produce this short guide to South Asian languages designed to
give the layman basic information. Written in an easily accessible style, the
book gives a brief history and description of each language and its script, as
well as of its literature and present position in the region. The chapter on Urdu
is by D. J. Matthews and on Punjabi by C. Shackle.
342
The Sindhi-English dictionary.
Anandram T. Shahaney. Bombay: School and College Bookstall, [n.d.]. 5th ed.
560p.
Shahaney's work has often been reprinted and can be used as a basic
dictionary for the language. Each Sindhi word is given only in Arabic script.
There is a companion English to Sindhi version (The English-Sindhi dictionary.
Bombay: School and College Bookstall, 1966, new ed.).
343
Sindhi self-instructor.
A. T. Shahaney. Bombay: School and College Bookstall, 1967. 3rd ed. 200p.
Originally published in 1905, this is still one of the few available textbooks for
Sindhi, although it gives only a basic grounding and does not measure up to
modern standards. The author, who taught British officials and their families,
provides notes on grammar and vocabulary. Sindhi is spoken by Hindu Sindhis
who migrated to India at independence, and the present edition published
from Bombay uses devanagari as well as Arabic script. It also uses Roman
transcriptions. Another, shorter version of
 Page 91
Shahaney's work has also been reprinted in Pakistan, The Sindhi instructor [a
useful book to acquire working knowledge of Sindhi language] by Munshi
Anandram, revised and edited by Mohammed Ibrahim M. Joyo (Hyderabad:
Sindhi Adabi Board, 1971, 130p.). Although the text is in English, Sindhi words
are given only in Arabic script, a knowledge of which would therefore be a
prerequisite for using the book.
344
The Sindhi language.
R. P. Yegorova, translated by E. H. Tsipan. Moscow: 'Nauka' Publishing House,
1971. 162p. bibliog. (Languages of Asia and Africa).
Originally published in Russian in 1966, this is a reference grammar for the
specialist linguist. After a brief introduction which describes the historical and
current position of the language, there are sections on phonetics, morphology
and syntax.
345
Languages of South Asia: a guide.
G. A. Zograph, translated by G. L. Campbell. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul,
1982. 231p. 2 maps. bibliog. (Languages of Asia and Africa, vol. 3).
This is a brief but systematic description, based initially on Grierson's Linguistic
Survey of India, of the languages spoken in what philologists now think of as
the 'Indian linguistic area'. Urdu is subsumed in the Indo-Aryan group, along
with Punjabi and Sindhi and related languages. Other languages covered are
Pashtu, Baluchi, Brahui and the Dardic group. For each language there is a
description of its phonology and morphology. The book was originally published
in Russian in 1960 as Yazyki Indii, Pakistana, Tseilona i Nepala (Moscow:
Oriental Publishing House).
 Page 92

Religion
346
An intellectual history of Islam in India.
Aziz Ahmad. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 1969. 226p. bibliog.
(Islamic Surveys, no. 7).
Despite the title this work by one of the most distinguished students of the
subject is really a survey of Indian Islam and the religious and spiritual
tendencies within it. The major sub-groups and the sufi orders are each
described in a few pages. There are also chapters on literature and the fine
arts.
347
Islamic modernism in India and Pakistan 18571964.
Aziz Ahmad. London: Oxford University Press, 1967. 294p. bibliog.
A major work of scholarship but accessible to anyone with an interest in the
subject. Aziz Ahmad looks at Sayyid Ahmad Khan and Muhammad Iqbal as the
key figures in the 19th and 20th centuries respectively, and then at other
complementary and contrasting writers. He is alert to both the religious and
the political aspects of his subject. All of the writers considered are of relevance
to contemporary thought in Pakistan, although only Maulana Maududi and G.
A. Parwiz wrote in the post-1947 context.
348
Islamic perspectives: studies in honour of Mawlana Sayyid Abul A'la Mawdudi.
Edited by Khurshid Ahmad, Zafar Ishaq Ansari. Leicester, England: Islamic
Foundation, 1979. 394p. bibliog.
Mawdudi (often spelt Maududi) was the most prominent South Asian
'fundamentalist' Muslim writer of the 20th century who had tremendous
influence internationally as well. These essays by Muslim scholars and
intellectuals cover a wide range of topics in the general field of Islamic studies.
Maududi himself is the subject of three papers and there is a full bibliography
of his writings, totalling 138 items, and 62 items in English, Urdu and other
languages about his work. There are passing references to Pakistan in several
of the other papers.
 Page 93
349
A late nineteenth century Muslim response to the Western criticism of Islam an
analysis of Amir Ali's We and works.
Abdullah Ahsan. American Journal of Islamic Social Sciences, vol. 2, no. 2
(Dec. 1985), p. 179206.
An overview of the work and writings of Amir Ali, a prominent 19th-century
Indian Muslim who led a counter-attack against dismissive views of Islam in the
West, especially the influential work of Sir William Muir. His insistence on the
superiority of Islam to Christianity, especially in his book The Spirit of Islam,
gave him a considerable reputation, although his interpretation of Islam owed
much to European rationalism and his political views were in favour of the
continuation of British rule.
350
Analytical catalogue of books on Allama Muhammad Iqbal. (18771977).
Compiled and edited by Abdul Hafeez Akhtar. Karachi: Government of Pakistan,
Ministry of Education, Department of Libraries, 1978. 97p. 182p.
Produced at the time of the Iqbal centenary in 1977, this lists 306 items in
English, 464 in Urdu and smaller numbers in other Asian languages. For each
entry there is a content analysis under standardized headings.
351
Religion and thought of Shah Wali Allah Dihlawi 17031762.
J. M. S. Baljon. Leiden, The Netherlands: E. J. Brill, 1986. 221p. bibliog.
(Studies in the History of Religions [Supplements to Numen], no. 48).
A major study of this key figure in the South Asian Islamic tradition whose
influence has always been recognized but whose work has not been given
specialized attention in the English literature. Baljon writes primarily for the
scholar and some prior background knowledge would be necessary for the
general reader. The work concentrates on Wali Allah's religious rather than
political views.
352
Islam in the modern world.
A. K. Brohi, edited by Khurshid Ahmad. Lahore: Publishers United, 1975. 2nd
ed. 323p.
A. K. Brohi was a distinguished lawyer who served for a time as President Zia's
law minister and was an ardent advocate of orthodox Islam. This collection of
speeches and essays addresses such themes as Islam and socialism, the
historical role of Pakistan, and Islam and material progress. A parallel
collection, Testament of faith (Lahore: Publishers United, 1975) brings together
thoughts on more purely religious themes.
353
Iqbal und Europa: vier Vorträge. (Iqbal and Europe: four lectures.)
Edited by J. C. Bürgel. Bern; Frankfurt; Las Vegas, Nevada: Peter Lang, 1980.
85p. (Schweizer Asiatische Studien/Etudes Asiatiques Suisses,
Studienhefte/Cahiers, no. 5).
Four lectures delivered to mark the centenary of Iqbal's birth which compare
his characteristic emphasis on the self or khudi with the ideas of Goethe and
other European philosophers and writers. A Czech scholar, Jan Marek, covers
Iqbal's social thought.
 Page 94
354
A study in Iqbal's philosophy.
Bashir Ahmad Dar, foreword by Mumtaz Hasan. Lahore: Sh. Ghulam Ali & Sons,
1971. rev. ed. 329p. bibliog.
First published in 1944, this is a sympathetic treatment of Iqbal's philosophical
position and its relation to Islamic and Western ideas. Iqbal's ideas on the self
and on society occupy the main chapters of the book. Dar also wrote Iqbal and
post-Kantian voluntarism (Lahore: Bazm-i-Iqbal, 1956).
355
Religious thought of Sayyid Ahmad Khan.
Bashir Ahmad Dar. Lahore: Institute of Islamic Culture, 1957. 304p.
This is an older but still valuable study of Sayyid Ahmad Khan which discusses
his religious thought in the context of the challenges Islam faced in 19th-
century South Asia from Christian missionaries and from Hindu revivalism. He
describes in detail Sayyid Ahmad's reconciliation of human reason and divine
omnipotence, and its implications for the sources of religious authority. Dar's
sympathetic account of Sayyid Ahmad sees him as the originator of
contemporary progressive and liberal Islamic thought. An appendix includes
extracts from his The causes of the Indian revolt.
356
The profile of popular Islam in the Pakistani Punjab.
Richard M. Eaton. Journal of South Asian and Middle Eastern Studies, vol. 2,
no. 1 (Fall 1978), p. 7492.
The author has used the register of disciples of a major sufi shrine in the
Punjab, going back with breaks to its foundation in the 17th century, to
demonstrate the potentiality of such a source not only for the study of sufi
shrines as social institutions but also for the study of social and economic
structures over an extended period of time.
357
The encyclopaedia of Islam.
Leiden, The Netherlands: E. J. Brill; London: Luzac (vols 13 only), 1960. 2nd
ed. In progress.
This multi-volumed work is a major example of worldwide scholarly cooperation.
Some hundreds of scholars, Muslim and non-Muslim (although the latter
predominate), have contributed articles over the years to a work which covers
all major events, personalities, places and themes in Islamic religion and
history. There is also some coverage of economic and social issues. There are
many entries which relate specifically to Pakistan and to South Asian Muslims.
The first edition, in five volumes, was published by E. J. Brill between 1913 and
1942. The second edition had reached five volumes by 1986 but the final work
is likely to be double that number. A parallel French edition is published by E. J.
Brill in partnership with G. P. Maisonneuve (Paris).
358
Shaykh Ahmad Sirhindi: an outline of his thought and a study of his image in
the eyes of posterity.
Yohanan Friedmann. Montreal; London: McGill-Oueen's University Press, 1971.
130p. bibliog. (McGill Islamic Studies, vol. 2).
A specialist study of Sheikh Ahmad Sirhindi, an early 17th-century sufi and a
major figure in Indo-Muslim thought. Friedmann suggests that most current
interpretations of Sirhindi see him through a prism of 20th-century concerns
and present him therefore as
 Page 95
a strictly orthodox revivalist. We should look at him, he argues, as a more
complex figure whose concerns remained primarily the mystical ones of the
typical sufi.
359
The faith movement of Mawlana Muhammad Ilyas.
M. Anwarul Haq. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1972. 210p. bibliog.
A committed but also scholarly study of the life and work of a 20th-century
religious leader who came from a sufi background and worked until his death in
1944 to revive the personal faith of Muslims rather than concerning himself
with issues of political power. Haq's book is one of the few works in English to
give access to this side of Islam in South Asia. Ilyas himself worked in the
region round Delhi but his followers are also to be found in Pakistan.
360
The Shi'a of India.
John Norman Hollister. London: Luzac, 1953. 440p. bibliog.
This is a work typical of the scholar-missionary. Written in fact before 1947, it is
a useful and authoritative compendium of information on the various groups
described, but it does not attempt to provide an interpretative understanding
of the spirit of Shia Islam. Hollister discusses the 'mainstream' Ithna 'Ashariya,
who recognize twelve actual Imams, and the Ismailis and their subsects, the
Nizari branch of which regard the Aga Khan as their spiritual head. The total
Shia population of Pakistan today is uncertain but it is at least 10 per cent and
may be substantially more.
361
Javid-nama.
Muhammad Iqbal, translated by Arthur J. Arberry. London, George Allen &
Unwin, 1966. 151p. bibliog. (UNESCO Collection of Representative Works,
Pakistan Series).
Regarded as Iqbal's most important single poetic work, the Javid-nama or Book
of Eternity was written in Persian and first published in 1932. By telling of a
spiritual journey to the presence of God, Iqbal is able to convey his views on
philosophy and on Islamic history. The Javid-nama has been translated into
German (Das Buch der Ewigkeit, by Annemarie Schimmel. Munich: Max Hueber
Verlag, 1957), French (Le livre de l'éternité, by Eva Meyerovitch and
Mohammed Mokri. Paris: Albin Michel, 1962) and many other languages.
362
The secrets of the self (Asrar-i-Khudi): a philosophical poem.
Muhammad Iqbal, translated by Reynold A. Nicholson. London: Macmillan,
1920. 148p.
In his Persian poem Secrets of the self and its companion Mysteries of
selflessness (original title Rumuz-i-Bekhudi, translated by Arthur J. Arberry.
London: John Murray, 1953) Iqbal puts forth his distinctive theory of the
individual ego (khudi) and its relation to God. 'The moral and religious ideal of
man', Iqbal wrote in a letter to Nicholson, 'is not self-negation but self-
affirmation, and he attains to this ideal by becoming more and more individual,
more and more unique.'
 Page 96
363
The reconstruction of religious thought in Islam.
Muhammad Iqbal. London: Oxford University Press, 1934. 192p.
Reprinted and translated many times, this is the most systematic statement by
Iqbal of the religious and philosophical ideas which he otherwise expressed in
poetry. With reference both to the traditions of Muslim thought and to
contemporary European philosophers such as Henri Bergson, Iqbal develops his
view of the creative and dynamic individual within Islam. He writes also of the
principle of movement in Islam.
364
Shikwa and Jawab-i-Shikwa: complaint and answer, Iqbal's dialogue with Allah.
Muhammad Iqbal, translated and with an introduction by Khushwant Singh.
Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1981. 96p.
These two poems, written in 1909 and 1913 respectively, represent Iqbal as a
poet at his most audacious and brilliant. In the first he asks God why he has
allowed Muslim power to decline; the second gives the answer that the
Muslims have declined because they have abandoned a truly Muslim way of
life. The present edition includes the Urdu text in parallel with the English
translation, and also a devanagari transliteration. There is an earlier translation
of the poems by A. J. Arberry, Complaint and Answer (Lahore: Sh. Muhammad
Ashraf, [n.d.]).
365
Iqbal Review.
Lahore: Iqbal Academy Lahore, 1960 . biannual.
A journal devoted to articles in English primarily on the life and thought of
Iqbal but also on related Islamic topics. A volume containing a representative
selection of articles from it in English was published by the Academy in 1983,
edited by Waheed Qureshi: Selections from the Iqbal Review.
366
Islamic Studies.
Islamabad: International Islamic University, 1962 . quarterly.
Published by a government-sponsored institution, this journal reflects
Pakistan's concern to promote Islamic studies in general. Articles cover
historical, theological and cultural aspects of Islam. The majority of the
contributors are Pakistani, but some are from abroad, in some cases non-
Muslim scholars.
367
Die Religionen des Hindukusch. (The religions of the Hindukush).
K. Jettmar, with contributions by Schuyler Jones, Max Klimburg. Stuttgart,
West Germany: Verlag W. Kohlhammer, 1975. 525p. 2 maps. bibliog. (Die
Religionen der Menschheit, vol. 4, no. 1).
This is a massive, anthropologically oriented account of the religious beliefs of
the non-Muslim tribal groups in the Hindu Kush mountains. For each major
group of peoples, there is a description of gods, rites and festivals. The first
portion of the book has been translated into English by Adam Nayyar as The
religions of the Hindukush, vol. 1 The religion of the Kafirs: the pre-Islamic
heritage of Afghan Nuristan (Warminster, England: Aris & Phillips, 1986), and
contains some additional material, especially a glossary by Peter S. C. Parkes.
Publication in English of the remaining parts, which deal with Pakistani areas, is
promised.
 Page 97
368
The rose and the rock: mytical and rational elements in the intellectual history
of South Asian Islam.
Edited by Bruce B. Lawrence. Durham, North Carolina: Duke University
Programs in Comparative Studies on Southern Asia and in Islamic and Arabian
Development Studies, 1979. 200p. (Comparative Studies on Southern Asia, no.
15).
Originally given to a conference in 1975, the papers in this valuable collection
focus on the situation of élite Muslims in North India in the 19th and 20th
centuries as they confronted the challenge of European colonialism to the
mystical and poetical roots of their culture. The major figures considered are
Ghalib, Sayyid Ahmad Khan and Iqbal, but there are studies also of the 17th-
century poet Bedil, strictly speaking outside the scope of the volume, and of
18th-century sufi saints.
369
Essays on Islamic civilization presented to Niyazi Berkes.
Edited by Donald P. Little. Leiden, The Netherlands; E. J. Brill, 1976. 364p.
This Festschrift for a scholar of Turkey includes the following items of relevance
to Pakistan: Charles J. Adams, 'The authority of the prophetic Hadith in the
eyes of some modern Muslims' (in fact Maududi); Sajida Alvi, 'The historians of
Awrangzeb: a comparative study of three primary sources'; Sheila McDonough,
'Iqbal, Gandha, and Muhammad 'Ali: religious charisma and the nationalist
Muslims, 19201928'; Fazlur Rahman, 'Some Islamic issues in the Ayyub Khan
era'.
370
Muslim ethics and modernity: a comparative study of the ethical thought of
Sayyid Ahmad Khan and Mawlana Mawdudi.
Sheila McDonough. Waterloo, Ontario: Wilfrid Laurier University Press for the
Canadian Corporation for Studies in Religion, 1984. 128p. (Comparative Ethics
Series, vol. 1).
A monograph on the thinking on ethical questions of two major Muslim writers
in South Asia who are often seen as the foremost proponents of respectively
modernist and fundamentalist positions. McDonough sees both as looking for
ways in which Muslims can live in the contemporary world without abandoning
their past. The book is intended for serious students of comparative ethics as
well as of South Asian Islam. An earlier work by McDonough (The authority of
the past: a study of three Muslim modernists. Chambersburg, Pennsylvania:
American Academy of Religion, 1970. 56p. bibliog. [AAR Studies in Religion,
1970:1]) considers Sayyid Ahmad Khan alongside Muhammad Iqbal and
Ghulam Ahmad Parwez.
371
lqbal: poet-philosopher of Pakistan.
Edited by Hafeez Malik. New York; London: Columbia University Press, 1971.
441p. bibliog. (Studies in Oriental Culture, no. 7).
An important collection of specially written studies on Iqbal designed to make
him better known in the United States. The editor has brought together
scholars from the USA, Pakistan, India, Europe and the Soviet Union to provide
an informed assessment of Iqbal's political, philosophical, religious and poetical
contributions.
 Page 98
372
Towards understanding the Qur'an. English version of Tafhim al-Qur'an. vol. 1.
Surahs 13.
Sayyid Abul A'la Mawdudi, translated and edited by Zafar Ishaq Ansari.
Leicester, England: Islamic Foundation, 1988. 370p. 3 maps. bibliog.
A verse-by-verse commentary on the Quran in the tafsir tradition, this
expresses the mature religious thought of Maududi. It was first written in Urdu
and published in 1950. The translation will eventually be a multi-volume work.
It is edited in such a way as to be accessible to the non-Muslim reader.
373
Islam.
Fazlur Rahman. London: Weidenfeld & Nicholson, 1966. 271p. bibliog.
Rahman gives an excellent general description of Islam as a religious system,
its history and theological tendencies within it. He writes as an Islamic scholar
with a modernist slant. The publication of the book led to protests in Pakistan
against Rahman and to his dismissal from his official position.
374
Islam and modernity: transformation of an intellectual tradition.
Fazlur Rahman. Chicago; London: University of Chicago Press, 1982. 172p.
(Publication of the Center for Middle Eastern Studies, no. 15).
A general work on the Islamic intellectual and educational tradition, particularly
its attitude to the interpretation of the Quran, where Rahman argues for a
modernist approach. Considerable space is given to a number of Pakistani
writers and their Indian forerunners, including Maududi, Iqbal and I. H.
Qureshi.
375
Iqbal's concept of God.
M. S. Raschid. London; Boston: Kegan Paul International, 1981. 124p. bibliog.
This is a careful and philosophically informed study which argues that Iqbal is
mistaken in his concept of God and puts forward a case for the traditional
Quranic view. Raschid suggests that Iqbal's concept of God is actually a
superficial extrapolation from Western philosophers such as Hegel and
Bergson.
376
A history of sufism in India.
A history of sufism in India.
Saiyid Athar Abbas Rizvi. Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1978, 1983. vol. 1.
Early sufism and its history in India to 1600 AD. 2 maps. bibliog. vol. 2. From
sixteenth century to modern century. bibliog.
The bulk of this work is made up of an immensely detailed, often anecdotal,
but scholarly account, based on Persian sources, of the saints who belonged to
the silsilas or orders of sufis who were active in India up to the 19th century.
As far as possible, each major figure and his teachings are described. There are
also chapters on the sufis' relationship to the Hindu tradition of mysticism, on
sufi concepts of politics, and on sufi poetry.
 Page 99
377
The legacy of Islam.
Edited by Joseph Schacht, with C. E. Bosworth. Oxford, England: Clarendon
Press, 1974. 2nd ed. 530p.
This collective work replaces an earlier volume published in 1931. The authors
see Islam as defining a civilization rather than simply a set of religious values.
There are chapters therefore not just on religion and philosophy but on law,
science, medicine, art, etc. Many of the contributions are very oriented towards
the 'central lands' of Islam but there is a contribution specifically on South Asia
by Aziz Ahmad.
378
Gabriel's wing: a study into the religious ideas of Sir Muhammad Iqbal.
Annemarie Schimmel. Leiden, The Netherlands: E. J. Brill, 1963. 428p. bibliog.
(Studies in the History of Religions [Supplements to Numen], no. 6).
This large work remains one of the most important studies of Iqbal's thought.
After an initial chapter dealing with his life and work, Schimmel shows how
Iqbal approached the essentials of the Islamic faith and discusses his
relationship to Eastern and Western influences. She explores the meaning of
his key concept of khudi or self.
379
Islam in the Indian subcontinent.
Annemarie Schimmel. Leiden, The Netherlands; Cologne: E. J. Brill, 1980.
303p. map. bibliog. (Handbuch der Orientalistik. Abteilung 2, Band 4,
Abschnitt 3).
A general review of the subject by one of its leading scholars. The framework is
chronological but throughout the emphasis is on the development of religious
ideas and expression, particularly mystical thought.
380
Pain and grace: a study of two mystical writers of eighteenth-century India.
Annemarie Schimmel. Leiden, The Netherlands: E. J. Brill, 1976. 310p. bibliog.
(Studies in the History of Religions [Supplements to Numen], no. 36).
A major work by one of the leading figures in the study of Indian Islam on two
sufi poets of the 18th century. Khwaja Mir Dard, who lived in Delhi and wrote
in Urdu and Persian, has been relatively little studied in the past, while Shah
Abdul Latif, who wrote in Sindhi, has attracted considerable attention as a
figure in Sindhi literature and as a mystic. Schimmel discusses both as
members of the sufi tradition concerned to see the true unity of existence
beyond the immediate diversity, while depicting Mir Dard as a more urban,
sophisticated figure than the rural Shah Abdul Latif. The book ends with a
number of translations by the author into German of the poetry both writers.
381
The ardent pilgrim: an introduction to the life and work of Mohammed Iqbal.
Iqbal Singh. London; New York; Toronto: Longmans, Green, 1951. 247p.
bibliog.
This is an early biography of Iqbal by an Indian writer, which sets out the main
features of Iqbal's life. Singh is an admirer of Iqbal not as a prophet or inspirer
of
 Page 100
Pakistan but as a poet. He sees him as bridging the past and present worlds of
Persian and Urdu poetry.
382
Islam in India and Pakistan: a religious history of Islam in India and Pakistan.
Murray T. Titus. Madras: Christian Literature Society, 1959. 328p. bibliog.
(Christian Students' Library, no. 20).
Originally published in 1930 as Indian Islam: a religious history of Islam in
India, this is an attempt by an American missionary to describe as objectively
as possible the development of Islam in India and Pakistan from its earliest
contact with the subcontinent. Although some areas of the book have been
overtaken by more recent research, it is still valuable as a synopsis of the
subject.
383
The sufi orders in Islam.
J. Spencer Trimingham. Oxford, England: Clarendon Press, 1971. 333p.
bibliog.
A general history of the sufi orders, including those which have been important
in South Asia, especially the Chishtiyya, the Qadiriyya, the Naqshbandiyya and
the Suhrawardiyya. Trimingham traces the descent of the leaders, and
discusses each order's distinctive beliefs and practices.
384
Sayyid Ahmad Khan: a reinterpretation of Muslim theology.
Christian W. Troll. New Delhi: Vikas, 1978. 384p. bibliog.
Originally a PhD thesis, this is a major study of the religious thought of Sayyid
Ahmad Khan. Troll discusses Sayyid Ahmad Khan's intellectual formation, with
special emphasis on his early life, and then presents his mature position on the
relationship of reason and faith. The second half of the book consists of
translations from Urdu of sixteen important texts of Sayyid Ahmad Khan on
religious topics.
Saints of Sind.
See item no. 15.
Studies in Islamic culture in the Indian environment.
See item no. 128.
Muslim self-statement in India and Pakistan 18571968.
Muslim self-statement in India and Pakistan 18571968.
See item no. 129.
Shariat and ambiguity in South Asian Islam.
See item no. 132.
Islam in Asia. vol. 1. South Asia.
See item no. 133.
Islam et société en Asie du Sud. (Islam and society in South Asia.)
See item no. 134.
Partners in freedom and true Muslims: the political thought of some Muslim
scholars in British India, 19121947.
See item no. 137.
 Page 101
The Cambridge History of Islam.
See item no. 139.
Islamic Culture.
See item no. 142.
Islamic society and culture: essays in honour of Professor Aziz Ahmad.
See item no. 143.
Conversion to Islam.
See item no. 148.
Islamic revival in British India: Deoband, 18601900.
See item no. 151.
Moral conduct and authority: the place of adab in South Asian Islam.
See item no. 152.
Islam and Muslim society in South Asia.
See item no. 161.
Makli hill: a center of Islamic culture in Sindh.
See item no. 211.
The sufi as saint, curer, and exorcist in modern Pakistan.
See item no. 393.
Pir and murshid: an aspect of religious leadership in West Pakistan.
See item no. 398
Astor: eine Ethnographie. (Astor: an ethnography.)
See item no. 415.
Panjabi sufi poets, A.D. 14601900.
See item no. 732.
 Page 102

Social Structure
General
385
Class and power in a Punjabi village.
Saghir Ahmad, introduction by Kathleen Gough. New York; London: Monthly
Review Press, 1977. 174p. bibliog.
This book is, to quote the introduction by Kathleen Gough, 'a valuable and
pioneering study of class, economy, power and status in a Punjabi village', by a
scholar who was killed in an accident before he could develop his initial work
into a full-fledged sociological study. The fieldwork was carried out in 196465
in a village in the canal-colony district of Sargodha. The study outlines the
system of economic and political power in the village at the time when the
government of Ayub Khan was trying to initiate social change through
institutional innovation. Besides the central village study, the volume also
includes the introduction by Kathleen Gough which makes useful comparisons
with India, and two essays by the author based on the same body of data
which raise questions about 'modernization' and population policy.
386
Pakistan society: Islam, ethnicity and leadership in South Asia.
Akbar S. Ahmed. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1986. 264p.
This is a collection of previously published essays by one of Pakistan's leading
anthropologists and intellectuals. All date from the 1980s and are grouped into
three sections, 'Islam in society', 'Ethnicity and leadership', and Contemporary
issues'. The majority of the essays deal with the North-West Frontier, Ahmed's
own area of specialization, but others range more widely. The first essay
analyses South Asian Islam in terms of types of leadership linked respectively to
orthodox, eclectic and modernist forms of Islam and argues that Pakistan
needs a healthy synthesis of all three.
 Page 103
387
Kinship in West Punjab villages.
Hamza A. Alavi. Contributions to Indian Sociology (n.s.), no. 6 (Dec. 1972), p.
127.
The subject of this article is the anthropological question of what provides the
basic principle of social organization in the villages studied by Alavi in West
Punjab. He concludes that it is not caste, as suggested by some writers, but
the more tightly defined biraderi which is important. He discusses patrilateral
parallel cousin marriage and vartan bhanji as aspects of this institution.
388
The politics of dependency: a village in West Punjab.
Hamza A. Alavi. South Asian Review, vol. 4, no. 2 (Jan. 1971), p. 11128.
Alavi examines the structures and processes of village-level politics in a village
in a canal-colony area of the Punjab. He discusses traditional social institutions
such as the biraderi, the formal structure of the state, and the economic
structure within which political conflict takes place. He draws attention to
cattle-stealing as an important form of political activity.
389
No five fingers are alike: cognitive amplifiers in social context.
Joseph C. Berland. Cambridge, Massachusetts; London: Harvard University
Press, 1982. 246p. bibliog.
A study of a group of nomadic entertainers (Qalandar) by an anthropologist
who is also interested in comparative psychology. While much of the book is
theoretical in orientation, focusing for example on the ideas of Piaget on
cognitive ontogeny, it contains much fascinating material on the lives of groups
who live outside the settled framework of Pakistan life.
390
Pakistan society (a sociological perspective).
M. Iqbal Chaudhry. Lahore: Aziz, 1980. 4th rev. and enlarged ed. 728p.
bibliog.
First published in 1964, this is a textbook designed for Pakistani students in the
social sciences. Rather didactic in tone, it contains a considerable volume of
information not just on aspects of Pakistan's social structure but on rural
development issues. It lacks the necessary footnotes and critical bibliography
to facilitate further inquiry.
391
The structure of marriage preferences: an account from Pakistani fiction.
Veena Das. Man (n.s.), vol. 8, no. 1 (March 1973), p. 3045.
A study from an anthropological perspective of preferred marriage patterns in
Pakistan, especially the preference for patrilateral parallel cousin marriage. The
author uses as her data material from a number of popular Urdu novels
published between 1947 and 1969 and discusses the rules which seem to be
followed in the arrangement of marriages. The khandan or lineage is seen as
forming a unit the preservation of whose integrity the rules are meant to
maintain.
 Page 104
392
Marriage among Muslims: preference and choice in northern Pakistan.
Hastings Donnan. Delhi: Hindustan Publishing Corporation; Leiden, The
Netherlands: E. J. Brill, 1988. 231p. 3 maps. bibliog.
This is a technical study by an anthropologist which addresses the question of
the basis on which Muslim families express preference in choosing marriage
partners. Basing himself on fieldwork in Rawalpindi district, Donnan argues that
although there is an expressed preference for patrilateral cousin marriage in
reality many non-kin factors enter into the picture and that these must be
incorporated into the analysis.
393
The sufi as saint, curer, and exorcist in modern Pakistan.
Katherine Ewing. Contributions to Asian Studies, vol. 18 (1984), p. 10614.
On the basis of fieldwork carried out in the mid-1970s, the author discusses
the role of the sufi saint or pir as a healer. She describes the healing
techniques employed and shows how the pir makes no distinction between the
physical and the spiritual domains in his diagnoses and cures.
394
Caste, patti and faction in the life of a Punjab village.
Inayat Ullah. Sociologus (n.s.), vol. 8, no. 2 (1958), p. 17086.
The author describes the social organization of a Jat-dominated village in
northern Punjab. He regards caste as the basic unit of social life, and after that
the patti or group of landowning families originally created for revenue
collection purposes. He also discusses the emergence during the twenty years
preceding the study of factional conflict in the village.
395
Age and social status at marriage, Karachi, Pakistan, 196164 and 1980: a
comparative study.
J. Henry Korson, M. A. Sabzwari. Journal of Comparative Family Studies, vol.
15, no. 2 (Summer 1984), p. 25779.
Since 1961 marriages have been supposed to be registered with the local
authorities. The authors compare sample registrations for 196164 and 1980 in
the urban environment of Karachi and conclude that the age of marriage
increased significantly for females but hardly at all for males. These findings are
correlated with levels of education and employment. Other aspects of marriage
are also discussed.
396
Endogamous marriage in a traditional Muslim society: West Pakistan. a study in
intergenerational change.
J. Henry Korson. Journal of Comparative Family Studies, vol. 2, no. 2 (Autumn
1971), p. 14555.
A study of the incidence of cousin marriage among a limited sample of
university students and their parents in Karachi and Lahore. The results show a
decline across generations from around 40 per cent to half that level.
 Page 105
397
South Asian intellectuals and social change: a study of the role of vernacular-
speaking intelligentsia.
Edited by Yogendra K. Malik. New Delhi: Heritage, 1982. 352p. bibliog.
This volume contains a study by Bilal Hashmi and Hasan Nawaz Gardezi of
Urdu-speaking intellectuals and their structural and cultural context. The
authors concentrate particularly on Shah Wali Allah, Iqbal and Faiz Ahmed Faiz
in their discussion of the social origins of ideas.
398
Pir and murshid: an aspect of religious leadership in West Pakistan.
Adrian Mayer. Middle Eastern Studies, vol. 3, no. 2 (Jan. 1967), p. 1609.
A brief but suggestive article by an anthropologist on one of the central
institutions of rural life in Pakistan, that of the often hereditary spiritual guide
or leader. The author distinguishes two roles which are often combined in the
same individual but which nevertheless have separate places, that of the
spiritual guide or murshid on the one hand and that of the healer or pir on the
other. He also discusses their relations with their disciples or murids and their
political role.
399
Anthropology in Pakistan: recent socio-cultural and archaeological perspectives.
Edited by Stephen Pastner, Louis Flam. Cornell University, South Asia Program,
1982. 230p. (South Asia Occasional Papers and Theses, no. 8).
This is a collection of seventeen short papers mostly based on fieldwork in the
1970s by the younger generation of US anthropologists and archaeologists
working on Pakistan, some of whom have not published extensively so far. The
work of several Pakistani scholars is also included. The book is divided
approximately equally between the two disciplines. Change and adaptation are
common themes to both anthropological and archaeological sections.
400
The sweepers of Slaughterhouse: conflict and survival in a Karachi
neighbourhood.
Pieter Streefland. Assen, The Netherlands: Van Gorcum, 1979. 150p. map.
bibliog.
Originally a dissertation and as such published in Dutch in 1975, this is an
anthropological study based on extensive field research in 197071 of a group
of Christian Punjabi sweepers in a crowded slum area of Karachi. Streefland
describes the setting for their lives, the role of kinship, the way conflicts
emerge and are handled, and the types of leadership that exist. Although
regular work ensures a degree of economic security for the time being,
Streefland describes their situation as subordinate and marginal.
401
Zat and qoum in Punjabi society: a contribution to the problem of caste.
Parvez A. Wakil. Sociologus (n.s.), vol. 22, nos 12 (1972), p. 3848.
Wakil argues in this theoretical article that the concept of caste is not
appropriate when trying to conceptualize in sociological terms the terms zat
and qoum which are used in Pakistan Punjab to describe various types of
status and occupational groupings, as well
 Page 106
as the network of reciprocal obligations called seyp. He suggests that the
possibility of individual mobility and the looseness of endogamy indicate that
the notion of caste is not appropriate. He thus reaches similar conclusions,
although by a different route, to those of Alavi in his article on 'Kinship in West
Punjab villages' (q.v.). Another article by Wakil discusses biraderi, which in
some respects is the basis of an alternative approach to the understanding of
social organization: 'Explorations into the kin-networks of the Punjabi society: a
preliminary statement', Journal of Marriage and the Family, vol. 32, no. 4 (Nov.
1970), p. 7007.
Peoples of South Asia.
See item no. 12.
Pakistan: society and culture.
See item no. 13.
Muslim peoples: a world ethnographic survey.
See item no. 23.
Eine sozio-ethno-religiöse Minderheit: die Christen West-Pakistans. (A
socioethno-religious minority: the Christians in West Pakistan.)
See item no. 310.
A Punjabi village in Pakistan.
See item no. 408.
Women's seclusion and men's honor: sex roles in north India, Bangladesh, and
Pakistan.
See item no. 437.
Rural women and the family: a study of a Punjabi village in Pakistan.
See item no. 442.
Elite politics in an ideological state.
See item no. 464.
Lebensverhältnisse ländlicher Familien in Westpakistan: eine Typisierung
ländlicher Haushalte als Grundlage für entwicklungspolitische MaBnahmen,
dargestellt am Beispiel von sechs Dörfern im Distrikt Peshawar, Westpakistan.
(Conditions of life of rural families in West Pakistan: a typology of rural
households as a foundation for political development measures, based on the
example of six villages in Peshawar district, West Pakistan.)
See item no. 637.
Rural-urban migration and the urban poor in Pakistan.
See item no. 638.
 Page 107

Regional
402
Millennium and charisma among Pathans: a critical essay in social
anthropology.
Akbar S. Ahmed. London; Henley, England; Boston: Routledge & Kegan Paul,
1976. 173p. bibliog.
The first of Ahmed's major anthropological studies, this is an extended
theoretical critique of Barth's work on the Pathans, Political leadership among
Swat Pathans (q.v.). Ahmed argues against the static and individualist thrust
which he sees as typifying Barth's approach, and argues instead for one which
gives weight to a dynamic view of Pukhtun society. The Wali of Swat's
emergence as a leader is used as the major example to indicate the
advantages of this alternative approach.
403
Pukhtun economy and society: traditional structure and economic development
in a tribal society.
Akbar S. Ahmed. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1980. 406p. 9 maps.
bibliog.
The author of this major study of Pukhtun society is both an academic and a
senior official of the Pakistan government. His work is an attempt to look at the
relationship between the lives of members of a particular Pukhtun tribe, the
Mohmand, and the ideal code of Pukhtun society, pukhtunwali. The study was
carried out in two villages, one in a remote tribal area, the other in the so-
called settled areas of the Peshawar valley. The author concludes that at the
time of his fieldwork in 197576 the values of Pukhtun society were still effective
in both places but that they were likely to change sharply in the years to come
as the villages were penetrated economically by the wider world.
404
Religion and politics in Muslim society: order and conflict in Pakistan.
Akbar S. Ahmed. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press, 1983.
215p. 4 maps. bibliog.
Ahmed pursues his long-standing concern with the interaction of religious
ideas, the structure of tribal society and the impact of the wider political
environment through an extended case-study of events in the South Waziristan
tribal agency, where a tribal revolt occurred in the 1970s. Particular attention is
tribal agency, where a tribal revolt occurred in the 1970s. Particular attention is
paid to the position of the government-appointed political agent, a role in fact
fulfilled by the author during part of the period under study.
405
Features of person and society in Swat: collected essays on Pathans.
Fredrik Barth. London; Boston; Henley, England: Routledge & Kegan Paul,
1981. 190p. 4 maps. bibliog. (Selected essays of Fredrik Barth, vol. 2).
Barth, well known for his work on the social structure of the Pukhtuns, brings
together in this volume essays on the subject published between 1956 and
1971. An extended final chapter, 'Swat Pathans reconsidered', previously
unpublished, includes his reply to critics of his earlier work, notably Akbar S.
Ahmed (Millennium and charisma among Pathans: a critical essay in social
anthropology [q.v.]) and Talal Asad.
 Page 108
406
Political leadership among Swat Pathans.
Fredrik Barth. London: Athlone Press; New York: Humanities Press, 1959.
143p. 2 maps. bibliog. (London School of Economics Monographs on Social
Anthropology, no. 19).
Barth's seminal study of the Swat Pukhtuns concerns itself with the question of
how the political system of the area he studied in northern Pakistan operated in
a atmosphere where the prevalent values were those of 'freedom and
rebellion'. An extended critique can be found in Millennium and charisma
among Pathans: a critical essay in social anthropology, by Akbar S. Ahmed
(q.v.).
407
Rusticus loquitur, or the old light and the new in the Punjab village.
Malcolm Lyall Darling. London: Oxford University Press, 1930. 400p. map.
Darling was a British official who spent much of his career in the 1920s working
in the rural areas of the Punjab to encourage rural development through
cooperation and in other ways. His books were designed, as he writes in the
preface, 'to ascertain what the peasant does and what he thinks on each
question, believing that this is an indispensable preliminary to all schemes for
his betterment.' Most of this book records his impressions as he went the
length and breadth of the Punjab on horseback in 192829. Little escapes his
attention, whether it be the price of jewellery or the changes in the power of
the moneylender. As the title of the book indicates, he sees a contrast between
different areas of the province in terms of the progress of social change. On the
whole, he considers the western parts to be less developed. Darling was the
author of two related books on Punjab society: The Punjab peasant in
prosperity and debt (London: Oxford University Press, 1925); and Wisdom and
waste in the Punjab village (London: Oxford University Press, 1934). His
autobiography, Apprentice to power: India 19041906 (London: Hogarth Press,
1961), is a delightful account of his life as a young man in the Punjab before
the first world war, especially in Dera Ghazi Khan in the south-west of the
province.
408
A Punjabi village in Pakistan.
Zekiye Eglar. New York: Columbia University Press, 1960. 240p. 3 maps.
bibliog.
An ethnographic account of a village in Gujrat district in northern Punjab based
on an extended stay in the early 1950s. All aspects of village life are covered,
but special attention is paid to the family and to the position of women. The
author, as both a woman and a Muslim, had privileged access to the domestic
sphere. The main analytical focus of the book is on the institution of vartan
bhanji, the exchange of gifts and favours particularly at the time of marriages,
which serves to integrate village society.
 Page 109
409
Zentrale Gewalt in Nager (Karakorum): politische Organisationsformer,
ideologische Begründungen des Königtums und Veränderungen in der
Moderne. (Central power in Nager [Karakorum]: forms of political organization
and ideological foundations of kingship and transformations in the modern
period.)
Jürgen Frembgen. Wiesbaden, West Germany: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1985.
241p. 5 maps. bibliog. (Beiträge zur Südasienforschung Südasien-Institut
Universität Heidelberg, no. 103).
This is a work of political anthropology which discusses state forms in the
Karakoram region in the northern mountains and in particular the kingdom that
existed in Nager for several centuries until its absorption into Pakistan in 1972.
Frembgen discusses the segmentary and unitary elements within the state.
410
Social structure of Pakistan's Brahui-Baluchi population.
Yuri Gankovsky. Journal of South Asian and Middle Eastern Studies, vol. 5, no.
4 (Summer 1982), p. 5773.
A general account of the Baluchi and Brahui peoples. The article is a useful
synthesis of material from a wide range of census and other sources.
411
Guardians of the Khaibar: the social organization and history of the Afridis of
Pakistan.
David M. Hart. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1985. 208p. 6 maps. bibliog.
This is a study by an anthropologist whose approach is very much that of the
traditional ethnographer, although in the circumstances in which he had to
work in the late 1970s he had to rely heavily on interview and historical
material rather than on direct observation. The Afridi are the Pukhtun tribe
which lives in the area of the Khyber pass. Hart discusses their kinship
organization and history, and compares Pukhtun tribal structure to that of the
Berber in North Africa.
412
Relocation of a Punjab Pakistan community.
John J. Honigmann. Middle East Journal, vol. 8, no. 4 (Autumn 1954), p.
42944.
This is a detailed anthropological study of a village established on newly
irrigated land in the Thai region of West Punjab. Most of the inhabitants were
from Ludhiana district in East Punjab and had come as refugees in 1947.
Honigmann takes an optimistic view of the village's development.
413
Panjab castes.
Denzil Ibbetson. Delhi: B. R. Publishing Corporation, 1974. 338p.
First published as a separate volume in 1916, this was originally part of the
1881 Census Report where it was entitled 'The races, castes and tribes of the
Panjáb'. A classic of colonial ethnography, it displays the official urge to classify
the people who made up the population of the Indian empire and to define the
characteristics which supposedly distinguished one group from another. After
an initial chapter discussing general features of caste in the Punjab (which at
this point included much of what is now the North-West Frontier Province),
Ibbetson discusses in detail a very large
 Page 110
number of social groups, making comments on their traditions, practices and
way of life.
414
Generosity and jealousy: the Swat Pukhtun of northern Pakistan.
Charles Lindholm. New York: Columbia University Press, 1982. 321p. bibliog.
An anthropological case-study of a Pukhtun village in the Swat valley of
northern Pakistan. Lindholm uses a range of techniques derived from
anthropology and psychology but acknowledges in his introduction the singular
depth of insight derived from his close friendship and cooperation with one
particular individual in the village. Lindholm's central concern is to uncover the
basic structure of Pukhtun society and culture and in particular the tension
between the value attached in it to hospitality and the fierce competiton which
is otherwise characteristic. He finds at least part of the answer to lie in the
value attached to friendship.
415
Astor: eine Ethnographie. (Astor: an ethnography.)
Adam Nayyar. Wiesbaden, West Germany: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1986. 120p.
map. bibliog. (Beiträge zur Südasienforschung Südasien-Institut Universität
Heidelberg, vol. 88)
Astor is a valley settlement on the northern side of Nanga Parbat in northern
Pakistan. Nayyar's account of the people that live there concentrates on their
traditional world-view and religious practices, especially the role of the shaman.
He also discusses the recent impact of Islam on the region. Appendices give
the text and German translations of representative shaman and lineage songs.
416
Livestock symbolism and pastoral ideology among the Kafirs of the Hindu Kush.
Peter Parkes. Man (n.s.) vol. 22, no. 4 (Dec. 1987), p. 63760.
A specialist exercise in cultural anthropology which looks at the ritual and the
moral values of Kalasha (or Kafir) pastoralists of Chitral. This tiny non-Muslim
group makes livestock husbandry an exclusively male activity and links this
division of labour to a dichotomy of the natural environment into male and
female domains.
417
Baluch fishermen in Pakistan.
Stephen Pastner. Asian Affairs, vol. 9 (o.s. vol. 65), no. 2 (June 1978), p.
Stephen Pastner. Asian Affairs, vol. 9 (o.s. vol. 65), no. 2 (June 1978), p.
1617.
This is a descriptive article for a more general audience by a professional
anthropologist who spent time among the fishermen of the Baluchistan coast in
197677. He describes an adaptable group who are broadly content with their
life despite increasing pressure from the outside world.
418
The competitive saints of the Baluch.
Stephen L. Pastner. Asian Affairs, vol. 11 (o.s. vol. 67), no. 1 (Feb. 1980), p.
3742.
Pastner here provides a brief but evocative sketch of the role of Baluchi sufis in
the life of the nomads of Baluchistan.
 Page 111
419 Agriculture, kinship and politics in southern Baluchistan.
Stephen Pastner, Carroll McC. Pastner. Man, (n.s.), vol. 7 (1972), p. 12836.
This article explores the complex relations between land-use practices,
especially irrigation, kinship and marriage, and politics in the Makran region of
southern Baluchistan. The authors draw special attention to the fluidity of
kinship ties and local political arrangements and see a link with a pattern of
land use in which the stress is on individual rather than group decision-making.
420
The social organization of the Marri Baluch.
Robert N. Pehrson, compiled and analysed by Fredrik Barth. New York:
Wenner-Gren Foundation for Anthropological Research, 1966. 127p. map.
bibliog. (Viking Fund Publication in Anthropology, no. 43).
The author died during the course of his fieldwork in 195455, and his rough
draft was revised subsequently by the distinguished anthropologist Fredrik
Barth. The Marri are a nomadic tribe who live mainly in north-east Baluchistan.
Pehrson stayed in their camps and collected data on such topics as kinship,
relations between the sexes, and tribal structure. As an ethnographic work it is
primarily of use for anthropologists, but the material would be accessible to the
non-specialist.
421
Rites and ceremonies of Hindus and Muslims.
Compiled by H. A. Rose. New Delhi: Amar Prakashan, 1983. 228p.
This typical piece of colonial ethnography was first published in 1908 and was
put together by the compiler from material in earlier census reports for the
Punjab. Topics covered include pregnancy, birth, betrothal, marriage and
death observances, with separate sections in each case for Hindus and
Muslims. A final chapter covers the subject of fictive kinship.
422
Ethnologie and Geschichte: Festschrift für Karl Jettmar. (Ethnology and history:
Festschrift for Karl Jettmar.)
Edited by Peter Snoy. Wiesbaden, West Germany: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1983.
654p. 2 maps. bibliog. (Beiträge zur Südasienforschung Südasien-Institut
Universität Heidelberg, vol. 86).
This Festschrift in honour of the leading foreign scholar of the northern regions
of Pakistan, includes contributions from 56 scholars from across the world.
Most are written in German but there are some in English and a couple in
French. For the most part they relate to the archaeology, ethnology and history
of the Hindu Kush region in Pakistan and Afghanistan.
423
The Jat of Pakistan.
Sigrid Westphal-Hellbusch, Heinz Westphal. Berlin: Duncker & Humblot, 1964.
110p. bibliog.
The Jats who are the subject of this piece of ethnographic research have little
if anything to do with the numerous Jat population of the Punjab but are a
nomadic tribe of the Indus delta. The authors describe the results of fieldwork
carried out in 195556, and examine topics such as tribal organization and
economic activities, as well as discussing links between the group and similar
tribes in Iraq.
 Page 112
The tigers of Baluchistan.
See item no. 14.
Mountain people.
See item no. 35.
Words for my brother: travels between the Hindu Kush and the Himalayas.
See item no. 75.
Mizh: a monograph on government's relations with the Mahsud tribe.
See item no. 195.
The last Wali of Swat: an autobiography as told to Fredrik Barth.
See item no. 273.
The profile of popular Islam in the Pakistani Punjab.
See item no. 356.
Die Religionen des Hindukusch. (The religions of the Hindukush.)
See item no. 367.
Class and power in a Punjabi village.
See item no. 385.
Pakistan society: Islam, ethnicity and leadership in South Asia.
See item no. 386.
Kinship in West Punjab villages.
See item no. 387.
The politics of dependency: a village in West Punjab.
See item no. 388.
Caste, patti and faction in the life of a Punjab village.
See item no. 394.
Zat and qoum in Punjabi society: a contribution to the problem of caste.
See item no. 401.
The endless day: some case material on Asian rural women.
See item no. 434.
 Page 113

Social Change and Social Issues

424
Settlement and social change in Asia.
Wolfram Eberhard. Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press, 1967. 492p.
maps. bibliog. (Collected Papers of Wolfram Eberhard, vol. 1).
Most of the papers in this volume deal with China but three are to do with
Pakistan. The first, 'Colony villages in the Punjab', reviews the manner in which
first the colonial and later the Pakistan government designed the canal colonies
in the Punjab. The second is a very useful bibliography, 'Studies on Pakistan's
social and economic conditions: a bibliographic note', which lists a number of
unpublished theses in Punjab universities completed since 1930 dealing with
these issues, mainly at village level. The third, 'Modern tendencies of Islam in
Pakistan', adds little to the subject.
425
Tourismus in Hunza: Beziehungen zwischen Gästern und Gastgebern. (Tourism
in Hunza: relations between guests and hosts.)
Jürgen Frembgen. Sociologus (n.s.), vol. 33, no. 2 (1983), p. 17485.
Hunza in the northern mountains of Pakistan is seen by many as a 'Shangri-la'
and it has attracted many tourists in recent years. In the spirit of recent
anthropological questioning of the impact of tourism on hitherto remote
groups, the author looks at the negative consequences in Hunza on the
integrity of local cultural patterns.
426
Poverty, voluntary organizations and social change: a study of an urban slum in
Pakistan.
Sabeeha Hafeez. Karachi: Royal Book Company, 1985. 248p. bibliog.
This is an action-oriented, although rather jargonized study of the Lyari area of
Karachi and of the local and outside voluntary groups which are active there.
Hafeez describes them collectively as 'change actors' and examines in detail
the type of work they undertake.
 Page 114
427
Drug addiction and rehabilitation of addicts in Pakistan.
Edited by Anwar-ul-Haq, Umar Farooq. Lahore: Pakistan Sociological
Association, 1979. 218p.
This volume contains 25 papers presented to a conference held in Faisalabad in
November 1977 on a problem that has since become more acute, especially as
a result of changes in the drug traffic following the Afghanistan crisis. The
participants were mainly sociologists and medical specialists; the subjects of
the papers ranged from analyses of the origins of drug addiction in society to
practical methods for controlling the growing of the opium poppy.
428
Rural development in Pakistan.
Akhter Hameed Khan, introduction by Akbar S. Ahmed. Lahore: Vanguard
Books, 1985. 307p.
Akhter Hameed Khan has been a major figure in Pakistani thinking on issues of
rural development, if often more of a gadfly than a mainstream policy-maker,
and this volume includes a selection of his papers and essays. The emphasis
throughout his career, from his time at the Comilla Academy of Rural
Development on, has been on decentralizing administration and increasing
popular involvement in development. One of the papers provides a brief
autobiography. The introduction by Akbar S. Ahmed is mainly biographical and
includes a note on the inside story of the Daudzai project.
429
Rural development in Pakistan.
Shoaib Sultan Khan. Delhi: Vikas, 1980. 161p.
The author of this study was at one time director of the Pakistan Academy of
Rural Development in Peshawar and reflects in this book on the meaning of
rural development in a country like Pakistan and appropriate strategies to
achieve it. Much of the volume is devoted to a consideration of one particular
effort to stimulate development in the Daudzai area of North-West Frontier
Province in the early 1970s through encouraging cooperation between officials
and the local population (see previous entry). The writer was particularly
influenced by the earlier work of Akhter Hameed Khan.
430
Cultural barriers to Pakistan's quest for unity.
Stephen Pastner. Journal of Developing Societies, vol. 3, no. 1 (April 1987), p.
2545.
An anthropologist's view of the tension within Pakistan between universalist
Islam and particularist ethnic traditions. Pastner argues that the short-term
measures taken by the government to reduce social and economic tensions, for
example the encouragement of labour export to the Middle East, may in the
end exacerbate some of the country's problems.
431
Pakistan's rural development.
Mushtaqur Rahman. Hong Kong: Asian Research Service, 1983. 175p. 14
maps. bibliog.
An evaluation by a geographer of the Integrated Rural Development
Programme introduced by Z. A. Bhutto in 1972. Following a general discussion
of rural development there are case-studies drawn from all regions of Pakistan.
The author gives a pessimistic assessment of the programme which he sees as
being imposed from above and proposes an alternative approach based on
greater popular participation.
 Page 115
Squatter settlements in Pakistan: the impact of upgrading.
See item no. 684.
Between basti dwellers and bureaucrats: lessons in squatter settlement
upgrading in Karachi.
See item no. 689.
Women and Society
432
Women in the Muslim world.
Edited by Lois Beck, Nikki Keddie. Cambridge, Massachusetts; London: Harvard
University Press, 1978. 698p. bibliog.
Despite the title, most of this volume is concerned with the Middle East, and
there is only one essay on Pakistan, an anthropological study by Carroll McC.
Pastner on 'The status of women and property on a Baluchistan oasis in
Pakistan'. In the first section, 'General perspectives on legal and socio-
economic change', there are some references to Pakistani material.
433
Nizam-i-Islam: processes and conflicts in Pakistan's programme of Islamisation,
with special reference to the position of women.
Lucy Carroll. Journal of Comparative and Commonwealth Politics, vol. 20, no. 1
(March 1982), p. 5795.
The author is concerned with the difficulties created by efforts to Islamize
Pakistan's legal system and uses a detailed case-study of the family law
position of women to illustrate her points.
434
The endless day: some case material on Asian rural women.
Edited by T. Scarlett Epstein, Rosemary A. Watts. Oxford, England; New York;
Toronto; Sydney; Paris; Frankfurt: Pergamon Press, 1981. 179p. bibliog.
(Pergamon International Library, Women in Development Series, vol. 3).
Two chapters in this volume, both with an anthropological orientation, are
concerned with Pakistan. The first, by Akbar S. Ahmed and Zeenat Ahmed,
entitled '''Mor" and "Tor": binary and opposing models of Pukhtun
womanhood', discusses the role of women in upholding the basic Pukhtun
values embodied in the notion of pukhtunwali. The second, by Naveed-i-Rahat,
'The role of women in reciprocal relationships in a Punjab village', sees a similar
'The role of women in reciprocal relationships in a Punjab village', sees a similar
role for women in a village near Islamabad, although she also emphasizes the
ability of women to manipulate those values to their own ends.
435
Women in Muslim family law.
John L. Esposito. Syracuse, New York: Syracuse University Press, 1982. 155p.
bibliog.
Esposito discusses the issues involved in the position of women under Muslim
family
 Page 116
law, and the dilemmas facing those who wish to change it. He uses Pakistan
and Egypt as his principal case-studies.
436
The metropolitan women in Pakistan: studies.
Sabeeha Hafeez. Karachi: Royal Book Company, 1981. 406p.
This is a collection of six related studies on the conditions of life of women in
Karachi. The author is a sociologist who conducted sample surveys to collect
much of the data used. Groups studied include career-oriented middle-class
women, factory workers, housewives and slum-dwellers.
437
Women's seclusion and men's honor: sex roles in north India, Bangladesh, and
Pakistan.
David G. Mandelbaum. Tucson, Arizona: University of Arizona Press, 1988.
153p. bibliog.
Mandelbaum was a distinguished American anthropologist, and this was the
last book he wrote before his death in 1987. In it he takes an anthropological
perspective on the position of women in South Asia and on the significance of
seclusion or purdah. He argues that in South Asia, as elsewhere, gender
relations are linked to other cultural themes, especially to men's honour and
prestige. An earlier highly influential work on the same subject, although it
deals only with Muslim women in and around Delhi, is by Cora Vreede-de
Stuers, Parda: a study of Muslim women's life in northern India (Assen, The
Netherlands: Van Gorcum, 1968).
438
Women between cultures: the lives of Kinnaird College alumnae in British
India.
Michelle Maskiell. Syracuse, New York: Syracuse University, Maxwell School of
Citizenship and Public Affairs, 1984. 202p. 2 maps. bibliog. (Foreign and
Comparative Studies/South Asian series, no. 9).
Originally a thesis, this work looks first at the question of education for women
in colonial Punjab and the establishment of Kinnaird College in Lahore in 1913
as a missionary institution, and then at the graduates of the college and the
way their lives were altered. Maskiell concludes that despite the opportunities
that a college education offered, the basic structure of family-centred life
remained the norm for most.
439
The extended family: women and political participation in India and Pakistan.
Edited by Gail Minault. Delhi: Chanakya, 1981. 312p.
The theme of this collection of essays is political participation rather than the
extended family in the sociological sense. Two papers deal with Muslim women
during the pre-independence period, and one with women's groups and the
1961 Muslim Family Laws Ordinance in Pakistan.
440
Women of Pakistan: two steps forward, one step back?
Edited by Khawar Mumtaz, Farida Shaheed. London; Atlantic Highlands, New
Jersey: Zed Press, 1987. 196p. bibliog.
A pioneering work by two women academics and activists on the history of
women's movements in Pakistan, particularly the Women's Action Forum. After
an account of
 Page 117
the general position of women, the editors, who are in fact primarily
responsible for the whole book, describe the activities of the forum in opposing
the Zia régime's policies towards women.
441
Purdah: separate worlds and symbolic shelter.
Hanna Papanek. Comparative Studies in Society and History, vol. 15, no. 3
(June 1973), p. 289325.
The author uses published material on India and Pakistan, and her own
substantial experience of life in Pakistan to discuss the pattern of purdah in
South Asia among Muslim and Hindu communities, and the way it meshes with
systems of status, dependency, and the maintenance of moral standards.
442
Rural women and the family: a study of a Punjabi village in Pakistan.
Abdur Rauf. Journal of Comparative Family Studies, vol. 18, no. 3 (Autumn
1987), p. 40315.
Based on a study of a village in Faisalabad district, the article delineates the
subordinate position of women within the family, especially in matters of
property. It identifies a gap between expressed attitudes and actual practice.
443
Women of South Asia: a guide to resources.
Carol Sakala. Millwood, New York: Kraus International Publications, 1980.
517p.
Besides a good range of bibliographical entries, including articles and theses as
well as books, this guide includes a chapter by Emily Hodges, 'Libraries,
archives and other resources in Pakistan for the study of women', p. 43747.
444
Pakistani women: a socioeconomic and demographic profile.
Edited by Nasra M. Shah, foreword by Syed Nawab Haider Naqvi. Islamabad:
Pakistan Institute of Development Economics; Honolulu, Hawaii: East-West
Population Institute, East-West Center, 1986. 412p. map. bibliog.
This substantial contribution brings together data from a wide range of census
and other survey sources to produce as comprehensive a picture as possible of
the position of women in Pakistan. Besides collating the data, itself a major
task, the contributors apply appropriate analytical techniques to achieve as
accurate and dynamic a picture as possible. The first part of the book deals
accurate and dynamic a picture as possible. The first part of the book deals
with the demographic position, while in the second part topics such as health,
education, employment and family planning issues are discussed. A useful
appendix reviews all the relevant census and other data sources.
Women's status and fertility change in Pakistan.
See item no. 303.
A Punjabi village in Pakistan.
See item no. 408.
 Page 118
Islamic reassertion, in Pakistan: the application of Islamic laws in a modern
state.
See item no. 522.
 Page 119

Politics
General
445
Pakistan general elections: 1970
Iftikhar Ahmad. Lahore: South Asian Institute, Punjab University, 1976. 159p.
bibliog.
After a general review of previous elections in Pakistan, this work provides
separate chapters on the contestants, the issues, the campaign and the results
of Pakistan's first ever general election. The final two chapters look at the
results in terms of socioeconomic factors and at trends in political leadership as
revealed by the elections. Within the confines of a narrowly based election
study, there is much useful material and analysis.
446
Government and politics in Pakistan.
Mushtaq Ahmad. Karachi: Space Publishers, 1970. 3rd ed. 392p. bibliog.
A well-established and reliable, if old-fashioned textbook on the subject. Ahmad
treats each phase of Pakistan's political history in turn, from the parliamentary
period before 1958 to the military rule of General Yahya Khan. For each phase
he reviews critically the institutional developments and the economic and social
policies pursued. There is however little discussion of the social background.
447
Contemporary Pakistan: politics, economy and society.
Edited by Manzooruddin Ahmed. Durham, North Carolina: Carolina Academic
Press, 1980. 269p.
The papers collected in this volume were originally presented at a conference
in New York in 1978, with contributions arranged thematically into sections on
politics, economy, and society. Many of them are concerned specifically, and
often from a distinctly critical position, to review the Bhutto period and the
1977 elections. The
 Page 120
immediacy of response is both a strength and a weakness. Other papers,
particularly in the last section, take a longer-term perspective.
448
Pakistan: human rights violations and the decline of the rule of law.
London: Amnesty International, 1982. 57p.
Amnesty International's report covers constitutional developments in the period
after the coup of 1977 and the incidence of arbitrary arrests, imprisonments
without trial, torture and death in police custody, and other aspects of what it
regards as unacceptable abuses of human rights.
449
Asian Survey.
Berkeley, California: University of California, Institute of International Studies,
1961 . monthly.
This widely read journal carries articles in the first instance from academic
analysts but also from other specialists in the domestic and international affairs
of Asia. There are frequent contributions on Pakistan and on the South Asian
region. Each February there is an article reviewing the previous year's
developments in the country.
450
The Jamaat-i-Islami of Pakistan: political thought and political action.
Kalim Bahadur. Delhi: Chetana, 1977. 228p. bibliog.
A critical study of the Jamaat-i-Islami, the fundamentalist political organization
founded by Maulana Maududi. The book deals successively with the
antecedents of the Jamaat and its early activities before independence; the
role of the Jamaat in Pakistan's politics up to 1971, especially its efforts to
establish an Islamic constitution, and its organizational structure and ideology.
451
The state, religion and ethnic politics: Afghanistan, Iran and Pakistan.
Edited by Ali Banuazizi, Myron Weiner. Syracuse, New York: Syracuse University
Press, 1986. 390p. 6 maps.
This useful collection of essays contains contributions on Pakistan from four
leading US scholars, Leonard Binder, Stephen Cohen, Selig Harrison, and John
Esposito. The themes of the work's title are addressed in the context of
Pakistan's past and present situation.
452
Zia's Pakistan: politics and stability in a frontline state.
Edited by Craig Baxter. Boulder, Colorado; London: Westview Press, 1985.
122p. (Westview Special Studies on South and Southeast Asia).
The American academics who produced this set of papers reflect on what
appeared at the time to be a turning point in Zia's rule when he introduced in
1985 a measure of civilian participation. The central theme of the collection is
the issue of the degree of legitimacy enjoyed by the Zia régime among
different groups, and the factors that might affect that legitimacy, for example
the Afghan situation and economic issues.
453
Pakistan: the gathering storm.
Benazir Bhutto. Delhi: Vikas, 1983. 116p.
This reproduces a political manifesto issued by Benazir Bhutto when President
Zia was
 Page 121
at the height of his power and the Pakistan People's Party was officially
proscribed. In vigorous language she condemns the Zia régime for its
dictatorial ways and puts forward the demand for a return to democracy on the
basis of the 1973 constitution. She also sets out a programme for economic
and foreign policy.
454
"If I am assassinated ...".
Zulfikar Ali Bhutto, foreword by Pran Chopra. Delhi: Vikas, 1979. 240p.
Written secretly while he was on trial and eventually smuggled out of prison,
this is Bhutto's defence of himself against the accusations that had been made
against his government by General Zia. Besides responding vigorously to the
charges of election rigging, etc., he goes on the offensive and accuses his
opponents of being in league with foreign powers (by which is clearly meant
the USA) alarmed at his popularity and at his nuclear policies.
455
Pakistan: a political study.
Keith Callard. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1957. 355p. bibliog.
An early but useful study of Pakistan's political system in which Callard sees
Pakistan as a country in search of a political identity of its own and questions
the necessary applicability of the norms of Western democracy. Starting from
independence he discusses party politics, constitution-making and the federal
structure, and the role of Islam. Appendices summarize the 1956 constitution
and list central government ministers and provincial governors and chief
ministers.
456
Pakistan: transition from military to civilian rule.
Golam W. Choudhury. Buckhurst Hill, England: Scorpion, 1988. 256p. bibliog.
Completed in July 1988, although there is a brief epilogue which refers to the
death of President Zia the following month, this is a sympathetic account of
what the author calls Zia's 'great experiment of blending Islam and democracy'
in Pakistan. Some of the book is descriptive of events in the last few years,
especially in the constitutional field, but there is also a substantial amount of
background information and discussion. Two long chapters discuss the
Islamization process.
457
457
Pakistan: the roots of dictatorship. The political economy of a praetorian state.
Edited by Hassan Gardezi, Jamil Rashid. London: Zed Press, 1983. 394p. map.
bibliog.
A collection of essays by radical Pakistani academics, most of whom were
working abroad in 1983. The focus is the persistence of military rule and its
origins in the country's social and economic structure. There are sections on
the external dimension, particularly what the contributors see as Pakistan's
dependent position vis-à-vis the United States, and on Islam and the
manipulation of ideology. The book was published in Pakistan in abbreviated
form as Pakistan: the unstable state.
 Page 122
458
Imperialism and revolution in South Asia.
Edited by Kathleen Gough, Hari P. Sharma. New York; London: Monthly Review
Press, 1973. 470p.
This collection of essays by radical scholars includes several on Pakistan. The
one that has had the greatest influence on subsequent scholarship is the
important piece by Hamza Alavi on 'The state in postcolonial societies: Pakistan
and Bangladesh'. Originally published in New Left Review, no. 74 (July-Aug.
1972), this challenges the appropriateness of traditional Marxist views on the
position of the state in Asian and African countries and argues that because of
the particular configuration of class forces in many such states, including
Pakistan, the state and the military-bureaucratic oligarchy that controls it has a
degree of relative autonomy from the main propertied classes. There are also
useful articles by Hassan N. Gardezi, Feroz Ahmed, and Saghir Ahmad.
459
State and ideology in the Middle East and Pakistan.
Fred Halliday, Hamza Alavi. London: Macmillan, 1988. 267p.
The only chapter on Pakistan is in fact by Hamza Alavi: 'Pakistan and Islam:
ethnicity and ideology', p. 64111. Alavi argues from a sociological perspective
that the Pakistan movement was about Muslim material interests rather than
Islam. The argument is presented mainly in historical terms, but there is some
discussion of the post-independence period and of the Zia years.
460
Politics in Pakistan: the struggle for legitimacy.
Louis D. Hayes. Boulder, Colorado: Westview; Epping, England: Bowker, 1984.
203p. bibliog.
The author argues in the course of this general study of Pakistani politics that
successive régimes have failed to achieve legitimacy for themselves both
because of the difficulties of locating a stable source of political authority within
the Islamic tradition and because of failures of political leadership since
independence. It would be suitable for a student readership.
461
Politics in the post-military state: some reflections on the Pakistani experience.
Gerald A. Heeger. World Politics, vol. 29, no. 2 (Jan. 1977), p. 24262.
This article, written before the Zia coup, addresses theoretical questions about
the ability of civilian régimes which come after periods of military rule to
establish firmly rooted democratic institutions. Pointing to the often arbitrary
and 'patrimonial' strategies pursued by Bhutto, Heeger was pessimistic about
the prospects.
462
Land to the tiller: the political economy of agrarian reform in South Asia.
Ronald J. Herring. New Haven, Connecticut, London: Yale University Press,
1983. 314p. 4 maps. bibliog.
A comprehensive study of the subject within the framework of which there is a
chapter devoted to Pakistan with the title 'Land ceilings in Pakistan: an
agrarian bourgeois revolution?'. Herring sees the reforms of the 1970s as part
of a process whereby the traditional landlord class was brought within the fold
of 'progressive, enlightened
 Page 123
gentry', without alienating its support from the régime. The author has covered
much of the same ground, with particular emphasis on the political dimension,
in 'Zulfikar Ali Bhutto and the "eradication of feudalism" in Pakistan',
Comparative Studies in Society and History, vol. 21, no. 4 (Oct. 1979), p.
51957.
463
Pakistan in crisis: an interview with Eqbal Ahmad.
Nubar Housepian. Race and Class, vol. 22, no. 2 (Autumn 1980), p. 12946.
Eqbal Ahmad is a well-known radical scholar who in this interview describes at
some length his immediate reactions to and analysis of the Zia régime. He sees
the situation in terms of simultaneous crises of legitimation, state power,
integration, economy and external relations. He draws particular attention to
divergence under Zia between the interests of the army and the bureaucracy.
464
Elite politics in an ideological state.
Asaf Hussain. Folkestone, England: Dawson, 1979. 212p. bibliog.
This is a fairly general study of Pakistan's politics from a sociological
perspective. Hussain first discusses the special quality of Pakistan as an
'ideological state', and the inappropriateness of using Western models of
government to assess and judge its political progress. He then devotes most of
the book to a detailed analysis of the existing political system, which he sees as
dominated by a number of élite groups which he lists as the landowning élites,
the bureaucratic élites, the religious élites, the industrial élites, the professional
élites and the military élites, before concluding that Pakistan will not progress
in a truly Islamic direction so long as the power of the élite remains
unchallenged.
465
Pakistan: Zia and after.
Anthony Hyman, Muhammed Ghayur, Naresh Kaushik. London: Asia Publishing
House, 1988. 137p.
This book was completed within a month of President Zia's death in August
1988 as a review of his years in power. It makes up in immediacy and vigorous
comment what it may lack in depth and reflectiveness.
466
Generals in politics: Pakistan 19581982.
Generals in politics: Pakistan 19581982.
Mohammad Asghar Khan. London; Canberra: Croom Helm, 1983. 230p.
The author himself is a retired Air Marshal and leader of a political party, the
Tehrik-i-Istiqlal. He claims to be vehemently opposed to any form of military
rule, although he played an ambiguous role in the events that led up to the
coup of 1977. His book is for the most part, however, an account and
justification of his own involvement in politics from 1968 on. It includes his
clashes with Bhutto as well as with Zia.
467
Interest groups and development: business and politics in Pakistan.
Stanley A. Kochanek. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1983. 393p. bibliog.
A detailed study of the place of business interest groups within the Pakistan
political system from a political science perspective. Kochanek concludes that
there has been very slow development of modern interest groups in Pakistan,
as opposed to the use of
 Page 124
more personal channels of influence, and that this is related to more general
characteristics of the Pakistan political system. There is also a great deal of
useful information on business in general.
468
Contemporary problems of Pakistan.
Edited by J. Henry Korson. Leiden, The Netherlands: E. J. Brill, 1974. 151p.
Although there is no indication of the fact, this volume is a reprint of a special
issue of the Journal of African and Asian Studies, vol. 8, nos 34 (July and
October 1973). Altogether seven articles are included, all of them studying one
or another aspect of Pakistan under Bhutto. Some are of an ephemeral nature
and their authors have written more recently on the same themes (for example
in Manzooruddin Ahmed, Contemporary Pakistan: politics, economy and
society, [q.v.]); others, for example those by Baxter on the political role of the
large landowning families in the Punjab and by Rahman on the treatment of
Islam in the 1973 constitution, are of more lasting significance.
469
Power and privilege: influence and decision-making in Pakistan.
Robert LaPorte, Jr. Berkeley, California; Los Angeles: University of California
Press, 1975. 225p. bibliog.
This is a study of the political élite in Pakistan and its participation in decision-
making during the period since 1947. LaPorte is concerned on the one hand to
argue that the élite is not as monolithic as it has sometimes been portrayed,
especially with the emergence of an articulate middle class, and on the other to
suggest that Pakistan politics were still in the early 1970s 'elite-controlled and
elite-directed'. The study is based to some extent on analysis of political
developments but also incorporates assessments gathered systematically from
American diplomats and others who had served in Pakistan.
470
Pakistan People's Party and Pakistan's democracy.
Maleeha Lodhi. Journal of South Asian and Middle Eastern Studies, vol. 6, no. 3
(Spring 1983), p. 2031.
The author discusses the reasons for the failure of the Pakistan People's Party
to mount an effective challenge to the régime of President Zia. These are
attributed to organizational and leadership weaknesses going back to the
formation of the party.
471
The politics of development: the case of Pakistan, 19471958.
Talukder Maniruzzaman. Dacca: Green Book House, 1971. 191p. bibliog.
Originally a thesis, this is a study of the period from independence up to the
1958 coup which argues that despite the obvious political instability of these
years a degree of 'political development', as defined in terms of prevalent
theories in the 1960s, did take place. Maniruzzaman is particularly concerned
with the development of interest groups.
 Page 125
472
Ethnic preference and public policy in developing states.
Edited by Neil Nevitte, Charles H. Kennedy. Boulder, Colorado: Lynne Rienner,
1986. 203p.
This book includes a chapter by Kennedy, published in a shorter version in
Asian Survey, vol. 24, no. 6, on the 'Politics of redistributional preference in
Pakistan' (p. 6393). In it he discusses the regional tensions within Pakistan
that have become more pronounced over the years, despite the unifying factor
of Islam. As in other countries which face similar problems, a system of quotas
has been introduced for recruitment to the public services and Kennedy
discusses the operation of the system.
473
The political economy of Pakistan 194785.
Omar Norman. London; New York: KPI, 1988. 218p. bibliog.
This is a political history of Pakistan which seeks to relate forms of government
to developments in the economy and consequent change, or lack of change, in
the class structure of the country. The book is in three parts dealing,
respectively, with the pre-1971 period, the Bhutto phase, and the Zia years up
to the lifting of Martial Law.
474
An analysis of contemporary Pakistani politics: Bhutto versus the military.
Sameel Ahmed Qureshi. Asian Survey, vol. 19, no. 9 (Sept. 1979), p. 91021.
Sameel Ahmed Qureshi is in fact a pseudonym for a Pakistani political observer
who writes here of the circumstances of Zulfikar Ali Bhutto's fall and in
particular his trial and execution. The author argues strongly for Bhutto's
innocence.
475
Public opinion and political development in Pakistan, 19471958.
Inamur Rahman. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1982. 282p. bibliog.
Originally a PhD thesis, this book uses the categories of American political
science. It makes perhaps excessive claims for the role of the press during the
period studied but nevertheless includes some useful material on public opinion
in the pre-Ayub Khan period. The work is based on a survey of four leading
newspapers of the time Dawn, Pakistan Times, Pakistan Observer, and Nawa-i-
Waqt (Urdu).
476
The military and politics in Pakistan, 194786.
Hasan-Askari Rizvi, foreword by Fazal Muqeem Khan. Lahore: Progressive,
1986. 3rd ed. 339p. bibliog.
Rizvi traces the history of the relationship between the army and the political
system of Pakistan from the situation in pre-independence India through the
various phases of civilian government and military rule up to the Zia period. He
attributes the frequency of military interventions to the weakness of Pakistan's
political institutions, but argues that military rule is not a solution. The third
edition is a substantially revised and extended version of the earlier editions
published in 1974 and 1976 respectively. Appendices include statements by
successive military rulers on why they are taking power.
 Page 126
477
The political system of Pakistan.
Khalid B. Sayeed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1967. 321p. 3 maps. bibliog.
Sayeed begins with the pre-1947 origins of Pakistan's politics before moving on
to a thematic analysis of the government system, the place of Islam, the
problem of regionalism, political parties, development in the rural sector, and
international relations. The framework of the study is a developmental
approach derived from the political science of the time.
478
Politics in Pakistan: the nature and direction of political change.
Khalid bin Sayeed. New York: Praeger, 1980. 194p. map.
An interesting general survey of Pakistan's political development which, unlike
Sayeed's earlier work (see previous entry), emphasizes the colonial origins of
the Pakistani state and the importance of the class basis of successive régimes.
Sayeed sees the Bhutto régime as Bonapartist in the Marxist sense in its efforts
to act as arbiter between class interests, and stresses the importance of the
petty bourgeoisie in its overthrow.
479
Political development in Pakistan.
Karl von Vorys. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1965. 341p.
The author starts his analysis from the assumptions that economic and social
change can come about only if there is an adequate political leadership capable
of giving direction and that such direction needs to be carefully planned. He
regards General Ayub Khan, who was in power at the time he wrote, as having
the necessary leadership qualities. The first part of the book sets out the
background to Pakistan's political system; in the second von Vorys discusses in
more detail the programmes adopted by Ayub. He concludes with an analysis
of the presidential election of 1965. Appendices include extracts from the 1962
constitution and President Ayub's inaugural address after his electoral victory.
480
Pakistan under martial law, 19771985.
Mohammad Waseem. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1987. 246p.
This is a revised collection of the author's contributions to the Muslim, one of
Pakistan's leading English-language newspapers, between 1983 and 1985. The
approach in fact is as much academic as journalistic and taken together the
articles form a connected analysis of Pakistan's politics during the Martial Law
period and more generally. There are also some useful sketches of a number of
leading Pakistani politicians.
481
Politics and the state in Pakistan.
Mohammad Waseem. Lahore: Progressive, 1989. 555p.
This is a substantial and important work on the state in Pakistan. The author
integrates his historical and theoretical material to provide an analysis of
Pakistan politics in terms of the role of the state as an initiator of economic
development on the one hand and as the focus of the struggle between classes
and regions on the other.
 Page 127
482
The March 1977 elections in Pakistan: where everyone lost.
M. G. Weinbaum. Asian Survey, vol. 17, no. 7 (July 1977), p. 599618.
A detailed account by an academic who was in Pakistan at the time of the
disputed elections. Weinbaum covers the immediate run up, the elections
themselves, and the early stages of the agitation by the Pakistan National
Alliance (PNA) which led eventually to the military coup. A more general review
of the political situation at the time by Lawrence Ziring can be found in the
same issue: 'Pakistan: the campaign before the storm', p. 58198.
483
The politics of Pakistan: a constitutional quest.
Richard S. Wheeler. Ithaca, New York; London: Cornell University Press, 1970.
346p. 3 maps. bibliog. (South Asian Political Systems).
An introductory account of Pakistan's politics which is centred on constitutional
questions and the search for consensus. The historical background and the
social and economic setting are covered, before detailed treatments of the
periods 194758 and 195869.
484
White paper on the performance of the Bhutto regime.
Islamabad: Government of Pakistan, 1979.4 vols.
Following the coup of July 1977 and the subsequent postponing of the
elections, the government of General Zia published a number of white papers
designed to show the Bhutto years in a negative light. The one referred to here
deals with allegations concerning Bhutto's personal conduct, the treatment of
the fundamental institutions of the state, the use of state power against his
opponents, and the economic policies pursued during the 197277 period.
Facsimiles of relevant documents are included. While the tone is harsh and the
documents have a clear political motivation, they are important sources for the
study of the period. Two earlier white papers published in 1978 dealt
respectively with the misuse of the media during the Bhutto period and the
allegations of rigging during the 1977 elections. Bhutto's response to the
earlier white papers is to be found in his ''If I am assassinated ..." (q.v.).
485
The states of South Asia: problems of national integration.
Edited by A. Jeyaratnam Wilson, Denis Dalton. London: C. Hurst, 1982. 343p.
A Festschrift for a distinguished scholar of South Asian politics, Professor W. H.
Morris-Jones, who himself worked primarily on India, this volume includes
articles on the pre-1947 origins of Pakistani political issues by Khalid bin
Sayeed, and on the condition of Pakistan at the beginning of the 1980s by
Ataur Rahman, as well as references in some of the other contributions.
486
Indian Muslim refugees in the politics of Pakistan.
Theodore P. Wright, Jr. Journal of Commonwealth and Comparative Politics,
vol. 12, no. 2 (July 1974), p. 189205.
This is a general review of the muhajirs or refugees who came from India in
1947 and their political fortunes. Wright deals especially with the situation
during the Ayub Khan years and with the refugees' position in Sindh, where
their dominance of Karachi and other urban areas led to considerable rivalry
with the local Sindhi population.
 Page 128
487
Pakistan in its fourth decade: current political, social, and economic situation
and prospects for the 1980s.
Edited by Wolfgang-Peter Zingel in collaboration with Stephanie Zingel-Avé
Lallemant. Hamburg: Deutsches Orient Institut, 1983. 374p. bibliog.
(Mitteilungen des Deutschen Orient-Instituts, no. 23).
A collection of papers based on a conference held in Hamburg in 1980 to
discuss the contemporary situation in Pakistan. Separate sections are devoted
to constitution and law, ideology and regionalism, the economy, and foreign
policy. The majority of the contributors are German or based in Germany, but
others are from Pakistan, Britain and North America. The book was reprinted in
Pakistan in two volumes in 1985 with the title Pakistan in the 80s (Lahore:
Vanguard Books).
488
Pakistan: the enigma of political development.
Lawrence Ziring. Boulder, Colorado: Westview Press; Folkestone, England:
Dawson, 1980. 294p. 2 maps. bibliog.
A general overview of Pakistan's political development which covers all the
main themes, including the dominance of the army and bureaucracy, ethnic
tensions, and problems of constitution-making. The enigma of the title refers to
Pakistan's failure to achieve a stable and legitimate political structure.
Pakistan: a nation in making.
See item no. 3.
Breaking the curfew: a political journey through Pakistan.
See item no. 56.
Passage to Peshawar: Pakistan between the Hindu Kush and the Arabian sea.
See item no. 73.
Can Pakistan survive? The death of a state.
See item no. 249.
Pakistan: military rule or people's power.
See item no. 250.
Pakistan under Bhutto 19711977.
See item no. 253.
Pakistan: failure in national integration.
See item no. 257.
Persistent praetorianism: Pakistan's third military regime.
See item no. 259.
The Ayub Khan era: politics in Pakistan, 19581969.
See item no. 262.
Pakistan: the long view.
See item no. 263.
Friends not masters: a political autobiography.
See item no. 275.
 Page 129
The battle of ideas in Pakistan.
See item no. 506.
Der IndischPakistanische Konflikt und seine wirtschaftlichen und sozialen
Kosten fü Pakistan in den Jahren 19581968. (The IndoPakistani conflict and its
economic and social costs for Pakistan in the years 19581968.)
See item no. 587.
Asian drama: an inquiry into the poverty of nations.
See item no. 608.
Pakistan: country report.
See item no. 611.
Land reforms in Pakistan: a historical perspective.
See item no. 666.
Rural development in Bangladesh and Pakistan.
See item no. 670.
Exports, politics, and economic development: Pakistan 19701982.
See item no. 671.
Regional
489
Focus on Baluchistan and Pushtoon question.
Edited by Feroz Ahmed. Lahore: People's Publishing House, 1975. 116p.
The articles included in this collection were originally published in Pakistan
Forum (a radical journal published in Canada) in 1973. The purpose of the
collection was to open up the regional question in the aftermath of the
secession of Bangladesh and to advocate a solution based on the rights of all
national groups in the country. The individual articles provide somewhat
general and rather brief accounts of the historical and social situation in the
two provinces of Baluchistan and North-West Frontier Province (NWFP).
490
Pakistan's western borderlands: the transformation of a political order.
Edited by Ainslie T. Embree. New Delhi: Vikas, 1977. 158p. 2 maps. bibliog.
A collection of papers originally presented to a seminar in New York on
developments in NWFP and Baluchistan. The linking theme is the analysis of
the stresses encountered as areas peripheral to the British Indian empire are
integrated into the new unit of Pakistan. The authors are historians and
anthropologists as well as political scientists, but it is the political theme that is
dominant.
 Page 130
491
Ethnic conflict in South Asia.
Edited by Asghar Ali Engineer. Delhi: Ajanta, 1987. 223p.
The rising tide of ethnic violence in South Asia is the focus of this collection of
papers presented originally to a conference in Nepal organized by a Sri Lankan
institute. There are seven contributions on Pakistan. Most of them deal with
the violence in Karachi and in Sindh more generally between Muhajirs,
Pukhtuns, and Sindhis.
492
In Afghanistan's shadow: Baluch nationalism and Soviet temptations.
Selig S. Harrison. New York; Washington, DC: Carnegie Foundation for
International Peace, 1981. 228p. 7 maps.
Selig Harrison, a scholar and a journalist, writes here of the strategic location of
the Baluch areas, which lie across the Iran-Pakistan border, and discusses the
desire in the region for political autonomy or independence. Although the
purpose of the book is to stimulate public debate in the United States on policy
towards the region and Harrison argues for a restricted role designed to limit
risk it also makes a significant contribution to a general understanding of
Baluchistan.
493
Centre-province relations in Pakistan under President Zia: the government's
and the opposition approaches.
C. G. P. Rakisits. Pacific Affairs, vol. 61, no. 1 (Spring 1988), p. 7897.
The author argues that President Zia's policy of Islamization was accompanied
by a degree of centralization which was seen by the smaller provinces as the
'Punjabization' of Pakistan society; this in turn provoked a degree of consensus
among the political parties on the need for an alternative approach to centre-
province relations. The author gives particular attention to developments in
Sindh.
494
The Baluchis and the Pathans.
Robert G. Wirsing. London: Minority Rights Group, 1981. 23p. map. bibliog.
A brief and succinct account of the past history and present position of these
two major ethno-linguistic groups in Pakistan (and also in Iran and
Afghanistan). It is designed to inform the reader of the political and economic
pressures to which they are currently subjected as a result of domestic and
international developments. Similar ground is covered by the same author's
'South Asia: the Baluch frontier tribes of Pakistan', in Robert G. Wirsing (ed.),
Protection of ethnic minorities: comparative perspectives (New York; Oxford;
Toronto; Sydney; Paris; Frankfurt: Pergamon Press, 1981), p. 277312.
The narrow smile: a journey back to the north-west frontier.
See item no. 68.
Indian Muslim refugees in the politics of Pakistan.
See item no. 486.
 Page 131

Islam and Politics

495
Islam and Pakistan.
Freeland Abbott. Ithaca, New York: Cornell University Press, 1968. 242p.
bibliog.
This is a relatively early treatment of the subject which besides relies entirely
on English-language sources and on translations. It nevertheless remains
valuable for its historical sweep and the warmth of its understanding of the
dilemmas inherent in interpreting new social realities through established
religious beliefs.
496
Parliament, parties, polls and Islam: issues in the current debate on religion
and politics in Pakistan.
Mumtaz Ahmad. American Journal of Islamic Social Sciences, vol. 2, no. 1 (July
1985), p. 1528.
A review of the debates in Pakistan over the structure and institutions of a
properly Islamic political system. The author is primarily concerned with the
debates during the Zia régime and the largely unsuccessful efforts of the
government to establish a consensus among the intellectual and political élite
on how to proceed.
497
Maulana Maududi and the Islamic state.
Sayed Riaz Ahmad. Lahore: People's Publishing House, 1976. 192p. bibliog.
Originally a doctoral thesis, this is a general study of Maududi's thinking on
political matters. Apart from expounding his principal views, as found especially
in Islamic law and constitution (q.v.), Ahmad examines the development of his
ideas against the background of changing political circumstances in Pakistan
and compares them with those of other advocates of an Islamic state.
498
The concept of an Islamic state: an analysis of the ideological controversy in
Pakistan.
Ishtiaq Ahmed. London: Frances Pinter, 1987. 235p. bibliog.
Ahmed reviews a number of positions taken by Pakistani writers since 1947 on
the question of how Quranic laws and injunctions could be made the
foundation of a political order. Although some of his subjects have been
studied more than once by earlier writers, Ahmed's work is valuable for its
systematic approach and for its interesting discussion of the relationship
between divine will and human reason.
499
The politics of Islamic reassertion.
Edited by Mohammed Ayoob. London: Croom Helm, 1981. 298p.
William Richter contributes the chapter on Pakistan to this collection of country
studies published in the wake of the Iranian revolution. Most of the chapter is
devoted to the measures introduced by the Zia régime and to their political
impact.
500
Pakistan's ideology and ideologues.
Ikram Azam. Lahore: Progressive, 1982. 177p. bibliog.
Ikram Azam is a prolific writer who is committed to the idea that Pakistan is
held
 Page 132
together by its Islamic ideology. The present work traces the emergence of the
ideology of Pakistan in the work of Jinnah, Iqbal, and other leading figures. The
book itself can best be seen as an ideological statement.
501
Religion and politics in Pakistan.
Leonard Binder. Berkeley, California, Los Angeles: University of California Press,
1961. 440p.
The focus of this important work is the framing of the constitution of 1956 and
the attempts by the ulama and religiously oriented politicians to make it what
they considered a genuinely Islamic one. Binder discusses in detail the
attitudes of the various groups and the successive compromises that were
reached, culminating in 1954 with the effective defeat of the ulama's position
in favour of a modernist approach. Two appendices reproduce the views of the
Board of Talimat-i-Islamia, the representative of the ulama.
502
L'Islam et l'état dans le monde d'aujourd'hui. (Islam and the state in the
contemporary world.)
Edited by Olivier Carré. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1982.
This collection of essays contains a chapter by Marc Gaborieau on 'Rôles
politiques de l'Islam au Pakistan' (p. 189203). He reviews the role of Islam in
Pakistan since its creation and looks at the tension between modernists,
traditionalists and fundamentalists. He covers the debates on the form of the
constitution and trends after 1977.
503
Modern Islamic political thought: the response of the Shi'i and Sunni Muslims
to the twentieth century.
Hamid Enayat. London: Macmillan, 1982. 225p.
This valuable work by an Iranian scholar concentrates on Egyptian and Iranian
writers but devotes substantial space to Maududi and makes some reference to
other South Asian writers such as Iqbal and Azad. The comparative framework
is useful.
504
Islamization: religion and politics in Pakistan.
John L. Esposito. The Muslim World. vol. 72, nos 34 (JulyOct. 982), p. 197223.
A review of changes introduced by the Zia régime up to 1982 in the fields of
A review of changes introduced by the Zia régime up to 1982 in the fields of
law, economics, education and the position of women, together with a brief
examination of the underlying ideological debate. The article is based on
published sources and on interviews conducted by the author with President
Zia and other leading figures in the régime.
505
The politics of sufism: redefining the saints of Islam.
Katherine Ewing. Journal of Asian Studies, vol. 42, no. 2 (Feb. 983), p. 25168.
In this interesting article based on fieldwork carried out in the mid-1970s, the
author discusses the policy of successive governments since 1958 towards the
hereditary saints or pirs who play such an important role in religious life in
Pakistan. Both Ayub Khan and Bhutto sought to bring the shrines under more
direct government control to limit their political power but at the same time to
allow the government to benefit from the
 Page 133
Islamic symbols associated with them. President Zia continued the same policy,
although his political strategy emphasized the role of the ulama rather than the
pirs. In the process of exercising greater control, the government has also
sought to redefine the role of the pir in terms of an educator rather than a
spiritual intermediary.
506
The battle of ideas in Pakistan.
Sibte Hasan. Karachi: Pakistan Publishing House, 1986. 280p.
A group of related articles by a well-known Pakistani critic and writer on the
theme of secularism, in which the author's concern is to link secularism as an
ideology to progressive social change. Hasan traces the development of
secularism historically as well as making comparisons with the situation in other
Muslim countries such as Egypt and Turkey. He concludes with two chapters
on the battle of ideas in modern Urdu literature and on Iqbal, his prototypical
humanist.
507
Islamization: an analysis of religious, political and social change in Pakistan.
Riaz Hassan. Middle Eastern Studies, vol. 21, no. 3 (July 1985), p. 26384.
A review of the Islamization process during the Zia period which takes seriously
the views and motives of the proponents of Islamization in Pakistan while at
the same time placing them in social context. The article concludes that
ironically even if it were successful Islamization might succeed in creating new
social schisms in place of those it had overcome. Appendices include the
preamble to the 1973 constitution and the text of a statement by a group of
ulama in 1951 on the basic principles of an Islamic state.
508
Islamisition of Pakistan.
Afzal Iqbal. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1986. 198p. bibliog.
This is a review by a prominent writer and former diplomat of the issues
involved in the question of Islamization in Pakistan. The author outlines what
he considers to be the main thrust of the movement for Pakistan and examines
the debates over how Pakistan's character as a Muslim society should be
incorporated into constitutional provisions. He examines the Zia period in detail
up to 1985. The Islamic provisions of Pakistan's successive constitutions are
included as appendices.
509
Islam, politics and the state: the Pakistan experience.
Edited by Asghar Khan. London: Zed Press, 1985. 281p.
A collection of essays critical of the way Islam has been used and interpreted
by the rulers of Pakistan, especially in the period since 1977. The editor is a
prominent political figure, and the authors of the individual essays are all well-
established academics, mostly with a radical orientation. The subjects range
from general overviews of the historical and contemporary relationship of Islam
and politics, through studies of individual figures such as Maududi, to analyses
of official cultural and scientific policy. There are also essays dealing with the
crisis of the Pakistan state, problems of national integration, and Pakistan's
geopolitical imperatives.
 Page 134
510
Pakistan's Shia movement: an interview with Arif Hussaini.
Maleeha Lodhi. Third World Quarterly, vol. 10, no. 2 (April 1988), p. 80617.
Arif Hussaini, who was murdered in August 1988, was the principal leader of
Pakistan's Shia minority and had transformed the Tehrik-i-Nifaz-i-Fiqah-i-Jafria
into a significant political force. In this interview he discusses the role of the
Tehrik, the position of the Shia community in Pakistan, and his views on the
Iranian revolution and world affairs generally. There is a general treatment of
the Shia position by Saleem Qureshi, 'The politics of the Shia minority in
Pakistan', in Dhirendra Vajpeyi and Yogendra K. Malik (eds), Religious and
ethnic minorities in South Asia (Delhi: Manohar, 1989), p. 10938.
511
The Islamic law and constitution.
Sayyid Abul A'la Maududi. Lahore: Islamic Publications, 1983. 8th ed. 412p.
This book is in fact a compilation of the writings and speeches of Maududi, the
founder of Pakistan's fundamentalist Jamaat-i Islami, on politics and
constitutionalism within the framework of Islam. First published in 1955 and in
a greatly enlarged edition in 1960, it has become the basic text for
understanding Maududi's thought in this area. He argues throughout that the
establishment in Pakistan of a truly Islamic state, based strictly on the Quran
and the Sunna, is both necessary and feasible. He indicates that such a state
would give authority under God to an elected amir and a consultative assembly
or majlis-i-shura.
512
Faith and power: the politics of Islam.
Edward Mortimer. London: Faber & Faber, 1982. 432p. 5 maps.
Mortimer, a distinguished British journalist, here seeks to understand, through
a series of case-studies, the interrelationship of Islamic belief and the politics of
the societies to which its adherents belong. The chapter devoted to Pakistan
reviews the demand for Pakistan and the various ways in which Islam has
played a part in politics since independence.
513
From Jinnah to Zia.
Muhammad Munir. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1980. 2nd ed. 183p.
The author, a former Chief Justice of Pakistan and a prominent intellectual
figure, uses this book (originally published in 1979) to develop an argument
against the notion that Pakistan should be some form of theocracy and in
favour of the view that it should be a democracy. He argues that the intention
of Jinnah to create a secular state was progressively undermined by his
successors. There is considerable implicit criticism of the Zia régime. The book
was written as a contribution to political debate in Pakistan and is not always
easy to follow without some prior knowledge of events, but it is not an
ephemeral work.
514
Among the believers: an Islamic journey.
V. S. Naipaul. London: André Deutsch, 1981. 399p.
A journal by the distinguished writer of his visit to a number of Muslim
countries. A third is devoted to Pakistan, which he visited in 1979. Through an
intensely personal account of his encounters with individuals, Naipaul raises a
series of issues concerning
 Page 135
Islam itself and those countries which are seeking to unite Islam and politics.
His own observations bring little comfort to the fundamentalist.
515
Islam in the political process.
Edited by James Piscatori. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press,
1983. 240p.
This collaborative volume compares the roles that Islam plays in the politics of
a number of countries, some in the Middle East, others elsewhere. A chapter
by David Taylor, 'The politics of Islam and Islamization in Pakistan' (p. 18198)
examines the situation before and after independence.
516
Islam and development: the Zia regime in Pakistan.
Saleem Qureshi. World Development, vol 8, nos 78 (JulyAug. 980), p. 56375.
The article covers what has become familiar ground in its treatment of the
types of measures introduced by the Zia régime, but Qureshi looks in more
detail than most other writers at those areas affecting economic development
and at the assumptions underlying the measures that were taken.
517
Report of the court of inquiry constituted under Punjab Act II of 1954 to
enquire into the Punjab disturbances of 1953.
Lahore: Superintendent, Government Printing, Punjab, 1954. 386p.
Generally referred to as the Munir report after its chairman Mr Justice Munir,
this report is in the first instance a detailed account of the anti-Ahmadi
disturbances in Lahore in 1953 which were the first occasion after
independence that the government faced a large-scale challenge on the streets
which was brought to an end only by the imposition of martial law. It is also
however a wide-ranging discussion and critique of the idea of an Islamic state
in Pakistan.
518
Islam in the modern world.
Erwin I. J. Rosenthal. London: Cambridge University Press, 1965. 416p.
bibliog.
The author, an authority on medieval Islamic thought, conducted a
comparative study in the early 1960s on the way Islam has adapted to the
modern world. The result is a sensitive account of constitutional debates about
modern world. The result is a sensitive account of constitutional debates about
the place of Islam on the one hand and of debates within Islam on the other. A
major part of the book relates to Pakistan, especially to the discussions there in
the 1950s.
519
South Asian politics and religion.
Edited by Donald Eugene Smith. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University
Press, 1966. 563p.
This old but still important collection of articles has a separate section on
'Pakistan: the politics of Islamic identity' which contains six contributions. Of
particular significance are Charles Adams's piece on Maududi, and Fazlur
Rahman's on Muslim family laws.
 Page 136
520
Islam in modern history.
Wilfred Cantwell Smith. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press,
1957. 317p.
Smith reflects in his magnum opus on the course of Islamic history and the
dynamic force within it of religious aspiration. A substantial chapter is devoted
to Pakistan and the dilemmas inherent in the quest for an Islamic way of life.
521
Pakistan: Islam, politics, and national solidarity.
Anwar Hussain Syed. New York: Praeger, 1982. 203p.
A valuable study of the uses that have been made of Islam in Pakistan politics
to create a sense of national solidarity. Syed argues that such solidarity is
unlikely to flow from a simple emphasis on religious identity and suggests that
a democratic political system is a prerequisite for its full development.
522
Islamic reassertion in Pakistan: the application of Islamic laws in a modern
state.
Edited by Anita M. Weiss. Syracuse, New York: Syracuse University ress, 1986.
146p. bibliog.
A collection of eight essays on the dimensions and significance of the
Islamization programme from 1979 on. Apart from two general reviews of the
broader context, there are three studies of the economic aspects, and
individual treatments of the effects on women and the political implications of
the programme. A particularly interesting piece by Richard Kurin (published
earlier in Asian Survey, vol. 25, no. 8 (Aug. 1985), p. 85262) looks at the
impact (or lack of impact) on the Islam practised in the countryside.
Muslims and political representation in colonial India: the making of Pakistan.
See item no. 230.
Islam and modernity: transformation of an intellectual tradition.
See item no. 374.
The Jamaat-i-Islami of Pakistan: political thought and political action.
See item no. 450.
Pakistan: transition from military to civilian rule.
See item no. 456.
See item no. 456.
From the Anglo-Mohammedan law to the Shariah: the Pakistan experiment.
See item no. 528.
 Page 137

Constitutional and Legal System

523
The constitution of the Islamic republic of Pakistan 1956.
Karachi: Government of Pakistan, Ministry of Law, 1956. 224p.
Although its formulation was a protracted and painful process and in the end it
was never fully implemented, the 1956 constitution maintained much of the
structure of the colonial government, and also of the parliamentary system.
Islam was recognized but treated as separate from the state. The constitution
also incorporates the decision made in 1955 to merge all the previous
provinces in West Pakistan into a single province.
524
The constitution of the republic of Pakistan 1962.
Karachi: Government of Pakistan, Manager of Publications, 1962. 134p.
Promulgated in March 1962 to replace the 1956 constitution, this gave
Pakistan a presidential form of government. Designed very much to meet the
wishes of Ayub Khan, it provided for the election of 'basic democracies' at the
local level, the members of which formed an electoral college for the election of
the president and of other bodies. The preliminary work in preparing the
constitution was done by a constitutional commission, whose report was also
published in 1962 (Report of the Constitutional Commission, Pakistan, 1961.
Karachi: Manager of Publications, 1962).
525
The constitution of the Islamic Republic of Pakistan, 1973, as amended up to
March 1988.
Makhdoom Ali Khan. Karachi: Pakistan Publishing House, 1986 (sic, in fact
1988). 347p.
Technically the 1973 constitution, introduced during the Bhutto régime,
remained the only constitutional framework for Pakistan throughout the Zia
years and thereafter, although its provisions were of course overridden by
Martial Law from 1977 to 1985. The constitution was, however, radically
amended by the 8th Amendment, passed in late 1985, as well as by earlier
measures. The present work is a standard text of the constitution as it stood
after the 8th Amendment, with footnotes which indicate every
 Page 138
change that was made after 1973. It also includes the text of a number of
important documents from the Zia period, including the Political Parties Act of
1962, as amended in 1985, and the 1986 rules for the registration of political
parties. There is, however, no index to the book nor commentary on the
individual clauses. The introduction discusses general legal issues and assumes
a knowledge of the relevant political history.
526
Aspects of the Frontier Crimes Regulation in Pakistan.
Willard Berry. Durham, North Carolina: Duke University Program in Comparative
Studies on Southern Asia, 1966. 122p. bibliog. (Monographs and Occasional
Papers Series, no. 3).
The focus of this monograph is the way the British and the Pakistan
governments have handled the question of the legal norms to be followed in
the tribal areas of the Frontier. The Frontier Crimes Regulation of 1901 and the
Criminal Law Amendment of 1963 both assumed that there is space in Pakistan
(or British India) for two sets of legal norms, although the 1963 measure gives
greater weight to formal rules. After the Ayub Khan coup of 1958 both the
president and the then chief justice justified this legal pluralism as the basis for
an indigenous legal system, although it was in turn criticized as simply a cover
for executive arbitrariness. The author of this monograph, based on a careful
reading of the relevant legal cases and secondary anthropological literature,
provides an account from a legal sociological perspective, of the implications of
these legal measures for social change and national development.
527
Constitutional development in Pakistan.
G. W. Choudhury. London: Longman, 1969. 2nd ed. 277p. bibliog.
The standard account of constitutional development in Pakistan up to and
including the passing of the 1962 constitution which introduced a presidential
system and a form of indirect democracy. The author describes in some detail
the 1962 constitution, in whose framing he had a role as honorary advisor to
the Constitution Commission. He discusses the earlier, largely fruitless efforts to
find a constitutional framework which would satisfy all interests. The present
work, which is a substantially revised and extended version of the first edition,
published in 1959, also largely supersedes the author's Democracy in Pakistan,
published in 1963 which, despite its title, was primarily concerned with
constitutional development. On the purely legal side, Ivor Jennings,
Constitutional Problems in Pakistan (London: Cambridge University Press,
1957) reproduces the texts of the major judgments in the Federal Court which
arose out of the crisis created in 1954 by the dismissal by the governor-general
of the first Constituent Assembly and discussed in chapter 7 of Choudhury's
book. An older work on the subject is Alan Gledhill's Pakistan: the development
of its laws and constitution (London: Stevens, 1957 [The British
Commonwealth: The Development of its Laws and Constitutions, vol. 8]).
528
From the Anglo-Mohammedan law to the Shariah: the Pakistan experiment.
Afaq Haydar. Journal of South Asian and Middle Eastern Studies, vol. 10, no. 4
(Summer 1987), p. 3350.
After an outline of the sharia, the author discusses briefly the measures taken
in Pakistan to install it in place of the existing legal system, and the difficulties
encountered in the process.
 Page 139
529
Family law in Pakistan.
David S. Pearl. Journal of Family Law, vol. 9, no. 2 (1969), p. 16589.
A review for lawyers who are not specialists on Pakistan on the background to
the Muslim Family Laws Ordinance of 1961. Pearl reports that at the time he
wrote the ordinance had not made much impact.
530
A textbook on Muslim personal law.
David Pearl. London; Sydney; Wolfeboro, New Hampshire: Croom Helm, 1987.
2nd ed. 284p. bibliog.
First published in 1979, this is intended primarily for the specialist but is
accessible to others interested in family law among Muslims. Pearl places
special emphasis on Muslims of the Indian subcontinent and refers frequently
to law cases from India and Pakistan.
531
Local self government in Pakistan.
Syed Abdul Quddus. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1981. 402p. bibliog.
This work is focused on the restoration by the Zia régime in 1979 of local
government institutions, albeit on a non-party basis. Three-quarters of the
book is in fact devoted to reproducing the texts of the relevant government
ordinances. There is a somewhat wordy introduction which looks at local self-
government from a number of angles.
532
A code of Muslim personal law.
Tanzil-ur-Rahman. Karachi: Hamdard National Foundation, 1978, 1980. 2 vols.
bibliog.
This is a comprehensive work, mainly for the specialist, which approaches the
subject through establishing a codification designed to reduce the differences
between the various schools of law within Islam. Each section is followed by a
commentary, often at considerable length, on the issues raised and the sources
followed.
533
An introduction to Islamic law.
Joseph Schacht. Oxford, England: Clarendon Press, 1964. 304p. bibliog.
Joseph Schacht was an Islamicist as much as a lawyer, and this important work
Joseph Schacht was an Islamicist as much as a lawyer, and this important work
examines law as a historical phenomenon. The first part of the book discusses
the evolution of Islamic law; the second looks at such primary themes as
property, family, and criminal law.
534
Partnership and profit-sharing in Islamic law.
Muhammad Nejatullah Siddiqi. Leicester, England: Islamic Foundation, 1985.
111p. bibliog. (Islamic Economic Series, no. 9).
Originally written in Urdu, this is a general introduction to the principles that
underlie Islamic approaches to commercial law. Shirkah and mudarabah are
described as the two principal forms of business partnership that do not
contravene the Islamic ban on interest (riba).
 Page 140
535
Constitutional legitimacy: a study of the doctrine of necessity.
Leslie Wolf-Phillips. London: Third World Foundation, 1979. 79p. (Third World
Foundation Monographs, no. 6).
This useful study looks in a comparative perspective at the legal arguments put
forward to support the imposition of martial law at various times in Pakistan's
history and to ensure a measure of constitutional continuity. The author
discusses four instances, viz. the governor-general cases of 1955, Dosso
(1958), Asma Jilani (1972) and Begum Bhutto (1977). Each case produced a
different response from the judges. An abridged version was published as an
article in Third World Quarterly, vol. 1, no. 4 (Oct. 1979), p. 97133.
Nizam-i-Islam: processes and conflicts in Pakistan's programme of Islamisation,
with special reference to the position of women.
See item no. 433.
Women in Muslim family law.
See item no. 435.
Religion and politics in Pakistan.
See item no. 501.
South Asian politics and religion.
See item no. 519.
 Page 141

Government and Administration

536
Administrative problems in Pakistan.
Edited by Guthrie S. Birkhead. Syracuse, New York: Syracuse University Press,
1966. 223p. 2 maps.
The seven essays collected in this volume were all written by American scholars
connected with Syracuse University and the Administrative Staff College in
Lahore. The common concern is with the importance of public administration to
the success of plans for economic development. The individual chapters cover
basic democracies, agriculture, business organizations, and individual
government agencies, and proposals for administrative reform.
537
Asian bureaucratic systems emergent from the British imperial tradition.
Edited by Ralph Braibanti. Durham, North Carolina: Duke University,
Commonwealth Studies Center, [n.d.]. 733p. (Duke University Commonwealth-
Studies Center Publication no. 28).
The purpose of this volume was to engage in a comparative study of
bureaucratic systems in Asian countries in the context of efforts at the time the
work was written to bring such systems into line with developmental
requirements. Braibanti himself contributed a long chapter on 'The higher
bureaucracy of Pakistan' (p. 209353) and there is relevant material in the
chapters by B. Cohn on the recruitment and training of British officials during
the early colonial period and by H. Tinker on the structure of the British
imperial heritage. Braibanti contributed a chapter on 'Public bureaucracy and
judiciary in Pakistan' to another comparative volume, Bureaucracy and political
development, edited by Joseph LaPalombara (Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton
University Press, 1963).
 Page 142
538
Research on the bureaucracy of Pakistan: a critique of sources, conditions, and
issues, with appended documents.
Ralph Braibanti. Durham, North Carolina: Duke University Press, 1966. 569p.
(Duke University Commonwealth-Studies Center Publication no. 26).
In the 1960s the bureaucratic system of Pakistan became of considerable
interest to foreign, especially American scholars who were concerned with the
overall economic progress of the country. The present volume makes a case for
the importance to researchers of the considerable volume of reports and
documents on the bureaucracy issued mainly after (but in some cases before)
1947. It then discusses in substantial and very helpful detail these sources,
and provides necessary background information on the organization of
government. The work covers not only central government but local institutions
and public corporations. There is a separate chapter devoted to legal research.
Fifteen documents appendices are included. These are for the most part
extracts from speeches designed to illustrate general attitudes towards
bureaucratic change.
539
Babus, Brahmans and bureaucrats: a critique of the administrative system in
Pakistan.
Nazim (pseud. for Hassan Habib). Lahore: People's Publishing House, 1973.
144p.
A collection of articles and papers written in 197071 which argue for a radical
overhaul of a system which the author believes is a legacy of the colonial past.
He is particularly concerned to eliminate the 'Babu-Brahman-Bureaucrat
complex' and replace it with modern, professional and specialized
management. At the time the book was published, Hassan Habib was principal
of the Pakistan Administrative Staff College.
540
District administration in West Pakistan: its problems and challenges.
Edited by Inayatullah. Peshawar: Pakistan Academy for Rural Development,
1964. 336p.
This volume contains the papers given at a conference in 1964 which drew
together academics and professional administrators to discuss the problems in
adapting Pakistan's district level administration to the requirements of the post-
independence situation as represented by the introduction of the basic
democracies scheme by Ayub Khan.
541
Bureaucracy in Pakistan.
Charles H. Kennedy. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1987. 246p. bibliog.
A detailed study of the bureaucracy in Pakistan which discusses its central
political role since independence in the context both of its own institutional
history since before independence and of the general political history of the
country. Kennedy is particularly good on the changes brought about during the
Bhutto period and after.
 Page 143
542
Administrative training and development: a comparative study of East Africa,
Zambia, Pakistan, and India.
Edited by Bernard Schaffer. New York; Washington, DC; London: Praeger,
1974. 445p. (Praeger Special Studies in International Economics and
Development).
The work as a whole focuses on the role of training and training institutions in
meeting developing countries' needs. There is a contribution by Ken Cabatoff
on the National Institute of Public Administration (NIPA) in Lahore. Basing
himself on fieldwork at the end of the 1960s, he discusses the tensions
between staff and students over the purpose of the institution and the type of
training that it imparted, and over their respective roles.
The men who ruled India.
See item no. 117.
Punjab settlement manual.
See item no. 183.
 Page 144

Armed Forces
543
The Indo-Pak clash in the Rann of Kutch.
Saeed Ahmad. Rawalpindi, Pakistan: Army Education Press, [1973]. 149p. 6
maps.
A detailed account, primarily from the military point of view, of the clashes in
the first half of 1965 between Indian and Pakistani forces in the Rann of Kutch
area which lies across the extreme southern section of the Indo-Pakistan
border. Although not a full-scale war, these clashes were an important prelude
to the September 1965 war. The volume includes the text of the ceasefire
agreement of 30 June 1965.
544
The Pakistan army.
Stephen P. Cohen. Berkeley, California; Los Angeles; London: University of
California Press, 1984. 177p. bibliog.
This is a comprehensive and reliable account by the leading US specialist on
the military in South Asia. After discussing the general organization and
recruitment of the army, including its domination by men from particular
regions, especially the northern Punjab, Cohen turns to the officer corps, its
general attitudes, political involvement, ideological orientation and strategic
outlook.
545
Battle for Pakistan: the air war of 1965.
John Fricker. Shepperton, England: Ian Allan, 1979. 192p. map.
A strictly military account by a British journalist and writer on affairs of the air
war in September 1965. The author had full cooperation from the Pakistan Air
Force and is therefore in a position to give a detailed narrative of the actions
that were fought. He also discusses the reasons for the air superiority that was
achieved by the Pakistan side. The book is well illustrated by photographs.
 Page 145
546
History of the Pakistan Air Force, 19471982.
Syed Shabbir Hussain, M. Tariq Qureshi, foreword by M. Anwar Shamim. [?
Karachi]: [?Pakistan Air Force], 1982. 332p.
An official history illustrated with many photographs which covers the Pakistan
Air Force from its inception at the time of independence to the 1980s. Like
most such histories it is full of precise detail of the formation of squadrons and
of specific operations during Pakistan's wars with India and the men who took
part in them. There are also more general sections on organization and
training.
547
Pakistan's nuclear development.
Ashok Kapur. London; New York; Sydney: Croom Helm, 1987. 258p.
A careful and scholarly study of Pakistan's nuclear programme since the 1950s
by an Indian specialist in international relations based in Canada. Kapur argues
that it is only since the early 1970s that the programme has been primarily
military in orientation. He advocates a private dialogue between India and
Pakistan to improve mutual understanding in this critical area. Another relevant
work is Nuclear power in developing countries: an analysis of decisionmaking,
edited by James Everett Katz and Onkar S. Marwah (Lexington, Massachusetts;
Toronto: Lexington Books, 1982), which contains a review of Pakistan by Shirin
Tahir-Kheli, although there is no direct consideration of the military aspects.
548
The first round: Indo-Pakistan War 1965.
M. Asghar Khan, foreword by Altaf Gauhar. London: Islamic Information
Services, 1979. 146p.
The author was commander-in-chief of the Pakistan Air Force until July 1965,
two months before the war broke out, and was familiar with the diplomatic as
well as military background. During the war itself he was active in obtaining
military supplies from friendly countries such as China and Turkey. The book,
written we are told in 196667, combines personal reminiscence with
observations on the actions and decisions of the principal actors on the
Pakistan side. He is critical of United States policy towards the combatants and
of Ayub Khan for agreeing to a ceasefire rather than continuing the military
action at a moment when he thinks a breakthrough might have been made. He
remarks in the introduction that the war 'appears now to have been fought for
no purpose'.
549
The martial races of India.
George MacMunn. London: Sampson Low, Marston & Co, (c.1933). 368p. 2
maps.
The concept of the martial race is now seen as closely associated with the
ideology of imperialism, but it was widely accepted in the period before
independence and its traces still linger. In this classic statement MacMunn, an
army general, outlines the history of armies in India from classical to modern
times. His chapters on the British period lay much stress on the 'martial races'
of the Punjab.
550
A matter of honour: an account of the Indian army, its officers and men.
Philip Mason. London: Jonathan Cape, 1974. 580p. maps. bibliog.
Philip Mason, a distinguished writer and member of the Indian Civil Service,
writes
 Page 146
here of the Indian army from its 17th- and 18th-century origins to its partition,
along with the rest of the Indian empire, at the time of independence. He
emphasizes the contribution made by the Indian army to British causes
elsewhere in the world, notably during the two world wars. This is both a
scholarly work, as in the discussion of the 'martial races' approach to
recruitment, but also a well-written popular account.
551
Bugles and a tiger: a personal adventure.
John Masters. London: Michael Joseph, 1956. 335p.
A personal memoir of his life as a young soldier on the North-West Frontier by
the well-known novelist. He took part for a while in the military operations in
Waziristan from 1936 to 1939, and reflects on the outlook and attitudes of the
participants on both sides.
552
Nation building and the Pakistan army, 19471969.
Raymond A. Moore, Jr., foreword by Altaf Qadir. Lahore: Aziz, 1979. 384p.
Unlike most studies of the military, this work concentrates explicitly on what
the author calls the nation-building activities of the Pakistan army in the period
up to 1969. The first chapters cover the role of the army in its purely military
capacity as a defender of the country's internal and external security, but most
of the book is concerned with such issues as its involvement in disaster relief
and the activities of the Fauji (army) Foundation in promoting industrial
development.
553
Our defence cause: an analysis of Pakistan's past and future military role.
M. Attiqur Rahman. London; Sydney; Toronto: White Lion, 1976. 263p. bibliog.
This book is a reflective discussion by a retired general of the weaknesses in
Pakistan's defence planning in the light of the defeat in the 1971 war with
India. His suggestions for change, which draw on comparative examples from
the Napoleonic wars on, extend from relatively minor points of detail to
proposals for greater openness in military affairs.
554
Going nuclear.
Leonard Spector. Cambridge, Massachussetts: Ballinger, 1987. 370p. maps. (A
Carnegie Endowment Book).
Carnegie Endowment Book).
Spector is one of the leading US specialists on nuclear proliferation. This
volume, one of a series sponsored by the Carnegie Endowment for
International Peace, reviews the evidence for nuclear weapons programmes in
a number of countries, including Pakistan and India. A list of each country's
known nuclear installations is given. Spector brings his account up to late
1986, and concludes that Pakistan is actively seeking a nuclear weapons
capability. He is the author of two earlier volumes in the series: Nuclear
proliferation today (New York: Vintage Books, 1984), and The new nuclear
nations (ibid., 1985).
Witness to surrender.
See item no. 260.
 Page 147
The story of soldiering and politics in India and Pakistan.
See item no. 281.
The military and politics in Pakistan, 194786.
See item no. 476.
 Page 148

Foreign Relations
General
555
China Pakistan relations 19471980: documents.
Edited by K. Arif. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1984. 300p.
The 209 documents included in this volume are almost all public statements
and communiqués. Although the formulae used are, as would be expected,
often stereotyped, taken together the documents illustrate the increasingly
close relationship between Pakistan and China since 1947. There is a useful set
of appendices which bring together otherwise scattered statistical information
on economic relations and on arms supplies from China to Pakistan.
556
Pakistan's Soviet policy: one step forward, two steps back.
Muhammad R. Azmi. Asian Profile, vol. 15, no. 2 (April 1987), p. 16778.
Azmi reviews the relationship before and after the 1979 Soviet intervention in
Afghanistan and argues that Pakistan should take steps to improve its relations
with the USSR, in part to reduce the perceived threat from India.
557
The myth of independence.
Zulfikar Ali Bhutto. London: Oxford University Press, 1969. 188p.
The late prime minister's most extended statement of his position on
international relations, and an important document for understanding his world
view. It was written shortly after he had resigned as Ayub Khan's foreign
minister anti just before his foundation of the Pakistan People's Party. Through
a survey of Pakistan's foreign relations since 1947, in which the conflict with
India is seen as the central feature, he argues against the link with the United
States which had been so important to Pakistan in the late 1950s and early
1960s. He describes the USA as unreliable and the alliance itself as an
infringement of Pakistan's sovereignty. The book also makes a case for close
relations with China, in the fostering of which Bhutto had a large part.
 Page 149
558
The Indian ocean: region of conflict or 'peace zone'?
Dieter Braun, translated by Carol Geldart, Kathleen Llanwarne. London: C.
Hurst; Canberra: Croom Helm, 1983. 228p. 6 maps. bibliog.
First published in German in 1982 (Der Indische Ozean: Konfliktregion oder
'Zone des Friedens'?, Baden-Baden, West Germany: Nomos Verlagsgesellschaft
[Internationale Politik und Sicherheit, vol. 9]), this is a study by a German
specialist in security issues of the whole Indian Ocean region in terms both of
global and regional factors. There is a valuable chapter which reviews the
history of the zone of peace idea, first put forward by Sri Lanka and then taken
up by India.
559
Pakistan's foreign policy: an historical analysis.
S. M. Burke. London: Oxford University Press, 1973. 432p. bibliog.
A standard history of Pakistan's foreign policy by a former Pakistani diplomat.
Burke organizes his material into three periods: 194753, the non-aligned years;
195462, the aligned years; and 196370, a period of reappraisal. A brief
postscript covers the period up to July 1972 and the Simla agreement. The
focus of the book is very much on Indo-Pakistan relations, and on the bearing
of those on relations with the rest of the world, but it is not exclusively devoted
to them.
560
Perspectives on Pakistan's foreign policy.
Edited by Surendra Chopra. Amritsar, India: Guru Nanak Dev University Press,
1983. 476p.
The 26 articles included in this work, all but two by Indian scholars, arose out
of a seminar in 1982. Some are general in scope, others provide detailed case-
studies. There are some rather stereotyped comments, but as a whole the
volume is useful both for its detail and as an Indian perspective.
561
India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, and the major powers: politics of a divided
subcontinent.
G. W. Choudhury. New York: Free Press; London: Collier Macmillan, 1975.
276p. bibliog.
The author organizes his study by describing and analysing in turn the relations
since 1947 between the countries of the subcontinent and the USSR, the USA
and China, especially in the context of the Bangladesh crisis and its aftermath.
He argues that on the whole the great powers, the USSR especially, have
complicated rather than eased the way to peace in the region.
562
Islam in foreign policy.
Edited by Adeed Dawisha. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press,
1983. 191p.
This is a companion volume to that edited by J. Piscatori, Islam in the political
process (q.v.). In the present collection there is a piece on Pakistan, 'In search
of an identity: Islam and Pakistan's foreign policy', by Shirin Tahir-Kheli, in
which she discusses the growing importance in the 1970s of the Islamic
dimension but notes that such a policy may carry costs in terms of involvement
in the Middle East's regional conflicts.
 Page 150
563
Pakistan in a changing world: essays in honour of K. Sarwar Hasan.
Edited by Masuma Hasan. Karachi: Pakistan Institute of International Affairs,
1978. 258p. 3 maps.
Seven Pakistani and four foreign scholars contributed to this volume in honour
of the founder-secretary of the Pakistan Institute of International Affairs.
Subjects are mostly in the field of Pakistan's foreign relations, and cover many
aspects ranging from the 1965 war with India to Pakistan's relations with
Australia. This is a useful collection.
564
Pakistan and the Iran-Iraq war.
Suroosh Irfani. Journal of South Asian and Middle Eastern Studies, vol. 9, no. 2
(Winter 1985), p. 5566.
Throughout the war from 1980 to 1988 Pakistan was able to maintain a neutral
stance and to keep links with both sides. This article discusses its policy in
historical, economic and strategic perspective. An earlier article written before
the fall of the Shah in 1979 is Shirin Tahir-Kheli's 'Iran and Pakistan:
cooperation in an area of conflict', Asian Survey, vol. 17, no. 5 (May 1977), p.
47490.
565
Security in Southern Asia 1: the security of Southwest Asia.
Zalmay Khalilzad. Aldershot, England: Gower, 1984. 191p.
South-west Asia is defined here as Pakistan, Afghanistan and Iran and is seen
as a region of instability and crisis. The purpose of the book, a product of a
research programme at the International Institute of Strategic Studies in
London on regional security issues, is to provide an integrated account of
threats to the region's security arising from domestic instability, regional
rivalries, especially the Kashmir issue, and superpower involvement in the area.
566
Soviet-American relations with Pakistan, Iran and Afghanistan.
Edited by Hafeez Malik. London: Macmillan Press, 1987. 431p.
This volume is made up of the papers presented to a conference in 1984
convened to consider US policy in South-west Asia in the light of developments
in Iran and Afghanistan. Most of the contributors are American academics and
security specialists, but there are chapters from Agha Shahi, former foreign
minister of Pakistan, and from a group of Soviet scholars. Pakistan's bilateral
relations with its neighbours and the great powers are reviewed, and there are
chapters also on the security implications of internal problems.
567
Defense planning in less-industrialized states: the Middle East and South Asia.
Edited by Stephanie G. Neuman. Lexington, Massachusetts; Toronto: Lexington
Books, 1984. 315p. maps.
This volume arose out of concern in the USA to understand more closely the
processes whereby planning of defence policies takes place in the volatile areas
of the Middle East and South Asia. The chapter on Pakistan is contributed by
Shirin Tahir-Kheli, with a commentary by Stephen Cohen. Tahir-Kheli
characterizes Pakistan's defence planning as essentially reactive and lacking
long-term perspective.
 Page 151
568
Pakistan Horizon.
Karachi: Pakistan Institute of International Affairs, 1948 . quarterly.
This is the main journal in Pakistan devoted to Pakistan's international relations.
As well as research articles on a range of specific and more general topics,
each issue includes two chronologies, 'Pakistan and the world', and 'Chronicle
of international affairs', and copies of selected documents relevant to Pakistan.
569
Anglo-Pakistan relations, 19471976.
M. Aslam Qureshi. Lahore: Research Society of Pakistan, 1976. 395p. bibliog.
(Publications of the Research Society, no. 38 [sic, in fact 33]).
Originally a doctoral thesis, this work describes in detail relations between the
two countries as they emerged from the trauma of partition in 1947. The
author focuses on particular events and developments such as the Kashmir
question, Pakistan's membership of Western military alliances, and its fraught
relations with Afghanistan. A final chapter covers the Bangladesh crisis and Z.
A. Bhutto's subsequent decision to take Pakistan out of the Commonwealth
(reversed by his daughter in 1989). Anthony Hyman's article, 'Pakistan and the
Commonwealth: an expanding organization?', Round Table, no. 307 (July
1988), p. 293302, offers a historical perspective.
570
The frontiers of Pakistan: a study of frontier problems in Pakistan's foreign
policy.
Mujtaba Razvi. Karachi; Dhaka: National Publishing House, 1971. 339p. 8
maps. bibliog.
A comprehensive analysis from a Pakistani perspective of the country's
frontiers, based largely on historical and geographical material. The author sees
Pakistan as especially concerned to finalize its 'territorial personality', the limits
of which had been somewhat hazy at the time of independence owing to the
British imperial policy of relying on buffer zones. Whereas a settlement with
Iran was easy to achieve, it was not so with India and Afghanistan, where
conflict extended beyond the narrow question of border demarcation. The work
includes the text of a number of important documents, including the Radcliffe
Award of 1947, the Indus Waters Treaty, and the Tashkent Declaration.
571
United States Pakistan relations.
Edited by Leo E. Rose, Noor A. Husain. Berkeley, California: University of
California, Institute of East Asian Studies, 1985. 270p. (Research Papers and
Policy Studies, no. 13).
The eighteen papers collected in this volume were originally presented to a
conference held in 1984 and organized jointly by the University of California
and the Institute of Strategic Studies in Islamabad. Themes covered included
economic and security relations between Pakistan and the United States, and
discussions of the impact on the US-Pakistan relationship of wider international
issues, for example the Arab-Israeli conflict, where the two countries have
rather different perceptions and interests. The papers are for the most part
oriented towards the relationship between the two countries at the time the
conference was held but are quite broad-ranging in scope.
 Page 152
572
The regional imperative: the administration of U.S. foreign policy towards South
Asian states under presidents Johnson and Nixon.
Lloyd I. Rudolph, Susanne Hoeber Rudolph (et al.). New Delhi: Concept
Publishing, 1980. 465p.
The studies collected together in this volume were originally prepared by US
academics as part of an official project to review US foreign policy, and focus
on issues that were current in the mid-1970s. Two papers deal specifically with
Pakistan. Philip Oldenburg examines the way the US government responded to
the 1971 crisis, while Gerald A. Heeger discusses the way in which US policy
towards Pakistan was formulated in the immediate aftermath of the creation of
Bangladesh. An important article on US policy in 1971 by a senior US official at
the time of the Bangladesh crisis, Christopher Van Hollen, is reproduced as an
appendix, and there are substantial references to Pakistan in other
contributions.
573
China and Pakistan: diplomacy of an entente cordiale.
Anwar Hussain Syed. Amherst, Massachusetts: University of Massachusetts
Press; Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1974. 259p. map.
Syed traces and comments upon Pakistan-China relations since the early
1950s. He discusses China's role at the time of the Indo-Pakistan war of 1965
and its difficult position during the 1971 civil war. He sees the relationship from
the Pakistani side as part of a pattern of 'small nation' behaviour. Another
study which touches briefly on the relationship is by Wayne A. Wilcox, India,
Pakistan and the rise of China (New York: Walker & Co, 1964).
574
The Sandi-Pakistani military relationship: implications for U.S. policy.
Shirin Tahir-Kheli, William O. Staudenmaier. Orbis, vol. 26, no. 1 (Spring
1982), p. 15571.
The authors discuss the domestic and international factors which gave impetus
to the relationship in the 1970s and review the implications for US strategy in
the Middle East. In general they consider it to have been a helpful
development.
575
The United States and Pakistan: the evolution of an influence relationship.
Shirin Tahir-Kheli. New York: Praeger, 1982. 167p. bibliog. (Studies of
Influence in International Relations).
Pakistan and the United States have a longstanding military and diplomatic
connection dating back to the mid-1950s, but the relationship has often been
fraught and uneasy. Tahir-Kheli's interesting study discusses the two sides'
divergent perceptions of the threats each faced and concludes that in practice
the two were able to influence each other on only a limited number of
occasions. She discusses the evolution of the relationship from its beginning up
to the Afghan crisis and devotes a chapter to the nuclear issue, where the
United States has signally failed to influence Pakistan.
576
The enduring entente: Sino-Pakistani relations 19601980.
Yaacov Vertzberger, foreword by T. P. Thornton. New York: Praeger, 1983.
112p. map. (Washington Papers, vol. 10, no. 95).
A useful study of relations between Pakistan and China. Vertzberger describes
the
 Page 153
historical development of the relationship and locates it in the strategic and
diplomatic requirements of the two countries.
577
Pakistan enters the Middle East.
M. G. Weinbaum, Gautam Sen. Orbis, vol. 22, no. 3 (Fall 1978), p. 595612.
This gives an overview of Pakistan's relations with its Middle East neighbours,
since independence, and especially after 1971 when Bhutto consciously sought
to build up links. The authors see the Middle East as a major component of
Pakistan's future foreign policy.
578
Pakistan's search for a foreign policy after the Invasion of Afghanistan.
W. Howard Wriggins. Pacific Affairs, vol. 57, no. 2 (Summer 1984), p. 284303.
A review of the alternative strategies open to Pakistan after the Soviet invasion
of Afghanistan at the end of 1979. Wriggins looks at the implications of relying
heavily on the USA, the eventual strategy followed, and also at possibilities of
improving links with India, before turning to Pakistan's stance towards the
USSR. He concludes that Pakistani policy-makers pursued an adroit and
multifaceted policy in difficult circumstances.
Making the new Commonwealth.
See item no. 243.
Pakistan in its fourth decade: current political, social, and economic situation
and prospects for the 1980s.
See item no. 487.
Islam, politics and the state: the Pakistan experience.
See item no. 509.
South Asian insecurity and the great powers.
See item no. 584.
The security of South Asia: American and Asian perspectives.
See item no. 586.
South Asia: too late to remove the bomb.
See item no. 589.
India
579
Pakistan's nuclear dilemma: energy and security dimensions.
Akhtar Ali. Karachi: Economist Research Unit, 1984. 218p. bibliog.
A careful review of the positions of India and Pakistan over nuclear power and
nuclear weapons. The author argues, contrary to powerful voices in Pakistan in
the 1970s and
 Page 154
1980s, that the country has benefited little from keeping its nuclear option
open, and that it would be better for it to sign the Nuclear Non-Proliferation
Treaty without linking this to India's doing so. There is a 60-page appendix
reviewing Pakistan's energy needs and sources of supply.
580
Bangla Desh documents.
New Delhi: Government of India, Ministry of External Affairs, [1971]. 719p.
This volume was produced in 1971 after the Pakistan army's intervention in
East Bengal, as part of the Indian diplomatic efforts to try to bring international
pressure to bear on the Pakistan government to end the civil war and allow the
large number of refugees in India to return home. It includes large numbers of
short extracts from Pakistani and Indian sources, mainly official documents and
statements, covering the 197071 period. There are also extracts to illustrate
international press reaction.
581
India, Pakistan, and the great powers.
William J. Barnds. London: Pall Mall Press, 1972. 388p. 3 maps. bibliog.
The author worked for many years as an analyst for the US government, and
during that time developed an interest in the relationships between South Asia
and the rest of the world. This book reviews the complex patterns of US and
USSR involvement in the region, the consequences of the Indo-China war of
1962 and the Indo-Pakistan war of 1965, and the choices facing the USA in its
policy towards the region. Barnds concludes with an argument for less military
involvement through arms supplies and more support for long-term economic
development in the region.
582
The Indo-Pakistani conflict.
Russell Brines. London: Pall Mall Press, 1968. 481p. 4 maps. bibliog.
This is an account by a journalist of the Indo-Pakistan war of 1965. Brines's
purpose is to identify the broader historical forces which drove the two sides
into a major military conflict, and he therefore devotes much of his book to the
background of hostility between the two countries. He blames the Soviet Union
and China for exploiting the situation and using India and Pakistan as proxies
for their own conflicts.
583
583
Mainsprings of Indian and Pakistani foreign policies.
S. M. Burke. Minneapolis, Minnesota: University of Minnesota Press, 1974.
308p. bibliog.
This is in some ways a companion piece to Burke's more detailed account of
Pakistan's foreign policy, Pakistan's foreign policy: an historical analysis (q.v.).
In the first part he discusses the broad historical and cultural framework. In
the second, he again describes the development of foreign policy after
independence, but in comparative terms.
584
South Asian insecurity and the great powers.
Edited by Barry Buzan, Gowher Rizvi. London: Macmillan, 1986. 257p.
The theoretical framework for this work is Buzan's concept of a security
complex as an appropriate unit of analysis in the field of international relations.
South Asia is one
 Page 155
such security complex and the book looks at various factors that impinge on it.
These include domestic problem in India and Pakistan, specifically regional
rivalries, especially the Indo-Pakistan tension on which there is a chapter by
Rizvi, and supra-regional conflicts, including superpower competition. The
editors conclude that Pakistan is likely to play a pivotal role, for good or ill, in
future developments in the region.
585
Pakistan's relations with India: 19471966.
G. W. Choudhury. London: Pall Mall Press, 1968. 341p. bibliog.
A careful and meticulous history of the subject by a political scientist who was
also a minister in the government of Yahya Khan. Although written from a
Pakistani perspective, it seeks to provide an essentially factual account.
Separate chapters are devoted to the Kashmir dispute and trade and water
disputes, as well as to the more general development of each country's foreign
policy. The book ends with the 1965 war.
586
The security of South Asia: American and Asian perspectives.
Edited by Stephen Philip Cohen. Chicago; Urbana, Illinois: University of Illinois
Press, 1987. 290p. maps.
Cohen brought together a number of leading academics, journalists and public
figures from South Asia and the United States to produce this work, which does
indeed provide perspectives on the main security issues in the South Asian
region. Wherever possible, contributors to the volume look at situations from
other people's points of view. There are also four chapters which seek to
provide 'visions of the future', and appendices on the military balance of power
and on the consequences for the region if there were to be a nuclear conflict.
587
Der Indisch-Pakistanische Konflikt und seine wirtschaftlichen und sozialen
Kosten für Pakistan in den Jahren 19581968. (The Indo-Pakistani conflict and
its economic and social costs for Pakistan in the years 19581968.)
Hans Frey. Wiesbaden, West Germany: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1978. 234p.
bibliog. (Beiträge zur Südasienforschung Südasien-Institut Universität
Heidelberg, vol. 38).
This is a more general work than its title might suggest. Frey traces the
development of regional and communal differences in the pre- and post-
independence periods and their consequences for domestic as well as Indo-
Pakistan relations. He also assesses the direct impact of Indo-Pakistan conflicts
on the two countries in terms of increased defence spending and other costs.
588
Kashmir: a study in India-Pakistan relations.
Sisir Gupta. London: Asia Publishing House, 1966. 511p. bibliog.
This is the most authoritative statement from an Indian writer on Kashmir, and
a work whose careful analysis of all aspects of the situation makes it invaluable
for any serious student of the subject. Gupta traces the course of the conflict
from the period just before independence, through the tangled events of the
194749 period and the initial involvement of the United Nations, to the
stalemate in the 1950s. A final chapter reviews possible ways forward. The
work was completed before the 1965 war, but Gupta reviews its implications in
a brief preface.
 Page 156
589
South Asia: too late to remove the bomb.
Richard N. Haass. Orbis, vol. 32, no. 1 (Winter 1988), p. 10718.
After reviewing recent developments, especially in the nuclear field, Haass
concludes that Indo-Pakistan relations remain very unstable. He argues that
the USA has no option but to be involved in the region but that the margin for
error is very small.
590
The process of priority formulation: US foreign policy in the Indo-Pakistani war
of 1971.
Dan Haendel. Boulder, Colorado: Westview Press, 1977. 428p. bibliog.
Originally a dissertation and making little effort to hide its origins, this work
discusses the relevance of a range of theoretical models to the events of 1971.
Haendel is particularly concerned to see how far US decisions, for example to
maintain formal neutrality, can be explained in terms of a theory of rational
choice.
591
Nuclear proliferation: Islam, the bomb and South Asia.
Rodney W. Jones, foreword by Amos A. Jordan, Jr. Beverly Hills, California;
London: Sage Publications, 1981. 88p. bibliog. (Washington Papers, vol. 9, no.
82).
A US policy-oriented analysis of Pakistan's and India's nuclear programmes
which assesses the chances of restricting the proliferation of nuclear weapons
in the South Asian region. Written at the beginning of the 1980s, it covers only
the first few years of the two countries' nuclear programmes but is useful both
for its succinct and balanced account of developments and for its analysis of
the issues at stake in discussions of nuclear proliferation in the region.
592
Danger in Kashmir.
Josef Korbel. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1954. 351p. 2
maps. bibliog.
An early but still valuable account of the Kashmir dispute by a member of the
UN commission which tried in the early stages to bring about an agreed
solution. Korbel describes the background and origins of the dispute and then
goes into detail on the work of the UN and its representatives. Appendices
include relevant UN documents.
593
The Indus rivers: a study of the effects of partition.
Aloys Arthur Michel. New Haven, Connecticut; London: Yale University Press,
1967. 595p. 9 maps. bibliog.
The Indus Waters Treaty of 1960, concluded with the help of the World Bank,
brought to an end years of uncertainty and recrimination between India and
Pakistan over the use for irrigation of the Indus and its tributaries, which pay
no heed to the boundaries established in 1947. Michel's study traces the
development of irrigation in the region before 1947, the political consequences
of partition in 1947, the framing of the treaty and its subsequent
implementation in the two countries. Most of his fieldwork was carried out in
Pakistan rather than India. A detailed account of the negotiations that
produced the treaty is Indus waters treaty: an exercise in international
mediation, by Niranjan D. Gulhati (Bombay: Allied Publishers, 1973). Gulhati
was head of the Indian negotiators during the critical stages. Both his and
Michel's works include the text of the treaty.
 Page 157
The Indo-Pak clash in the Rann of Katch.
See item no. 543.
Pakistan's nuclear development.
See item no. 547.
The first round: Indo-Pakistan War 1965.
See item no. 548.
Going nuclear.
See item no. 554.
Pakistan's foreign policy: an historical analysis.
See item no. 559.
The frontiers of Pakistan: a study of frontier problems in Pakistan's foreign
policy.
See item no. 570.
 Page 158

Economy
594
The impact of international migration on economic development in Pakistan.
Jonathan Addleton. Asian Survey, vol. 24, no. 5 (May 1984), p. 57496.
The focus of this article is migration to the Gulf in the 1970s. Addleton looks at
the size and composition of the flows of workers, at government policy, at the
impact on the economy, especially through the way the workers' remittances
were invested, and finally at the consequences of declining rates of migration
and remittances.
595
The management of Pakistan's economy, 194782.
Viqar Ahmed, Rashid Amjad. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1984. 315p.
(UGC Monograph Series in Economics).
This work was written primarily for economics students in Pakistan but would
be valuable for anyone wanting basic data and information on trends in the
Pakistan economy since independence. It contains sections on the macro
framework, economic decision-making in a historical perspective, agriculture,
industrial and commercial policies, and the financing of economic development.
596
Trade, finance and development in Pakistan.
J. Russell Andrus, Azizali F. Mohammed. Karachi: Oxford University Press,
1966. 289p. bibliog.
A largely descriptive work which deals first with the importance of trade to
Pakistan's development and then with a number of aspects of the banking
system and public finance. A final chapter covers development planning. The
same authors published The Economy of Pakistan in 1958 (London: Oxford
University Press).
597
Annual Report.
Karachi: State Bank of Pakistan. annual.
Published a few months after the end of each financial year, the Annual Report
is in two
 Page 159
parts. The first reviews the general state of the economy and the current
situation with respect to the money supply, banking, public finance, etc. The
second is a statistical appendix which provides detailed figures on selected
economic indicators, national accounts, agriculture, manufacturing and mining,
money and banking, the capital market, prices, the balance of payments,
foreign trade and government finance. Although there is some overlap with the
Economic Survey (q.v.) the authors of the State Bank document are more
detached in tone and cover financial issues in considerably more detail. The
Bulletin of the State Bank, published monthly, contains items of economic news
and information, but most of its space is given over to statistical tables which
more or less duplicate and update those in the Annual Report.
598
Pakistan's development priorities: choices for the future.
Edited by Shahid Javed Burki, Robert LaPorte, Jr. Karachi: Oxford University
Press, 1984. 390p.
A collection of articles by leading economists on the state of the Pakistan
economy at the beginning of the Sixth Plan period. The book is organized into
sections dealing with the historical background to the economy, sectoral
priorities in agriculture, industry and resource mobilization, human resource
development and delivery systems. A concluding chapter identifies priorities for
the attention of the country's economic planners. The sections dealing with
sectoral priorities and human resources are perhaps the most valuable, but the
book as a whole is an important, if in some respects over-optimistic, review of
the state of the economy in the 1980s. A shorter version of S. Lieberman's
article on population was published in Population and Development Review,
vol. 8, no. 1 (March 1982), p. 85120, under the title 'Demographic
perspectives on Pakistan's development'.
599
Pakistan: energy planning in a strategic vortex.
Charles K. Ebinger. Bloomington, Indiana: Indiana University Press, 1981.
155p. map. bibliog.
This is a policy-oriented study by a US expert on the energy situation facing
Pakistan after the oil price rises of the 1970s. He concludes that Pakistan faces
a serious energy crisis and that its nature and the solutions to it are as much
political as economic. The international implications are also drawn out.
600
Economic Survey.
Islamabad: Government of Pakistan, Ministry of Finance, Economic Adviser's
Wing. annual.
Produced each year on the eve of the budget, i.e. in June, the Economic
Survey reviews the general state of the economy in the previous financial year
(in Pakistan, July-June). A lengthy statistical appendix provides time-series
data on all important economic indicators, including estimates for the year
under review. Much of the material is very detailed and the commentary
naturally reflects current government concerns. Used with care the Economic
Survey is the best starting point for serious economic analysis. From 1986
onwards, a Statistical Supplement has been issued in October to complete the
figures for the previous financial year.
 Page 160
601
Development policy II the Pakistan experience.
Edited by Walter P. Falcon, Gustav F. Papanek. Cambridge, Massachusetts:
Harvard University Press, 1971. 267p.
A series of essays on specific aspects of Pakistan's economic development by
members of Harvard's Development Advisory Service. Topics covered include
agriculture, exports, and entrepreneurship. Although the individual authors
have mostly written elsewhere on their subjects, the collection is a useful one
and illustrates the prevalent policy orientation at the time. An earlier volume,
Development policy theory and practice, edited by Gustav F. Papanek
(Cambridge, Massachusetts: Harvard University Press, 1968), contains three
papers relating to Pakistan.
602
Growth and inequality in Pakistan.
Edited by Keith Griffin, Azizur Rahman Khan. London: Macmillan, St Martin's
Press, 1972. 282p. bibliog.
This is a collection of articles published for the most part in the Pakistan
Development Review in the second half of the 1960s, in which the authors
question some of the assumptions that had been made in development
economics generally and specifically in the case of Pakistan. Criticism is
directed against a number of other economists, Gustav Papanek for example,
who worked in Pakistan during the 1960s. Their main concern is with the
implications for equality of the type of growth-oriented policies pursued during
the 1960s. Some of the contributions deal directly with questions of income
distribution, others look at the implications for such questions of agricultural
and industrial policy.
603
A compendium of Pakistan's economy.
Irfan-ul-Haque. Karachi: Royal Book Company, 1987. 461p. bibliog.
This is a collection of 61 previously published papers and articles on various
aspects of the economy. Regrettably, no indication is given as to the date or
place of original publication, but for the most part they were written during the
1980s for economic and financial magazines in Pakistan. Many relate to the
general state of the economy but there are others on monetary policy and
other macro-economic issues and on industry, agriculture, and trade. The
papers are very often based on government statistics and provide an easy way
into them, although the articles also assume considerable background
knowledge of the economy.
604
Domestic resource mobilization in Pakistan: selected issues.
Nizar Jetha, Shamshad Akhtar, Govinda Rao. Washington, DC: World Bank,
1984. 133p. (World Bank Staff Working Papers, no. 632).
The question of raising the domestic savings rate by mobilizing additional
resources either through taxation or through private savings has been a major
policy issue in Pakistan for a number of years. This World Bank study reviews
the situation in respect of direct and indirect taxation, personal saving and
company saving, and makes a number of recommendations with a view to
raising the overall levels. Appendices outline in a clear and simple way the
taxation structure at the time the report was written.
 Page 161
605
The economic growth of Pakistan.
Sergei Kamanev [sic, Kamenev]. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1985. 169p. bibliog.
This is a general review of Pakistan's economy by a Soviet scholar. Kamenev
takes as his raw material the national accounts produced since 1947 and found
in various official statistical publications. He then uses these data to discuss the
structure of the economy, for example industrial and agricultural production
and public finance, and how it has changed over time. The study ends in 1971.
606
The political economy of Pakistan.
Shahid Kardar. Lahore: Progressive Publishers, 1987. 318p.
This is a collection of 29 newspaper and magazine articles published in the
198486 period mainly in Dawn, Viewpoint, and the Herald. Many aspects of
economic policy are covered by the writer, a journalist and economist who is
highly critical of the current social and economic system in Pakistan.
607
Money and banking in Pakistan.
S. A. Meenai. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1984. 3rd ed. 308p. bibliog.
This standard work by a senior official of the State Bank of Pakistan aims at
and achieves a comprehensive review of the subject. First issued in 1967, the
book describes the various categories of banks and credit institutions in the
country, and then discusses the way monetary policy is handled. A final
chapter in the third edition looks at Islamization and the moves to switch to
non-interest-based forms of lending.
608
Asian drama: an inquiry into the poverty of nations.
Gunnar Myrdal. New York: Twentieth Century Fund, 1968. 3 vols. 2 maps. (A
Twentieth Century Fund Study).
This justly famous work takes South Asia as its principal example in its
discussion of the many political, social and economic factors which affect the
ability of Asian countries to achieve equitable and stable forms of development.
There is a separate chapter on Pakistan's political problems, and the country is
mentioned frequently in other sections of the work.
609
Pakistan's economy through the seventies.
Pakistan's economy through the seventies.
Syed Nawab Haider Naqvi, Khwaja Sarmad. Islamabad: Pakistan Institute of
Development Economics, 1984. 180p. bibliog.
The authors provide a thorough review, based on an extensive statistical
appendix, of what happened to the Pakistan economy between 1969/70 and
1979/80 in terms of agricultural and industrial production, domestic resource
availability, foreign trade, and aid and development. They identify a series of
long-term problems which were not resolved despite the relatively good annual
growth rates in GDP. A related study which looks at the whole period since
independence is by Khwaja Sarmad, A review of Pakistan's development
experience (194950 to 197980) (Islamabad: Pakistan Institute of Development
Economics, 1984 [Research Reports Series, no. 140]).
 Page 162
610
Pakistan and Gulf Economist.
Karachi: Economist Publications, 1960 . weekly.
Published from 1960 to 1982 as the Pakistan Economist, this is a general
economic and political magazine which carries articles on a wide range of
topics related to Pakistan, the Gulf, and world affairs generally. There is a short
statistical section at the end of each issue.
611
Pakistan: Country Report.
London: Economist Intelligence Unit, 1955 . quarterly.
Previously entitled Quarterly Economic Review, this examines current trends in
the economy under such thematic headings as agriculture, industry, energy,
foreign trade, and aid and development. There is also a section on political
developments. The reports aim to interpret as well as to describe. An annually
updated Country Profile places current economic and political developments in
longer-term perspective.
612
Pakistan Development Review.
Islamabad: Pakistan Institute of Development Economics, 1960 . quarterly.
This is the main journal for professional discussion of development issues in
Pakistan. Some papers are highly technical but many are accessible to the non-
professional. Some articles published in the journal are subsequently
incorporated into books or are collected into edited works. Other important
articles are not, however, and research on any aspect of Pakistan's economic
development should begin with the Review. As well as economics in the narrow
sense, it also includes frequent contributions on demographic and other issues.
613
Pakistan Economic and Social Review.
Lahore: University of the Punjab, Department of Economics, 1952 . biannual.
This longstanding journal is concerned primarily with issues of economic
development and with related social questions.
614
Lectures on development strategy, growth, equity and the political process in
southern Asia.
Gustav F. Papanek. Islamabad: Pakistan Institute of Development Economics,
Gustav F. Papanek. Islamabad: Pakistan Institute of Development Economics,
1986. 147p. bibliog. (Lectures in Development Economics, no. 5).
This volume includes the text of three lectures by Papanek in Islamabad in
which he compares the results of the different economic strategies pursued in
Pakistan, India, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka and Indonesia in terms of growth and
equity, and the relationship between the two. He is keenly aware of the
political dimension. The discussion that his lectures provoked, much of which
focused on the Pakistan experience, is reproduced in extenso, as are the
comments at each lecture of Syed Nawab Haider Naqvi.
 Page 163
615
Pakistan's development: social goals and private incentives.
Gustav F. Papanek. Cambridge, Massachusetts: Harvard University Press,
1967; Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1968. 354p. bibliog.
Papanek was one of the earliest and most important of the foreign advisers
who worked in Pakistan during the 1950s and 1960s, and this is his most
important study of the country's economy. In it he outlines and applauds what
he regards as the sensible and pragmatic approach taken by the Ayub Khan
government towards the private sector. The final chapter is titled 'The social
utility of greed'. There is a substantial statistical appendix.
616
Economic development in South Asia: proceedings of a conference held by the
International Economic Association at Kandy, Ceylon.
Edited by E. A. G. Robinson, Michael Kidron. London: Macmillan, St Martin's
Press, 1970. 585p.
The papers collected here arose from a concern to compare the economic
experiences of India and Pakistan in their quests for development. A
conference was subsequently held in the late 1960s at which for the most pan
paired papers by Indian and Pakistani economists on such topics as agricultural
development, the role of the public sector, choice of techniques, trade and
foreign aid were presented and discussed. The volume includes brief
summaries of the discussions that took place on the papers.
617
The economy of Pakistan: a select bibliography.
Akhtar H. Siddiqui. Karachi: Institute of Development Economics, 1963. 162p.
Siddiqui brings together 4,248 items on the economy of Pakistan, many of
them from highly specialized periodicals. The entries are arranged under
subject headings, but there are no annotations. A supplement was published in
1967 covering the period 196365. Siddiqui is the compiler of many other
bibliographies, for example Agriculture in Pakistan: a selected bibliography
(Rawalpindi: United States Agency for International Development, 1969) and A
guide to Pakistan government publications, 195870 (Karachi: National Book
Centre, 1973).
618
Growth and development in Pakistan 19551969.
Joseph J. Stern, Walter P. Falcon. Cambridge, Massachusetts: Center for
International Studies, Harvard University, 1970. 88p. (Occasional Papers in
International Affairs, no. 23).
A useful and compact review of Pakistan's economic development from the
inception of planning in 1955 to the end of the Ayub Khan period. The
agricultural, industrial and social sectors are examined in turn.
619
The economic consequences of divided India: a study of the economy of India
and Pakistan.
C. N. Vakil. Bombay: Vora, 1950. 555p. bibliog.
This work, to which a number of scholars besides Vakil also contributed,
provides a benchmark for studies of the later development of the Pakistan
economy, as well as providing detailed material on the immediate impact of the
partition and economic relations between India and Pakistan. Chapters cover
the refugee problem, agriculture, industry, mining, transport, trade and
finance.
 Page 164
620
World Development Report.
World Bank. New York: Oxford University Press, 1978 . annual.
This is an annual publication which provides an easy and reliable way to view a
country's economy in comparison with others. The first part of each report
reviews trends in the world economy, particularly as they affect Third World
countries. The second, 'World development indicators', is a set of 30 or so
statistical tables covering topics ranging from the structure of production and
balance of payments to demographic trends and social indicators.
Pakistan: its resources and development.
See item no. 30.
The Cambridge Economic History of India.
See item no. 108.
Class structure and economic development: India and Pakistan since the
Moghuls.
See item no. 115.
Economic history of Pakistan.
See item no. 258.
The export of manpower from Pakistan to the Middle East, 19751985.
See item no. 322.
Pakistan in its fourth decade: current political, social, and economic situation
and prospects for the 1980s.
See item no. 487.
Islam and development: the Zia regime in Pakistan.
See item no. 516.
Islamic reassertion in Pakistan: the application of Islamic laws in a modern
state.
See item no. 522.
Pakistan's nuclear dilemma: energy and security dimensions.
See item no. 579.
 Page 165

Planning
621
The first five year plan, 195560.
Karachi: Government of Pakistan, National Planning Board, 1958. 652p. map.
An earlier version of the plan had been published in May 1956 but was then
withdrawn because of opposition from landed interests annoyed by some of the
recommendations. The final version was approved in April 1957, nearly halfway
through the plan period (which ran from April 1955 to March 1960). The
document reviews the general state of the economy in both the private and the
public sectors and then makes its recommendations, setting targets, identifying
projects and proposing policy measures as necessary. The overall aim was a
growth in gross national product (GNP) during the plan period of approximately
15 per cent. Considerable emphasis was placed on agriculture and irrigation.
622
The second five year plan (196065).
Karachi: Government of Pakistan, Planning Commission, 1960. 414p.
Prepared by the government of Ayub Khan and reflecting his pragmatic
orientation, this is a somewhat shorter document than that prepared for the
first plan, although the basic approach to development remained much the
same. The second five-year plan achieved many of its objectives. A final
evaluation of the second five-year plan (196065), was published by the
Planning Commission in 1966.
623
The third five year plan (196570).
Karachi: Government of Pakistan, Planning Commission, 1968. 605p. map.
An initial draft of the third plan was published in August 1964 to elicit
comments. It then had to be revised in the light of financial and other
difficulties flowing from the September 1965 war with India. The revisions are
indicated in a separately paginated 36-page appendix, 'Revised phasing,
sectoral priorities and allocations of the third five year plan (196570)'.
 Page 166
624
The fourth five year plan (197075).
Islamabad: Government of Pakistan, Planning Commission, 1970. 574p.
Produced in the period immediately after the agitation against President Ayub
and as the crisis over East Pakistan was beginning to develop, the fourth plan
reflects these developments, although it follows the standard pattern of
describing each specific sector of the economy and setting targets to be
achieved in the immediate future. Reports of the advisory panels for the fourth
five-year plan (Islamabad: Government of Pakistan, Planning Commission,
1970, 2 vols), published at the same time, gives a clearer picture of the
differences among economists over the direction the plan should take. The first
volume in fact consists of separate reports submitted by the East and West
Pakistani members of the general panel.
625
The fifth five year plan (197883).
Karachi: Government of Pakistan, Planning Commission, 1978. 266p.
The fourth plan was aborted because of the 1971 civil war and the subsequent
change of régime in West Pakistan. After the overthrow of Bhutto, who had
used a series of annual plans for economic policy purposes, the Zia régime
produced a fifth five-year plan in 1978 which emphasized higher levels of
resource mobilization and improved efficiency. As usual, the plan document
consists of sections on broad strategy and sectoral programmes and a
statistical review.
626
The sixth five year plan 198388.
Islamabad: Government of Pakistan, Planning Commission, [n.d. (1986)].
647p.
The document sets out the general planning strategy for the sixth plan (July
1983June 1988), which was designed to produce GDP growth of 6.5 per cent
through greater private sector investment and higher savings levels generally.
Each sector of the economy including human resources is given a chapter in
which past performance is reviewed and in which targets are set and projects
identified for the sixth plan. A statistical appendix sums up past performance
and the sixth plan targets.
627
7th five year plan 198893 and perspective plan 19882003 (draft).
Islamabad: Government of Pakistan, Planning Commission, 1988. 714p.
Published a few weeks before the official start of the seventh plan in July 1988
and prepared during the Zia period, this draft follows the pattern of previous
plan documents in reviewing the past and setting future targets, although
there is no separate statistical section. The seventh plan as set out here
continues the emphasis of the sixth on the private sector. The document also
includes a perspective plan which sets out the basic economic framework for
longer-term development up to 2003.
628
Studies in development planning.
Edited by Hollis B. Chenery. Cambridge, Massachusetts: Harvard University
Press, 1971. 422p. bibliog. (Harvard Economic Studies, vol. 136).
This collection of rather technical studies in the methodology of economic
planning includes two papers on Pakistan: by A. MacEwan on problems of
intersectoral and
 Page 167
interregional resource allocation in the context of divisions between East and
West Pakistan, and by Carl Gotsch on the application of linear programming to
problems of agricultural policy.
629
Development strategy for the sixth 198388: an IPS task force report.
Islamabad: Institute of Policy Studies, 1983. 137p.
This is an attempt by a group of economists to produce an alternative strategy
for Pakistan's economic development which is more in keeping with an Islamic
position. The authors emphasize the importance of achieving development
based on indigenous resources and in line with the Islamic principles of justice
and welfare. More specifically, they argue for greater investment in agriculture
and greater attention to regional development.
630
Federal and sovereign: a policy framework for the economic development of
Pakistan.
Lahore: Independent Planning Commission, 1985. 179p.
Intended as a blueprint for an alternative path of economic development, this
report was produced by a group of left-wing economists, journalists and others
to stimulate public debate over the policy issues at stake. The style is
deliberately popular. The commission members argue that a radical
restructuring and decentralization of power within the country is the only way
forward if just and equitable economic development is to take place.
631
The strategy of economic planning: a case study of Pakistan.
Mahbub ul Haq. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1966. 2nd ed. 266p.
First published in 1963, this has been an influential book in the history of
Pakistan planning. The author, who eventually became minister of finance in
the 1980s, had been associated earlier with the Planning Commission and here
argues for a much bolder approach to planning if Pakistan is to make rapid
progress towards self-reliant economic growth.
632
A short-term model for Pakistan economy: an econometric analysis.
Nurul Islam. Lahore; Karachi; Dacca: Oxford University Press, 1965. 148p.
The purpose of an econometric model is to aid decision-makers in their work by
indicating the effect of changes in one part of the economy on other parts. In
indicating the effect of changes in one part of the economy on other parts. In
this technical monograph, Islam constructs such a model for the Pakistan
economy and organizes existing data to provide a statistical estimation of it.
633
Planning and development in Pakistan: review and alternatives 19471982.
M. L. Qureshi. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1984. 428p.
The author of this critical analysis of Pakistan's development strategy worked
both as an academic economist and as a policy-maker, and was at one time
chief economist in the Pakistan Planning Commission. In the first part of the
book, Qureshi reviews the extent to which past strategies have succeeded in
meeting basic needs and achieving
 Page 168
equitable distribution of income. The second part puts forward suggestions for
an alternative approach based on decentralization of planning and better use
of existing resources.
634
Western economists and eastern societies.
George Rosen. Baltimore, Maryland; London: Johns Hopkins University Press,
1985. 270p. (Johns Hopkins Studies in Development).
This interesting book by someone who himself belongs to the group he
describes is about the work of the many Western, especially American
economists who worked as advisers in South Asia in the 1950s and 1960s
under the auspices of the Ford Foundation. In the case of Pakistan this means
particularly the Harvard Advisory Group, which exercised a major influence on
economic policy during the Ayub Khan period and was involved in the
establishment of the Pakistan Institute of Development Economics. Rosen
describes the ways in which the initial naive assumptions and 'myths' of some
of the advisers had to be modified, but his overall assessment of their impact is
positive.
635
River basin planning: theory and practice.
Edited by Suranjit K. Saha, Christopher J. Barrow. Chichester, England; New
York; Brisbane; Toronto: Wiley, 1981. 357p. maps. bibliog.
The purpose of this volume, which originated in a 1980 colloquium, is to
stimulate interest in the practical study of river basin planning. M. J.
Shepperdson contributed a paper, 'The development of irrigation in the Indus
river basin, Pakistan', p. 191213, which looks at the demographic,
environmental, and socio-economic consequences of the development of
irrigation in Pakistan.
636
Planning in Pakistan: organization and implementation.
Albert Waterston, assisted by C. J. Martin, Fritz A. Steuber. Baltimore,
Maryland: Johns Hopkins Press, 1963. 150p. map. bibliog.
An early but still useful work which describes in detail the way Pakistan's first
three five-year plans were formulated and implemented. Waterston and his
colleagues are concerned with such issues as the relationship between the
plans and the budgetary policy of the government, which was often at odds
with planning objectives.
Pakistan's development priorities: choices for the future.
See item no. 598.
Bestimmungsgründe und Alternativen divergierender regionaler
Wachstumsverläufe in Entwicklungsländern: eine theoretische und empirische
Analyse unter besonderer Berücksichtigung der Regionalentwicklung in Ost-
und Westpakistan, 19471970. (Determinants of and alternatives to diverging
regional growth paths in developing countries: a theoretical and empirical
analysis with special reference to regional development in East and West
Pakistan.)
See item no. 649.
Planning for education in Pakistan: a personal case study.
See item no. 693.
 Page 169

Standards of Living
637
Lebensverhätnisse ländlicher Familien in Westpakistan: eine Typisierung
ländlicher Haushalte als Grundlage für entwicklungspolitische Maßnahmen,
dargestellt am Beispiel von sechs Dörfern im Distrikt Peshawar, Westpakistan.
(Conditions of life of rural families in West Pakistan: a typology of rural
households as a foundation for political development measures, based on the
example of six villages in Peshawar district, West Pakistan.)
Herbert Albrecht. Saarbrücken, West Germany: Verlag der SSIP-SchriftenD.
Breitenbach, 1971. 328p. bibliog. (Sozialökonomische Schriften zur
Agrarentwicklung, no. 3).
A socio-economic study of six villages which discusses social stratification,
patterns of landholding, consumption levels and other aspects of rural life.
Albrecht is concerned to relate changes in type and status of household to
stages in family life-cycles.
638
Rural-urban migration and the urban poor in Pakistan.
V. Belokrenitsky. Journal of South Asian and Middle Eastern Studies, vol. 8, no.
1 (Fall 1984), p. 3546.
The author discusses the economic conditions of the migrants to the towns
who have been displaced from the land by the mechanization of agriculture,
most of whom have had to search for jobs in the low-productivity 'informal'
sector and in service occupations. He examines the social framework of
migrants' lives, and concludes that traditional structures continue to play an
important part.
 Page 170
639
Asie du Sud: traditions et changements. (South Asia: traditions and
transformations.)
Edited by Marc Gaborieau, Alice Thorner. Paris: Éditions du Centre National de
la Recherche Scientifique, 1979. 676p. (Colloques Internationaux du Centre
National de la Recherche Scientifique).
The most important paper on Pakistan in this conference volume is by M. J.
Shepperdson, p. 53141, 'Health policies and planning in Pakistan'.
Shepperdson reviews the overall position on the health front and examines
government programmes to improve it, with special attention to the 196576
period. He argues that malaria eradication has in the past absorbed a
disproportionate share of resources.
640
Long-term trends in income distribution in Pakistan.
Stephen Guisinger, Norman L. Hicks. World Development, vol. 6, nos 1112
(Nov.Dec. 1978), p. 127180.
A review of the evidence on income distribution from 1951 to 1975 using data
from a variety of sources. The authors conclude, contrary to both popular
perception and orthodox economic theory, that income inequality did not
worsen in the 196472 period of relatively rapid economic growth, largely
because of rises in agricultural incomes. Their tentative conclusion for the
197275 period is that while the real wages of some sectors of the organized
industrial workforce may have risen, stagnation elsewhere meant that overall
income inequality increased.
641
The structure of disparity in developing agriculture: a case study of the
Pakistan Punjab.
Shigemochi Hirashima. Tokyo: Institute of Developing Economies, 1978. 138p.
bibliog. (I.D.E. Occasional Papers Series, no. 16).
The existence of sharp disparities of income between landowners and landless
which do not disappear as a result of the type of agricultural development
experienced in countries such as Pakistan is treated in this case-study as a
historically based phenomenon. Hirashima goes back to the introduction of
irrigation during the late 19th century to show how institutional and
technological factors interact to sustain existing disparities.
642
Working with statistics of quality of life: Pakistan, 1960 to 1983.
Haroon Jamal, Salman Malik. The Developing Economies, vol. 25, no. 3 (Sept.
1987), p. 27080.
A pioneering effort to construct a physical quality of life index for Pakistan for
the period stated, using data from official sources. A physical quality of life
index seeks to measure a country's progress in social rather than narrowly
economic terms, for example in the fields of health and education. The authors
conclude that over the 23 years studied Pakistan has made no major
breakthroughs.
643
Poverty in rural Asia.
Edited by Azizur Rahman Khan, Eddie Lee. Bangkok: International Labour
Organization Asian Employment Programme, 1984. 276p.
This volume produced under the auspices of the ILO looks at the extent and
nature of poverty in rural Asia. M. Irfan and Rashid Amjad contribute a chapter
on poverty in
 Page 171
rural Pakistan (p. 1947). In it they review the findings of empirical research in
the 1960s and 1970s. They find that the evidence remains insufficient for firm
conclusions but that the major economic changes that took place in agriculture
during this time did not necessarily lead to much amelioration of poverty.
644
Welfare implications or sugar pricing in Pakistan.
Mahmood Hasan Khan. Food Policy, vol. 11, no. 3 (Aug. 1986), p. 2538.
Khan reviews the consequences of the high levels of protection given to sugar
producers in Pakistan since the mid-1970s. These have led to a rapid increase
in output but not to increases in productivity. Using partial equilibrium analysis,
he argues that private profit has been at the expense of the consumer.
645
The quality of life in Pakistan: studies in social sector economics.
Edited by Ijaz Nabi. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1986. 401p. bibliog.
A series of important studies, some of them reprinted from specialist journals,
on the less tangible aspects of economic development which nevertheless have
a major bearing on the well-being of the individual. The initial section contains
articles on the overall position of Pakistan in comparison with other countries,
and on the regional position internally. Thereafter there are sections on health,
education, and housing. Where necessary, the studies are technical, but most
are easy for the non-specialist to follow. Except for the introduction, the articles
do not go beyond 1982 in their coverage.
646
Underdevelopment, poverty and inequality in Pakistan.
S. M. Naseem. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1981. 323p. bibliog.
The author, a distinguished economist, examines Pakistan's economic
performance since independence so as to survey in an integrated fashion 'the
consequences of the economic strategies and policies adopted during the
period, for economic development, income redistribution and poverty
alleviation'. Naseem is particularly concerned with the agrarian situation.
647
Rural poverty in South Asia.
Edited by T. N. Srinivasan, Pranab K. Bardhan. New York: Columbia University
Press, 1988. 565p.
Most of this substantial volume is concerned with India but one article by
Most of this substantial volume is concerned with India but one article by
Shahid Javed Burki, 'Poverty in Pakistan: myth or reality?', p. 6988, considers
Pakistan. Burki's argument is that Pakistan no longer suffers quite the same
acute poverty that it did up to the 1970s and as is to be found elsewhere in
South Asia, partly because of labour migration to the Middle East and partly
because of the economic development that has taken place both in industry
and in agriculture. He points, however, to the difficulties in interpreting the
available data.
648
The political economy of healthcare in Pakistan.
S. Akbar Zaidi. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1988. 342p.
This is a series of separate studies on the general subject of the provision of
healthcare facilities in Pakistan. As the title indicates, the author links the
problems he identifies, such as the urban bias in the provision of medical
services in Pakistan, to structural
 Page 172
characteristics of Pakistan society. Nearly half the work is taken up by a survey-
based study entitled 'Medical students: their socio-economic background and
urban choice', carried out jointly with Salman Malik in 1984. For this, 358
students in Sindh medical colleges were interviewed. The paper includes the
tabulated results and the full text of a number of the interviews.
Growth and inequality in Pakistan.
See item no. 602.
Regional Disparities
649
Bestimmungsgründe und Alternativen divergierender regionaler
Wachstumsverläufe in Entwickungsländern: eine theoretische und empirische
Analyse unter besonderer Berücksichtigung der Regionalentwicklung in Ost-
und Westpakistan, 19471970. (Determinants of and alternatives to diverging
regional growth paths in developing countries: a theoretical and empirical
analysis with special reference to regional development in East and West
Pakistan.)
Heinz-Dietmar Ahrens. Wiesbaden, West Germany: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1978.
392p. bibliog. (Beiträge zur Südasienforschung Südasien-Institut Universität
Heidelberg, vol. 42).
This is a mathematically based study of economic development strategies
designed to maximize overall growth and regional distribution at the same
time. Ahrens sets up a simulation exercise to test what the effects of different
strategies might have been in the case of East and West Pakistan. There is
practical discussion of such issues as transfer of foreign exchange from one
wing to the other and the allocation of foreign aid.
650
Die Problematik regionaler Entwicklungsunterschiede in Entwicklungsländern:
eine theoretische und empirische Analyse dargestellt am beispiel Pakistans
unter Verwendung der Hauptkomponentenmethode. (The problem of regional
differences in development in developing countries: a theoretical and empirical
analysis based on the example of Pakistan through the use of the principal
components method.)
Wolfgang-Peter Zingel. Wiesbaden, West Germany: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1979.
554p. maps. bibliog. (Beiträge zur Südasienforschung Südasien-Institut
Universität Heidelberg, vol. 51).
Using rigorous statistical methods, Zingel explores the degree and nature of
regional disparities in economic development in Pakistan up to the beginning of
the 1970s. He establishes a basis on which to classify all the districts of the
country. He then examines the possible explanations for these differences in
terms of past government policy.
 Page 173
Pakistan: failure in national integration.
See item no. 257.
Private industrial investment in Pakistan 19601980.
See item no. 652.
 Page 174

Industry
651
Entrepreneurship in the Third World: risk and uncertainty in industry in
Pakistan.
Zafar Altaf. London; New York; Sydney: Croom Helm, 1988. 224p. bibliog.
This book discusses different types of entrepreneurial behaviour in Pakistan in
the light of the specific political environment there. The author blames the
propensity of successive governments to intervene in the economy for
producing an unstable situation for entrepreneurial activity. The value of the
work is rather reduced by poor organization and layout. An earlier work by Altaf
on the same subject is Pakistani entrepreneurs (London: Croom Helm, 1983).
652
Private industrial investment in Pakistan 19601980.
Rashid Amjad. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press, 1982. 257p.
bibliog. (Cambridge South Asian Studies, no. 26).
This important work studies levels of investment in industry in the 1960s and
seeks to explain the high rates in the early years of the decade and the
markedly lower ones after 1965. The author finds the key factor to be foreign
aid inflows, high levels of which combined with an overvalued exchange rate
permitted highly profitable investment to be made in the earlier period. After
1965 a foreign exchange constraint and the imposition of controls on
investment limited new projects. The author draws attention to the
concentration of control over industrial assets in this period and to the increase
in interregional inequality, as well as to the higher levels of foreign
indebtedness that resulted from the policies followed.
653
The structure of protection in developing countries.
Bela Balassa and associates. Baltimore, Maryland; London: Johns Hopkins
Press, 1971. 375p.
This is a study for the World Bank and the Inter-American Development Bank
on protection of industries, a major topic in development economics. Seven
countries
 Page 175
were studied following a common methodology. The study of Pakistan is by
Stephen R. Lewis, Jr. and Stephen E. Guisinger. They describe the complex
system used at the time to protect Pakistan's nascent industries, especially the
system of multiple exchange rates.
654
Foreign aid and industrial development in Pakistan.
Irving Brecher, S. A. Abbas. London: Cambridge University Press, 1972.271p.
bibliog. (Perspectives on Development, no. 1).
A specialized study of the interaction between flows of foreign aid to Pakistan
up to the late 1960s and economic development, particularly in the industrial
sector. A series of case-studies are presented in both the public and private
sectors. The authors conclude that aid during the period studied was a major
factor in Pakistan's growth but that to be effective aid must always be tied to
appropriate institutional change in the recipient country, not least so as to
avoid increasing income disparities.
655
Pakistan: industrialization and traded policies.
Stephen R. Lewis, Jr. London; New York; Karachi: Oxford University Press for
OECD, Paris, 1970. 214p. bibliog.
A technical study of the impact of government policy towards manufacturing
exports on the rate and composition of industrial growth. The work is valuable
for its description of the various policy instruments and its statistical appendix,
as well as for its discussion of the rapid industrial growth that occurred in the
1960s, and of the effect of policy on regional disparities between East and
West Pakistan.
656
Pakistan's big businessmen: Muslim separatism, entrepreneurship, and partial
modernization.
Hanna Papanek. Economic Development and Cultural Change, vol. 21, no. 1
(Oct. 1972), p. 132.
This is an important study of the role played by migrants from India, especially
Bombay and Gujarat, in the development of an indigenous capitalist class.
Papanek sets the business activities of the largest families in historical and
sociological context.
657
657
Industrial concentration and economic power in Pakistan.
Lawrence J. White. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1974.
212p. bibliog.
This study, using tools derived from the study of industrial organization in
developed countries, looks at the degree of concentration of industrial control
in Pakistan in the late 1960s, a period when the position of the so-called '22
families' who owned much of the organized sector of industry as well as banks
was under public scrutiny. White seeks to understand how such concentrations
occur and their likely economic and non-economic effects. He concludes with a
review of the initial measures taken by the incoming Bhutto government at the
beginning of 1972.
Interested groups and development: business and politics in Pakistan.
See item no. 467.
 Page 176

Agriculture
658
Pakistan: the political economy of rural development.
Edited by Karamat Ali. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1982. 381p.
This is a useful collection of twelve articles on various aspects of Pakistan's
agricultural sector, with the general theme of the two-way interaction between
technological change and political power. Topics covered include land reform,
agricultural taxation and the introduction of tractors into agriculture. All but the
first and last articles are reprinted from various specialist journals, some of
which would not easily be available except in a large library.
659
Irrigation development planning: aspects of Pakistan experience.
I. D. Carruthers. Ashford, England: Wye College, Department of Economics,
1968. 67p. bibliog. maps. (Agrarian Development Studies, no. 2).
A study of the economic factors affecting the design of irrigation projects,
based on practical experience of work in the lower Indus region. The author
discusses the best methods of project appraisal and concludes with a
discussion of the vital but very sensitive issues of pricing policy and agricultural
taxation.
660
An appraisal of wheat market policy in Pakistan.
Peter A. Cornelisse, Syed Nawab Haider Naqvi. World Development, vol. 17,
no. 3 (March 1989), p. 40919.
This is a brief article based on a large-scale research project into current
policies towards wheat marketing and the role of government agencies. The
article argues for a more market-oriented approach in view of the improvement
in the levels of wheat production since the 1960s.
 Page 177
661
Irrigation and drainage in the world: a global view.
K. K. Framji, I. K. Mahajan. New Delhi: International Commission on Irrigation
and Drainage, 1969. 2nd ed. 2 vols.
First published in 1955, this work provides a comprehensive review of the
subject in all the world's major countries. Pakistan is dealt with in the second
volume, p. 791847. The chapter reviews the climatic and geological
background and then lists the main irrigation works that have been
constructed. It also deals with the drainage schemes that have been put in
hand from 1959 onwards to deal with the serious problems of waterlogging
and salinity that have developed in the wake of irrigation projects. It also
covers the legal and administrative aspects of the subject.
662
Prices, taxes and subsidies in Pakistan agriculture, 19601976.
Carl Gotsch, Gilbert Brown. Washington, DC: World Bank, 1980. 108p. map.
(World Bank Staff Working Paper, no. 387).
This is a technical paper intended for economists and others involved in
agricultural policy-making. The particular focus is on the relationship between
prices paid to the farmer (fixed or heavily influenced by government) and
agricultural investment. The authors conclude that although for political
reasons prices paid for some crops have been kept artificially low, in general
price levels were sufficient to allow for steady growth in the period studied.
663
Impact of agricultural research and extension on crop productivity in Pakistan:
a production function approach.
Mahmood Hasan Khan, Ather Hussain Akbari. World Development, vol. 14, no.
6 (June 1986), p. 75762.
A brief review of the subject using advanced statistical techniques. The authors
conclude that in the past Pakistan has invested low amounts in these areas
and that the marginal return on further investment would be very high.
664
Irrigation management in Pakistan: four papers.
Douglas J. Merrey, James M. Wolf. Digana, Sri Lanka: International Irrigation
Management Institute, 1986. 66p. maps. bibliog. (IIMI Research Paper, no.
4).
The papers included in this volume review the irrigation situation in Pakistan
and attempt to provide some answers to the question of why an area which,
with irrigation, could be highly fertile has not fulfilled its potential. The three
papers by Merrey look at local-level sociological and ecological processes which
affect the way the irrigation system operates. That by Wolf is concerned with
how the operation and maintenance of the system is funded.
665
The agrarian economy of Pakistan: issues and policies.
Ijaz Nabi, Naved Harold, Shahid Zahid. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1986.
337p. bibliog. (UGC Monograph Series in Economics).
Intended for professional economists and advanced students, this work
provides a sophisticated review of alternative theoretical approaches to the
study of agricultural development, and then examines in detail the relationship
between farm size and productivity, tenancy, linear programming approaches
to farmers' decision-making, and rural-urban migration. The three authors
make the best of the available data.
 Page 178
666
Land reforms in Pakistan: a historical perspective.
Edited by Syed Nawab Haider Naqvi, Mahmood Hasan Khan, M. Ghaffar
Chaudhry. Islamabad: Pakistan Institute of Development Economics, 1987.
216p.
This is in fact a collection of key documents illustrating the history of proposals
to change the structure of landholding in Pakistan up to 1959. Included in the
volume, in whole or in large part, are the reports of the Government Hari
Enquiry Committee, 194748 (together with a minute of dissent by M. Masud);
the Agrarian Committee appointed by the Pakistan Muslim League, 1949; the
Land Reforms Commission, 1959; and chapter seventeen of the first five-year
plan. There is an introductory chapter by the editors which sets the documents
in context and concludes that little has actually happened to change the rural
status quo.
667
The green revolution in Pakistan: implications of technological change.
Leslie Nulty, foreword by Arthur Gaitskell. New York; Washington; London:
Praeger, 1972. 150p. map. bibliog. (Praeger Special Studies in International
Economics and Development).
This useful although now rather dated study looks at the substantial increases
in agricultural output, mainly wheat, that were beginning to be achieved in the
late 1960s, within the wider context of the Pakistan economy. She argues that
some farmers in Pakistan were well placed to take advantage of the increased
availability of water and fertilizer but that without corresponding changes in the
distribution of land the benefits of agricultural development were likely to
remain concentrated in the hands of a few. She also argues against the need
to maintain artificially high prices for agricultural products as a means of
stimulating production.
668
Political regimes, public policy and economic development: agricultural
performance and rural change in two Punjabs.
Holly Sims. New Delhi; Newbury Park, California; London: Sage, 1988. 206p.
The Punjab before 1947 was a single geographical unit, and the fate of the
two halves after a purely political division therefore becomes an interesting
issue for comparative economic and political study. The demonstrably superior
agricultural performance of Indian Punjab is attributed in this carefully
researched study, which included intensive interviews with farmers on both
sides of the border, to the impact of greater political participation in the Indian
political system and to a more effective administrative system. An earlier study
of the same subject, which looked primarily at output comparisons, was by
Chandra Prabha, 'Districtwise rates of growth in agricultural output in East and
West Punjab during the pre-partition and post-partition periods', Indian
Economic and Social History Review, vol. 6, no. 4 (Dec. 1969), p. 34750.
669
Rural development in Pakistan.
Edited by Richard Stanford. Durham, North Carolina: Carolina Academic Press,
1980. 164p. bibliog.
This is a set of short papers which emerged out of a visit to Pakistan in 1973 by
a group of American academics. The writers are mainly Pakistani academics
and government officials who met and talked with the group in order to explain
to it the problems of rural development in Pakistan and the way the
government had tried to tackle them. The tone of most of the papers is simple
and straightforward and the volume as a
 Page 179
whole would be useful as background for undergraduate students of economic
development as well as for a wider audience.
670
Rural development in Bangladesh and Pakistan.
Edited by Robert D. Stevens, Hamza Alavi, Peter J. Bertocci. Honolulu, Hawaii:
University Press of Hawaii, 1976. 399p. bibliog.
Just over half of the papers in this collection, most of which were originally
presented to a conference in 1971, deal with Pakistan. While the general
theme is rural development and the interrelationship of economic and social
change, the range of topics covered and the disciplinary approaches adopted
are quite broad. Stevens identifies the five main themes as agricultural
stagnation and growth, the regional effects of agricultural growth, changing
political and social relationships, impending crises, and implications for the role
of government and political institutions.
The wealth and welfare of the Punjab.
See item no. 180.
Pakistan's rural development.
See item no. 431.
Land to the tiller: the political economy of agrarian reform in South Asia.
See item no. 462.
The economy of Pakistan: a select bibliography.
See item no. 617.
Welfare implications of sugar pricing in Pakistan.
See item no. 644.
The economics of camel transport in Pakistan.
See item no. 677.
West Pakistan: rural education and development.
See item no. 695.
 Page 180

Trade
671
Exports, politics, and economic development: Pakistan 19701982.
John Adams, Sabiha Iqbal. Boulder, Colorado: Westview Press, 1983. 257p.
bibliog.
The emphasis of this work is very firmly on the political aspects of Pakistan's
trade performance during the Bhutto period and the first five years of President
Zia's régime. The authors argue that policy has to be seen as arising from the
interplay of political interests. They also show how export performance in turn
feeds back into the distribution of income and influence among the groups
involved.
672
Foreign Trade Statistics.
Islamabad: Government of Pakistan, Federal Bureau of Statistics, 1955 .
quarterly.
Initially published on an annual basis, these statistics provide detailed
information on Pakistan's imports and exports of all commodities. The
information is summarized in other statistical publications of the Government of
Pakistan, for example the Statistical Yearbook, and these figures would be
needed only by those interested in one particular product or with some other
very specialized interest.
673
Pakistan's trade with Eastern bloc countries.
Michael Kidron. New York; Washington; London: Praeger, 1972. 131p.
The author presents a general argument on the economic relationship between
Eastern bloc countries and countries of the South or Third World, and uses
Pakistan as a case-study. Whereas the general argument is based on a
theoretical analysis of world power relations, the case-study is 'austerely
empirical'. The book discusses the sharp rise in Pakistan's trade with Eastern
bloc countries in the 1960s, which in 196970 reached 11.6 per cent of the
total, but concludes that, as in fact turned out to be the case, prospects for
further growth were limited. There is a detailed statistical section.
 Page 181
674
Pattern of foreign trade of Pakistan.
Karachi: Chamber of Commerce and Industry, 1984. 2nd ed. 278p.
Based on official sources, this publication summarizes Pakistan's trade with
each one of its trading partners. For each country there is a summary
statement of the balance of trade from 1969/70 to 1982/83 and a list of the
items traded from 1979/80 on. Summary tables are also included. An earlier
edition was published in 1977.
Trade, finance and development in Pakistan.
See item no. 596.
The structure of protection in developing countries.
See item no. 653.
Pakistan: industrialization and trade policies.
See item no. 655.
 Page 182

Transport
675
Relics of the Raj.
C. J. Gammell. London: G.R.Q. Publications, 1985.96p. maps.
South Asia is well known as the part of the world where steam engines still play
a major role in railway transport, and it has duly attracted attention from
railway enthusiasts. The present volume is made up mainly of black and white
photographs of engines taken in the early 1980s. The Pakistan railway system
gets its proportionate share of attention. In addition to the photographs, there
is a map of the system and a list of the classes of steam engines in use.
676
Boats and boatmen of Pakistan.
Basil Greenhill. Newton Abbot, England: David & Charles, 1971. 191p. 2 maps.
Written before the break-up of Pakistan, this work naturally devotes most of its
space to the amphibious conditions of East Bengal, but there are two chapters
on West Pakistan. One is on the traditional fishing boats of the coast near
Karachi, the other on the boats used on the fast-flowing rivers of the northern
areas. The fieldwork on which the book is based was mostly carried out in the
1950s. The author is a specialist in traditional methods of boat-building and his
work is a significant contribution. The book wears its learning lightly, however,
and would be of fairly wide interest.
677
The economics of camel transport in Pakistan.
Alan Heston, H. Hasnain, S. Z. Hussain, R. N. Khan. Economic Development
and Cultural Change, vol. 34, no. 1 (Oct. 1985), p. 12141.
This interesting article reports the results of a survey in 1982 carried out by the
Pakistan Agricultural Research Council in order to assess the current position of
camels in the Pakistan economy at a time when many of their traditional
functions are being performed mechanically. The conclusion is that for some
types of activity camel power remains economically competitive, for example
short-haul freight in towns and cities, but that the cost of fodder is a key
variable.
 Page 183
678
Hundred years of Pakistan Railways: Pakistan Western Railways 1861-1961,
Pakistan Eastern Railways 18621962.
M. B. K. Malik. Karachi: Government of Pakistan, Ministry of Railways and
Communications, 1962. 226p. 15 maps. bibliog.
Produced under official auspices, this work covers a remarkably wide range of
topics, including the expansion of the railway system, details of employee
welfare, and the technical details of rolling stock so beloved by enthusiasts.
The book is illustrated by many black and white photographs.
 Page 184

Statistics
679
Environment Statistics of Pakistan.
Islamabad: Government of Pakistan, Federal Bureau of Statistics, Statistical
Division, 1984 . annual.
This publication brings together existing statistical data on natural resources,
energy, land, human settlement and pollution to provide an overall view of
Pakistan's environment, although the preface acknowledges gaps in the
coverage.
680
Pakistan Statistical Yearbook.
Karachi: Government of Pakistan, Statistics Division, Federal Bureau of
Statistics, 19527. annual.
The most authoritative statistical source for Pakistan, this volume provides over
600 pages of statistics covering all aspects of Pakistan life, but with a strong
emphasis on the economic. Currently, there are twenty sections including:
climate; population; labour; agriculture; manufacturing; energy and mining;
transport; money and banking; insurance and joint stock companies; balance
of payments; public finance; cooperative societies; health; education; society
and culture; national accounts; prices; foreign trade; foreign aid; and
development planning. As far as possible, the tables cover the past ten years.
The Yearbook was first published in 1952 but began to appear on an annual
basis only somewhat later. From time to time special retrospective editions are
published, for example Twenty-five years of Pakistan in statistics, 194772.
681
Statistical Pocket Book of Pakistan.
Karachi: Statistics Division, Federal Bureau of Statistics, [c. 1962 ]. annual.
Closely related to the previous entry, this covers effectively the same fields as
the Yearbook, except foreign aid, but presents the figures in a much more
concise and abbreviated form. In size it lives up to its title.
 Page 185
682
Statistical Yearbook/ Annuaire statistique.
New York: United Nations, [c.1950 ]. annual.
The United Nations statistical yearbook contains summary statistics on
population, economy, communications, education and other topics. Although
derived for the most part from Pakistani sources, and thus overlapping with the
Pakistan Statistical Yearbook (q.v.), the data in the UN source have been
processed and presented in such a way that Pakistan can be compared to
other countries. A number of specialized UN agencies produce statistical
information from which information on Pakistan can be derived. Among these
are UNESCO (Statistical Yearbook); ILO (Yearbook of Labour Statistics); IMF
(International Financial Statistics [monthly]). Pakistan is not, however, a
member of WHO.
Annual report.
See item no. 597.
Economic survey.
See item no. 600.
World development report.
See item no. 620.
 Page 186

Urban Development
683
Karachi.
Mohamed Amin, Duncan Willetts, Brian Tetley. Karachi: Pak American
Commercial, 1986. 136p.
This is a glossy introduction to the city, primarily aimed at a tourist market.
There are numerous photographs.
684
Squatter settlements in Pakistan: the impact of upgrading.
Maarten L. Kool, Dik Verboom, Jan J. van der Linden. Lahore: Vanguard Books,
1988. 182p. bibliog.
The focus of this study, one of the results of a long-term Dutch research
project in Karachi, is a long-established squatter settlement in Karachi which in
1977 was selected for regularization and upgrading. Surveys in 1977, 1979,
1981, 1983 and 1987 allowed the researchers to trace in great detail the way
this affected the residents. Their conclusions are that the upgrading has been
only a partial success.
685
Lahore: Entwicklung und räumliche Ordnung seines zentralen
Geschäftsbereich. (Lahore: development and spatial organization of its central
business area.)
Josef Mayer. Erlangen, West Germany: Fränkischen Geographischen
Gesellschaft, 1979. 196p. 10 maps. bibliog. (Erlangen Geographische Arbeiten,
Sonderband no. 9).
A detailed analysis, originally submitted as a doctoral dissertation, on the urban
geography of Lahore, or rather of its central business area. Each individual
locality in the bazaar and its economic activities is described. The focus of the
work is the distinctive spatial organization of the area, with each trade or
activity being concentrated in one small area, despite the absence of any
formal 'planning'.
 Page 187
686
The new capitals of India, Pakistan and Bangladesh.
Sten Nilsson. Lund, Sweden: Studentlitteratur, 1973. 230p. maps.
There is a brief mention of Lahore and a more extended coverage of Karachi,
Pakistan's capital immediately after independence, but the main Pakistan
section of this book is a substantial essay on Islamabad. As well as looking at
the historical and political context in which Islamabad was planned and
constructed, the author discusses the outlook of the city's principal designer,
the Greek architect and planner C. A. Doxiadis. He then examines the different
ways in which the architects of the individual buildings conceived their task and
comments on their relative success. There are numerous, not always very well
produced, plans and illustrations.
687
Lahore: urban development in the third world.
Mohammad A. Qadeer. Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1983. 282p. 13 maps.
bibliog.
This is a study of the process of urban change in a large Third World city.
Qadeer, himself a native of Lahore and with a wide comparative knowledge,
sees the city as a totality and explores the impact on it, and on the quality of
life of its citizens, of the rapid changes of the post-independence period. He is
sceptical of some of the 'solutions' that have been put forward to resolve the
'urban crisis', but suggests that with appropriate policy shifts a decent life for
Lahore's citizens can be achieved.
688
Urban biographies.
Grenfell Rudduck. Karachi: Government of Pakistan, Planning Commission,
1965. 127p. 3 maps. (Study no. P.P.&H 19).
Rudduck, an architect and town planner, worked as an adviser to the Planning
Commission in the field of urban development in the late 1950s. In this work
he presents three brief but still useful historical studies of Karachi, Lahore and
Dhaka written primarily from a town planning perspective.
689
Between basti dwellers and bureaucrats: lessons in squatter settlement
upgrading in Karachi.
J. W. Schoorl, J. J. van der Linden, K. S. Yap. Oxford, England: Pergamon
Press, 1983. 305p. maps. bibliog.
The volume contains a series of articles emerging out of a twelve-year
involvement by the Amsterdam Free University in slum improvement work in
Karachi. After a section dealing with sociological perspectives, the authors
examine a number of government housing projects and come to pessimistic
conclusions about the possibility of their effecting real improvements.
690
'Exploring the neglected': a study of fruit and vegetable hawkers in Karachi.
Shahid Zahid, with the assistance of Robert E. Klitgaard, Sajjad Akhtar.
Karachi: Applied Economics Research Centre, University of Karachi, 1977.
mimeo. 111p. (Research Report, no. 8).
This is a useful study of one part of the 'informal sector' in Karachi. The
numerous fruit and vegetable hawkers in the city were studied intensively in
197576. There is information in the report based on direct and lively
observation of the actual workings of the distribution system from wholesale
market to street level, as well as data on the
 Page 188
background of the hawkers in terms of area of origin, date of migration to
Karachi, etc., as well as their attitudes and outlook.
Poverty, voluntary organizations and social change: a study of an urban slum in
Pakistan.
See item no. 426.
 Page 189

Education
691
Primary education and national development: a case study of the conditions for
expanding primary education in West Pakistan with an introductory discussion
of educational planning in relation to different aspects of national development
and education.
Rodney Åsberg. Stockholm: Almqvist & Wicksell, 1973. 388p. maps. bibliog.
(Göteborg Studies in Educational Sciences, no. 10).
This study, based on fieldwork carried out in 196970, begins from an academic
perspective but is throughout concerned with the need for the creation of
universal literacy and primary education in Pakistan, with the obstacles to the
achievement of this goal and with the possible non-formal routes to it.
692
Education in South Asia: a bibliography.
Philip G. Altbach, Denzil Saldanha, Jeanne Weiler. New York; London: Garland
Publishing, 1987. 360p. (Garland Reference Library of Social Science, vol.
390).
The 1,419 entries are arranged into chapters on a thematic basis and cover
sociological as well as organizational and pedagogical aspects of the subject.
There are relatively few entries on Pakistan, but this reflects the state of the
literature.
693
Planning for education in Pakistan: a personal case study.
Adam Curle. London; Sydney; Wellington: Tavistock, 1966. 208p. map. bibliog.
The author was associated with the Planning Commission in Pakistan in the late
1950s and again more briefly in the 1960s during the preparation of the third
five-year plan, working first on social issues and then on education. Here he
discusses both the question of planning for educational development in the
Pakistan context and his own role as one of the tribe of foreign experts who
were so important in the earlier stages of economic and social planning there.
The tone throughout is personal but there is
 Page 190
plenty of discussion of the major issues involved in expanding the range of
educational provision in the conditions prevailing in Pakistan.
694
Data analysis for development.
Robert E. Klitgaard. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1985. 142p. (UGC
Monograph Series in Economics).
This work is designed as a tool to teach elementary statistics to Pakistani
students of economics and allied subjects. The value of the book here lies in its
use of case-studies derived from data collected by members of the Applied
Economics Research Centre at the University of Karachi which would not
otherwise be available. Most are derived from concrete problems in Karachi city
or in Sindh. Five of the eight examples relate to aspects of education, for
example the economics of teacher training, and the factors affecting pupil
performance in different types of schools.
695
West Pakistan: rural education and development.
Abdur Rauf. Honolulu, Hawaii: East-West Center Press, 1970. 173p. bibliog.
Rauf reviews the progress made in West Pakistan after independence in various
areas of rural development. As well as education in the formal sense,
programmes for agricultural development are examined in some detail.
696
Education in search of fundamentals.
Parwaiz Shami. Karachi: National Book Foundation, 1976. 368p.
A collection of thirteen articles which cover a wide range of topics, for example
'Professional competence of teachers', 'The home and the school', and 'The
educative process and leisure'. The style is literary rather than empirical; the
author is concerned to identify the broad trends in Pakistan society and their
educational implications.
 Page 191

Science and Technology

697
Science in Pakistan (19471977).
M. I. D. Chughtai. Lahore: Pakistan Association for the Advancement of
Science, 1978.22p. (Occasional Publication).
A brief survey by the president of the Pakistan Association for the
Advancement of Science of the progress made in scientific research after
independence. Chughtai lists the various institutions in the country and
outlines the policies towards science adopted by successive governments.
698
Science and the human condition in India and Pakistan.
Edited by Ward Morehouse. New York: Rockefeller University Press, 1968.
230p.
Based on a conference held in 1966, this volume reflects the view that the
spread of scientific knowledge is the most important precondition of social
progress. The participants were senior scholars and scientists from India,
Pakistan and the United States and the scope of the papers ranges from
specific areas of applied science to discussions of general issues to do with
scientific education and the role of government. Some of the papers are
specifically concerned with Pakistan, while others make comparisons between
India and Pakistan.
699
Herb drugs and herbalists in Pakistan.
Khan Usmanghani, Gisho Honda, Wataru Miki. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of
Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, 1986. 281p. bibliog. (Studia
Culturae Islamicae, 28).
Although it is far from obvious from the introduction, this book, the result of
comparative work by a Japanese team on traditional systems of medicine in the
Middle East, consists primarily of a translation (alongside the original Urdu text)
of a handbook for the traditional physician or hakim in South Asia, prepared by
Hakim Muhammad Said of the Hamdard Foundation, the largest producer of
traditional or unani medicines in Pakistan. The recipes and uses for all the
medicines are included,
 Page 192
and there are photographs of each herb used in their preparation. The book
also includes a 25-page translation of a family history by Hakim Muhammad
Said which would be useful to anyone interested in traditional Muslim society
and perhaps to medical anthropologists.
Islam, politics and the state: the Pakistan experience.
See item no. 509.
Pakistan's nuclear dilemma: energy and security dimensions.
See item no. 579.
 Page 193

Literature
Urdu
700
Ghazals of Ghalib.
Edited by Aijaz Ahmad. New York: Columbia University Press, 1971. 174p.
This is an interesting experiment in translation. The editor, an Urdu scholar,
has selected a number of extracts from Ghalib's ghazals and provided a literal
translation together with notes on the vocabulary used and its deeper
resonances. These have then been given to English-language poets to produce
their own versions. Some of these remain quite close to the original, others are
much freer renderings. For some ghazals several versions are included.
701
The shore and the wave.
Aziz Ahmad, translated by Ralph Russell. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1971.
167p. (UNESCO Asian Fiction Series).
The author, well known as a scholar of Islam in South Asia, published this novel
in 1948 as a portrayal of life in his home city of Hyderabad (India) as
independence approached. Although geographically far from Pakistan, it relates
to the cultural world from which an important section of the Pakistan élite
comes.
702
The golden tradition: an anthology of Urdu poetry.
Selected, translated, and with an introduction by Ahmed Ali. New York,
London: Columbia University Press, 1973. 286p. (Studies in Oriental Culture,
no. 8).
The editor has selected poems, both ghazals and longer pieces, from the
leading poets of the 18th and 19th centuries, and has provided an extended
and valuable introduction in which he assesses the poems' literary form and
describes the strong religious feelings behind many of them.
 Page 194
703
Aspects of Ghalib: five essays.
Ahmed Ali, B. A. Dar, Ainslie T. Embree, Hamid Ahmad Khan, Mumtaz Hasan.
Karachi: Pakistan American Cultural Centre, 1970. 94p.
As the title indicates, this contains the text of five lectures on the occasion of
the centenary of Ghalib's death. Each author is a distinguished scholar of Urdu
literature or of South Asia more generally. The essays concentrate primarily on
the content and style of Ghalib's poetry. Another volume which was published
to mark the centenary was Ghalib: two essays, by Ahmed Ali and Alessandro
Bausani (Rome: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente, 1969 [Serie
Orientale Roma, no. 39]). Ahmed Ali's essay includes the translations of a
number of poems, while Bausani writes in Italian of Ghalib's Persian as well as
his Urdu poetry.
704
Storia delle letterature del Pakistan: Urdu, Pangiâbi, Sindhi, Pasc'tô, Bengali
Pakistana. (History of the literatures of Pakistan: Urdu, Panjabi, Sindhi, Pashto,
Pakistani Bengali.)
Alessandro Bausani. Milan: Nuova Accademia Editrice, 1958. 370p. map.
bibliog. (Storia delle letterature di Tutto il Mondo).
A history of the major literatures of Pakistan by a distinguished Italian
Islamicist. More space is devoted to Urdu than to all the other languages put
together, and of course most of the writers covered under this heading belong
to other parts of the subcontinent.
705
Marxist influence and South Asian literature.
Edited by Carlo Coppola. East Lansing, Michigan: Michigan State University,
Asian Studies Center, 1974. 2 vols. (South Asian Series Occasional Papers, nos
23, 24).
Many South Asian writers were strongly influenced by Marxist ideas, especially
in the years immediately before independence, and they created an important
organization called the All-India Progressive Writers Association. This collection
of papers, which arose out of a 1972 conference, discusses the work of a
number of writers in English and in Indian languages. Ahmed Ali, himself a
member of the movement, is concerned with Urdu writers, and Athar Murtuza
with Faiz Ahmed Faiz.
706
The true subject: selected poems of Faiz Ahmed Faiz.
Translated by Naomi Lazard. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press,
1988. 133p. (Lockert Library of Poetry in Translation).
Faiz Ahmed Faiz, who lived from 1911 to 1984, is, together with Iqbal, the
most outstanding figure in 20th-century Urdu literature. Known for his political
commitment to the left both in South Asia and internationally, his poetry
touches the human condition at many different points. His work has been
translated into many languages, and included in many anthologies. The
present translation is by an American poet who herself knows no Urdu and
therefore had to work from literal translations. She was, however, able to work
closely with Faiz on the translations as they developed and to have him explain
the nuances and overtones of his poems. Another important set of translations
is by V. G. Kiernan, Poems by Faiz (London: George Allen & Unwin,
 Page 195
1971), and in French by Laiq Babree, Faiz Ahmed Faiz: poèmes (Paris:
Seghers, 1979 [Collection UNESCO d'Oeuvres Représentatives, Série
Pakistanaise]).
707
Another lonely voice: the Urdu short stories of Saadat Hasan Manto.
Leslie A. Flemming. Berkeley, California: University of California, Center for
South and Southeast Asia Studies, 1979. 133p. bibliog. (Monograph Series, no.
18).
The only major study of Manto (q.v.) in English. Flemming begins with a
biographical chapter covering Manto's life in Bombay and Delhi before partition
and thereafter in Lahore until his death in 1955 at the age of 42. She then
discusses the literary context of his work before examining it in detail. She sees
both his style and his subjects as making him part of the mainstream of
modernist writing in the 20th century.
708
Versions of truth: Urdu short stories from Pakistan.
Edited by Khalid Hasan, Faruq Hasan. New Delhi: Vikas, 1983. 273p.
A useful anthology of short stories translated from Urdu to English. All were
written in the 20th century but, although it is not always clear, some of them
predate partition. Authors covered include Saadat Hasan Manto, Intizar
Hussain and a number of others. The translations are by a number of hands,
including the editors.
709
Downfall by degrees and other stories.
Abdullah Hussein, edited and translated by Muhammad Umar Memon. Toronto:
TSAR Publications, 1987.
Five Urdu short stories by a contemporary writer who is concerned with themes
of exile and alienation both in Pakistan and abroad. Another selection of his
stories, also edited by Memon, was published in 1984: Night and other stories
(New Delhi: Orient Longman).
710
Poems from Iqbal.
Translated by V. G. Kiernan, introduction by M. D. Taseer. Bombay: Kutub,
1947. 133p.
This is a representative selection of Iqbal's shorter Urdu poems, including many
This is a representative selection of Iqbal's shorter Urdu poems, including many
of his ghazals. Both Kiernan and Taseer knew Iqbal and write with authority on
his philosophical and literary achievements. Also included are remarks on the
development of Iqbal's poetic thought by Khwaja Abdul Hamid.
711
The Penguin book of modern Urdu poetry.
Selected and translated by Mahmood Jamal. Harmondsworth, England:
Penguin, 1986. 165p.
This is a broad selection of 20th-century Urdu poets, many of whom are still
active. Poets included range from the late Faiz Ahmed Faiz to recent feminist
writers, for example Fahmida Riaz, Many of the same poets are represented in
another anthology, Modern Urdu poems from Pakistan, translated and edited
by Anis Nagi (Lahore: Swad Noon Publications, 1974), although the poems
chosen are for the most part different.
 Page 196
712
Journal of South Asian Literature.
East Lansing, Michigan: Michigan State University, Asian Studies Center, 1963 .
biannual.
This well-established journal, originally titled Mahfil, covers both English and
South Asian languages and regularly carries critical articles on Urdu literature
and writers.
713
Black mirrors.
Farukh Khalid, translated by Eric Cyprian. London: Jonathan Cape, 1987. 285p.
Translated from an Urdu original entitled Siah ainey, this is a narrative of the
lives of the inhabitants of a seedy hotel in Lahore. Khalid offers a bleak vision of
Pakistan as it was in the 1970s. Only a portion of the original novel has been
included in the English version.
714
Kingdom's end and other stories.
Saadat Hasan Manto, translated by Khalid Hasan. London: Verso, 1987. 257p.
Manto, who died in 1955, was one of the most outstanding writers of Urdu
short stories in the 20th century. He is famous for his powerful stories of the
partition period as well as for his portraits of courtesans and other denizens of
the Bombay underworld. The volume includes a biographical introduction.
715
An anthology of classical Urdu love lyrics: text and translations.
D. J. Matthews, C. Shackle. London: Oxford University Press, 1972. 283p.
Designed primarily as a text for the student of Urdu who has progressed to the
point of being able to read poetry, but accessible to others, this is a collection
of ghazals by 22 poets from the 16th to the 20th centuries. The Urdu text and
the translation are printed in parallel, and there are full notes, brief biographies
of the poets and appendices on prosody, metre and grammatical features of
old Urdu. Another work along the same lines but with an exclusively
pedagogical aim is Classical Urdu poetry, by Muhammad Abd-al-Rahman
Barker, Shah Abdus Salam (Ithaca, New York: Spoken Languages Services,
1977, 3 vols).
716
Urdu literature.
Urdu literature.
D. J. Matthews, C. Shackle, Shahrukh Husain. London: Third World
Foundation, 1985. 139p. bibliog.
A succinct and reliable survey of Urdu literature from its 17th- and 18th-
century roots to the present day intended for the general reader. There are a
number of translations of poems which try as far as possible to give the feel of
the original form as well as of the content.
717
Partition literature: a study of Intizar Husain.
Muhammad Umar Memon. Modern Asian Studies, vol. 14, no. 3 (July 1980), p.
377410.
The focus of this article is the Urdu short-story writer Intizar Husain. Unlike
many of his contemporaries, who were active for example in the Progressive.
Writers
 Page 197
Movement, Intizar Husain was, Memon argues, conscious of the place of the
partition in the broad sweep of Muslim history in the subcontinent. Other Urdu
authors who used the partition as a theme are mentioned. Translations of some
of the stories discussed have been published in the Journal of South Asian
Literature (q.v.).
718
Urdu literature: a bibliography of English-language sources.
Frances W. Pritchett. New Delhi: Manohar, 1979. 162p.
The author describes her work as a 'preliminary compilation' and there is very
little by way of annotation, but this is nevertheless a valuable tool for scholar
and general reader alike. There are approximately 1,500 entries arranged into
general and genre studies, works by and about individual authors, and works
on the language itself. Access can be obtained through this bibliography to a
remarkably wide range of translations of Urdu poems, novels and short stories.
719
Ghalib: the poet and his age.
Edited by Ralph Russell. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1972. 131p.
Ghalib was perhaps the greatest of the 19th-century Urdu poets. Born into an
aristocratic family in the last days of Muslim power in India, he lived through
the dark days of 1857 in Delhi and died when British power was at its height.
This volume is composed of five papers originally read at a conference in
London in 1969 to mark the centenary of his death. Two chapters, by A.
Bausani and the editor respectively, discuss Ghalib's Persian and Urdu verse,
while the remaining three are more biographical in nature. More information on
Ghalib's life can be obtained from Ralph Russell, Khurshidul Islam, translated
and edited, Ghalib, 17971869, vol. 1 Life and letters (London: George Allen &
Unwin; Cambridge, Massachusetts: Harvard University Press, 1969 [UNESCO
Collection of Representative Works, Indian Series]). This includes the text of
many of Ghalib's letters, interspersed with commentary to provide a connected
account of his life. Regrettably, the second volume intended to include his
poetry has not yet appeared.
720
Three Mughal poets: Mir, Sauda, Mir Hasan.
Ralph Russell, Khurshidul Islam. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1969. 290p.
map. bibliog. (UNESCO Collection of Representative Works, Indian Series).
Intended for a general audience, this book by two distinguished scholars
introduces the work of the three most important poets of the 18th century, the
first period when Urdu flourished as a literary language. Each had his own
distinctive style and purpose, and the authors give each separate treatment,
although Mir enjoys pride of place. The poetic forms employed are discussed
and there are extensive quotations.
721
A history of Urdu literature.
Muhammad Sadiq. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1984. 2nd ed. 652p.
First published in 1964 when it soon established itself as one of the standard
works on the subject, the second edition is substantially revised and enlarged.
The first half of the book deals with the origins of Urdu and brings the history
of its literature up to Ghalib. The second covers the modern period from the
Aligarh movement on. As well as chapters on the major poets, Sadiq devotes
space to the short story, drama and
 Page 198
journalism. Although inevitably, given the range of the work, the treatment of
some authors is rather cursory, the judgements always seek to achieve
balance. Sadiq is particularly concerned with stylistic questions.
722
A history of Urdu literature.
Ram Babu Saksena. Allahabad, India: Ram Narain Lal, 1927. 374p.
Despite its age, this remains an important contribution to our knowledge of
Urdu literature from its early origins in the medieval period to its flourishing in
the 18th century onwards. While the greater part of the work is devoted to
poetry, there are substantial sections on prose as well. The work is particularly
strong on the biographical side.
723
Classical Urdu literature from the beginning to Iqbal.
Annemarie Schimmel. Wiesbaden, West Germany: Otto Harrassowitz, 1975.
261p. (A history of Indian literature, edited by Jan Gonda, vol. 8, fasc. 3).
Part of a comprehensive survey of Indian literature, this separate work surveys
the origins of Urdu in the medieval period up to the beginning of the 18th
century, and then deals in separate sections with the 17001850 period and
with the period bounded by the works of Ghalib and Iqbal. Schimmel has also
contributed a shorter review of writing in India in Persian, Turkish and Arabic
to the same series: Islamic literatures of India, 1973 (vol. 8, fasc. 1).
724
Urdu and Muslim South Asia: studies in honour of Ralph Russell.
Edited by Christopher Shackle. London: School of Oriental and African Studies,
1989. 205p. bibliog.
The contributions to this Festschrift range widely across the field of Urdu
literature and its cultural context but with particular emphasis on the 20th
century. Apart from poetry, other genres are covered, notably journalism, and
there are also papers on the public performance of poetry. A bibliography of
works by Ralph Russell is included.
725
Iqbal: his life and thought.
Syed Abdul Vahid. London: John Murray, 1959. 254p.
First published in India in 1944, this remains an important contribution to an
understanding of Iqbal's literary contribution. Three chapters are devoted to
understanding of Iqbal's literary contribution. Three chapters are devoted to
Iqbal's philosophy and one to his life, but most of the book deals with his
literary output in Persian and Urdu. Vahid also wrote Studies in Iqbal (Lahore:
Sh. Muhammad Ashraf, 1976, 2nd ed.), in which he compares Iqbal with a
number of other poets and writers, including Goethe and Rumi.
A course in Urdu.
See item no. 328.
Pain and grace: a study of two mystical writers of eighteenth-century India.
See item no. 380.
The ardent pilgrim: an introduction to the life and work of Mohammed Iqbal.
See item no. 381.
 Page 199
The structure of marriage preferences: an account from Pakistan fiction.
See item no. 391.
Regional
726
''Hir": zur strukturalen Deutung des Panjabi-Epos von Waris Shah. ("Hir":
towards the structural meaning of the Punjabi epic by Waris Shah.)
Doris Buddenberg. Wiesbaden, West Germany: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1985.
156p. bibliog. (Beiträge zur Südasienforschung Südasien-Institut Universität
Heidelberg, vol. 95).
The author sees Hir-Ranjha, the most important Punjabi folk epic dating in the
form she studied from the late 18th century, as a local variant of those love
epics which end with the death of the lovers. Applying the techniques of
contemporary literary criticism, she interprets the epic in terms of two codes,
the spatial and the kinship, which allows the student to achieve greater
understanding of the significance of the two lovers and of the inner meanings
of the text. She draws particular attention to the religious meanings of Waris
Shah's work. There is a brief English synopsis.
727
Bulleh Shah: a selection.
Translated by Taufiq Rafat, introduction by Khaled Ahmad. Lahore: Vanguard
Books, 1982. 243p.
This book contains translations by a Pakistani poet of a selection of the poems
of Bulleh Shah, the 18th-century Punjabi poet. Like most poets of his time, he
came from a sufi background, and his poems reflect both that and the wider
mystical traditions of India. There is a useful scholarly introduction by Khaled
Ahmad, although the translations themselves are not annotated or discussed.
The Punjabi text of each poem (in Persian script) is printed in parallel.
728
Popular poetry of the Baloches.
M. Longworth Dames. London: Royal Asiatic Society, 1907. 2 vols. (Asiatic
Society's Monographs, vols 9 & 10). [also published as Folklore Society annual
volume for 1905].
Dames, an early scholar of Baluchi language and literature, spent many years
on this collection of oral literature. In a brief introduction he sets out his
understanding of the nature of Baluchi poetry and its forms. The remainder of
the first volume is given over to his translations of ballads, love songs, religious
poems, legends, cradle songs and riddles. These do not attempt to reproduce
the original metrical form, nor do they simply seek a literal rendering of the
original. The second volume contains the transliterated texts of the poems
translated in the first volume, and an essay on the language of Baluchi poetry.
 Page 200
729
A Baluchi miscellanea of erotica and poetry: Codex Oriental Additional 24048 of
the British Library.
Josef Elfenbein. Naples, Italy: Istituto Universitario Orientale, 1983. 156p.
(Supplemento n. 35 agli Annali vol. 43 (1983), fasc. 2).
This is a collection of often bawdy folk tales and poetry written down,
according to the editor, probably in the early 19th century. The work contains
an introduction, a transliterated text and translation, a word list and a
photographic reproduction of the original manuscript.
730
Poems from the Divan of Khushâl Khân Khattak.
Translated by D. N. Mackenzie. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1965. 258p.
bibliog. (UNESCO Collection of Representative Works, Pakistan Series).
Khushhal Khan Khattak, 161389, is generally regarded as the father of Pashto
poetry. This is the most scholarly modern selection of his work. Two hundred
and sixteen poems have been translated, ranging from the brief quatrains to
longer lyrics and odes. There is a short but helpful introduction. There is
another selection of his poems translated into English by Evelyn Howell and
Olaf Caroe, The poems of Khushhal Khan Khatak (Peshawar: Pashto Academy,
1963).
731
Selections from Rahman Baba.
Edited and translated by Jens Enevoldsen. Herning, Denmark: Poul Kristensen,
1977. 191p. bibliog.
Rahman Baba was a popular Pashto poet of the 17th century who, like similar
writers, can be appreciated at many different levels of meaning. In this
selection 50 ghazals are translated into English side by side with the original
text. There is an enthusiastic introduction by the editor which gives the limited
information that is known about the poet's life.
732
Panjabi sufi poets, A.D. 14601900.
Lajwanti Rama Krishna. Calcutta: Oxford University Press, Indian Branch, 1938.
142p. bibliog.
Originally a thesis, this is one of the few systematic treatments of the subject.
Rama Krishna discusses in turn eight major sufi poets, and some minor ones,
from the late 15th to the 19th centuries. Pride of place is given to Bulleh Shah.
For each poet there is a description of his life, so far as details are known, and
a discussion of the sufi themes in his work.
733
Pakistan: literature and society.
Fahmida Riaz, foreword by Bhisham Sahni. New Delhi: Patriot, 1986. 124p.
Fahmida Riaz is a well-known Urdu poet. She moved to India during the Zia
régime, and there wrote this study of contemporary Pakistani literature. She
arranges her material by province and is particularly concerned with the vitality
of the regional languages, although she recognizes the importance of Urdu in
the Punjab. She is particularly interested in social and political content.
 Page 201
734
Sindhi literature.
Annemarie. Schimmel. Wiesbaden, West Germany: Otto Harrassowitz, 1974.
41p. (A history of Indian literature, edited by Jan Gonda, part of vol. 8).
This is a brief but comprehensive review of Sindhi literature by the leading
foreign scholar of the subject. Schimmel discusses the importance of sufi
themes in Sindhi poetry, especially that of Shah Abdul Latif, as well as 19th
and 20th century developments.
735
Shah Abdul Latif: his poetry, life and times. A study of literary, social and
economic conditions in eighteenth century Sind.
H. T. Sorley. London: Oxford University Press, 1940. 432p. bibliog.
Shah Abdul Latif of Bhit is by general consent the outstanding sufi poet of
Sindh. This book by the leading British scholar of his work is in fact in three
distinct parts. The first is a general study of 18th-century Sindh, the second a
critical study of Shah Abdul Latif's work, and the third a translation of the
Risalo, or collected poems. Sorley discusses some of the particular problems in
translating this genre of poetry. A substantial portion of the Risalo has also
been translated by Elsa Kazi, Risalo of Shah Abdul Latif (Hyderabad: Sindhi
Adabi Board, 1965). There are more recent studies of the poet by Motilal
Jotwani, Shah Abdul Latif: his life and work. A study of socio-cultural and
literary situations in eighteenth century Sindh (now in Pakistan) (Delhi:
University of Delhi, 1975), and by Annemarie Schimmel, Pain and grace (q.v.).
736
Qadir Yar: a critical introduction.
M. Athar Tahir. Lahore: Pakistan Punjabi Adabi Board, 1988. 141p. bibliog.
Qadir Yar was a Punjabi poet of the first half of the 19th century. He can be
placed in the qissa or narrative tradition (to which belong also the Hir-Ranjha
poems, q.v.). Tahir's critical study calls attention to the range of themes,
drawn from Islamic and Hindu sources alike, that Qadir Yar's work
encompasses. A translation of Qadir Yar's masterpiece, Puran Bhagat, by
Taufiq Rafat has also been published (Lahore: Vanguard Books, 1983).
737
The adventures of Hir and Ranjha.
Waris Shah, translated by Charles Frederick Usborne, edited by Mumtaz Hasan.
London: Peter Owen, 1973. 201p. (UNESCO Collection of Representative
Works, Pakistan Series).
Waris Shah's rendering in the 18th century of the romance of Hir and Ranjha is
generally reckoned as one of the masterpieces of Punjabi literature. Although
Usborne's translation is old, it remains the only available English version. The
present edition was earlier published in Pakistan (Karachi: Lion Art Press,
1966). A scholarly French edition and translation is also available (Hir Varis
Sah: poème Panjabi du XVIIIe siècle. Introduction, translittération, traduction
et commentaire [Hir Varis Sah: a Panjabi poem of the 18th century.
Introduction, transliteration, translation and commentary], vol. 1 Strophes 1 á
110 [stanzas 1 to 110], Denis Matringe, Pondicherry, India: Institut Français
d'Indologie, 1988 [Publications de l'Institut Français d'Indologie, no. 72]).
 Page 202
Punjabi in Lahore.
See item no. 339.
Pain and grace: a study of two mystical writers of eighteenth-century India.
See item no. 380.
Storia delle letterature del Pakistan: Urdu, Pangiâbi, Sindhi, Pasc'tô, Bengali
Pakistana. (History of the literatures of Pakistan: Urdu, Panjabi, Sindhi, Pashto,
Pakistani Bengali.)
See item no. 704.
The bazaar of the storytellers.
See item no. 767.
English
738
The murder of Aziz Khan.
Zulfikar Ghose. London: Macmillan, 1967. 315p.
Set in the Punjab, this is a story of social change and the accompanying
tensions. It revolves round a farmer, Aziz Khan, and the efforts of a nouveau
riche family to dispossess him. The underlying theme is the clash between the
values of rural and industrial societies.
739
Kim.
Rudyard Kipling. London: Macmillan, 1949. 413p. (Centenary edition).
First published in 1901 and reprinted many times since, Kim is perhaps
Kipling's most famous work. The story begins in Lahore, with Kim astride the
Zam-zamah gun, although his travels, actually and metaphorically, take him far
away from his original existence as an orphan in the city. Kipling's father had
been curator of the Lahore Museum and Kipling himself had started his adult
life as a journalist in the city. Some of his short stories have a Lahore
background, including 'The city of dreadful night'. Kipling's use of Lahore in his
writing is discussed in Angus Wilson, The strange ride of Rudyard Kipling
(London: Secker and Warburg, 1977).
740
Delusions and discoveries: studies on India in the British imagination,
18801930.
Benita Parry. London: Allen Lane the Penguin Press, 1972. 369p. bibliog.
A critical study of a number of British authors who wrote about India. The
chapters on Kipling, Flora Annie Steel, and Edmund Candler are particularly
relevant to the Punjab. Parry argues that Steel and Candler saw India as
essentially alien and exotic. Only Kipling and especially Forster used their
Indian experience to do justice both to India and to human experience. A work
on a related subject is Shamsul Islam, Chronicles of the Raj: a study of literary
reaction to the imperial idea towards the end of the Raj (London: Macmillan,
1979), which deals inter alia with Masters and Kipling.
 Page 203
741
Wordfall: three Pakistan poets.
Taufiq Rafat, Malik Kureishi, Kaleem Omar, edited by Kaleem Omar. Karachi:
Oxford University Press, 1975. 78p.
A representative selection of poems by three contemporary Pakistani poets
writing in English. Many of the poems reflect themes directly related to
Pakistan life and experience.
742
Shame.
Salman Rushdie. London: Jonathan Cape, 1983. 287p.
Rushdie is the author not only of Shame and Midnight's children, a study of
India's experience since independence, but of The satanic verses, which
caused a storm of controversy when first published in 1988. Many Muslims
regard it as blasphemous. In Shame he applies his 'magical realist style' to the
history of Pakistan. No historical figures are named but few readers will be in
doubt of who might have been in the author's mind when he refers, for
example, to Raza Hyder and 'the virgin Ironpants'.
743
The crow eaters.
Bapsi Sidhwa. London: Jonathan Cape, 1980. 283p.
Herself a Parsi, Bapsi Sidhwa has written an affectionate satire, first published
in Lahore in 1978, on the small but prosperous Parsi community in Pakistan.
The central character, Faredoon or Freddy Junglewalla, makes his way in life in
Lahore in the first half of the 20th century to become the undisputed leader of
his community. 'Toady, philanthropist and shrewd businessman', he is capable
of dealing with the British on his own terms but has less success with his
mother-in-law Jerbanoo, a richly comic figure. Another novel by Sidhwa which
focuses on the Parsi community of Lahore but against the sombre setting of
the partition period is Ice-candy-man (London: Heinemann, 1980).
744
The 13th house.
Adam Zameenzad. London: Fourth Estate, 1987. 202p.
Zameenzad's first novel tells the story of an ordinary man caught up in a series
of events beyond his control until he finishes up having lost everything. While
the description is often comic, the thrust of the book is to emphasize the
helplessness of the individual.
My beautiful launderette and the rainbow sign.
See item no. 319.
 Page 204

The Arts
General
745
Museology and museum problems in Pakistan.
Edited by Saifur Rahman Dar. Lahore: Lahore Museum, 1981. 331p. maps.
This volume is in fact the proceedings of a training course for museum staff in
Pakistan, but there is much useful information on Pakistan's museums both
included en passant in the general contributions and also in special sections.
746
Repositories of our cultural heritage: a handbook of museums in Pakistan.
Saifur Rahman Dar. Lahore: Lahore Museum, 1979. 127p. map. bibliog.
This volume gives details of contents, opening hours, etc. for Pakistan's 33
largest museums, brief notes on sixteen more and a list of a number of others.
The author gives a fair summary of the material held by the museums he writes
about and is not afraid to make critical comments.
747
The cultural heritage of Pakistan.
S. M. Ikram, Percival Spear. Karachi: Oxford University Press, 1955. 204p.
In a series of separate essays held together by an initial chapter by S. M. Ikram
on 'The pattern of Pakistan's heritage', a number of distinguished Pakistani
scholars outline the country's cultural heritage in the visual and plastic arts, in
Urdu and Persian and in the regional languages. In many areas, of course, it is
the Muslim traditions of the whole subcontinent which are described. Two
concluding chapters cover religious and intellectual developments. Although
dated in some respects, the book remains a useful survey of the subject.
 Page 205

Visual Arts
748
Art in Pakistan: early years.
Jalaluddin Ahmed. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner, 1972. 19p.
Apart from the brief introduction which describes the emergence of modern
painting in Pakistan in the 1940s and 1950s, this book consists of 72 colour
reproductions of works by Pakistani painters. The artists represented include
'traditionalists' such as the well-known Abdul Rahman Chughtai as well as
younger painters such as Sadequain who have been influenced by
contemporaries elsewhere in the world. Earlier versions of the present work
were published in Pakistan.
749
Pahari paintings and Sikh portraits in the Lahore museum.
F. S. Aijazuddin, foreword by W. G. Archer. London; New York: Sotheby Parke
Bernet; Karachi; Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1977. 101p. bibliog.
As W. G. Archer notes in his foreword, the Lahore museum has one of the
finest collections of pahari paintings, i.e. miniature paintings produced under
the influence of Mughal styles in the small states of the Punjab hills and in the
Sikh states of the plains. As it happens, the hill states fell to India's share in
1947, although many of the Sikh portraits would have been painted in what is
now Pakistan. This excellently produced volume is a catalogue of the museum's
holdings. There are colour reproductions of sixteen paintings, and black and
white ones of the rest.
750
Sindhi tombs and textiles: the persistence of pattern.
Ethel-Jane W. Bunting, foreword by George F. Dales. Albuquerque, New
Mexico: Maxwell Museum of Anthropology and University of New Mexico Press,
1980. 76p. map. bibliog.
The purpose of this extensively illustrated work is to draw attention to the
continuity of motif between the stone tombs which are found throughout Sindh
and the hand-blocked textiles produced locally.
751
The gardens of Mughul India: a history and guide.
Sylvia Crowe, Sheila Haywood, Susan Jellicoe, Gordon Patterson. London:
Thames & Hudson, 1972. 200p. maps. bibliog.
The formal gardens laid out by the Mughal rulers of India, with their
interweaving of water, trees and flowers, have always attracted attention. The
present work is designed for a generally interested audience but is carefully
documented and illustrated, with extensive quotes from the memoirs of the
Mughal emperors and from European travellers. There are many photographs
and copies of miniatures, although most are in black and white. The only
surviving garden in Pakistan is the Shalimar garden in Lahore, but several of
the most famous are located in Kashmir, and in any case the gardens are an
integral part of Indo-Muslim culture. An earlier book on the same subject is
Constance Mary Villiers-Stuart, Gardens of the Great Mughals (London: A. & C.
Black, 1913).
 Page 206
752
Crafts of the Punjab. vol. 1. Murree Hills.
Has-Saan [sic, Hassan] Gardezi. Lahore: Punjab Small Industries Corporation,
1986. 119p. bibliog.
A glossy and well-produced survey of both design and production techniques.
The book has a number of good colour illustrations.
753
The calligraphers of Thatta.
M. A. Ghafur. Karachi: University of Karachi, Institute of Central and West
Asian Studies, 1968 (2nd imp., 1978). 90p. map. bibliog. (Institute of Central
and West Asian Studies Publication no. 5, Monograph Series no. 1).
Thatta, located near Karachi, was one of the major political and cultural
centres of Sindh throughout the pre-colonial period, and there are abundant
archaeological remains there. The focus of Ghafur's work is the wide range of
examples of calligraphy to be found on tombs and mosques, and photographs
of many of them are included. Most date from the 16th, 17th and 18th
centuries. As well as describing the examples, the book contains biographical
details of the craftsmen and some historical information on Thatta itself.
754
The art and architecture of the Indian subcontinent.
J. C. Harle. Harmondsworth, England: Penguin, 1986. 597p. 2 maps. bibliog.
(Pelican History of Art).
This comprehensive work on the subject covers a number of topics relevant to
Pakistan, including finds from Harappa and Mohenjo-daro, Gandhara art and
sculpture, Mughal painting, and Indo-Islamic architecture.
755
Indian miniatures in the India Office Library.
London: Sotheby Parke Bernet; Karachi; Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1981.
559p. bibliog.
The India Office Library holdings of miniatures are among the richest in the
world and include such jewels as the Dara Shikoh album. This complete
catalogue gives a comprehensive history of the collection and deploys the latest
scholarly work in its entries for individual paintings. 568 items are listed but
many cover several pieces and the collection totals some 1,700 paintings.
Seventeen of the best paintings are illustrated in colour and there are smaller
black and white reproductions of many others. The collection includes the
highest examples of Mughal court painting as well as many provincial pieces
from the 18th and 19th centuries, including a few from the Punjab, mainly
from the hills (pahari paintings).
756
Textiles of Baluchistan.
M. G. Konieczny. London: British Museum, 1979. 77p. map. bibliog.
This work describes in detail the techniques, materials and patterns used in
textile production in Baluchistan. Over half the book is made up of colour and
black and white photographs, mostly of items from the collection of the
Museum of Mankind in London. A few of the items illustrated are floor
coverings, but the majority are bags of various types or harness trappings.
 Page 207
757
Architecture in Pakistan.
Kamil Khan Mumtaz. Singapore: Mimar, 1985. 206p. maps. bibliog.
A well-produced and presented survey of Pakistan's architectural heritage both
imperial and local, together with a review of post-1947 developments. The
author's judgements are measured and informative. Mosques, palaces, public
buildings and domestic housing are all included.
758
Lahore: the city within.
Samina Quraeshi, with an essay by Annemarie Schimmel. Singapore: Concept
Media, 1988. 292p.
This is a lavishly illustrated and produced evocation of Lahore in which the
photographs and reproduced miniatures have equal place with the text. All
phases of the city's history are covered, but greatest attention is given to the
Mughal heyday.
759
The emperors' album: images of Mughal India.
Stuart Cary Welch, Annemarie Schimmel, Marie L. Swietochowski, Wheeler M.
Thackston. New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art, 1987. 318p. bibliog.
Published in connection with an exhibition held in New York in 1987, this
volume contains a detailed catalogue, with excellently reproduced illustrations,
of the Kekorvian album. The highlights of the album are a collection of
miniatures painted for the emperors Jahangir and Shah Jahan. There are also
three introductory essays on specific aspects of Mughal painting. Many other
exhibition catalogues have been published and often provide valuable
information on Mughal painting, for example Stuart Cary Welch, Imperial
Mughal painting (New York: George Braziller, 1978).
Architecture and art treasures in Pakistan: prehistoric, protohistoric, Buddhist
and Hindu periods.
See item no. 90.
Lahore past and present (being an account of Lahore compiled from original
sources).
See item no. 177.
Multan: history and architecture.
See item no. 200.
Music and Dance
760
The rags of north Indian music: their structure and evolution.
N. A. Jairazbhoy. Middletown, Connecticut: Wesleyan University Press, 1971.
222p. bibliog.
This is an introduction to the subject for those with no previous acquaintance
with it but who wish to acquire a systematic knowledge of the theory of Indian
music and the
 Page 208
musical principles underlying the evolution of the ragas. It is at the same time
the exposition of Jairazbhoy's own original views. The book is accompanied by
a record of musical examples recorded by the well-known Vilayat Khan.
761
Sufi music of India and Pakistan: sound, context and meaning in Qawwali.
Regula Burckhardt Qureshi. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press,
1986. 265p. bibliog. (Cambridge Studies in Ethnomusicology).
Qawwali is a musical genre that is intimately linked to sufi religious practices
and qawwali songs are performed at shrines throughout India and Pakistan.
This study, based on fieldwork in both countries, deals with qawwali from an
ethnomusicological perspective which treats the music as music and at the
same time as a performance in a religious context.
762
The new Grove dictionary of music and musicians.
Edited by Stanley Sadie. London: Macmillan, 1980. 20 vols. maps. bibliog.
There is a comprehensive survey of South Asian music in volume 6, p. 69166,
by Harold S. Powers (et al.) which covers classical styles of music, as well as
dance. In volume 14, p. 10412, Regula Qureshi reviews Pakistani music, which
in this context means primarily folk music. In her article she looks at the social
role of the performers, instruments, and musical structures. There are brief
entries elsewhere in the Dictionary for performers, instruments and styles.
Extended entries for almost all the instruments used in South Asian music can
be found in The new Grove dictionary of musical instruments, edited by Stanley
Sadie (London: Macmillan, 1984. 3 vols).
763
Khyal: creativity within north India's classical musical tradition.
Bonnie C. Wade. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press, 1984.
314p. 2 maps. bibliog. (Cambridge Studies in Ethnomusicology).
Khyal is a style of singing which emerged in north India in the mid-18th
century and is now the dominant classical form. Within the genre there are a
number of gharanas or traditions defined in terms of their physical locations,
none of which happen to be in Pakistan, although a number of prominent
Muslim exponents moved to Pakistan at or shortly after partition. Wade
discusses in detail the most important gharanas in terms both of their histories
and of their distinguishing stylistic characteristics. The musical illustrations are
transcribed in such a way as to allow the trained reader to understand the
finest points of vocal technique and style.
764
Music in India: the classical traditions.
Bonnie C. Wade. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1979. 252p.
map. bibliog. (Prentice Hall History of Music Series).
Designed as an introductory text 'for the uninitiated Westerner', this book
reviews the basic categories of Indian music melody and metre and discusses
the various performance genres. Some degree of general musical knowledge is
assumed and the descriptions are often quite detailed, but there are also
chapters which seek to place the music in its cultural context. In addition to an
annotated bibliography there is a discography and a filmography.
 Page 209

Folklore and Festivals

765
Mataloona: Pukhto proverbs.
Translated by Akbar S. Ahmed, with preface by Olaf Caroe. Karachi: Oxford
University Press, 1975. 2nd rev. ed. 60p.
Mataloona is the Pukhto (Pashto) for proverbs, and Ahmed argues that in them
can be found much of the essence of Pukhtun culture. Each proverb is printed
in the original Pukhto, then in a literal translation, and finally in an apt English
version, sometimes with parallel proverbs from other cultures. The introduction
links the proverbs to the characteristic features of Pukhtun culture. The original
edition was published in 1973.
766
The beggar saint of Sehwan and other sketches of Sind.
Adrian Duarte. Karachi: Oxford University Press, [?1975]. 98p.
A collection of pieces contributed by the author to the Illustrated Weekly of
India and other magazines in the 193344 period. Many subjects are covered,
for example the title piece on the shrine of Kalandar Lal Shahbaz at Sehwan,
cock-fighting in rural Sindh, Sindhi wrestling, puppet shows, early English
travellers, and the origins of the postal service in the province.
767
The bazaar of the storytellers.
W. L. Heston, Mumtaz Nasir. Islamabad: Lok Virsa, [c.1987]. 349p. bibliog.
This volume can be read both as a collection of modern folk tales translated
from Pashto and as a study in the evolution of a folk tradition. The stories
included in the volume were originally copied down from cassette tapes on sale
in Peshawar. The stories themselves are in the traditional sung form but the
themes are modern as well as traditional.
768
Folk tales of Pakistan.
Laxman Komal. New Delhi: Sterling, 1976. 112p.
A collection of fifteen folk tales, mainly from Sindh, written in a simple and
attractive
 Page 210
style. There is a brief introduction but no indication of the provenance or
background of the individual stories.
769
Tales of the Punjab told by the people.
Flora Annie Steel, notes by R. C. Temple, illustrated by David Gentleman.
London; Sydney; Toronto: Bodley Head, 1973. 310p.
First published in 1884 as Wide-awake stories and then in its present form in
1894, this is a classic collection of folk tales collected by the wife of a British
official (her life is covered in her autobiography [q.v.] and in a modern
biography by Violet Powell [q.v.]). Each story is retold in a simple style suitable
for children but there are extensive scholarly notes by Sir Richard Temple,
himself an expert on folk tales, which are also included in the modern edition. A
collection of folk tales which relies extensively on Steel and Temple for its
source material is There was once a king (folk-tales of Pakistan), retold by
Sayyid Fayyaz Mahmud (Islamabad: Lok Virsa, [c.1981], 271p.).
No five fingers are alike: cognitive amplifiers in social context.
See item no. 389.
 Page 211

Mass Media
General
770
Press in Pakistan.
S. M. A. Feroze. Lahore: National Publications, 1957. rev. ed. 192p.
This consists largely of an annotated list of titles in English, Urdu, and other
languages, both past and current but it also has some more general historical
information. There are sections on news agencies and the press laws. The
value of the work is diminished by the absence of an index.
771
Journalism in Pakistan: first phase, 1845 to 1857.
Abdus Salam Khurshid. Lahore: Publishers United, 1964. 122p.
A survey of early newspapers published in English and in local languages from
the area that became Pakistan. Thirty-three of the titles listed belonged to the
West and only two to the East.
772
Punjab Muslim press and the Muslim world, 18881911.
Ikram Ali Malik. Lahore: South Asian Institute, University of the Punjab, 1974.
66p.
This monograph reproduces on a thematic basis extracts from the Punjab press
in order to illustrate the enthusiasm of the Punjab Muslims for the pan-
Islamism that was then emerging and the critique of British imperialism that it
implied. Almost all the extracts are from the Urdu press but most of the original
files no longer exist and they are given here in the translations made for British
officials. Even so, it is possible to get some feel from them of the tone of the
press at the time.
 Page 212
773
Fernsehen in Pakistan: entwicklungspolitische Bedeutung eines
Massenmediums. (Television in Pakistan: the developmental political
significance of a mass medium.)
Stefan R. Melnik. Bochum, West Germany: Studienverlag Dr. N. Brockmeyer,
1978. 260p. bibliog. (Bochumer Studien zur Publizistik- und
Kommunikationswissenschaft, vol. 19).
The focus of this study is the question of how far television in Pakistan has
been used to support development objectives. Although he outlines many
difficulties, the author is cautiously optimistic about the extent to which
television can be used for such purposes. The work as a whole contains a
considerable amount of information on the history of television in Pakistan and
on financial, programming and other aspects of its operation.
Public opinion and political development in Pakistan, 19471958.
See item no. 475.
Newspapers
774
Dawn.
Karachi: Pakistan Herald Publications, 1942 . daily.
The longest established of the English-language newspapers in Pakistan, it was
originally founded by Jinnah in 1942, replacing an earlier weekly publication. It
now stands for a broadly liberal perspective. It has good coverage of
economics. A weekly edition, Dawn Overseas Weekly, is also available.
775
The Frontier Post.
Peshawar: Zari Press, 1985 . daily.
Established after the end of the Martial Law period in 1985, the Frontier Post
grew rapidly to become the major English-language newspaper in the North-
West Frontier Province. Somewhat idiosyncratic in its editorial line, it is very
concerned with the issues of Afghanistan as they impinge on the province.
776
The Muslim.
Islamabad: Islamabad Publications, [c.1979 ]. daily.
The main newspaper published from Islamabad, the Muslim despite its title is a
The main newspaper published from Islamabad, the Muslim despite its title is a
liberal newspaper whose lively and well-informed coverage have made it prime
reading for the diplomatic community in the Pakistan capital as well as for civil
servants and intellectuals. It also boasts the distinction of having had the first
woman editor in the country.
777
The Nation.
Lahore: The Nation Publications, [c.1986 ]. daily.
Right of centre but more liberal than its Urdu stablemate Nawa-e-Waqt, the
Nation has a good reputation for local Punjab coverage.
 Page 213
778
The Pakistan Times.
Lahore: National Press Trust, 1947 . daily.
The Pakistan Times, founded in 1947, has gone through many vicissitudes.
During the 1950s it was identified as a radical newspaper, but after the 1958
coup it was in effect taken over by the government and in 1964 handed over
to the control of the National Press Trust.
Periodicals
779
Herald.
Karachi: Pakistan Herald Publications, 1970 . monthly.
A thick, glossy magazine for the Pakistan middle class which covers everything
from serious articles on politics and economics to fashion, sport and film. Many
of the best English-language journalists in the country write for it. Some of its
former staff members have established a rival monthly, Newsline (Karachi:
Newsline Publications, 1989).
780
Journal of the Research Society of Pakistan.
Lahore: University of the Punjab, 1964 . quarterly.
The Research Society of Pakistan is an autonomous body concerned to promote
scholarly activity, especially relating to the Muslim heritage of Pakistan. Its
journal carries articles, not always of the highest quality, in English and Urdu
on historical, literary and religious topics. Pakistan Journal of History and
Culture (Islamabad: National Institute of History and Culture, c. 1980 .
biannual), which is produced by an official institute, covers much the same
ground.
781
Pakistan Pictorial.
Islamabad: Pakistan Publications, 1949 . monthly.
This general interest magazine first started life in 1949 as Pakistan A Quarterly;
from 1952 it became Pakistan Quarterly, and then from 1973 onwards, with a
break in 1977, Pakistan Pictorial. It has always carried a wide range of articles
on different aspects of life in the country. It is not entirely clear what the target
audience is.
782
Viewpoint.
Lahore: Mazhar Ali Khan, 1975 . weekly.
A distinctly unglossy and often rather idiosyncratic magazine that at its best
includes some of the best critical journalism in Pakistan. A wide range of topics
is covered in each issue, some oriented towards immediate events, others
towards longer-term issues.
Newsletter of Baluchistan Studies.
See item no. 336.
 Page 214

Reference Works
783
The Far East and Australasia.
London: Europa Publications, 1969 . annual. bibliog.
Pakistan is represented in this standard yearbook by articles on geography,
history and economy, and by a statistical survey and directory giving details of
the country's major institutions. In all, the entry is between 30 and 40 pages.
784
Pakistan: an Official Handbook.
Islamabad: Government of Pakistan, Directorate of Films and Publications,
Ministry of Information and Broadcasting. annual (sometimes irreg.).
This annual publication offers a review of government programmes and
achievements mainly in the field of economic development. The tone is
inevitably bland but a considerable amount of information can be derived from
it. Its predecessor was West Pakistan Yearbook.
785
Pakistan Year Book.
Edited by Rafique Akhtar. Karachi; Lahore: East & West Publishing Company.
1973 . annual.
Probably the best of the general reference works which seek to cover Pakistan.
Its presentation and content has improved in recent years. Each issue contains
a large number of short, unsigned articles arranged under the general
headings of 'the land and the people', 'the cultural heritage', 'the government
and its services', and 'the economy'. The coverage is somewhat uneven, but in
general each article includes historical and current information. A limited range
of statistics is provided.
The Cambridge encyclopedia of India, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Nepal, Bhutan and
the Maldives.
See item no. 18.
 Page 215

Bibliographies
786
Bibliography of Asian Studies.
Ann Arbor, Michigan: Association of Asian Studies, 1941 . annual.
Published until 1967 as a special issue of the Journal of Asian Studies (before
1956 called Far Eastern Quarterly), this bibliography lists a wide range of
European-language scholarly articles and books on all aspects of Asian studies.
Up to 500 titles a year can be found in the Pakistan section, in addition to
references in the general sections. Two cumulative versions of the earlier
bibliographies, arranged both by author and by subject, have been published
(Boston: G. K. Hall). These cover 194165 and 196670 respectively. South Asia
was included in the scope of the bibliography only from 1955.
787
South Asian history, 17501950: a guide to periodicals, dissertations and
newspapers.
Margaret H. Case. Princeton, New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1968.
561p.
This bibliography is organized into sections dealing with periodical literature,
dissertations, and newspapers, and within the first two categories is further
subdivided by broad topic. Some but not all of the nearly 7,000 entries have
brief annotations. Separate author and subject indexes are provided.
788
A select bibliography of periodical literature on India and Pakistan, 194770.
Compiled by Pervaiz Iqbal Cheema. Islamabad: National Commission on
Historical and Cultural Research, 1976, 1979, 1984. 3 vols.
A compilation of over 5,000 entries from 575 journals covering an enormous
range of topics, although there are no annotations. Subjects covered include
cookery, sports, forestry, education, and folk tales, as well as the more
common areas such as economics and foreign affairs. The journals that have
been scanned include well-known academic periodicals but also a number of
weekly and monthly magazines
 Page 216
published in South Asia, the USA and Britain. All sources are in English. The
first volume deals exclusively with Pakistan, the second with India, and the
third with both.
789
Pakistan central government and quasi-governmental organisations: a
preliminary directory and list of IDS library holdings 19471971.
J. A. Downey. Brighton, England: Institute of Development Studies Library,
[c.1976]. (Occasional Guides, no. 5).
Based on the holdings of the Institute of Development Studies at the University
of Sussex, this lists many of the often confusing publications of government
ministries, their departments and other government organizations. Downey
gives valuable details of the organization and functions of each issuing body.
790
Asian Social Science Bibliography with Annotations and Abstracts.
Edited by N. K. Goil. Delhi: Hindustan Publishing Corporation (earlier Vikas),
1966 . annual.
This work continues two earlier series, The Southern Asia Social Science
Bibliography and South Asia Social Science Abstracts, published annually from
1952. From 1956 in part, and from 1957 in full, Pakistan was included in the
coverage. In the last issue available approximately ten per cent of the entries
related to Pakistan.
791
Library literature in Pakistan.
S. J. Haider. International Library Review, vol. 20, no. 1 (Jan. 1988), p. 65100.
The author reviews and describes a wide range of literature on libraries and
librarianship in Pakistan, including periodicals, conference proceedings, official
reports and classification schemes in use in the country. The article could also
serve as a history of librarianship in Pakistan.
792
Pakistan government and administration: a comprehensive bibliography.
Compiled by Garth N. Jones, Shaukat Ali (vol. 1). Peshawar: Pakistan Academy
for Rural Development, 197074. 3 vols.
This is a largely unannotated but very wide-ranging bibliography which focuses
on the activities of government but also includes material on the history of
Pakistan, foreign relations and even literature. As well as books and articles,
Pakistan, foreign relations and even literature. As well as books and articles,
unpublished dissertations and papers are included. The entries are arranged by
subject, and there is an author index. The circumstances of compilation were
such that each volume covers the whole field and is arranged according to the
same categories. The entries overlap in terms of date of publication.
793
Bibliographical control in Pakistan.
R. Mohammadally. International Library Review, vol. 18, no. 1 (Jan. 1986), p.
3356.
This article examines critically the major instruments available for the
bibliographical control of what is published in Pakistan, notably the Pakistan
national bibliography (q.v.) and the Library of Congress's Accession list for
Pakistan/South Asia. He concludes that both are far from satisfactory.
 Page 217
794
The Pakistan National Bibliography.
Islamabad: Government of Pakistan, Ministry of Education, Department of
Libraries, 1962 . annual (sometimes irreg.).
From 1962 onwards, all books in whatever language published in Pakistan and
received under the provisions of the 1962 Copyright Ordinance have been
listed in an annual volume. Comparisons can usefully be made with the
Accessions list Pakistan (since 1981, Accessions list South Asia) produced by
the Library of Congress. An attempt was made with UNESCO help to produce a
retrospective bibliography for the 194761 period, but the project had a difficult
history. Only one fascicule appears to have been produced (in 1973).
795
South Asian civilizations: a bibliographical synthesis.
Maureen L. P. Patterson, in collaboration with William J. Alspaugh. Chicago;
London: University of Chicago Press, 1981. 853p. 2 maps.
This monumental bibliography contains over 28,000 entries on all aspects of
the subject. Although the entries are not annotated, the headings are well
chosen to give as clear an insight as possible into the interconnections between
the subjects covered.
796
South Asian bibliography: a handbook and guide.
Edited by J. D. Pearson. Hassocks, England: Harvester Press; Atlantic
Highlands, New Jersey: Humanities Press, 1979. 381p.
Compiled under the auspices of the South Asia Library Group in Britain, this
work contains a number of accurate and detailed descriptive articles, arranged
both by country and by subject, on the bibliographical resources available for
study on South Asian topics. The chapter on Pakistan by Qazi Mahmudul Haq
describes 92 bibliographies on a range of subjects. Aspects of Pakistan are
included in most of the subject chapters. This volume is likely to stand for some
time as the starting point for any research student or scholar. A related set of
papers, but more diverse in scope and oriented more specifically towards
libraries in Britain, is South Asian studies, edited by Albertine Gaur (London:
The British Library, 1986 [British Library Occasional Papers, no. 7]).
797
Analytical catalogue of publications on Pakistan.
Akhtar H. Siddiqui. Islamabad: Pakistan Institute of Development Studies, [?
1984]. 380p. (PIDE Library Publication, no. 7).
This bibliography contains brief annotations on 1,361 items on economic
development and related topics held in the library of the Pakistan Institute of
Development Studies. It is particularly good on government publications.
Settlement and social change in Asia.
See item no. 424.
The economy of Pakistan: a select bibliography.
See item no. 617.
 Page 219

Indexes
There follow three separate indexes: authors (personal and corporate); titles;
and subjects. Title entries are italicized and refer either to the main titles, or to
other works cited in the annotations. The numbers refer to bibliographical entry
rather than page numbers. Individual index entries are arranged in
alphabetical sequence.

Index of Authors
A
Abbas, S. A. 654
Abbott, F. 495
Abdul Latif Shah 735
Abul Fazl Allami 103-4
Adams, C. 369, 519
Adams, J. 671
Adamson, H. 78
Addelton, J. see Addleton
Addleton, J. 316, 594
Afzal, M. 295
Aga Khan 264
Ahmad, Aijaz 700
Ahmad, Aziz 128-9, 139, 346-7, 377, 401
Ahmad, B. M. 308
Ahmad, Eqbal 463
Ahmad, I. 445
Ahmad, Kazi S. 27
Ahmad, Khaled 727
Ahmad, Khurshid 348, 352
Ahmad, Mumtaz 496
Ahmad, Mushtaq 446
Ahmad, Riaz 265
Ahmad, S. N. 167
Ahmad, Saeed 543
Ahmad, Saghir 385, 458
Ahmad, Sayed Riaz 497
Ahmad, Waheed 168
Ahmed, Akbar S. 134, 195, 386, 403-6, 428, 434, 765
Ahmed, Feroz 458, 489
Ahmed, Ishtiaq 498
Ahmed, Jalaluddin 748
Ahmed, Manzooruddin 223, 447, 468
Ahmed, Viqar 595
Ahmed, Zeenat 434
Ahrens, H-D. 649
Ahsan, A. 349
Aijazuddin, F. S. 749
Aitken, E. H. 36
Akbari, A. H. 663
Akhtar, A. H. 350
Akhtar, R. 785
Akhtar, Sajjad 690
Akhtar, Shamsad 604
Alam, I. 105
Alam, M. 296
Alavi, H. 387-8, 401, 458-9, 670
Albiruni, A. H. 271
Albrecht, H. 637
Alcock, L. 85
Alder, G. J. 62, 70, 169, 210
Ali, Ahmed 163, 702-3, 705
Ali, Akhtar 579
Ali, Amir 349
Ali, Chaudhri Muhammad 234
Ali, Imran 170-1
Ali, Karamat 658
Ali, Mahmud 167
Ali, Mohamed 130
Ali, Muhammad see Ali, Mohamed
Ali, Salim 46
Ali, Shaukat 792
Ali, Tariq 249-50
Ali Kufi 172
Allchin, B. 84
Allchin, R. 84
Alspaugh, W. J. 795
Altaf, Z. 651
Altbach, P. G. 692
Alvi, S. 369
Ambedkar, B. R. 216
Amin, M. 1-2, 683
Amjad, R. 595, 643, 652
Amnesty International 448
Anandram 343
Andrus, J. R. 596
Ansari, Z. I. 348, 372
Anwar, M. 313
Arberry, A. J. 361-2, 364
Archer, W. G. 749
Arif, K. 555
Åsberg, R. 691
Ashraf, A. 307
Ashworth, G. 35
Association for Asian Studies 786
Ayoob, M. 499
Azam, I. 500
Aziz, K. K. 217-18, 251
Azmi, M. R. 556
B
Babree, L. 706
Babur, Emperor 106
Bacqué-Grammont, J.-L. 106
Baha, L. 173
Bahadur, K. 450
Bailey, T. G. 325-6
Balassa, B. 653
Baljon, J. M. S. 351
Ballard, C. 318
 Page 220
Ballard, R. 315
Ballhatchet, K. A. 306
Balneaves, E. 53
Baloch, I. 174
Baloch, M. K. B. B. M. 175
Baluch, M. A. Y. K. 176
Banuazizi, A. 451
Baqir, M. 177
Barani see Ziauddin Barani
Bardhan, P. K. 647
Barker, M. A. R. 327-8, 715
Barnds, W. J. 581
Barrier, N. G. 178-9, 214
Barrow, C. J. 635
Barth, F. 273, 402, 405-6, 420
Bartholomew (map publisher) 43
Bary, W. T. de 131
Basham, A. L. 160
Bausani, A. 703-4, 719
Baxter, C. 167, 452, 468
Bayly, C. A. 105, 109
Beck, L. 432
Belokrenitsky, V. 638
Berland, J. C. 389
Bernhard of The Netherlands, H.R.H. Prince 51
Berry, W. 526
Bertocci, P. J. 670
Beveridge, A. S. 106
Beveridge, H. 104
Bhojwani, A. T. 194
Bhutto, B. 266, 453
Bhutto, Z. A. 252, 454, 557
Binder, L. 451, 501
Birkhead, G. S. 536
Blake, S. P. 107
Bose, M. 264
Bosworth, C. E. 377
Braibanti, R. 263, 537
Brass, P. R. 164, 219
Braun, D. 558
Brecher, I. 654
Brice, W. C. 38
Brines, R. 582
Brohi, A. K. 352
Brown, G. 662
Brown, J. C. 24
Buddenberg, D. 726
Bulleh Shah 727
Bunting, E.-J. W. 750
Burke, S. M. 559, 583
Burki, S. J. 3, 253, 322, 598, 647
Burn, R. 109
Burnes, A. 54
Burton, R. 55
Butterworth, E. 324
Buzan, B. 584
Bürgel, J. C. 353
C
Cabatoff, K. 542
Caldwell, J. C. 4
Callard, K. 455
Callum, C. 303
Calvert, H. 180
Campbell, G. L. 345
Caroe, O. 5, 21, 730, 765
Carré, O. 502
Carroll, L. 433
Carruthers, I. D. 659
Case, M. H. 787
Casterline, J. C. 296
Census Organization (Pakistan) 293
see also Population Census Organization
Chamber of Commerce and Industry (Karachi) 674
Chaudhry, M. G. 666
Chaudhry, M. I. 390
Chavan, Y. B. 166
Cheema, P. I. 788
Chenery, H. B. 628
Chopra, P. 454
Chopra, S. 560
Choudhury, G. W. 254, 456, 527, 561, 585
Christensen, H. 307
Chughtai, M. I. D. 697
Claridge, E. 57
Cohen, A. 314, 451
Cohen, S. P. 544, 567, 586
Cohn, B. 537
Collins, L. 235
Conran, W. I. 192
Coppola, C. 705
Cornelisse, P. A. 660
Craik, H. D. 192
Crook, N. 303
Crowe, S. 751
Curle, A. 693
Cyprian, E. 713
D
Dahya, B. 314
Dales, G. F. 85, 750
Dalton, D. 485
Dames, M. L. 728
Dani, A. H. 86, 158, 181
Daniel, J. C. 47
Dar, B. A. 269, 354-5, 703
Dar, S. R. 745-6
Darling, M. L. 407
Das, V. 161, 391
Davies, C. C. 120, 182
Davis, K. 297
Dawisha, A. 562
de Bary, W. T. 131
Dennell, R. 97
Deshpande, A. 236
Dewey, C. 110
Dey, A. K. 24
Dichter, D. 25
Dinesen, B. 296
Dodwell, H. H. 109
Donnan, H. 392
Douglas, P. 137
Douie, J. M. 183
Downey, J. A. 789
Dowson, J. 111
Duarte, A. 766
Dunbar, J. 57
Duncan, E. 56
Dungen, P. H. M. van den 184
Dupree, N. H. 307
Dutt, A. K. 39
Dutta, P. C. 92
E
Eades, J. 315
East, W. G. 31
Eastwick, E. B. 185, 203
Eaton, R. M. 356
Eberhard, W. 424
Ebinger, C. K. 599
Economist Intelligence Unit (London) 611
 Page 221
Eden, E. 57
Eden, F. 57
Eglar, Z. 408
Elahi, K. Maudood 300
Elahi, Karim 301
Elfenbein, J. H. 329, 729
Elliot, H. M. 111
Embree, A. T. 490, 703
Emerson, P. 35
Enayat, H. 503
Enevoldsen, J. 731
Engineer, A. A. 491
Epstein, T. S. 434
Esposito, J. L. 435, 451, 504
Europa Publications (London) 783
Ewing, K. 132, 393, 505
F
Fairley, J. 58
Fairservis, J. 87
Fairservis, W. A. Jr. 87
Faiz, Faiz Ahmed 706, 711
Falcon, W. P. 601, 618
Fallaci, O. 267
Farmer, B. H. 6, 31
Farooq, U. 427
Fazal, C. P. K. 186
Federal Bureau of Statistics (Pakistan) 302, 672, 679-81
Feldman, H. 255
Feroze, S. M. A. 770
Field, H. 7
Finch, W. 59
Fisher, C. 31
Flam, L. 399
Flemming, L. 707
Foster, W. 59
Framji, K. K. 661
Fredunbeg, M. K. 172
Frembgen, J. 409, 425
Frey, H. 587
Fricker, J. 545
Friedmann, Y. 133, 172, 358
Frye, R. N. 187
G
Gaborieau, M. 134, 502, 639
Gaitskell, A. 667
Gammell, C. J. 675
Gandhi, R. 268
Gankovsky, Y. V. 188, 256, 410
Gardezi, H. N. 397, 457-8
Gardezi, Has-Saan see Gardezi, Hassan
Gardezi, Hassan 752
Garrett, H. L. O. 191
Gascoigne, B. 112
Gauhar, A. 254, 548
Gaur, A. 796
Gavrilov, I. 188
Geib, M. 39
Geldart, C. 558
Gentleman, D. 769
Ghafur, M. A. 753
Ghalib 700, 719
Ghayur, M. 465
Ghose, Z. 738
Gilani, I. S. 316
Gilmartin, D. 189
Gledhill, A. 527
Goil, N. K. 790
Gole, S. 40
Gonda, J. 723
Gordon-Polonskaya, L. R. 256
Gotsch, C. 628, 662
Gough, K. 385, 458
Goulding, H. R. 190
Government of India (pre-1947) 42
Government of Pakistan 291, 484, 524
see also Census Organization, Federal Bureau of Statistics, Ministry of
Education, Ministry of Finance, Ministry of Home Affairs, Ministry of
Information and Broadcasting, Ministry of Law, National Planning Board,
 Planning Commission, Population Census Organization, Survey of Pakistan
Government of the Punjab 517
Green, P. 64
Greenhill, B. 676
Grey, C. 191
Grierson, G. L. A. 330
Griffin, K. 602
Griffin, L. H. 192
Grunebaum, G. E. von 129
Guisinger, S. 640, 653
Gulhati, N. D. 593
Gupta, N. 126
Gupta, S. 588
Gustafson, W. E. 193
H
Haass, R. N. 589
Habib, Hassan 539
Habib, Irfan 40, 108, 113-14
Habib, Mohammad 120, 135
Haendel, D. 590
Hafeez, S. 426, 436
Haider, S. J. 791
Haig, W. 109
Halliday, F. 459
Hambly, G. 66
Hameed, S. S. 238
Hamid, Abdul 220
Hamid, Khwaja, Abdul 710
Hamid, Naved 665
Hancock, G. 2
Haq, Abdul 331-2
Haq, Anwar-ul- 427
Haq, M. Anwarul 359
Haq, Mahbub ul 631
Haq, Qazi Mahmudul 796
Haq, S. Moinul 141
Haque, Irfan-ul- 603
Hardy, P. 135-7, 148
Harle, J. C. 754
Harrison, J. 306
Harrison, S. S. 451, 492
Hart, D. M. 411
Hasan, Faruq 708
Hasan, Khalid 708, 714
Hasan, Masud-ul- 269
Hasan, Masuma 563
 Page 222
Hasan, Mumtaz 354, 703
Hasan, Mushirul 130, 138, 153
Hasan, Sibte 506
Hashmi, B. 397
Hasnain, H. 677
Hassan, R. 507
Haward, R. K. 306
Hawkins, R. E. 48
Haydar, A. 528
Hayes, L. D. 460
Haywood, S. 751
Heeger, G. A. 461, 572
Herms, E. 298
Herring, R. J. 462
Heston, A. 677
Heston, W. L. 767
Hewitt, K. 35
Hicks, N. L. 640
Hirashima, S. 641
Hodges, E. 443
Hodson, H. V. 237
Hollen, C. Van 572
Hollister, J. N. 360
Holt, P. M. 139
Honda, G. 699
Honigmann, J. J. 412
Hopkins, A. G. 110
Hosking, E. 49
Hotchand, N. 194
Housepian, N. 463
Howell, E. 195, 730
Hughes-Bullet, R. 42
Hunt, Lord 69
Hunter, W. W. 140
Husain, Azim 270
Husain, Fazl-i- 168
Husain, Intizar 708, 717
Husain, Mahmud 141
Husain, Shahrukh 716
Hussain, Asaf 464
Hussain, Intizar see Husain
Hussain, Mazhar 295
Hussain, S. Z. 677
Hussain, Syed Shabbir 546
Hussein, A. 709
Huttenback, R. A. 196
Hyman, A. 465, 569
I
Ibbetson, D. 413
Ikram, S. M. 271, 747
Ikramullah, S. S. 272
Iltis, J. C. 127
Inayatullah 394, 540
Independent Planning Commission (Lahore) 630
India, Government of see Government of India, Ministry of External Affairs
Institute of Development Studies (University of Sussex) 789
Institute of Policy Studies (Islamabad) 629
International Labour Organization 682
International Monetary Fund 682
Iqbal, Afzal 130, 508
Iqbal, Muhammad 221, 361-4, 710
Iqbal, Munawar 316
Iqbal, Sabiha 671
Irfan, M. 643
Irfani, S. 564
Islam, Khurshidu 719-20
Islam, Nurul 632
Islam, Shamsul 740
Ispahani, M. A. H. 232
Israel, M. 143
Ives, J. D. 35
J
Jackson, R. 197
Jacobson, J. 88
Jacquemont, V. 60
Jaffrey, M. 19
Jafri, R. A. 130
Jahan, R. 257
Jahanzeb, M. 273
Jairazbhoy, N. A. 760
Jalal, A. 222
Jalal, H. 8
Jamal, H. 642
Jamal, M. 711
James, E. M. 194
Jan, M. Q. 33, 69
Jansen, M. 100
Jansson, E. 198
Jarrett, H. S. 103
Jeffery, P. 317
Jellicoe, S. 751
Jenkins, R. 323
Jennings, I. 527
Jetha, N. 604
Jettmar, K. 89, 367
Jinnah, M. A. 225, 227, 232
Johnson, B. L. C. 26
Jones, G. N. 792
Jones, K. W. 193
Jones, R. W. 591
Jones, S. 367
Jordan, A. A. Jr. 591
Jotwani, M. 735
Joyo, M. I. M. 343
K
Kabir, M. 158
Kamanev, S. see Kamenev
Kamenev, S. 605
Kapur, A. 547
Kardar, S. 606
Karim, M. S. 304
Katz, J. E. 547
Kausar, I. H. 199
Kaushik, N. 465
Kazi, E. 735
Kazi, S. 303
Keay, J. 61
Keddie, N. 432
Kennedy, C. H. 308, 472, 541
Kennedy, K. A. R. 95
Kenoyer, J. M. 85
Khalid, F. 713
Khalilzad, Z. 565
Khaliquzzaman, C. 274
Khan, Afsar Umar Salim 135
Khan, Ahmad Nabi 200
Khan, Akhtar Hameed 428
Khan, Azizur Rahman 602, 643
Khan, F. A. 90
Khan, Fazal Muqeem 476
Khan, Hamid Ahmad 703
Khan, Imran 9
Khan, M. Fahim 316
Khan, Mahmood Hasan 644, 663, 666
Khan, Makhdoom Ali 525
 Page 223
Khan, Mohammad Ali 299
Khan, Mohammad Asghar 466, 509, 548
Khan, Mohammad Ayub 275
Khan, R. N. 677
Khan, Sayyid Ahmad 140, 355
Khan, Verity Saifullah 318
Khan, Wali 238
Khuhro, H. 194, 201
Khurshid, A. S. 233, 771
Khushal Khan Khattak 730
Kidron, M. 616, 673
Kiernan, V. 706, 710
King, D. 91
Kipling, R. 739
Klimburg, M. 367
Klitgaard, R. E. 690, 694
Knight, E. F. 62
Kochanek, S. A. 467
Komal, L. 768
Konieczny, M. G. 756
Kool, M. L. 684
Korbel, J. 592
Korson, J. H. 395-6, 468
Kosinski, L. A. 300
Kozlowski, G. C. 145
Krishna, L. R. 732
Krishna, L.
Kumar, D. 108
Kureishi, H. 319
Kureishi, M. 741
Kureshy, K. U. 27
Kurin, R. 522
L
Lal, K. S. 146
Lambrick, H. T. 10, 67, 185, 202-4
Lambton, A. K. S. 139
LaPalombara, J. 537
Lapierre, D. 235
LaPorte, R. Jr. 322, 469, 598
Lavan, S. 308
Lawrence, B. B. 368
Lazard, N. 706
Learmonth, A. T. A. 31
Lee, E. 643
Lelyveld, D. 147
Levtzion, N. 148
Lewis, B. 139, 655
Lewis, S. R. Jr. 653, 655
Library of Congress 794
Lieberman, S. 598
Linden, J. J. van der 684, 689
Lindholm, C. 414
Little, D. P. 369
Llanwarne, K. 558
Lodhi, M. 470, 510
London Centre for Pakistan Studies 320
Lorenz, M. 333
Low, D. A. 127
Luard, C. E. 63
Lukacs, J. R. 92
Lumby, E. W. R. 239
Lunt, J. 54
M
MacEwan, A. 628
Mackenzie, D. N. 730
MacMunn, G. 549
Maddison, A. 115
Mahajan, I. K. 661
Mahmud, S. F. 769
Malik, Hafeez 149-50, 371, 566
Malik, Iftikhar Haider 277
Malik, Ikram Ali 205, 772
Malik, M. B. K. 678
Malik, M. Usman 11
Malik, Salman 642, 648
Malik, Yogendra K. 308, 397, 510
Malkani, K. R. 206
Maloney, C. 12
Mandelbaum, D. G. 437
Maniruzzaman, T. 471
Manrique, S. 63
Mansergh, N. 239
Manto, S. H. 707-8, 714
Marek, J. 353
Mariani, F. 64
Maron, S. 13
Marshall, D. N. 116
Marshall, J. 86, 93
Martin, C. J. 636
Marwah, O. S. 547
Maskiell, M. 438
Mason, K. 65
Mason, P. 117, 550
Massey, C. F. 192
Masson, C. 66-7
Masters, J. 551
Matheson, S. 14
Matringe, D. 737
Matthews, D. J. 341, 715-16
Matthews, N. 127
Maududi, S. A. A. 372, 511
Maugham, W. S. 264
Mawdudi, S. A. A. see Maududi
Mayer, A. 398
Mayer, J. 685
Mayne, P. 15, 68
McDonough, S. 223, 276, 369-70
Meenai, S. A. 607
Mehta, V. 286
Mekhari, M. A. 233
Melnik, S. R. 773
Memon, M. U. 709, 717
Mengal, A. K. 327
Menon, V. P. 240
Merrey, D. J. 664
Metcalf, B. D. 132, 151-2, 223
Meyerovitch, E. 361
Michel, A. A. 593
Miki, W. 699
Miller, K. 9, 69
Minault, G. 153, 161, 439
Ministry of Education (Pakistan) 794
Ministry of External Affairs (India) 580
Ministry of Finance (Pakistan) 600
Ministry of Home Affairs (Pakistan) 292
Ministry of Information and Broadcasting (Pakistan) 784
Ministry of Law (Pakistan) 523
Mir 720
Mir Hasan 720
Mitchell, N. 278
Mohammadally, R. 793
Mohammed, A. F. 596
Moir, M. 127
Mokri, M. 361
Moon, P. 239, 241, 248
 Page 224
Moorcroft, W. 70
Moore, R. A. Jr. 552
Moore, R. J. 242-3
Moorhouse, G. 71
Moosvi, S. 103, 118
Morehouse, W. 698
Moreland, W. H. 119
Morgenstierne, G. 334
Mortimer, E. 512
Mosley, L. 244
Mountfort, G. 49
Mujahid, S. al 279
Mujeeb, M. 154
Mumtaz, Kamil Khan 757
Mumtaz, Khawar 440
Munir, M. 513, 517
Murphy, D. 72
Murphy, P. 9
Murtuza, A. 705
Musa, M. 281
N
Nabi, I. 645, 665
Nag, M. 301
Nagi, A. 711
Naim, C. M. 223
Naipaul, V. S. 514
Naqvi, S. N. H. 444, 609, 614, 660, 666
Narang, G. C. 335
Naseem, S. M. 646
Nasir, M. 767
National Planning Board (Pakistan) 621
see also Planning Commission
Nayyar, A. 367, 415
Nazim (pseudonym) 539
Neuman, S. G. 567
Nicholson, R. A. 362
Niemeijer, A. C. 155
Nilsson, S. 686
Nizami, K. A. 120
Nizamuddin, M. 296
Noman, O. 473
Norden, D. 48
Nulty, L. 667
Nyrop, R. 16
O
O'Dwyer, M. 280
Oldenburg, P. 572
Omar, K. 741
Osborne, C. 79
P
Page, D. 224
Pakistan, Government of see Government of Pakistan
Papanek, G. F. 601, 614-15
Papanek, H. 441, 656
Parkes, P. S. C. 367, 416
Parry, B. 740
Pastner, C. McC. 432
Pastner, S. L. 399, 417-19, 430
Pataudi, S. A. K. 281
Patterson, G. 751
Patterson, M. L. P. 795
Pearl, D. S. 529-30
Pearson, J. D. 796
Pehrson, R. N. 420
Pfeffer, K. H. 310
Philips, C. H. 156, 245
Phillott, D. C. 103
Pirzada, S. S. 225-7
Piscatori, J. 515
Pithawalla, M. B. 29
Planning Commission (Pakistan) 622-7
see also National Planning Board
Platts, J. T. 337
Polunin, O. 50
Popkin, N. 25
Population Census Organization (Pakistan) 294
see also Census Organization
Possehl, G. 95-6
Postans, T. 208
Powell, V. 285
Powers, H. S. 762
Pritchett, F. W. 718
Punjab, Government of see Government of the Punjab
Q
Qadeer, M. A. 687
Qadir, A. 552
Qadir Yar 736
Quddus, S. A. 531
Quraeshi, S. 758
Qureshi, Anwar Iqbal 258
Qureshi, Ishtiaq Husain 17, 121, 139, 157-8
Qureshi, M. Aslam 569
Qureshi, M. L. 633
Qureshi, M. Naeem 159
Qureshi, M. Tariq 546
Qureshi, Regula Burckhardt 761-2
Qureshi, Saleem 223, 510, 516
Qureshi, Sameel Ahmed (pseudonym) 474
Qureshi, Waheed 365
R
Rafat, T. 727, 736, 741
Rahat, N.-i- 434
Rahman, Ataur 485
Rahman, Fazlur 369, 373-4, 468, 519
Rahman, Inamur 475
Rahman, Mushtaqur 431
Rahman, M. Attiqur 553
Rahman, Tanzil-ur- 532
Rahman Baba 731
Raikes, R. L. 96
Rajagopalachariar, C. 270
Rakisits, C. G. P. 493
Rama Krishna, L. 732
Rao, G. 604
Rapson, E. J. 109
Raschid, M. S. 375
Rashid, A. 158
Rashid, J. 457
Rauf, A. 442, 695
Raychaudhuri, T. 108
Razvi, M. 570
Reeves, R. 73
Rendell, H. 97
Riaz, F. 711, 733
Richards, J. F. 122
Richter, W. L. 259
Ripley, S. D. 46
Rittenberg, S. A. 198, 209
 Page 225
Rizvi, Gowher 584
Rizvi, Hasan-Askari 476
Rizvi, S. A. A. 139, 160, 376
Roberts, T. J. 51
Robertson, G. S. 210
Robinson, E. A. G. 616
Robinson, F. C. R. 18, 44, 161, 164, 219, 228
Rooney, J. 311
Rose, H. A. 42, 421
Rose, L. E. 571
Rosen, G. 634
Rosenthal, E. I. J. 135, 518
Rosselli, J. 60 Rudduck, G. 688
Rudolph, L. I. 572
Rudolph, S. H. 572
Rushbrook Williams, L. F. 83
Rushdie, Salman 742
Rushdie, Sameen 19
Russell, R. 338, 701, 719-20
S
Sabzwari, M. A. 395
Sadie, S. 762
Sadiq, M. 721
Sadullah, M. M. 246
Saha, S. 635
Sahgal, B. 48
Sahni, B. 733
Said, H. M. 699
Saiyid, M. H. 282
Sakala, C. 443
Saksena, R. B. 722
Salam, S. A. 715
Saldanha, D. 692
Salik, S. 260
Salim, M. 98
Santiago, J. R. 80
Sarkar, J. 103
Sarmad, K. 609
Sathar, Z. 303
Sauda 720
Sayeed, K. B. 229, 477-8, 485
Scarsbrook, Alisa 20
Scarsbrook, Alan 20
Schacht, J. 377, 533
Schaffer, B. 542
Schaller, G. B. 52
Schimmel, A. 11, 211, 361, 378-80, 723, 734, 758-9
Schofield, V. 283
Schoorl, J. W. 689
Schwartzberg, J. E. 45
Selier, F. 304
Sen, G. 577
Shackle, C. 339-41,715-16, 724
Shaffer, J. G. 92
Shah, N. M. 444
Shahaney, A. T. 342-3
Shaheed, F. 440
Shahi, A. 566
Shahnawaz, J. A. 284
Shaikh, F. 230
Shami, P. 696
Shamim, M. A. 546
Shamloo (pseudonym) 269
Sharma, H. P. 458
Shaw, A. 321
Shaw, I. 78, 81
Shepley, J. 267
Shepperdson, M. J. 635, 639
Shipton, E. 74
Siddiqi, A. H. 30
Siddiqi, M. N. 534
Siddiqui, A. H. 617, 797
Sidhwa, B. 743
Sims, H. 668
Singer, A. 21
Singh, C. 123
Singh, I. 381
Singh, K. 364
Singhal, D. P. 124
Sirageldin, I. 299
Smirnov, U. A. 340
Smith, D. E. 519
Smith, W. C. 162, 520
Snoy, P. 422
Sorley, H. T. 36, 735
Spain, J. W. 22
Spate, O. H. K. 31
Spear, P. 125-6, 747
Spector, L. 554
Srinivasan, T. N. 647
Stainton, A. 50
Staley, I. 75
Stanford, R. 669
State Bank of Pakistan 597
Staudenmaier, W. O. 574
Steel, F. A. 285, 769
Stein, A. 99
Stephens, I. 231
Stern, J. J. 618
Steuber, F. A. 636
Stevens, R. D. 670
Streefland, P. 400
Sukhwal, B. L. 32
Survey of Pakistan 37
Swietochowski, M. L. 759
Swift, H. 82
Swinson, A. 212
Syed, A. H. 223, 521, 573
Symonds, R. 163
T
Tahir, M. A. 736
Tahirkheli, R. A. K. 33, 69
Tahir-Kheli, S. 547, 562, 564, 567, 574-5
Talbot, I. 213
Tandon, P. 286
Taseer, M. D. 710
Taseer, S. 287
Taylor, D. 164, 219, 515
Tayyeb, A. 34
Temple, R. C. 769
Tendulkar, D. G. 288
Tetley, B. 683
Thackston, W. M. 759
Thapar, R. 125
Thewalt, V. 89
Thompson, E. 57
Thorburn, S. S. 178, 214
Thomer, A. 639
Thornton, T. H. 190, 289
Thornton, T. P. 576
Tinker, H. 247, 537
Titus, M. T. 382
Tobias, M. 35
Toynbee, A. J. 76
Trebeck, G. 70
Trimingham, J. C. 383
Troll, C. W. 384
Tsakok, I. 322
Tsipan, E. H. 344
 Page 226

U
Ullah, Inayat see Inayatullah
United Nations 682
United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization 682
Urban, G. 100
Usborne, C. F. 737
Usmanghani, K. 699
V
Vahid, S. A. 725
Vajpeyi, D. 308, 510
Vakil, C. N. 619
van den Dungen, P. H. M. 184
van den Linden, J. J. 684, 689
Varis Shah see Waris Shah
Verboom, D. 684
Vertzberger, Y. 576
Vigne, G. T. 77
Villiers-Stuart, C. M. 751
von Grunebaum, G. E. 129
von Vorys, K. 479
Vreede-de Stuers, C. 437
W
Wade, B. C. 763-4
Wagle, N. K. 143
Wainwright, M. D. 127, 245
Wakil, P. A. 401
Ward, R. 323
Waris Shah 737
Waseem, M. 480-1
Wasti, S. R. 165
Waterston, A. 636
Watson, J. L. 318
Watts, R. A. 434
Wavell, A. 248
Webster, J. C. B. 312
Weekes, R. V. 23
Weiler, J. 692
Weinbaum, M. G. 482, 577
Weiner, M. 451
Weir, D. 324
Weiss, A. M. 522
Weitz, C. A. 92
Welch, S. C. 759
Werbner, P. 315, 324
Westphal, H. 423
Westphal-Hellbusch, S. 423
Wheeler, M. 101-2, 109
Wheeler, R. S. 483
White, L. J. 657
Whitteridge, G. 66
Wilcox, W. A. 176, 261, 573
Willetts, D. 2, 683
Williams, L. F. R. 83
Wilson, A. J. 485
Wilson, Angus 739
Wingate, R. 289
Wirsing, R. G. 494
Wolf, J. M. 664
Wolf-Phillips, L. 535
Wolpert, S. 290
Woodruff, P. (pseudonym) 117
World Bank 620
Wriggins, W. H. 263, 578
Wright, T. P. Jr. 486
Y
Yap, K. S. 689
Yapp, M. E. 164, 210, 215, 219
Yegorova, R. P. 344
Z
Zablotsky, A. 305
Zahab, M. A. 134
Zahid, S. 665, 690
Zaidi, S. A. 648
Zaidi, Z. H. 232
Zakaria, R. 166
Zaman, M. 233
Zaman, Waheed-uz- 279
Zameenzad, A. 744
Ziauddin Barani 135
Zingel, W.-P. 487, 650
Zingel-Avé Lallemant, S. 487
Ziring, L. 223, 262-3, 482, 488
Zograph, G. A. 345
 Page 227

Index of Titles
A
Abdul Ghaffar Khan: faith is a battle 288
Abode of snow: a history of Himalayan exploration and mountaineering 65
Abul Kalam Azad, 137
Accessions list Pakistan 793-4
Accessions list South Asia 793-4
Administration of the Sultanate of Delhi 121
Administrative problems in Pakistan 536
Administrative training and development: a comparative study of East Africa,
Zambia, Pakistan, and India 542
Adventures of Hir and Ranjha 737
Afghan refugees in Pakistan: from emergency towards self-reliance. A report on
the food situation and related socio-economic aspects 307
Aga Khans, 264
Agrarian economy of Pakistan: issues and policies 665
Agrarian system of Moslem India 119
Agrarian system of Mughal India (1556-1707) 113
Agriculture in Pakistan: a selected bibiliography 617
Ahmadiyah movement: a history and perspective 308
A'in-i-Akbari 103, 116, 118
Akbarnama 103-4
Aligarh' s first generation: Muslim solidarity in British India 147
All round view 9
Among the believers: an Islamic journey 514
Analytical catalogue of books on Allama Muhammad Iqbal (1877-1977) 350
Analytical catalogue of publications on Pakistan 797
Ancient Pakistan 94
Anglo-Pakistan relations, 1947-1976 569
Annual report 597
Another lonely voice: the Urdu short stories of Saadat Hasan Manto 707
Anthology of classical Urdu love lyrics: text and translations 715
Anthropological reconnaissance in West Pakistan, 1955. With appendixes on
the archaeology and natural history of Baluchistan and Bahawalpur 7
Anthropology in Pakistan: recent socio-cultural and archaeological perspectives
399
Antiquities of northern Pakistan: reports and studies. vol. 1 Rock inscriptions in
the Indus valley 89
Apprentice to power: India 1904-1906 407
Architecture and art treasures in Pakistan: prehistoric, protohistoric, Buddhist
and Hindu periods 90
Architecture in Pakistan 757
Ardent pilgrim: an introduction to the life and work of Mohammed Iqbal 381
Area handbook for Pakistan 16
Art and architecture of the Indian subcontinent 754
Art in Pakistan: early years 748
Asian bureaucratic systems emergent from the British imperial tradition 537
Asian drama: an inquiry into the poverty of nations 608
Asian Social Science Bibliography with Annotations and Abstracts 790
Asian Survey 449
Asie du Sud: traditions et changements 639
Aspects of Ghalib: five essays 703
Aspects of the Frontier Crimes Regulation in Pakistan 526
Astor: eine Ethnographie 415
Atlas of Pakistan 37
Atlas of the Islamic world since 1500 44
Atlas of the Mughal empire: political and economic maps with detailed notes,
bibliography and index 40
Authority of the past: a study of three Muslim modernists 370
Ayub Khan era: politics in Pakistan, 1958-1969 262
 Page 228

B
Babur-nama (Memoirs of Babur) 106
Babus Brahmans and bureaucrats: a critique of the administrative system in
Pakistan 539
Baluchi language: a dialectology with texts 329
Baluchi miscellanea of erotica and poetry: Codex Oriental Additional 24048 of
the British Library 729
Baluchis and the Pathans 494
Bangla Desh documents 580
Battle for Pakistan: the air war of 1965 545
Battle of ideas in Pakistan 506
Bazaar of the storytellers 767
Beauty of Pakistan 2
Beggar saint of Sehwan and other sketches of Sind 766
Bestimmungsgründe und Alternativen divergierender regionaler
Wachstumsverläufe in Entwicklungsländern: eine theoretische und empirische
Analyse unter besonderer Berücksichtigung der Regionalentwicklung in Ost-
und Westpakistan, 1947-1970 649
Between basti dwellers and bureaucrats: lessons in squatter settlement
upgrading in Karachi 689
Between Gandhara and the silk road: rock-carvings along the Karakoram
highway. Discoveries by German-Pakistani expeditions, 1979-1984 89
Between Oxus and Jumna 76
Between two cultures: migrants and minorities in Britain 318
Beyond Bokhara: the life of William Moorcroft, Asian explorer and pioneer
veterinary surgeon, 1767-1825 70
Beyond Punjab 286
Bhutto: a political biography 287
Bhutto: trial and execution 283
Bibliography of Asian Studies 786
Bibliography of economic literature relating to the Punjab 186
Birth of Indian civilization 84
Black mirrors 713
Blank on the map 74
Boats and boatmen of Pakistan 676
Bokhara Burnes 54
Book of Indian birds 46
Book of Indian reptiles 47
Breaking the curfew: a political journey through Pakistan 56
British India's northern frontier 1865-95: a study in imperial policy 62, 169,
210
British relations with Sind, 1799-1843: an anatomy of imperialism 196
Das Buch der Ewigkeit 361
Bugles and a tiger: a personal adventure 551
Bulleh Shah: a selection 727
Bulletin (State Bank of Pakistan) 597
Bulletins see Census bulletins
Bureaucracy and political development 537
Bureaucracy in Pakistan 541
C
Calligraphers of Thatta 753
Cambridge Economic History of India 108
Cambridge encyclopedia of India, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Nepal, Bhutan and the
Maldives 18
Cambridge History of India 109
Cambridge History of Islam 139
Can Pakistan survive? The death of a state 249
Causes of the Indian revolt 355
Census bulletins 291-3
Census of Pakistan 1951 291
Census of Pakistan 1961 292
Chachnama, an ancient history of Sind 172
Changing map of Asia: a political geography 31
Charles Masson of Afghanistan 66
Chiefs and families of note in the Punjab 192
China and Pakistan: diplomacy of an entente, cordiale 573
China Pakistan relations 1947-1980: documents 555
Chitral: the story of a minor siege 210
Christian community and change in nineteenth century North India 312
Chronicles of the Raj: a study of literary reaction to the imperial idea towards
the end of the Raj 740
Churchill, Cripps, and India 243
 Page 229
Citizens, slaves, guest-workers: the dynamics of labour migration from South
Asia 316
City in South Asia: premodern and modern 306
Class and power in a Punjabi village 385
Class structure and economic development: India and Pakistan since the
Moghuls 115
Classical Urdu literature from the beginning to Iqbal 723
Classical Urdu poetry 715
Code of Muslim personal law 532
Collected works of Quaid-e-Azam Mohammad Ali Jinnah 225
Collection and analysis of community data 296
Colonel Sir Robert Sandeman: his life and work on our Indian frontier. A
memoir, with selections from his correspondence and official writings 289
Communal and pan-Islamic trends in colonial India 153
Compact handbook of the birds of India and Pakistan 46
Compendium of Pakistan's economy 603
Complaint and answer 364
Comprehensive bibliography of Pakistan archaeology: paleolithic to historic
times 91
Concept of an Islamic state: an analysis of the ideological controversy in
Pakistan 498
Constitutional development in Pakistan 527
Constitutional legitimacy: a study of the doctrine of legitimacy 535
Constitution of the Islamic republic of Pakistan 1956 523
Constitution of the Islamic Republic of Pakistan, 1973, as amended up to
March 1988 525
Constitution of the republic of Pakistan 1962 524
Constitutional problems in Pakistan 527
Constitutional relations between Britain and India: the transfer of power 1942-
7 239
Contemporary Pakistan: politics, economy and society 447, 468
Contemporary problems of Pakistan 468
Continents in collision: the International Karakoram Project 69
Conversion to Islam 148
Country Profile 611
Course in Baluchi 327
Course in Urdu 328
Crafts of the Punjab. vol. 1 Murree Hills 752
Crisis of empire in Mughal North India: Awadh and the Punjab, 1707-48 105
Crisis of Indian unity, 1917-1940 243
Crow eaters 743
Cultural heritage of Pakistan 747
D
Daddyji 286
Danger in Kashmir 592
Data analysis for development 694
Daughter of the East: an autobiography 266
Dawn 774
Dawn Overseas Weekly 774
Defense planning in less-industrialized states: the Middle East and South Asia
567
Delhi between two empires 1803-1931: society, government and urban growth
126
Delusions and discoveries: studies on India in the British imagination, 1880-
1930 740
Democracy in Pakistan 527
Development policy theory and practice 601
Development policy II the Pakistan experience 601
Development strategy for the sixth plan 1983-88: an IPS task force report 629
Diary and notes of Mian Fazl-i-Husain 168
Dictionary of Urdu, classical Hindi, and English 337
District administration in West Pakistan: its problems and challenges 540
District census reports 292
Divide and quit 241
Domestic resource mobilization in Pakistan: selected issues 604
Downfall by degrees and other stories 709
Drug addiction and rehabilitation of addicts in Pakistan 427
Dry leaves from young Egypt or a glance at Sindhe before Napier 185
 Page 230

E
Early travels in India 1583-1619 59
Economic consequences of divided India: a study of the economy of India and
Pakistan 619
Economic development in South Asia: proceedings of a conference held by the
International Economic Association at Kandy, Ceylon 616
Economic growth of Pakistan 605
Economic history of Pakistan 258
Economic impact of Afghan refugees in NWFP 307
Economic survey 597, 600
Economy of Pakistan 596
Economy of Pakistan: a select bibliography 617
Economy of the Mughal empire 103
Economy of the Mughal empire c.1595: a statistical survey 118
Education in search of fundamentals 696
Education in South Asia: a bibliography 692
Eight lives: a study of the Hindu-Muslim encounter 268
Elite politics in an ideological state 464
Emergence of Pakistan 234
Emperors' album: images of Mughal India 759
Empire and nation: Punjab and the making of Pakistan 189
Encyclopaedia of Islam 38, 357
Encyclopedia of Indian natural history: centenary publication of the Bombay
Natural History Society, 1883-1983 48
End and the beginning: Pakistan, 1968-71 255
Endgames of empire: studies of Britain's Indian problem 243
Endless day: some case material on Asian rural women 434
Enduring entente: Sino-Pakistani relations 1960-1980 576
English-Panjabi dictionary 325
English-Sindhi dictionary 342
Entrepreneurship in the Third World: risk and uncertainty in industry in
Pakistan 651
Environment Statistics of Pakistan 679
Escape from empire: the Attlee government and the Indian problem 242
Essays on Islamic civilization presented to Niyazi Berkes 369
Ethnic communities in business: strategies for economic survival 323
Ethnic conflict in South Asia 491
Ethnic preference and public policy in developing states 472
Ethnicity, nationalism and the Pakhtuns: the independence movement in
India's North-West Frontier Province 198, 209
Ethnologie und Geschichte: Festschrifi für Karl Jettmar 422
European adventurers of northern India, 1785 to 1849 191
Excavations at Mohenjo Daro, Pakistan: the pottery 85
Experiment with freedom: India and Pakistan 1947 247
'Exploring the neglected': a study of fruit and vegetable hawkers in Karachi
690
Exports, politics, and economic development: Pakistan 1970-1982 671
Extended family: women and political participation in India and Pakistan 439
F
Facts are facts: the untold story of India's partition 238
Faith and power: the politics of Islam 512
Faith movement of Mawlana Muhammad Ilyas 359
Faiz Ahmed Faiz: poèmes 706
Far East and Australasia 783
Far Eastern Quarterly 786
Father and daughter: a political autobiography 284
Fazl-i-Husain: a political biography 270
Features of person and society in Swat: collected essays on
 Page 231
Pathans 405
Federal and sovereign: a policy framework for the economic development of
Pakistan 630
Fernsehen in Pakistan: entwicklungspolitische Bedeutung eines
Massenmediums 773
Ferozsons English-Urdu dictionary 331
Ferozsons Urdu-English dictionary 332
Fertility in Pakistan: a review of findings from the Pakistan fertility survey 296
Fifth five year plan (1978-83) 625
Final evaluation of the second five-year plan 1960-65) 622
First five year plan, 1955-60 621
First round: Indo-Pakistan War 1965 548
Flora Annie Steel: novelist of India 285
Flowers of the Himalaya 50
Focus on Baluchistan and Pushtoon question 489
Folk tales of Pakistan 768
Foreign aid and industrial development in Pakistan 654
Foreign Trade Statistics 672
Forgotten chapter of Indian history as described in the memoirs of Seth
Naomul Hotchand, C.S.I., of Karachi, 1804-1878 194
Foundations of Pakistan: All-India Muslim League documents, 1906-1947 226
Fourth five year plan (1970-75) 624
Freedom at midnight 235
Friends not masters: a political autobiography 275
From Akbar to Aurangzeb: a study in Indian economic history 119
From crisis to crisis: Pakistan in 1962-69 255
From Jinnah to Zia 513
From martial law to martial law: politics in the Punjab, 1919-1958 167
From purdah to parliament 272
Frontier Post 775
Frontiers of Pakistan: a study of frontier problems in Pakistan's foreign policy
570
Full tilt 72
Fully annotated atlas of South Asia 39
G
Gabriel's wing: a study into the religious ideas of Sir Muhammad Iqbal 378
Garden of fidelity, being the autobiography of Flora Annie Steel 1847-1929 285
Gardens of Mughul India: a history and guide 751
Gardens of the Great Mughals 751
Gazetteer of the province of Sind 36
Gazetteer of West Pakistan: the former province of Sind (including Khairpur
State) 36
General guide to the India Office Library and Records 127
Generals in politics: Pakistan 1958-1982 466
Generosity and jealousy: the Swat Pukhtun of northern Pakistan 414
Geography of Pakistan 27
Geology of Kohistan: Karakoram Himalaya, northern Pakistan 33, 69
Ghalib, 1797-1869 vol. 1 Life and letters 719
Ghalib: the poet and his age 719
Ghalib: two essays 703
Ghazals of Ghalib 700
Gilgit game: the explorers of the western Himalayas 1865-95 61
Glance at Sindhe before Napier or dry leaves from young Egypt 185, 203
Going nuclear 554
Golden tradition: an anthology of Urdu poetry 702
Government and politics in Pakistan 446
Government archives in South Asia: a guide to national and state archives in
Ceylon, India and Pakistan 127
Great divide: Britain India Pakistan 238
Great Moghuls 112
Great tragedy 252
Green revolution in Pakistan: implications of technological change 667
Growth and development in Pakistan 1955-1969 618
Growth and inequality in Pakistan 602
Growth of Muslim population in medieval India (A.D. 1000-1800) 146
Guardians of the Khaibar: the social organization and history of the Afridis of
Pakistan 411
Guide to Pakistan government publications, 1958-70 617
Guide to Punjab government reports and statistics 186
 Page 232
Guide to Taxila 86, 93
Guide to Western manuscripts and documents in the British Isles relating to
South and South East Asia 127
H
Handbook for travellers in India, Pakistan, Nepal, Bangladesh and Sri Lanka
(Ceylon) 83
Handbook of the birds of India and Pakistan 46
Harappan civilization: a contemporary perspective 95
Herald 779
Herb drugs and herbalists in Pakistan 699
Hesitant dawn (Christianity in Pakistan 1579-1760) 311
Hindu-Muslim riots in the British Punjab (1849-1900) 205
Hir Varis Sah: pòeme Panjabi du XVIIIe siècle. Introduction, translitteration,
traduction et commentaire 737
Historians of India, Pakistan and Ceylon 156
Historians of medieval India: studies in Indo-Muslim historical writing 135
Historical atlas of Islam 38
Historical atlas of South Asia 45
Historical background of Pakistan 1857-1947: an annotated digest of source
material 217
Historic city of Taxila 86
History of India as told by its own historians: the Muhammadan period 111
History of India:volume two 125
History of Pakistan (1947-1958) 257
History of sufism in India 376
History of the freedom movement (being the story of Muslim struggle for the
freedom of Hind-Pakistan) 141
History of the Indian people 124
History of the Pakistan Air Force, 1947-1982 546
History of Urdu literature 721-2
Housing, economic and demographic survey, 1973 293
Hundred years of Pakistan Railways: Pakistan Western Railways 1861-1961,
Pakistan Eastern Railways 1862-1962 678
I
Ice-candy-man 743
Imperial gazetteer of India: provincial series 36, 42
Imperial gazetteer of India: the Indian empire 41
Imperial impact: studies in the economic history of Africa and India 110
Imperial monetary system of Mughal India 122
Imperial Mughal painting 759
Imperialism and revolution in South Asia 458
Imran: the autobiography of Imran Khan 9
In Afghanistan's shadow: Baluch nationalism and Soviet temptations 492
India and Pakistan: a general and regional geography 31
India as I knew it, 1885-1925 280
India at the death of Akbar: an economic study 119
India, Pakistan and Ceylon: the regions 31
India, Pakistan and the rise of China 573
India, Pakistan or Pakhtunistan: the nationalist movements in the North-West
Frontier Province, 1937-47 198
India, Pakistan, and the great powers 581
India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, and the major powers: politics of a divided
subcontinent 561
Indian cookery 19
Indian Islam: a religious history of Islam in India 382
Indian maps and plans 40
Indian miniatures in the India Office Library 755
Indian Musalmans: are they bound in conscience to rebel against the Queen?
140
Indian Muslims 154
Indian ocean: region of conflict or 'peace zone'? 558
Indian society and the making of the British empire 109
Indian subcontinent: India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka 43
Indisch-Pakistanische Konflikt und seine wirtschaftlichen und sozialen Kosten
für Pakistan in den Jahren
 Page 233
1958-1968 587
Indiscke Ozean: Konfliktregion oder 'Zone des Friedens'? 558
Indo-Pak clash in the Rann of Kutch 543
Indo-Pakistani conflict 582
Indus civilization 101
Indus rivers: a study of the effects of partition 593
Indus valley civilization 109
Indus waters treaty: an exercise in international mediation 593
Industrial concentration and economic power in Pakistan 657
Inside Baluchistan: a political autobiography of His Highness Baiglar Baigi,
Khan-e-Azam XIII 176
Insight and guide to Pakistan 79
Intellectual history of Islam in India 346
Interest groups and development: business and politics in Pakistan 467
International Financial Statistics 682
Interview with history 267
Introduction to Islamic law 533
Introduction to South Asia 6
Invitation to Ahmadiyyat 308
Invitation to Indian cooking 19
Iqbal and post-Kantian voluntarism 354
Iqbal Review 365
Iqbal und Europa: vier Vorträge 353
Iqbal: his life and thought 725
Iqbal: poet-philosopher of Pakistan 371
Iqbal's concept of God 375
Iqbal, Jinnah, and Pakistan: the vision and the reality 223
Irrigation and drainage in the world: a global review 661
Irrigation development planning: aspects of Pakistan experience 659
Irrigation management in Pakistan: four papers 664
Islam 373
Islam and modernity: transformation of an intellectual tradition 374
Islam and Pakistan 495
Islam et l'état dans le monde d'aujourd'hui 502
Islam et société en Asie du Sud 134
Islamic Culture 142
Islamic law and constitution 497, 511
Islamic literatures of India 723
Islamic modernism in India and Pakistan 1857-1964 129, 347
Islamic perspectives: studies in honour of Mawhlana Sayyid Abul A'la Mawdudi
348
Islamic reassertion in Pakistan: the application of Islamic laws in a modern
state 522
Islamic revival in British India: Deoband, 1860-1900 151
Islamic society and culture: essays in honour of Professor Aziz Ahmad 143
Islamic Studies 366
Islam in Asia vol. 1 South Asia 133, 172
Islam in foreign policy 562
Islam in India and Pakistan: a religious history of Islam in India and Pakistan
382
Islam in modern history 520
Islam in the Indian subcontinent 379
Islam in the modern world (Brohi) 352
Islam in the modern world (Rosenthal) 518
Islam in the political process 515, 562
Islamisation of Pakistan 508
Islam, politics and the state: the Pakistan experience 509
J
Jahangir and the Khan dynasty 9
Jamaat-i-Islami of Pakistan: political thought and political action 450
Jat of Pakistan 423
Javid-nama 361
Jawan to general: recollections of a Pakistani soldier 281
Jinnah of Pakistan 290
Journal of Asian Studies 786
Journal of South Asian Literature 712, 717
Journal of the Pakistan Historical Society 144
Journal of the Research Society of Pakistan 780
Journalism in Pakistan: first phase, 1845 to 1857 771
Journey through Pakistan 2
K
Karachi 683
Kashmir: a study in India-Pakistan relations 588
Khilafat movement in India, 1919-1924 155
Khilafat movement:
 Page 234
religious symbolism and political mobilization in India 153
Khyal: creativity within north India's classical musical tradition 763
Kim 739
Kingdom's end and other stories 714
L
Labour migration from Pakistan to the Middle East and its impact on the
domestic economy 316
Lahndi language 340
Lahore past and present (being an account of Lahore compiled from original
sources) 177
Lahore: Entwicklung und räumliche Ordnung seines zentralen Geschäftsbereich
685
Lahore: the city within 758
Lahore: urban development in the third world 687
Land reforms in Pakistan: a historical perspective 666
Land to the tiller: the political economy of agrarian reform in South Asia 462
Language, religion and politics in North India 164, 219
Languages of South Asia: a guide 345
Last days of the British Raj 244
Last days of united Pakistan 254
Last Wali of Swat: an autobiography as told to Fredrik Barth 273
Lebensverhältnisse ländlicher Familien in Westpakistan: eine Typisierung
ländlicher Haushalte als Grundlage für entwicklungspolitische Maßnahmen,
dargestellt am Beispiel von sechs Dörfern im Distrikt Peshawar, Westpakistan
637
Lectures on development strategy, growth, equity and the political process in
southern Asia 614
Ledge between the streams 286
Legacy of Islam 377
Lehrbuch des Pashto (Afghanisch) 333
Let's visit Pakistan 4
Letters and writings of Iqbal 270
Letters from India 60
Letters of Iqbal to Jinnah: a collection of Iqbal's letters to the Qaid-i-Azam
conveying his views on the political future of Muslim India 221
Letters of Mian Fazl-i-Husain 168
Life of Iqbal: general account of his life 269
Linguistic survey of India 330, 345
Lion river: the Indus 58
Le livre de Babur: Mémoires du premier Grand Mogol des Indes (1494-1529)
106
Le livre de l'éternité 361
Local self government in Pakistan 531
Lords of the Khyber: the story of the North-West Frontier 21
M
M. A. Jinnah Ispahani correspondence 1936-1948 232
Mahfil 712
Mainsprings of Indian and Pakistani foreign policies 583
Makers of Pakistan and modern Muslim India 272
Making of Pakistan 163
Making of Pakistan: a study in nationalism 218
Making the new Commonwealth 244
Makli hill: a center of Islamic culture in Sindh 211
Mamaji 286
Mammals of Pakistan 51
Management of Pakistan's economy, 1947-82 595
Maps of Mughal India, drawn by Colonel Jean-Baptiste-Joseph Gentil, Agent for
the French Government to the Court of Shuja-ud-Daula at Faizabad, in 1770
40
Marriage among Muslims: preference and choice in northern Pakistan 392
Martial races of India 549
Marxist influence and South Asian literature 705
Mataloona: Pukhto proverbs 765
Matter of honour: an account of the Indian army, its officers and men 550
Maulana Maududi and the Islamic state 497
Memoirs of Aga Khan: world enough and time 264
Men who ruled India 117
Metropolitan women in Pakistan: studies 436
Middle stone age cultures of northern Pakistan 98
Midnight's children 742
 Page 235
Migrants and refugees: Muslim and Christian Pakistani families in Bristol 317
Migrants, workers and the social order 315
Migration in Pakistan: theories and facts 304
Military and politics in Pakistan, 1947-86 476
Millennium and charisma among Pathans: a critical essay in social anthropology
402, 405-6
Mineral and nuclear fuels of the Indian subcontinent and Burma: a guide to
the study of the coal, oil, natural gas, uranium and thorium resources of the
area 24
Minority families in Britain: support and stress 318
Mizh: a monograph on government's relations with the Mahsud tribe 195
Modern Islam in India: a social analysis 162
Modern Islamic political thought: the response of the Shi'i and Sunni Muslims
to the twentieth century 503
Modern Muslim India and the birth of Pakistan (1858-1951) 271
Modern Urdu poems from Pakistan 711
Mohamed Ali in Indian politics: selected writings 130
Mohammad Ali Jinnah: a political study 282
Mohammed Ali Jinnah: maker of modern Pakistan 276
Money and banking in Pakistan 607
Moral conduct and authority: the place of adab in South Asian Islam 152
Moslem nationalism in India and Pakistan 149
Mountain monarchs: wild sheep and goats of the Himalaya 52
Mountain people 35
Mountains of the Murgha Zerin: between the Hindu Khush and the Karakoram
53
Mughals in India: a bibliographical survey of manuscripts 116
Multan: history and architecture 200
Murder of Aziz Khan 738
Musalmans and money-lenders in the Punjab 178, 214
Museology and museum problems in Pakistan 745
Al-Mushir 309
Music in India: the classical traditions 764
Muslim 776
Muslim community of the Indo-Pakistan subcontinent (610-1947): a brief
historical analysis 157
Muslim endowments and society in British India 145
Muslim ethics and modernity: a comparative study of the ethical thought of
Sayyid Ahmad Khan and Mawlana Mawdudi 370
Muslim peoples: a world ethnographic survey 23
Muslim self-statement in India and Pakistan 1857-1968 129
Muslim separatism in India: a brief survey 1858-1947 220
Muslims of British India 136
My archaeological mission to India and Pakistan 102
My beautiful launderette and the rainbow sign 319
My life, a fragment 130
Mysteries of selflessness 362
Myth of independence 557
Myth of return: Pakistanis in Britain 313
N
N.-W.F.P. administration under British rule, 1901-1919 173
Narrative of a journey to Kalat 67
Narrative of various journeys in Balochistan, Afghanistan and the Panjab,
including a residence in those countries from 1828 to 1838 66-7
Narrow smile: a journey back to the North-West Frontier 68
Nation 777
Nation building and the Pakistan army, 1947-1969 552
Nationalism and communal politics in India, 1916-1928 138
New Cambridge History of India 109
New capitals of India, Pakistan and Bangladesh 686
New course in Hindustani 338
New course in Urdu and spoken Hindi for learners in Britain 338
New Grove dictionary of music and musicians 762
New Grove dictionary of musical instruments 762
New nuclear nations 554
 Page 236
New sociology of modern Britain 324
Newsletter of Baluchistan Studies 336
Newsline 779
Night and other stories 709
Nineteen eighty-one census report of Pakistan 294
No five fingers are alike: cognitive amplifiers in social context 389
North-West Frontier of West Pakistan: a study in regional geography 25
North-West Frontier: people and events 1839-1947 212
Nuclear power in developing countries: an analysis of decisionmaking 547
Nuclear proliferation today 554
Nuclear proliferation: Islam, the bomb and South Asia 591
O
On Alexander's track to the Indus: personal narrative of explorations on the
north-west frontier of India 99
Our defence cause: an analysis of Pakistan's past and future military role 553
P
Pahari paintings and Sikh portraits in the Lahore museum 749
Pain and grace: a study of two mystical writers of eighteenth-century India
380, 735
Pakistan (Johnson) 26
Pakistan (Stephens) 231
Pakistan: a nation in making 3
Pakistan and Gulf Economist 610
Pakistan: an Official Handbook 784
Pakistan: a political geography 34
Pakistan: a political study 455
Pakistan A Quarterly 781
Pakistan Archaeology 94
Pakistan army 544
Pakistan: a travel survival kit 80
Pakistan central government and quasi-governmental organisations: a
preliminary directory and list of IDS library holdings 1947-1971 789
Pakistan: Collins illustrated guide 81
Pakistan: Country Report 611
Pakistan: das Land und seine Menschen, Geschichte, Kultur, Staat und
Wirtschaft 11
Pakistan Demographic Survey 302
Pakistan Development Review 602, 612
Pakistan Economic and Social Review 613
Pakistan Economist 610
Pakistan: energy planning in a strategic vortex 599
Pakistan: failure in national integration 257
Pakistan fertility survey 1976: a summary of findings 296
Pakistan general elections: 1970 445
Pakistan Geographical Review 28
Pakistan government and administration: a comprehensive bibliography 792
Pakistan Horizon 568
Pakistan: human rights violations and the decline of the rule of law 448
Pakistani community in Britain 321
Pakistani entrepreneurs 651
Pakistan in a changing world: essays in honour of K. Sarwar Hasan 563
Pakistan: industrialization and trade policies 655
Pakistan in its fourth decade: current political, social, and economic situation
and prospects for the 1980s 487
Pakistan in the 80s 487
Pakistanis in Europe 320
Pakistan: Islam, politics, and national solidarity 521
Pakistan: its resources and development 30
Pakistani village 20
Pakistani way of life 17
Pakistani women: a socioeconomic and demographic profile 444
Pakistan Journal of History and Culture 780
Pakistan: literature and society 733
Pakistan: military rule or people's power 250
Pakistan movement in Baluchistan 199
Pakistan national bibliography 793-4
Pakistan: old country new nation 231
Pakistan or the partition of India 216
Pakistan past and present: a comprehensive study published in
commemoration of the centenary of the birth of the founder of
 Page 237
Pakistan 8
Pakistan Pictorial 781
Pakistan Quarterly 781
Pakistan's development priorities: choices for the future 598
Pakistan's development: social goals and private incentives 615
Pakistan's economy through the seventies 609
Pakistan's foreign policy: an historical analysis 559, 583
Pakistan's ideology and ideologues 500
Pakistan's nuclear development 547
Pakistan's nuclear dilemma: energy and security dimensions 579
Pakistan: society and culture 13
Pakistan society (a sociological perspective) 390
Pakistan society: Islam, ethnicity and leadership in South Asia 386
Pakistan's relations with India: 1947-1966 585
Pakistan's rural development 431
Pakistan Statistical Yearbook 680, 682
Pakistan's trade with Eastern bloc countries 673
Pakistan's western borderlands: the transformation of a political order 490
Pakistan: the consolidation of a nation 176, 261
Pakistan: the development of its laws and constitution 527
Pakistan: the enigma of political development 488
Pakistan: the formative phase 229
Pakistan: the gathering storm 453
Pakistan: the long view 263
Pakistan: the political economy of rural development 658
Pakistan: the roots of dictatorship. The political economy of a praetorian state
457
Pakistan: the unstable state 457
Pakistan Times 778
Pakistan: transition from military to civilian rule 456
Pakistan under Bhutto 1971-1977 253
Pakistan under martial law, 1977-1985 480
Pakistan Year Book 785
Pakistan: Zia and after 465
Panjab castes 413
Panjab Past and Present 207
Panjab, North-west Frontier Province and Kashmir 183
Panjabi grammar: a brief grammar of Panjabi as spoken in the then Wazirabad
district 326
Panjabi sufi poets, A.D. 1460-1900 732
Parda: a study of Muslim women's life in northern India 437
Partition of India: policies and perspectives 1935-1947 246
Partition of the Punjab 1947: a compilation of official documents 246
Partners in freedom and true Muslims: the political thought of some Muslim
scholars in British India, 1912-1947 137
Partnership and profit-sharing in Islamic law 534
Party politics in Pakistan, 1947-1958 251
Passage to Peshawar: Pakistan between the Hindu Kush and the Arabian sea
73
Pathan borderland 22
Pathans 550 BC AD 1957 5, 21
Pathway to Pakistan 274
Pattern of foreign trade of Pakistan 674
Penguin book of modern Urdu poetry 711
People of South Asia: the biological anthropology of India, Pakistan, and Nepal
92
Peoples of Pakistan: an ethnic history 188
Peoples of South Asia 12
Personal observations on Sindh: the manners and customs of its inhabitants
and its productive capabilities 208
Perspectives on Pakistan's foreign policy 560
Peshawar: historic city of the frontier 181
Physical and economic geography of Sind (the lower Indus basin) 29
Planning and development in Pakistan: review and alternatives 1947-1982 633
Planning for education in Pakistan: a personal case study 693
Planning in Pakistan: organization and implementation 636
Poems by Faiz 706
Poems from Iqbal 710
Poems from the Divan of Khushâl Khân Khattak 730
Poems of Khushhal Khan Khatak 730
Political development in Pakistan 479
Political economy of
 Page 238
healthcare in Pakistan 648
Political economy of Pakistan 606
Political economy of Pakistan 1947-85 473
Political identity in South Asia 164, 219
Political leadership among Swat Pathans 402, 406
Political regimes, public policy and economic development: agricultural
performance and rural change in two Punjabs 668
Political system of Pakistan 477
Political theory of the Delhi sultanate (including a translation of Ziauddin
Barani's Fatawa-i Jahandari, circa 1358-9 A.D.) 135
Political thought in medieval Islam: an introductory outline 135
Political triangle in India 1858-1924 165
Politics and the state in Pakistan 481
Politics in Pakistan: the nature and direction of political change 478
Politics in Pakistan: the struggle for legitimacy 460
Politics of development: the case of Pakistan, 1947-1958 471
Politics of Islamic reassertion 499
Politics of Pakistan: a constitutional quest 483
Popular poetry of the Baloches 728
Population and social organization 301
Population of India and Pakistan 297
Population of Pakistan 295
Population redistribution and development in South Asia 300
Poverty in rural Asia 643
Poverty, voluntary organizations and social change: a study of an urban slum in
Pakistan 426
Power and privilege: influence and decision-making in Pakistan 469
Prelude to partition: the Indian Muslims and the imperial system of control
1920-1932 224
Press in Pakistan 770
Prices, taxes and subsidies in Pakistan agriculture, 1960-1976 662
Primary education and national development: a case study of the conditions for
expanding primary education in West Pakistan with an introductory discussion
of educational planning in relation to different aspects of national development
and education 691
Private industrial investment in Pakistan 1960-1980 652
Problem of the North-West Frontier, 1890-1908, with a survey of policy since
1849 182
Problem of ''greater Baluchistan": a study of Baluch nationalism 174
Problematik regionaler Entwicklungsunter-schiede in Entwicklungsländern: eine
theoretische und empirische Analyse dargestellt am beispiel Pakistans unter
Verwendung der Hauptkomponenten-methode 650
Process of priority formulation: US foreign policy in the Indo-Pakistani war of
1971 590
Protection of ethnic minorities: comparative perspectives 494
Provincial politics and the Pakistan movement: the growth of the Muslim
League in North-West and North-East India, 1937-47 213
Public opinion and political development in Pakistan, 1947-1958 475
Pukhtun economy and society: traditional structure and economic development
in a tribal society 403
Punjab Alienation of Land Bill of 1900 178
Punjab and the Raj, 1840-1947 213
Punjab Geographical Review 28
Punjab history in printed British documents: a bibliographic guide to
parliamentary papers and select, nonserial publications, 1843-1947 179
Punjab Muslim press and the Muslim world, 1888-1911 772
Punjab peasant in prosperity and debt 407
Punjab settlement manual 183
Punjab tradition: influence and authority in nineteenth-century India 184
Punjab under imperialism,
 Page 239
1885-1947 170
Punjabi century 286
Punjabi saga (1857-1987) 286
Punjabi village in Pakistan 408
Puran Bhagat 736
Q
Qadir Yar: a critical introduction 736
Quaid-e-Azam Jinnah's correspondence 221, 227
Quaid-i-Azam Mohammad Ali Jinnah: myth and reality 223
Quaid-i-Azam Mohammad Ali Jinnah: the formative years 1892-1920 265
Quaid-i-Azam: studies in interpretation 279
Quality of life in Pakistan: studies in social sector economics 645
Quarterly Economic Review 611
R
Rags of north Indian music: their structure and evolution 760
Reader of classical Urdu poetry 328
Reconstruction of religious thought in Islam 363
Regional imperative: the administration of U.S. foreign policy towards South
Asian states under presidents Johnson and Nixon 572
Relics of the Raj 675
Religion and politics in Muslim society: order and conflict in Pakistan 404
Religion and politics in Pakistan 501
Religion and thought of Shah Wali Allah Dihlawi 1703-1762 351
Religionen des Hindukusch 367
Religions of the Hindukush vol. 1 The religion of the Kafirs: the pre-Islamic
heritage of Afghan Nuristan 367
Religious and ethnic minorities in South Asia 308, 510
Religious thought of Sayyid Ahmad Khan 355
Report of the Constitutional Commission, Pakistan, 1961 524
Report of the court of inquiry constituted under Punjab Act II of 1954 to
enquire into the Punjab disturbances of 1953 517
Report on a linguistic mission to north-western India 334
Reports of the advisory panels for the fourth five-year plan 624
Repositories of our cultural heritage: a handbook of museums in Pakistan 746
Research on the bureaucracy of Pakistan: a critique of sources, conditions, and
issues, with appended documents 538
Return to Punjab 286
Review of Pakistan's development experience (1949-50 to 1979-80) 609
Review on Dr. Hunter's Indian Musalmans 140
Revolution in Pakistan: a study of the Martial Law administration 255
Risalo of Shah Abdul Latif 735
Rise of civilization in India and Pakistan 84
Rise of Muslims in Indian politics: an analysis of developments from 1885 to
1906 166
Rites and ceremonies of Hindus and Muslims 421
River basin planning: theory and practice 635
Roots of ancient India: the archaeology of early Indian civilization 87
Rose and the rock: mystical and rational elements in the intellectual history of
South Asian Islam 368
Rulers, townsmen and bazaars: North Indian society in the age of British
expansion, 1770-1870 105
Rural development in Bangladesh and Pakistan 670
Rural development in Pakistan (A. H. Khan) 428
Rural development in Pakistan (S. S. Khan) 429
Rural development in Pakistan (Stanford) 669
Rural poverty in South Asia 647
Rusticus loquitur, or the old light and the new in the Punjab village 407
S
Saints of Sind 15
Satanic verses 742
Sayyid Ahmad Khan: a
 Page 240
reinterpretation of Muslim theology 384
Science and the human condition in India and Pakistan 698
Science in Pakistan (1947-1977) 697
Scinde; or the unhappy valley 55
Searchlights on Baloches and Balochistan 175
Second five year plan (1960-65) 622
Secrets of the self (Asrar-i-Khudi): a philosophical poem 362
Security in Southern Asia 1: the security of Southwest Asia 565
Security of South Asia: American and Asian perspectives 586
Select bibliography of periodical literature on India and Pakistan, 1947-70 788
Selections from Mohamed Ali's Comrade 130
Selections from Rahman Baba 731
Selections from the Iqbal Review 365
Separatism among Indian Muslims: the politics of the United Provinces'
Muslims, 1860-1923 228
Settlement and social change in Asia 424
Seventh five year plan 1988-93 and perspective plan 1988-2003 (draft) 627
Shadows in the dark (a history of Christianity in Pakistan up to the 10th
century) 311
Shah Abdul Latif: his life and work. A study of socio-cultural and literary
situations in eighteenth century Sindh (now in Pakistan) 735
Shah Abdul Latif: his poetry, life and times. A study of literary, social and
economic conditions in eighteenth century Sind 735
Shame 742
Shari' at and ambiguity in South Asian Islam 132
Shaykh Ahmad Sirhindi: an outline of his thought and a study of his image in
the eyes of posterity 358
Shi'a of India 360
Shikwa and Jawab-i-Shikwa: complaint and answer. Iqbal's dialogue with Allah
364
Shore and the wave 701
Short history of Pakistan 158
Short-term model for Pakistan economy: an econometric analysis 632
Siah ainey 713
Sikandar Hayat Khan (1892-1942): a political biography 277
Sind before the Muslim conquest 202
Sind revisited: with notices of the Anglo-Indian army; railways; past, present,
and future 55
Sind through the centuries: proceedings of an international seminar held in
Karachi in Spring 1975 by the Department of Culture, Government of Sind 201
Sind: a general introduction 10
Sindh story 206
Sindh, and the races that inhabit the valley of the Indus 55
Sindhi instructor [a useful book to acquire working knowledge of Sindhi
language] 343
Sindhi language 344
Sindhi literature 734
Sindhi self-instructor 343
Sindhi tombs and textiles: the persistence of pattern 750
Sindhi-English dictionary 342
Sir Charles Napier and Sind 203
Sir George Cunningham: a memoir 278
Sir Sayyid Ahmad Khan and Muslim modernization in India and Pakistan 150
Siraiki language of central Pakistan: a reference grammar 340
Sixth five year plan 1983-88 626
Social organization of the Marri Baluch 420
Sole spokesman: Jinnah, the Muslim League and the demand for Pakistan 222
Some aspects of religion and politics in India during the thirteenth century 120
Sources of Indian tradition 131
Sources on Punjab history 193
South Asia Social Science Abstracts 790
South Asia: a systematic geographic bibliography 32
South Asian bibliography: a handbook and guide 796
South Asian civilizations: a bibliographical synthesis 795
South Asian history, 1750-1950: a guide to periodicals, dissertations and
newspapers 787
 Page 241
South Asian insecurity and the great powers 584
South Asian intellectuals and social change: a study of the role of vernacular-
speaking intelligentsia 397
South Asian languages: a handbook 341
South Asian politics and religion 519
South Asian Studies 796
Southern Asia Social Science Bibliography 790
Soviet-American relations with Pakistan, Iran and Afghanistan 566
Sozio-ökonomische Determinanten der Fertilität der Landbevölkerung im Nord-
Punjab. Fallbeispiel: Muradi Janjil (Pakistan) 298
Speeches and statements of Iqbal 270
Spirit of Islam 349
Squatter settlements in Pakistan: the impact of upgrading 684
Standard English-Urdu dictionary 331
Standard Urdu-English dictionary 332
State and ideology in the Middle East and Pakistan 459
State, religion and ethnic politics: Afghanistan, Iran and Pakistan 451
States of South Asia: problems of national integration 485
Statistical Pocket Book of Pakistan 681
Statistical supplement 600
Statistical Yearbook 672, 682
Statistical Yearbook/Annuaire statistique 682
Stones of silence: journeys in the Himalaya 52
Storia delle letterature del Pakistan: Urdu, Pangiâbi, Sindhi, Pasc'tô, Bengali
Pakistana 704
Story of soldiering and politics in India and Pakistan 281
Strange ride of Rudyard Kipling 739
Strategies of British India: Britain, Iran and Afghanistan, 1798-1850 215
Strategy of economic planning: a case study of Pakistan 631
Structure of disparity in developing agriculture: a case study of the Pakistan
Punjab 641
Structure of protection in developing countries 653
Students' role in the Pakistan movement 233
Studies in development planning 628
Studies in Iqbal 725
Studies in Islamic culture in the Indian environment 128
Studies in the archaeology and palaeoanthropology of South Asia 95
Studies in the archaeology of India and Pakistan 88
Study in Iqbal's philosophy 354
Sufi music of India and Pakistan: sound, context and meaning in Qawwali 761
Sufi orders in Islam 383
Sweepers of Slaughterhouse: conflict and survival in a Karachi neighbourhood
400
Synopsis of the birds of India and Pakistan 46
T
Tales of the Punjab told by the people 769
Taxila: an illustrated account of archaeological excavations carried out at Taxila
... between the years 1913 and 1934 93
Terrorist 204
Testament of faith 352
Textbook on Muslim personal law 530
Textiles of Baluchistan 756
That untravelled world: an autobiography 74
There was once a king (folk-tales of Pakistan) 769
Third five year plan (1965-70) 623
Thirteenth house 744
Thirty seconds at Quetta 197
Three Mughal poets: Mir, Sauda, Mir Hasan 720
Tigers of Baluchistan 14
Tigers, durbars and kings: Fanny Eden's Indian journals 1837-1838 57
Times Atlas of the World 43
To the frontier 71
Towards understanding the Qur'an. English version of Tafhim al-Qur'an. vol. 1
Surahs 1-3 372
Trade, finance and development in Pakistan 596
Transfer of power in India 240
Traveller's guide to Pakistan 78
Travels in Kashmir, Ladak, Iskardo ... and the Himalaya, north of the Panjab 77
Travels in the Himalayan provinces of Hindustan and the Panjab from 1819 to
1825 70
 Page 242
Travels into Bokhara together with a narrative of a voyage on the Indus 54
Travels of Fray Sebastien Manrique 63
Trekker's guide to the Himalaya and Karakoram 82
True subject: selected poems of Faiz Ahmed Faiz 706
Twenty-five years of Pakistan in statistics, 1947-72 680
Twilight of the Mughuls: studies in late Mughul Delhi 126
U
Underdevelopment, poverty and inequality in Pakistan 646
Understanding the Muslim mind 268
United States Pakistan relations 571
United States and Pakistan: the evolution of an influence relationship 575
Up the country: letters written to her sister from the Upper Provinces of India
57
Urban biographies 688
Urban ethnicity 314
Urdu and Muslim South Asia: studies in honour of Ralph Russell 724
Urdu literature: a bibliography of English-language sources 718
Urdu literature 716
Urdu newspaper reader 328
Urdu-English vocabulary: student's pronouncing dictionary 328
V
Vanishing jungle: the story of the World Wildlife Fund expeditions to Pakistan
49
Vergessene Städte am Indus: frühe Kulturen in Pakistan vom 8.-2.
Jahrtausend v. Chr 100
Versions of truth: Urdu short stories from Pakistan 708
Viceroy's journal 248
Viewpoint 782
W
Waterless moon 53
Way of the Pathans 22
We live in Pakistan 1
Wealth and welfare of the Punjab 180
West Pakistan Yearbook 784
West Pakistan: rural education and development 695
Western economists and eastern societies 634
Where four worlds meet: Hindu Kush 1959 64
Where men and mountains meet: the explorers of the western Himalayas
1820-75 61
Where the Indus is young 72
Where three empires meet: a narrative of recent travel in Kashmir, Western
Tibet, Gilgit, and the adjoining countries 62
White paper on the performance of the Bhutto regime 484
Wide-awake stories 769
Wisdom and waste in the Punjab village 407
Witness to surrender 261
Women between cultures: the lives of Kinnaird College alumnae in British India
438
Women in Muslim family law 435
Women in the Muslim world 432
Women of Pakistan: two steps forward, one step back? 440
Women of South Asia: a guide to resources 443
Women's seclusion and men's honor: sex roles in north India, Bangladesh, and
Pakistan 437
Wonder that was India 160
Wonder that was India vol. II A survey of the history and culture of the Indian
subcontinent from the coming of the Muslims to the British conquest 160
Wordfall: three Pakistan poets 741
Words for my brother: travels between the Hindu Kush and the Himalayas 75
World Development Report 620
Y
Yazyki Indii, Pakistana, Tseilona i Nepala 345
Yearbook of Labour Statistics 682
Z
Zentrale Gewalt in Nager (Karakorum): politische Organisationsformen,
ideologische Begründungen des Königtums und Veränderungen in der
Moderne 409
Zia's Pakistan: politics and stability in a frontline state 452
 Page 243

Subject Index
A
Abdul Latif, Shah 380, 734-5
Administrative system 789
and agricultural development 668
and economic development 536
Bhutto period 541
bibliography 538
comparative studies 537
criticism 539
district level 540
history 117, 537
Indian Civil Service 117
local government 531
political role 541
Punjab 183
recruitment to government service 472
reform proposals 536, 538-40
revenue assessment 183
training 542
see also Basic democracies
Afghan refugees 73, 300, 307
Afghanistan
impact on Pakistan's foreign relations 578
 impact on Pakistan's politics 452
relations with Pakistan 569-70
Soviet intervention 556
Afridi tribe 411
Aga Khan III 264
Aga Khans 264
Agrarian Committee 1949 666
Agriculture 27, 595, 598, 601-3, 605, 609, 611, 616, 618-9, 643, 646, 658-70
marketing 660
prices 644, 659, 662, 667
taxation 658-9
bibliography 617
farmers' decision-making 665
farm size and productivity 665
green revolution 667
history 180
impact on income disparities 641
Indo-Pakistan comparison 668
investment 662
land tenure 665
policy 628
research 663
see also Land reform; Economy
Ahmad, Bashir-ud-din Mahmud 308
Ahmadis
history 193
 riots against 517
Ahmadiya movement 308
Ain-i-Akbari 118
Akbar, Emperor 112
Ali, Chaudhri Muhammad 234
Ali, Mohamed 130-1, 268, 369
Ali, Muhammad see Ali, Mohamed
Ali, Rahmat 131
Aligarh movement see History
All-India Progressive Writers Association 705
Ambedkar, B. R. 216
Amnesty International 448
Anthropology
anthropometry 7
biological 92
see also Social structure; names of provinces
Arab conquest of Sindh 172
ArabIsraeli conflict 571
Arabic literature 723
Archaeological Survey of India 102
Archaeology 66, 84-102, 399
archaeological sites 76, 90
artefacts 90
Bahawalpur 7
Baluchistan 7
bibliography 91
 Buddhist period 89, 99
Charsadda 102
excavation reports 85, 98
Harappa 96, 102
in Pakistan 102
Indus civilization 84-5, 87-8, 92, 95-6, 100-2
Mohenjo-daro 85, 96, 102, 754
North-West Frontier Province 181
palaeoclimatology 84
periodicals 94
stone age 98
Taxila 86, 93
Thatta 753
Architecture 200, 757-8
Indo-Islamic 754
pre-modern 90
Armed forces 16, 281
air force 545-6
and Bangladesh crisis 260
army 544, 550, 552
defence expenditure 587
defence planning 567
history 550-1
martial race theory 550
non-military activities 552
nuclear programmes 554
 officer corps 544
organization 553
see also Military role in politics
Arts 346, 745-64
see also Dance; Gandhara; Museums; Music; Painting; Sculpture; Textiles
Astor (Northern Areas) 415
 Page 244
Atlases 37-40, 43-5
Aurangzeb, Emperor 112
Australia
relations with Pakistan 563
Autobiographies
Ali, Mohamed 130
Babur 106
Bhutto, Benazir 266
Ikramullah, Shaista S. 272
Jahanzeb, Miangul (Wali of Swat) 273
Khaliquzzaman, Choudhry 274
Khan, Ayub 275
Kureishi, Hanif 319
Mehta, Ved 286
Musa, Muhammad 281
O'Dwyer, Michael 280
Pataudi, Sher Ali Khan 281
Shahnawaz, Jahan Ara 284
Shipton, Eric 74
Steel, Flora Annie 285
Tandon, Prakash 286
Awami League 252, 260
Ayub Khan period (1958-69) 250, 255, 275, 369, 475, 479
institutional change 385
see also Basic democracies
Azad Jammu and Kashmir see Kashmir
Azad, Abul Kalam 268, 503
B
Babur, Emperor 112
Bahawalpur 7, 241, 261
botany 7
Balochistan see Baluchistan
Baltistan (Northern Areas) 35
guidebook 82
travel 72, 77
Baluchi see Folk tales; Languages; Literature; Poetry
Baluchistan 7, 14
19th-century history 67
Baluchis 14, 494
botany 7
culture 174
folk tales 729
gazetteer 42
history 174-6, 187-8, 197, 199, 215, 233, 289
integration of princely states 261
land-use practices 419
nomads 418, 420
periodicals 336
politics 489-90, 492, 494
position of women 432
social structure 410, 417, 419-20
 strategic location of 492
sufism 418
textiles 756
travel 66-7, 71
value system 14
see also Baluchi
Bangladesh crisis 252, 254, 260, 267, 590
Chinese attitude 573
documents 580
international implications 561, 569
United States attitude 572
Banking 596-7, 607
Basic democracies 262, 524, 536, 540
Bedil 368
Bergson, Henri 363, 375
Bhutto, Benazir 266, 453
Bhutto (Z. A.) period (1971-77) 253, 263, 447, 461, 466, 468, 473, 478, 482,
484, 505
administrative change 541
industrial policy 657
land reform 462
measures for rural development 431
policies towards religious shrines 505
Bhutto, Zulfikar Ali 253
biography 266, 283, 287
political views 252, 267, 454
 social base of support 253
trial and execution 474
Bibliographical control 793
Bibliographies 786-97
administration 538
agriculture 617
Ahmadis 193
archaeology 91
dissertations 792
economic history 186
economy 424, 617, 789, 797
education 692, 788
geography 32
government publications 617, 797
history 116, 127, 217, 787
Iqbal 350
librarianship 791
Maududi 348
of bibliographies 796
Punjab 179, 186, 193
Russell, Ralph 724
social conditions 424
social science 790
Urdu literature 718
women 443
Biographies
Akbar, Emperor 104
 Bhutto 283, 287
Burnes, Alexander 54
civil servants 117
Cunningham, George 278
Husain, Fazl-i-168, 270
Iqbal 269, 381
Jinnah 265, 276, 279, 282, 290
Khan, Abdul Ghaffar 288
Khan, Sikander Hayat 277
Masson, Charles 66
Maududi, Sayyid Abul Ala 348
Moorcroft, William 70
Muslim leaders 271
Sandeman, Robert 289
Shafi, Muhammad 284
Steel, Flora Annie 285
Biraderi (social unit) 387, 401
 Page 245
Birds 46
Birmingham (Britain) 314
Board of Talimat-i-Islamia 501
Boatbuilding techniques 676
Boats
fishing 676
river 676
Botany
Bahawalpur 7
Baluchistan 7
Bradford (Britain) 314, 318
Brahui 345
Brahui people 410
see also Baluchistan
Breastfeeding practices 296
Bristol (Britain) 317
Britain
relations with Pakistan 569
Brohi, A. K. 352
Budgetary policy 636
Bugti tribe 14
Bulleh Shah 727, 732
Burnes, Alexander 54
Businessmen 601, 651, 656
and politics 467
 overseas 315, 323-4
C
Cabinet Mission Plan 248
see also History
Calligraphy 753
Camels 677
Candler, Edmund 740
Caste among Muslims 387, 394, 401, 413
Cattle stealing and politics 388
Censuses 291-4, 302
history 295, 297
Ceremonies and rites in Punjab 421
China
arms supplies from 555
relations with Pakistan 555, 557, 561, 573, 576, 581-2
Chitral (Northern Areas) 210, 416
cultural anthropology 416
guidebook 82
history 210
languages 334
Christianity
history 311-12
periodicals 309
Christians 310, 317
Goan 306
in Karachi 400
Chughtai, Abdul Rahman 748
Churchill, Winston S. 242
Class structure see Social structure
Climatic conditions 27
Coal 24
Cock-fighting 766
Cognitive ontogeny 389
Commonwealth and Pakistan 569
Commonwealth Conference, 1949 243
Constitutions 487
1956 455, 501, 518, 523, 527
1962 255, 479, 524, 527
1973 468, 507, 525
8th Amendment to 1973 Constitution 525
appropriate forms 275
crisis of 1954 527, 535
during Zia period 448
framing of 251, 455-6, 483, 488, 508, 518, 527
Congress, Indian National 216, 222, 248
Contraception, use of 296
Cookery 19, 79, 788
Corruption 56
Coups see Military role in politics
Credit institutions see Banking
Cripps, Stafford 242
Culture 8, 11, 17-18
 adab 152
bibliography 795
government policy 509
Indo-Muslim 751
Northern Areas 416
of Pakistan 163, 747
periodicals 142
sharif 147
value systems 441
Cunningham, George 278
D
Dance 762
Dara Shikoh album 755
Dardic group of languages 345
Daudzai (North-West Frontier Province) project 428-9
Dawn 475
Defence see Armed forces; Foreign relations; Indo-Pakistan relations
Delhi 126
Demography see Population
Dera Ghazi Khan (Punjab) 407
Dictionaries
Punjabi 325
Sindhi 343
Urdu 328, 331-2, 337
Dissertations on Pakistan 792
Drama
 Urdu 721
Drug addiction 427
E
Earthquakes 197
Economic advisers, foreign 634, 688, 693
Economy 3, 6, 8, 16, 18, 31, 34, 108, 447, 487, 594-620, 633, 646-7, 650,
779, 783-4
Bhutto period 263, 484
bibliography 424, 617, 797
choice of techniques 616
development 30, 115, 258, 608, 612, 614-16, 618, 633, 649, 654
exchange rates 652-3
growth and equity issues 602, 614
 Page 246
informal sector 690
Islamic principles of development 534, 629
Islamization 504, 516, 522, 607
models 632, 649
monetary policy 597, 603, 607
periodicals 610, 612-13
planning 596, 621-36
policy 595, 598, 600, 602, 606, 646
political factors 608
regional 30
regional disparities 649-50
resource mobilization 595, 598, 604, 609
role of overseas migration 594
rural 428-9, 431
self-reliance 631
see also Agriculture; Banking; Energy; Entrepreneurship; Foreign aid;
History; Rural development; Trade
Education 11, 642, 645, 691-6, 788
and age at marriage 395
bibliography 692, 788
history 147, 285, 438
impact on family size 299
Islamization 504
planning 693
primary 691
 role of Christian missionaries 312, 438
scientific 698
teacher training 694
women 444
Elections
1945-46 233
1965 presidential 275, 479
1970 253, 445
1977 253, 447, 454, 482, 484
Elites see Politics
Employment
and age at marriage 395
women 444
Encyclopaedias 18
Islam 357
natural history 48
Energy 579, 599, 611
resources 24, 579
English see Literature; Novels; Poetry
Entomology
Bahawalpur 7
Baluchistan 7
Entrepreneurship 601, 651, 656
Environment 635
statistics 679
Epic poetry see Poetry
Ethos of Pakistan 17
Exorcism 393
Explorers, European 58-61
see also Travel
F
Faisalabad district (Punjab) 442
Faiz, Faiz Ahmed 397, 705-6, 711
Family planning programmes see Population
Farming see Agriculture
Fashion 779
Fauji Foundation 552
Fauna 11, 48-9, 82
birds 46
mammals 51
reptiles 47
sheep and goats 52
Film 779
Finance, public 596-7, 604-5, 607, 619
Fishing groups
Baluchistan 417
Five-year plans 621-7
see also Economy
Flora 11, 48, 50, 82
Folk tales 769
Baluchistan 729
bibliography 788
 modern 767
North-West Frontier Province 767
Punjab 285, 769
Sindh 768
Foreign aid 609, 611, 616, 649
see also Economy
Foreign relations 3, 6, 8, 34, 263, 477, 487, 555-78
Afghanistan 68, 169, 569-70
Australia 563
Bhutto's views 557
bibliography 788, 792
Britain 569
China 169, 555, 557, 561, 573, 576, 581-2
Commonwealth 243, 569
defence planning 567
documents 555, 568
history 169, 215, 559, 583
impact of Afghanistan crisis 578
Iran 564, 570
Iraq 564
Middle East 562, 577
military alliances 569
periodicals 449, 568
role of Islam 562
Saudi Arabia 574
Soviet Union 556, 561, 566, 581-2
United States 73, 557, 561, 566, 571-2, 574-5, 581
 see also Indo-Pakistan relations
Forestry 788
Forster, E. M. 740
Frontier Crimes Regulation, 1901 526
Frontiers 246, 492
and foreign relations 570
G
Gandhara 90, 754
Gandhi, Mohandas Karamchand 369
Gardens, Mughal 751
Gas, natural 14, 24
Gazetteers 36, 41-2
district 292
Geography 6, 24-35, 39, 783
 Page 247
bibliography 32
economic 30
natural resources 679
North-West Frontier Province 25
Northern Areas 25
periodicals 28
political 34
Sindh 10, 29
urban 685
Geology 11
Himalayas 65
Karakoram mountains 69
Kohistan 33
Ghalib 126, 368, 703, 723
biography 719
Ghazals (poetic form) see Poetry
Gilgit (Northern Areas) guidebook 82
Goan Christians 306
Goethe, J. W. 353, 725
Government publications 789, 797
Grammars
Punjabi 326
Sindhi 344
Siraiki 340
Urdu 328
Guidebooks 78-83
Gujrat (Punjab) 408
H
Handicrafts
Punjab 752
Haq, Zia-ul- see Zia period
Harappa see Archaeology
Hari Enquiry Committee 1947-48 666
Harvard Advisory Group 634
Hasan, K. Sarwar 563
Hawkers, fruit and vegetable 690
Health 642, 645
facilities 648
medical students 648
policy 639
sufi as healer 393
traditional 699
Hegel, G. W. F. 375
Himalayas see Northern Areas
Hindi 337-8
Hindu Kush see Northern Areas
Hindus in Sindh 206
Hir-Ranjha poems 726, 737
History 3-4, 6, 8, 11, 16, 18, 34, 124-5, 141, 780, 783, 792
Ahmadiya movement 308
Aligarh movement 228
ancient 109, 125, 158, 202
atlases 38, 40, 44-5
Baluchistan 174-6, 187, 197, 199, 215, 233, 289
bibliography 116, 127, 193, 217, 787, 795
British policy 140, 165, 168, 178, 182, 184, 239, 242
British rule 117, 158, 185, 196, 203, 208, 210, 212-14, 537
Buddhist period 99
colonial period 109, 125, 136, 312
crowd behaviour 236
Delhi sultanate 120-1, 135
early Muslim period 109, 111, 120-1
economic 103, 108, 110, 113-115, 118-19, 122, 170, 180, 186, 214, 258,
356, 598, 605, 619
ethnic groups 188
European adventurers 191
hijrat of 1920 159
historiography 156
Islamic 120, 128, 133-4, 143, 154, 520
Jallianwala Bagh massacre 280
Karachi 236
Kashmir crisis 278
Khilafat movement 130, 153, 155, 159, 220
Kushan period 76, 93, 181
Lahore 190
landlord role 189, 192
Marxist approach 162, 188
military 212, 544, 549-50
Mughal 40, 59, 103-7, 109, 111-14, 116, 118-19, 122-3, 125-6, 158, 160,
177, 311, 369, 758
Muslim dynasties 38
Muslim separatism 138, 147, 164, 166, 218-21, 224, 228-30
MuslimHindu relations 138, 205
Muslims and Congress 268, 274, 288
naval mutiny 236
North-West Frontier Province 182, 195, 198, 209, 212, 215, 233, 238, 273,
278, 288
Northern Areas 169, 210
opposition to Pakistan movement 137, 149
Pakistan movement 138, 149, 157-8, 162, 164, 189, 199, 209, 213, 216-
33, 238, 249, 264, 268, 271-2, 274, 276-7, 279, 282, 290, 459, 512, 515
partition of India 163, 174, 176, 206, 209, 216, 222, 225-7, 229, 231-2,
234-48, 258, 300, 593, 619
partition of Punjab 286
periodicals 142, 144, 207, 780
Persian sources 111
pirs, role of 189
political thought 135
post-1947 163, 176, 222-3, 229-31, 243, 249-63, 275, 446, 483
prehistory 84, 87, 89, 97
provincial autonomy 1919-47 224
Punjab 105, 123, 167, 170-1, 177-80, 183-4, 186, 188-9, 191-3, 200, 205,
207, 213-15,
 Page 248
224, 233, 241, 246, 270, 277, 280, 284, 407
Round Table Conference 1930 225
Sindh 172, 185, 194, 196, 201-4, 206, 208, 211, 215, 233, 236, 735
social 120, 356
South Asian Muslims 44, 128-61, 172, 230, 268, 271, 377, 379
student activism 233
technology 114
United Provinces 228
see also Archaeology; Bangladesh crisis; Jinnah, M.A.; Politics
Housing 645, 689
censuses 292
Human rights 448
Human resources 598
Humayun, Emperor 112
Hunza (Northern Areas) 425
Huq, Fazlul 268
Husain, Fazl-i- 270
Husain, Zakir 268
Hussain, Abdullah 709
Hussain, Intizar 708
Hussaini, Arif 510
I
Ideology of Pakistan 500
see also Islam and politics
Ikramullah, Shaista S. 272
Ilyas, Maulana Muhammad 359
Income effect on family size 299
Income disparities 602, 633, 640-1, 643
Indian Civil Service see Administrative system
Indian Ocean security 558
Indo-Aryan and Iranian languages 334
IndoPakistan relations 559-60, 563, 565-6, 570, 583-4, 586-7
1965 war 543, 545, 548, 563, 573, 581-2, 585
1971 war 553, 590
Bangladesh issue 580
defence cooperation schemes 243
Indus waters dispute 585, 593
Kashmir dispute 243, 565, 569, 585, 588, 592
military balance 586
nuclear issue 579, 586, 589, 591
trade 258, 585, 619
Indus civilization see Archaeology
Indus delta ethnography 423
Indus river 10, 58, 593
basin 7, 29, 635
travel 54
Indus waters dispute 585, 593
Indus Waters Treaty 570, 593
Industry 595, 598, 601-3, 605, 609, 611, 618-19, 651-7
and foreign aid 654
and government policy 655
 industrial concentration 657
investment 652
production 27
protection 653
Integrated Rural Development Programme 431
Intellectuals, role of 397
Interest, elimination of 534, 607
Iqbal, Muhammad 131, 268, 347, 353, 361-5, 368-74, 378, 397, 500, 503,
506
bibliography 350
biography 269, 381, 725
correspondence 269
periodicals 365
philosophy 353-4, 361-4, 371, 375, 378, 710, 725
poetry 361-2, 364, 371, 710, 723, 725
political views 221, 269, 371
social thought 353, 363
Iran
relations with Pakistan 564, 570
IranIraq war 564
Iraq relations with Pakistan 564
Irrigation 29, 593, 635, 659, 664
history 170
Indus valley 10
political implications 170
social effect of 412
 waterlogging problems 661
Islam 346-66, 368-84, 514, 747
17th century 358
18th century 351
19th century 131, 151
20th century 131, 339, 369, 424
and constitutions 468
and foreign relations 562
and Iqbal 361-4
and politics 230, 450-1, 455-7, 459, 477, 495-522
and society 386
codes of behaviour 132
commentary on Quran 372
conversion 146, 148
encyclopaedias 357
ethical thought 370
fundamentalist thought 348, 370
history in South Asia 128
modernist thought 150, 347, 355, 370, 373-4
mystical and rational elements 368
pan-Islamism 772
periodicals 365-6, 780
place in Pakistan 17
popular forms 356
Shia 360
social role 430
types of leadership 386
 ulama 151, 159, 161
Islamization 456, 504
economic 504, 516, 522, 534, 607
 Page 249
law 528
Zia period 507-8, 516, 522
Ispahani, M. A. H. 232
J
Jahangir, Emperor 112
Jahanzeb, Miangul (Wali of Swat) 273
Jallianwala Bagh massacre 280
Jamaat-i-Islami 450
Jamiat-ul-ulama-i-Hind 137
Jat tribe 423
Jesuit missionaries 311
Jettmar, Karl 422
Jinnah, M. A. 8, 221, 225, 233, 235, 243, 268, 272, 500, 513, 774
biography 265, 276, 279, 282, 290
correspondence 227, 232
role in Baluchistan 199
Journalism
Urdu 721, 724
Judiciary 537-8
K
Kalash Kafirs (tribal group) 35, 416
religion 367
Kalat, Khanate of 174, 176
Karachi 2, 683
age at marriage in 395
 Christian minority 306
ethnic conflict 491
history 236
Lyari district 426
map 43
marriage patterns 396
migration 304
position of women 436
role of muhajirs 486, 491
role of Pukhtuns 491
role of Sindhis 491
slum areas 400, 426
social structure 436
Karakoram mountains 33, 69
geology 69
social structure 409
Kashmir
guidebook 83
travel 60
Kashmir issue 243, 565, 569, 585, 588
role of UN 592
Kasur (Punjab) 285
Kekorvian album 759
Khairpur (Sindh) 261
Khaliquzzaman, Choudhry 274
Khan, Abdul Ghaffar 288
Khan, Akhter Hameed 428-9
Khan, Imran 9
Khan, Jahangir 9
Khan, Liaquat Ali 131, 243, 268
Khan, Mohammad Asghar 466, 548
Khan, Mohammad Ayub 275
see also Ayub Khan period
Khan, Sayyid Ahmad 131, 140, 268, 347, 368, 370, 384
and modernist thought 355
religious thought 384
writings 140, 384
Khan, Sikander Hayat 277
Khan, Yahya 254-5
see also Bangladesh crisis
Khudai Khidmatgars 288
see also History
Khushhal Khan Khattak 730
Khyal (musical style) 763
Kinnaird College, Lahore 438
Kipling, Rudyard 739-40
Kohistan 33
see also Northern Areas
Kureishi, Hanif 319
L
Labour force censuses 291, 293
Lahore 177, 286
 history 190
in literature 739, 743
marriage patterns 396
novels 713
Shalimar gardens 751
travel 54, 57, 59, 63
Lahore museum 749
Land reform 462, 658, 666
Land Reform Committee 1959 666
Land-use practices Baluchistan 419
Languages 330, 339, 341, 345
Baluchi 327, 336, 345
Brahui 345
Dardic group 345
Hindi 337-8
Indo-Aryan and Iranian 334
of northern areas 82
Pashto 333
Punjabi 325-6, 339, 341, 345
scripts 335
Sindhi 10, 342-5
Siraiki 340
Urdu 328, 331-2, 335, 337-9, 341, 345
see also Dictionaries; Grammars; Literature
Law
Anglo-Muhammadan 528
 charities 145
constitutional 535
criminal 533
family 435, 439
history 533
Islamic economic 534
Islamization 433, 504
legal pluralism 526
Muslim family 519, 529-30, 532-3
political parties 525
press 770
property 533
Punjab 178
sharia 528
tribal areas 526
waqfs 145
Librarianship 791
bibliography 791
Library of Congress
 Page 250
Accession Lists 793
Literacy 691
Literature 346, 700-44, 747, 780
Arabic 723
Baluchi 728-9
English 285, 319, 738-44
Marxist influences 705
Pashto 704, 730-1
periodicals 712
Persian 361-2, 703, 723, 747
Punjabi 704, 726-7, 732, 736-7
regional 733, 747
Sindhi 380, 704, 734-5
Turkish 723
Urdu 328, 364, 391, 506, 700-25, 733, 747
see also Drama; Poetry; Short stories
Local government see Administrative system; Basic democracies
Ludhiana (East Punjab) 412
M
Mahsud tribe 195
Makli hill (Sindh) 211
Makran coast (Baluchistan) 419
Malaria eradication 639
Manchester (Britain) 315, 324
Manto, Saadat Hasan 708, 714
Manuscript sources 116
guides 127
Maps 40, 43
see also Atlases
Marri tribe 420
Marriage patterns 391-2, 396
age at 296, 395
Marxism influences on literature 705
Marxist approaches to history 162, 188, 256
Marxist approaches to political analysis 256, 458, 478, 481
Mass media 475, 484
National Press Trust 778
news agencies 770
television 773
Urdu journalism 721, 724
see also Newspapers
Masson, Charles 66
Masters, John 551, 740
Maududi, Sayyid Abul Ala 131, 347-8, 369-70, 372, 374, 450, 497, 503, 509,
519
bibliography 348
speeches and writings 511
Mayo, Lord 140
Medicine see Health
Mehta, Ved 286
Middle class see Politics
Middle East
relations with Pakistan 577
see also Migration
Migrants from India see Muhajirs
Migration 300
impact on economy 316, 322, 594
internal 304, 690
overseas 314-16, 322, 594
rural-urban 638, 665
statistics 294
to Middle East 430, 647
Military role in politics 56, 255, 259, 457, 466, 476
1977 coup 259, 448, 474
see also Armed forces; Ayub Khan period; Zia period
Mineral resources 24, 619
Mining 619
Minorities
Ahmadis 308
Christians 306, 309-12, 317
Hindu 206
Parsi 743
Mir 720
Mir Dard, Khwaja 380
Mir Hasan 720
Mirpur (Kashmir) 315, 318
Missionaries, Christian 311-12
 challenge to Islam 355
impact of 438
Mohenjo-daro see Archaeology
Mohmand tribe 403
Monetary policy see Economy
Moneylending 214, 407
Moorcroft, William 70
Mosques
Lahore 177
see also Architecture
Mountaineering 64-5, 74
Mountbatten, Lord 237, 244, 248
Mudarabah (business partnership) 534
Mughal emperors 112
see also History; Painting
Muhajirs (social group) 23
as businessmen 656
political role 486
Multan (Punjab) 200
travel 63
Musa, Muhammad 281
Museums 745-6
Music 760, 762
classical 760, 763-4
cultural context 764
folk 762
instruments 762
 theory 760
vocal 763
Muslim Family Laws Ordinance 529
N
Nager (Northern Areas) 409
Naipaul, V. S. 514
Napier, Charles 55, 196, 203
National Institute of Public Administration (Lahore) 542
Natural resources see Geography
Nawa-i. Waqt 475
 Page 251
News agencies 770
Newspapers 205, 475, 770-2
Dawn 774
Frontier Post 775
Muslim 776
Nation 777
Pakistan Times 778
Urdu 328
see also Mass media
Nomads
Baluchistan 418
Qalandar 389
North-West Frontier Province 22, 402
administration 173
Afghan refugees 300, 307
gazetteer 42
geography 25
history 5, 173, 182, 188, 195, 198, 209, 215, 233, 238, 273, 278, 288, 551
Khudai Khidmatgars 288
newspapers 775
politics 489-90, 494
Pukhtunistan issue 68, 288
Pukhtuns 5, 21-2, 198, 209, 405-6, 414, 494, 765
pukhtunwali 403, 414, 434
rural development 428-9
 social change and family size 301
social structure 13, 21, 23, 209, 386, 402-3, 405-6, 411, 413-14
travel 66, 68, 70
tribes 5, 173, 404
women's position 434
see also Pashto
Northern Areas 35, 422
archaeology 422
cultural beliefs 416
ethnology 422
geography 25
geology 33, 65
guidebooks 80, 82
history 169, 210, 422
impact of tourism 425
languages 334, 345
princely states 261
religions 367, 415
scenery 2
social structure 409
travel 53, 61-2, 64, 71-2, 75, 77
Novels
English 738-9, 742-4
Urdu 391, 701, 713
Nuclear fuels 24
Nuclear issue 547, 554, 575, 579, 586, 589, 591
Numismatics 122
O
O'Dwyer, Michael 280
Oil price rise 599
Oil reserves 24
Operation Searchlight 260
Ornithology 46
Oxford (Britain) 321
P
Pagaro, Pir of 15
Painting 747
miniature 749, 754-5, 759
modern 748
Mughal 755, 759
pahari 749
Punjab 755
Pakhto see Pashto
Pakistan
ethos 17
Pakistan Fertility Survey 296
Pakistan Institute of Development Economics 634
Pakistan National Alliance 482
Pakistan National Bibliography 793-4
Pakistan Observer 475
Pakistan People's Party 134, 252-3, 453, 470
Pakistan Times 475
Pakistanis abroad 313-24
Britain 313-15, 317-21, 323-4
Europe 320
Middle East 315-16, 322
Parsis 743
Partition of India as literary theme 717, 743
Parwez, G. A. 347, 370
Parwiz, G. A. see Parwez
Pashto 765
see also Folk tales; Languages; Literature; Poetry
Pataudi, Sher Ali Khan 281
Patrimonial theories of political organization 107
Patti (social unit) 394
Patwaris (local officials), role of 110
Periodicals
archaeology 94
Baluchistan 336
Christianity 309
culture 142
current affairs 782
economy 610, 612-13
foreign relations 449, 568
geography 28
history 142, 144, 207, 780
Iqbal studies 365
Islam 366
 literature 712
politics 449, 782
South Asian Muslims 142
Persian see History; Literature; Poetry
Peshawar 181
Photographs 1-2, 20, 79, 81, 683, 753
Piaget, Jean 389
Pirs see Sufism
Planning see Economy
Poetry
Baluchi 728-9
epic 726
English 741
ghazals 700, 702, 710
Iqbal 371
Pashto 730-1
Persian 381, 719, 725
 Page 252
public performance 724
Punjabi 726-7, 732, 736-7
qissa tradition 736-7
Sindhi 380, 734-5
sufi 376, 703
Urdu 328, 381, 700, 702, 706, 710-11, 715-16, 719-22, 724-5
Political economy see Politics; Economy
Political movements
Pakistan National Alliance 482
Political parties 251
Awami League 252, 260
Congress, Indian National 216, 222, 248
Jamaat-i-Islami 450
Muslim League 213, 216, 220, 226, 228, 248, 274
Pakistan People's Party 134, 252, 253, 453, 470
Tehrik-i-Nifaz-i-Fiqah-i Jafria 510
Unionist Party 213, 270, 277
Politics 6, 249, 445-88, 611, 666, 670, 779, 782
Ayub Khan period 250, 255, 275, 475, 479
Baluch nationalism 174
Baluchistan 489-90, 492, 494
Bangladesh crisis 252, 254-5, 257, 260
Bhutto period 253, 266, 287,447, 461-2, 466, 468, 473-4, 478, 482, 484,
505
bureaucracy's role in 249, 262, 458, 488
business groups 467
constitutional issues 527, 535
corruption 484
decentralization of power 630
élites 257, 464, 469
integration of princely states 261
interest groups 467, 471
landlord politicians 167, 171
Marxist analysis 256, 458, 478, 481
middle-class role 262, 469
military role in 249, 457-8, 466, 476
muhajirs 486
national solidarity 521
North-West Frontier Province 489-90, 494
periodicals 449, 782
political anthropology 409
political economy 473, 606, 671
political leaders 251
pre-1971 473
public opinion 475
Punjab 167
regional issues 451, 472, 488-93
theoretical analyses 458, 461, 478, 481
United States' role 249, 457
village-level 388, 394
Zia period 266, 452, 454, 456, 463, 465-6, 470, 473-4, 476, 493, 496, 499,
505, 507, 509, 516, 522, 531
 see also Islam (and politics)
Pollution of environment 679
Population
censuses 291-4, 302
family planning 305, 444
fertility 296, 298-9, 301, 303
growth patterns 297
historical growth 118
history 146, 295, 297
impact of irrigation 92, 635
mortality, infant 296
periodicals 612
policy 297, 305, 385
redistribution 300, 304
surveys 296, 299, 302
women 444
see also Migration
Postal services 766
Poverty see Income disparities
Presbyterian missionaries 312
Press laws 770
Proverbs 765
Pukhtuns see North-West Frontier Province
Pukhtunwali see North-West Frontier Province
Punjab
administrative system 183
 agricultural development 180, 641, 668
bibliographies 179, 186, 193
canal colonies 424
economic development 186, 424
education 438
gazetteer 42
history 105, 123, 167, 170-1, 173, 177-80, 183-4, 186, 188-9, 191-2, 200,
205, 207, 213-15, 224, 233, 241, 246, 270, 277, 280, 284, 407
integration of princely states 261
land control 178
landlords 192, 468
moneylenders 178
newspapers 205, 777
partition 286
politics 167
Punjab tradition 184
role of moneylenders 178
rural development 407
Siraiki 340
social history 286
social structure 13, 20, 23, 385, 387, 392, 394, 407-8, 412-13, 421, 442
travel 54, 57, 60, 66, 70
Unionist Party 213, 270, 277
village-level politics 388, 394
see also Punjabi
Punjabi see Dictionaries;
 Page 253
Grammars; Languages; Literature; Poetry
Puppet shows 766
Purdah 437, 441
Q
Qadir Yar 736
Qalandar 389
Qawwali (musical style) 761
Qoum (social unit) 401
Quaid-i-Azam see Jinnah, M. A.
Quetta 197
Quran 372, 374
Qureshi, I. H. 131, 374
R
Radcliffe Award 570
Rahman Baba 731
Railways 675, 678
Ranjit Singh 54, 57, 70
Rann of Kutch clash 543
Refugees from Afghanistan 73, 300, 307
Regional disparities see Economy
Regional issues see Politics
Regional literature see Literature
Religions
Ahmadiya movement 308
of northern areas 367, 415
 see also Islam; Secularism
Reptiles 47
Resources, human 598
Riaz, Fahmida 711
Riba (usury) 534
Rochdale (Britain) 313
Rock-carvings 89
Rumi 725
Rural development 390, 431, 477, 669, 670, 695
North-West Frontier Province 428-9
Punjab 407
Rural-urban migration 638, 665
Russell, Ralph 724
S
Sadequain 748
Sandeman, Robert 289
Sargodha (Punjab) 385
Sauda 720
Saudi Arabia relations with Pakistan 574
Scenery 2
see also Guidebooks
Science 698
education 698
government policy 509
research 697
Sculpture 747
Secularism 506, 513
Seyp (form of social exchange) 401
Shah Jahan, Emperor 112
Shamans 415
Sharia (Islamic law) 132, 528
see also Islamization
Shia community 360, 510
Shipton, Eric 74
Shirkah (business partnership) 534
Short stories
Urdu 707-8, 714, 717, 721
Sialkot (Punjab) 285
Simla conference 248
Sindh 766
Arab conquest 172
calligraphy 753
conquest by Arabs 202
conquest by British 194, 196
culture 201, 211
folk tales 768
gazetteers 36, 42
geography 10, 29, 208
Hindu population 206
history 55, 172, 185, 188, 194, 196, 201-4, 206, 208, 211, 215, 233, 236,
735
Hur rebellion 204
 integration of princely states 261
mirs 185
politics 486, 493
social structure 23
stone-carving 753
sufi shrines 15
textiles 750
Thatta 753
tombs 750
travel 55, 71
tribal groups 423
see also Sindhi
Sindhi see Dictionaries; Folk tales; Grammars; Languages; Literature; Poetry
Siraiki 340
Sirhindi, Shaykh Ahmad 358
Skardu (Northern Areas) 77
Slum improvement 426, 684, 689
Social change and secularism 506
as literary theme 738
role of intellectuals 397
Social issues
drug addiction 427
slum improvement 426, 684, 689
Social structure 8, 12-13, 16, 18, 115, 386, 390, 399, 437, 447, 699
Baluchistan 23, 410, 417, 419, 420
history 192
household life-styles 637
Karachi 436
kinship 391-2
kinship as organizational principle 387, 401
low-status groups 400
marriage patterns 387, 391-2, 395-6
minority groups 310
North-West FrontierProvince 13, 21, 23, 209, 386, 402-3, 405-6, 411, 413-
14
overseas groups 313-14, 317, 321, 324
 Page 254
Punjab 13, 20, 23, 385, 387, 392, 394, 407-8, 412-13, 421, 442
role of pir/murshid 398
rural 385, 394
Sindh 23
theoretical analysis 387, 401
tribal society 404
Urdu speakers 23
Socio-linguistics 12
South Asia
security issues 584, 586
South Waziristan (North-West Frontier Province) 404
Soviet Union relations with Pakistan 556, 561, 566, 581
Sport 779, 788
cricket 9
squash 9
Standard of living 637-48
see also Rural development; Urban development
State see Politics
Statistics 27, 609, 615, 620, 680-2, 694, 783
agricultural 110
economic 597, 600, 610
environmental 679
historical 118-19
population 291-4
quality of life 642
 trade 672-4
Steel, Flora Annie 740
autobiography 285
biography 285
Sufism 120, 148, 152, 160, 200, 211, 346, 356, 358, 368, 376, 379, 383,
505, 761
18th century 368, 380
20th century 359
Baluchistan 418
poetry 727, 732, 734-5
role in rural life 398
shrines 15, 766
sufi as healer 393
Sugar production 644
Swat
history 273, 402
social structure 405-6
Swat, Wali of 273, 402
Sweepers 310, 400
T
Tandon, Prakash 286
Tashkent Declaration 570
see also Indo-Pakistan relations
Taxation 604
see also Economy
Teacher training 694
Technology history 114
Tehrik-i-Nifaz-i-Fiqah-i-Jafria 510
Television 773
and development 773
Textiles
Sindh 750
Baluchistan 756
Thal region (Punjab) 412
Thatta (Sindh) 211, 753
travel 63
Tombs, stone-carved Sindh 750
Tourism 78-83
impact on remote areas 425
Town planning 688
Trade 596, 601, 603, 609, 611, 616, 619, 653, 671-4
foreign 672, 674
statistics 672-4
with Eastern bloc 673
with India 585
Transport 619
boats 676
camel 677
railways 675, 678
Travellers' accounts 49, 52-77, 185, 766
see also Tourism
Trekking routes 80
Tribal areas 182, 195
see also North-West Frontier Province
Tribal societies 403-4
Tribes
Afridi 411
Baluchi 410
Brahui 410
Bugti 14
Jat 423
Kalash Kafir 35, 367, 416
Mahsud 195
Marri 420
Mohmand 403
Turkish literature 723
U
Ulama (learned men) see Islam
Unionist Party 213, 270, 277
United Provinces 228
Urban development 1, 300, 304, 638, 683-90
Urdu see Dictionaries; Drama; Grammars; Languages; Literature; Poetry; Short
stories
Urdu speakers as social group 23
United States
relations with Pakistan 557, 561, 571-2, 574-5, 581
role in Pakistan's politics 249, 457
role in South Asia 589
V
Vartan bhanji (form of social exchange) 387, 408
Vigne, G. T. 77
Village studies 20, 387-8, 408, 412, 414, 442
Voluntary agencies 426
W
Wali Allah, Shah 351, 397
Waqfs (religious endowments) 145
Waris Shah 726, 737
Wavell, Lord 248
Waziristan campaign, 1936-39 551
 Page 255
Wheat marketing 660
Wilcox, Wayne A. 263
Wildlife preservation 49
Women 13, 56, 432-44
19th century 285
bibliography 443
impact of education 438
in Karachi 436
in villages 408
Islamization and 433, 440, 522
legal position of 432-3, 435, 504
political participation 439
status and fertility 303
Women's Action Forum 440
World Fertility Survey 296
Wrestling 766
Y
Yearbook 785
Z
Zat (social unit) 401
Zia period (1977-88) 71,73, 259, 266, 452-4, 456, 463, 465-6, 470, 473, 480,
493, 496, 499, 505, 507, 509, 513, 516, 522, 531, 627
Ziauddin Barani 135
Zone of peace proposal 558